breeam infrastructure manual international 2015 · tableofcontents...

blankpage

Terms

Terms and conditions

Disclaimer

This schemedocument is the property of BREGlobal Limited and is made publicly available for informationpurposes only. Anytesting, assessment, certificationor approval activity related to this schemedocument must be conducted in accordancewithBREGlobal Limited's approved processes, and such activitymayonly be undertakenby authorised employees, agents, andassociates of the Building Research Establishment Limited and BREGlobal Limited, or approved parties. Anypartywishing touse or reproduce this schemedocument to offer testing, assessment, certificationor approvalmust apply to BREGlobalLimited for training, assessment and anassociated licence, to qualify as an approved party; a feewill normally be charged. BREGlobal Limited will not unreasonably refuse such applications. BREGlobal Limited accepts no responsibility for anyunauthorised use or distributionbyothers of this schemedocument and may take legal action to prevent suchunauthoriseduse or distribution.

Copyright

The information and images contained in this document are the property of BREGlobal Limited unless explicitly stated to thecontrary, and are protected by copyright laws. The information and images contained in this document maybe downloadedand printed without requiring specific permissionbut remains the intellectual property, technical know-howand copyrightedmaterial of BREGlobal Limited. Suchmaterial is not to be used in a derogatorymanner, in a misleading context or forcommercial purposes.Where suchmaterial is being issued to others, the source including theweb address and copyrightstatus must be acknowledged.Wemay require you to register your details before downloading certain informationordocuments.

Trade marks

BRE, BREGlobal, BREEAM, Smartwaste and theGreenGuide are all trademarks owned byeither BREor BREGlobal Limited andmaynot be used without writtenpermission from BREor BREGlobal Limited.

Acknowledgements

BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (pilot) has beenmade possible through the continued efforts of manydedicatedBREGroup staff members, the BREGlobal Limited governing body, the BREGlobal Limited standing panel of experts, BREEAMAssessors and thosewho have responded to our consultation calls and meetings or provided feedback in other ways. BREGlobal Limited also extends its gratitude to thosewho support BREEAMby continuing to specify and apply themethod andcontribute towards a sustainable built environment.

Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid ondayof printing only.

© BREGlobal Ltd Pilot.

TechnicalManual:Version: SD219 – Issue:2.0 – IssueDate:12/11/2015 i

Table of contents BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

Table of contents

Table of contents ii

List of tables v

List of figures vii

About BRE Global Limited 1

About this schemedocument 2

Introduction to BREEAM 3

Scope of BREEAM NewConstruction Infrastructure (pilot) scheme 12

Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed infrastructure 19

BREEAM evidential requirements 26

Integrated design 34

ID 01 Option appraisal and objectives 36

ID 02 Project team collaboration 44

ID 03 Handover and aftercare 49

ID 04 Ecosystem services 53

ID 05 Whole life costing 58

ID 06Whole life environmental impacts 64

Resilience 73

Res 01 Business continuity 76

Res 02 Riskassessment and mitigation 79

Res 03 Designing for future needs 93

Res 04 Surfacewater run-off 98

Res 05 Durability 104

Stakeholders 107

ST 01 Consultationplan 109

ST 02 Consultation and engagement 114

ST 03 Responsible constructionpractices 120

ST 04 Owner operator requirements 125

Localwellbeing 128

LW01 Economic impact 129

LW02 Social impact 137

Transport 146

Tra 01 Transport impact assessment 147

Tra 02 Travel and logistics plan 153

ii TechnicalManual:Version: SD219 – Issue:2.0 – IssueDate:12/11/2015

Table of contents

Tra 03 Transport connectivity 159

Land use and ecology 162

LUE01 Land use and value 164

LUE02 Soil and vegetationmanagement 169

LUE03 Remediationof land contamination 172

LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan 177

LUE05 Protectionof biodiversity 183

LUE06 Enhancement of biodiversity 187

LUE07 Land use changes 192

Landscape and heritage 197

LSH 01 Landscape and visual impact 198

LSH 02 Heritage assets 204

Pollution 209

Pol 01 Air quality 211

Pol 02 Water pollution 218

Pol 03 Noise and vibration 228

Pol 04 Light pollution 237

Materials 242

Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts 244

Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials 253

Mat 03Materials efficiency 264

Mat 04 Reuse and recycling 273

Carbonand energy 281

CE01 Carbonand energy strategy 282

CE02 Construction site carbonand energy 287

CE03 Operational carbonand energy 294

Waste 300

Wst 01 Constructionwastemanagement 301

Water 310

Wat 01 Water efficiencyplanning and implementation 311

Wat 02 Water monitoring 316

Innovation 319

Appendices 321

AppendixA - Strategic and project detail stages links 322

Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL) 327

TechnicalManual:Version: SD219 – Issue:2.0 – IssueDate:12/11/2015 iii

Table of contents BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

AppendixC 329

AppendixD 336

Endnotes 347

Index 349

Glossary 351

iv TechnicalManual:Version: SD219 – Issue:2.0 – IssueDate:12/11/2015

List of tables

List of tables

Table 1:BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (pilot) sections and assessment issues 6

Table 2List of infrastructure asset types covered under : BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (pilot) 12

Table 3:BREEAMrating benchmarks 19

Table 4:Minimum standards for BREEAMin Infrastructure 20

Table 5: Example calculation for BREEAMInfrastructure rating 23

Table 6:Minimum standards for a BREEAM'VeryGood' rating 24

Table 7BREEAMevidence principles 28

Table 8Document and evidence types 30

Table 9: Strategic BREEAMobjectives 38

Table 10: 'Likelihood of impact' scoring system 54

Table 11:TheMillennium EcosystemAssessment classificationof ecosystem services 55

Table 12: Standards and data used to inform the carbon footprint (criterion4 only) 65

Table 13:Approach to riskassessment and mitigation 81

Table 14:Allowance for climate change according to annual probability of flooding 99

Table 15: Environmental factors and material degradation effects to consider 105

Table 16:Credits associated with implementationof measures that create local positive economic impact 130

Table 17:Measures for creating positive local economic impact and examples of their implementation 131

Table 18:Credits associated with implementationof measures that enhance local social impact 138

Table 19: Examples of measures that could be implemented to enhance local social impact 139

Table 20:Credits associated with implementationof measures that enhance local social impact for projects of asimple nature 143

Table 21:Considerations for mitigationmeasures to be included as part of the transport impact assessment for theconstructionof the asset 148

Table 22:Considerations for mitigationmeasures to be included as part of the transport impact assessment for theoperationof the asset 149

Table 23:Aspects of enhanced transport connectivity 160

Table 24: Sizes of quadrat for higher plant weighted area average species richness 188

Table 25: Expected change in land type areas 194

Table 26: Factors associated with changes in carbon stockas a result of land use changes 195

Table 27:Credits associated with the landscape character and visual impact recommendations implemented 199

Table 28:Construction stage implementationof good practice surfacewater and groundwater pollutionpreventionmeasures 220

Table 29:Operational stage implementationof good practice surfacewater and groundwater pollutionpreventionmeasures 221

Table 30 :Credits associated with reduction in operational noise and vibration 230

TechnicalManual:Version: SD219 – Issue:2.0 – IssueDate:12/11/2015 v

List of tables BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

Table 31:TheNoise Exposure Hierarchy 230

Table 32:Recommendations for maximum luminance (CD/[m2]) 238

Table 33: Environmental zone descriptions 238

Table 34: Indicators to be reported ona full life cycle assessment 246

Table 35: Standards and data used to inform the carbon footprint (criterion4 only) 247

Table 36:Key elements of an infrastructure asset 247

Table 37:Credits available based onpercentage RSMpoints achieved 254

Table 38:Components and material categories 254

Table 39:Credits available based onpercentage RSMpoints achieved 257

Table 40: Example calculation for Route 1 - point allocation and award of credits 258

Table 41: Example calculation for Route 2 for permanent stone or aggregatematerials 259

Table 42: Example calculation for combining Route 1 & 2 - point allocation and award of credits 259

Table 43:Minimum levels (byweight and volume) of highgrade aggregate specified per application (where present)that is recycled or secondary aggregate 275

Table 44:Reporting total carbonequivalent and primary energy consumption in reference to the asset's capacity 283

Table 45:Credits associated with energy and carbon savings from construction activities 288

Table 46:Construction activities energy efficiency and carbon saving considerations 288

Table 47:Construction stage light fitting efficiencies 293

Table 48:Credits associated with energy and carbon savings as a result of the operationof the asset 295

Table 49:Operational energy saving considerations 295

Table 50:Operational light fitting efficiencies 299

Table 51:Diversionof non-hazardous waste from landfill benchmarks 303

Table 52:On-sitewasteminimisation features 303

Table 53:Constructionwaste groups 304

Table 54: Strategy and project detail links 322

Table 55: Safe and adequate access requirements 329

Table 56:Good neighbour requirements 330

Table 57: Environmentally aware requirements 332

Table 58: Safe and considerateworking environment requirements 334

Table 59: Fleet operator management requirements 336

Table 60: Fleet operator vehicle requirements 338

Table 61: Fleet operator driver requirements 340

Table 62: Fleet operator health, safety and wellbeing requirements 341

Table 63: Fleet operator operation requirements 344

vi TechnicalManual:Version: SD219 – Issue:2.0 – IssueDate:12/11/2015

Figures

List of figures

Figure 1 The BREEAMCertificationmark 4

Figure 2 BREEAMassessment and certification stages and the UK BIMTaskGroup’s Digital Planof Work (DPoW) 9

Figure 3 Structure and scope of BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (pilot) scheme 17

Figure 4 Life cycle stages as defined in EN 15978 71

Figure 5 Assessment linkage between ID 06Whole life environmental impacts and Mat 01 Environmental life cycleimpacts and available credits 252

Figure 6 Examples of lean tools and activities and where they can add value 267

TechnicalManual:Version: SD219 – Issue:2.0 – IssueDate:12/11/2015 vii

blankpage

About

About BRE Global Limited

BREGlobal Limited (part of the BRE (Building Research Establishment)Group) is an independent third party approvals bodyoffering certificationof fire, security and sustainability products and services to an internationalmarket.

BREGlobal Limited's mission is to 'Protect People, Property and the Planet'.

We aim to achieve this by:

1. Researching and writing standards2. Testing and certification in the areas of fire, electronics, security and sustainability3. Developing world leading sustainability assessment methods4. Undertaking research and consultancy for clients and regulators5. Promulgating standards and knowledge throughout the industry throughpublications and events6. Developing and delivering training.

BREGlobal Limited's product testing and approvals are carried out by recognised experts in our world renowned testinglaboratories.

BREGlobal Limited is custodianof a number of world leading brands including:

1. Building Research Establishment's Environmental Assessment Method (BREEAM) - theworld's leading environmentalassessment method for buildings

2. Loss PreventionCertificationBoard (LPCB) for approval of fire and security products and services.

BREGlobal Limited is a trading subsidiary of the BRETrust, the registered research and education charitywhichowns the BREGroup.

BREGlobal LimitedBucknalls LaneWatfordHertfordshireWD25 9XX

T+44 (0)333 321 8811

F+44 (0)1923 664 910

[email protected]

www.breglobal.comwww.greenbooklive.com

TechnicalManual:Version: SD219 – Issue:2.0 – IssueDate:12/11/2015 1

http://www.breglobal.com/

http://www.greenbooklive.com/

About this document BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

About this scheme document

This document is the technicalmanual for the BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (pilot) scheme. It describes anenvironmental performance standard against whichnew, infrastructure assets canbe assessed and achieve a BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (pilot) rating.

The SchemeDocument and the informationdetailed within is intended for use by trained, qualified and licensed BREEAMInfrastructure Assessors in accordancewith the procedural and operational requirements of BREEAM(as described in theBREEAMand CSH:OperationalGuidance, SD5070) under the terms and conditions of a BREEAMInfrastructure licence. Thisdocument should be used bynon-BREEAMInfrastructure Assessors for reference purposes only.

This document is the international (i.e. for projects outside of the UK) technicalmanual for the BREEAMNewConstruction:Infrastructure (pilot) scheme. It describes anenvironmental performance standard against whichnew, infrastructure assets inthis territory canbe assessed and achieve a BREEAMrating.

Changes to this BREEAM scheme document

This schemedocument is subject to revision and canbe reissued from time to time byBREGlobal Limited. A schedule of thepublicationdate for each issue of this document is provided below.

Any additions to this document that necessitate its reissue (from version2.0 onwards)will bemade availablewithin anappendix in this document. Additions to earlier reissues have been issued to pilot projects current at the time.

Fundamental changes to assessment criteria are typicallymade as part of a formal scheme update, resulting in a newBREEAMscheme version.

SchemeDoc. Issue no. Date of issue

SD219 2.0 (current) 12/11/2015

2 TechnicalManual:Version: SD219 – Issue:2.0 – IssueDate:12/11/2015

Introduction

Introduction to BREEAM

BREEAM(Building Research Establishment's Environmental Assessment Method) is theworld's first sustainability ratingscheme for the built environment and has contributed much to the strong focus in the UK on sustainability in design,construction and use. BREEAMis nowan international standard that is locally adapted, operated and applied throughanetworkof international operators, assessors and industry professionals. Through its application and use BREEAMhelpsclients measure and reduce their environmental impacts and indoing so create higher value, lower riskassets.

To date, BREEAMhas beenused to certify over 425,000 building and master planning assessments across the life cycle ofthese projects and it is being applied in over 60 countries. This methodology is nowbeing applied to infrastructure assets.

Aims of BREEAM

To mitigate the life cycle impacts of infrastructure assets on the environmentTo enable infrastructure assets to be recognised according to their sustainability benefitsTo provide a credible, environmental label for infrastructure assetsTo stimulate demand and create value for sustainable infrastructure assets, products and supply chains.

Objectives of BREEAM

To providemarket recognitionof infrastructure assets with a lowenvironmental impactTo ensure best environmental practice is incorporated in the planning, design, construction and operationofinfrastructure assets and thewider built environmentTo define a robust, cost effective performance standard surpassing that required by regulationsTo challenge themarket to provide innovative, cost effective solutions that minimise the environmental impact ofinfrastructure assetsTo raise awareness amongst owners, occupants, designers and operators of the benefits and value of infrastructureassets with a reduced life cycle impact on the environmentTo alloworganisations to demonstrate progress towards corporate sustainability objectives.

BREEAMis developed and operated to meet the following underlying principles:

Ensure environmental quality throughanaccessible, holistic and balanced measure of environmental impactsUse quantified measures for determining environmental qualityAdopt a flexible approach that encourages and rewards positive outcomes, avoiding prescribed solutionsUse robust science and best practice as the basis for quantifying and calibrating a cost effective and rigorousperformance standard for defining environmental qualityReflect the social and economic benefits of meeting the environmental objectives coveredProvide a common international framework of assessment that is tailored to meet the 'local' context includingregulation, climate and sectorIntegrate constructionprofessionals in the development and operational processes to ensurewide understandingand accessibilityAdopt third party certification to ensure independence, credibility and consistencyof the labelAdopt existing industry tools, practices and other standards wherever possible to support developments in policyand technology, build onexisting skills and understanding and minimise costsAlign technically and operationallywith relevant international standards, including the suite of standards on the'Sustainability of ConstructionWorks'prepared by the EuropeanCommittee for Standardisation TechnicalCommittee CEN/TC 350Engagewith a representative range of stakeholders to inform ongoing development in accordancewith theunderlying principles and the pace of change inperformance standards (accounting for policy, regulation and marketcapability).


Introduction BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

The aims, objectives and principles of BREEAMare embodied within a Core Technical Standard owned and managed byBREGlobal Limited. This is applied througha suite of BREEAMSchemes covering aspects of the built environment life cycle. Theseschemes are locally developed and operated by a number of different organisations, called National SchemeOperators(NSOs), across a range of countries.

For a full list of BREEAMNational SchemeOperators and Schemes visit www.breeam.org.

The UK BREEAM Schemes

BREGlobal Limited is theNational SchemeOperator of BREEAMin the UK. BREGlobal also develops and manages the pan-country BREEAMInternational schemes.We develop and operate a number of BREEAMschemes, eachdesigned to assess theenvironmental performance of different project types at various stages in the life cycle, and these include:

BREEAM Communities for themaster-planning of a larger community of buildingsBREEAM InternationalNewConstruction for newbuild, domestic and non-domestic buildingsBREEAM International In-Use for existing non-domestic buildings in-useBREEAM International Refurbishment and Fit-out for non-domestic building refurbishments and fit-outsBREEAM Infrastructure for infrastructure projects.

Independent BREEAMAssessors, trained, qualified and licensed byBREGlobal Limited canundertake a BREEAMassessmentusing this SchemeDocument and associated reporting and calculation tools.

Once anassessment is complete and quality assured BREGlobal Limited will issue a BREEAMcertificate. The BREEAMcertificateprovides formal verification that the assessor has completed anassessment in accordancewith the requirements of thescheme and its quality standards and procedures.

A BREEAMcertificate provides assurance to any interested party that a BREEAMrating, at the time of certification, accuratelyreflects an asset's performance against the BREEAMstandard.

Anyonewishing to verify the BREEAMrating of an asset cando so byeither checking its BREEAMcertificate, whichwill containthe certificationmark, as shown in Figure 1 , or by searching the BREEAMlistings onwww.greenbooklive.com.

Figure 1 The BREEAMCertificationmark


http://www.breeam.org/


Introduction

Ensuring quality and consistency

All BREEAMSchemes are developed and operated byNational SchemeOperators in accordancewith the Code for aSustainable Built Environment. The Code for a Sustainable Built Environment is a set of strategic principles and requirementswhichdefine an integrated approach to the design,management, evaluation and certificationof the environmental, socialand economic impacts of the built environment.

The Code is interpreted through the BREEAMCore Process and Technical Standards. These linked documents set out therequirements that a compliant schememust meet in order to be affiliated with the Code. The Standards ensure that acommonscientific and performance basis is used by all compliant schemes operated byNational SchemeOperators, whileensuring that these are relevant to local demands, standards and practices.

The Code and associated standards are developed and maintained byBREGlobal Limited withdirection from the BREEAMStrategyBoard, under the auspices of the BREGlobalGoverning Board.

To ensure independence, competence and impartiality, all National SchemeOperators are required to maintain schemeoperations accredited to International Standards. In the UK and pan-country international schemes, current BREGlobal LimitedBREEAMschemes are accredited by the United KingdomAccreditation Service (UKAS) to:

BSEN ISO17024 (Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certificationof persons) forBREEAMAssessorsBSEN 45011 (General requirements for bodies operating product certification systems) for the complete BREEAMassessment process.

BREGlobal Limited will operate this infrastructure pilot scheme in accordancewith the same procedures and will achieveaccreditation in due course.

BREGlobal Limited is also certified to ISO9001 for all its BREEAMrelated activities.

As a certificationbody accredited byUKAS, BREGlobal Limited maintains anopenand accountable governance structure. Theoperationof BREEAMis overseenby an independent Governing Body and a Standing Panel for Peer &Market Review.

TheGoverning Body represents stakeholder interests to ensure, amongst other things, that we at BREGlobal Limited areacting independently and impartially, operating our processes correctly, and treating our customers fairly.

The Standing Panel provides BREGlobal Limited with access to a range of experts that can reviewBREGlobal Limited'sstandards and schemes to ensure their robustness from a scientific, technical and market perspective as well as ensuring thedevelopment of the standards and schemes is open to greater external and independent scrutiny.



BREEAM Infrastructure

The BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (pilot) scheme is a performance based assessment method and certificationscheme for new infrastructure assets.

The primary aim of BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (pilot) is to mitigate the life cycle impacts of new infrastructureassets on the environment and improve positive social and economic impacts. This is achieved through integration and use ofthe schemeby clients and their project teams at key stages in the design and constructionprocess.

This enables the client, through the BREEAMAssessor and the BREGlobal certificationprocess, to measure, evaluate andreflect the performance of their new infrastructure asset against best practice in an independent and robust manner.

This performance is quantified by a number of individualmeasures and associated criteria stretching across a range ofeconomic, social and environmental issues, refer to Table 1, which is ultimately expressed as a single certified BREEAMrating.

Table 1:BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (pilot) sections and assessment issues

Issue title Issue title

Integrated Design Resilience

ID 01 Option appraisal and objectives Res 01 Business continuity

ID 02 Project team collaboration Res 02 Riskassessment and mitigation

ID 03 Handover and aftercare Res 03 Designing for future needs

ID 04 Ecosystem services Res 04 Surfacewater run-off

ID 05 Whole life costing Res 05 Durability

ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts Localwellbeing

Stakeholders LW01 Economic impact

ST 01 Consultationplan LW02 Social impact

ST 02 Consultation and engagement Transport

ST 03 Responsible constructionpractices Tra 01 Transport impact assessment

ST 04 Owner operator requirements Tra 02 Travel and logistics plan

Land use and ecology Tra 03 Transport connectivity

LUE01 Land use and value Landscape and heritage

LUE02 Soil and vegetationmanagement LSH 01 Landscape and visual impact


Introduction

LUE03 Remediationof land contamination LSH 02 Heritage assets

LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan Materials

LUE05 Protectionof biodiversity Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts

LUE06 Enhancement of biodiversity Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials

LUE07 Land use changes Mat 03Materials efficiency

Pollution Mat 04 Reuse and recycling

Pol 01 Air quality Waste

Pol 02 Water pollution Wst 01 Constructionwastemanagement

Pol 03 Noise and vibration Water

Pol 04 Light pollution Wat 01 Water efficiencyplanning and implementation

Carbonand energy Wat 02 Water monitoring

CE01 Carbonand energy strategy

CE02 Construction site carbonand energy

CE03 Operational carbonand energy


Engagement withBREEAM

BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

When and how to engage with the BREEAM New Construction:Infrastructure (pilot) scheme

Timing the engagement with and use of the BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (pilot) scheme via the BREEAMAssessoris essential for ensuring seamless integrationof themethodology in the newconstructionprocess.Without this, the ability tooptimise the infrastructure asset’s environmental performancewhile ensuring the cost effectiveness of achieving the desiredBREEAMrating will be compromised. Appointing a BREEAMAssessor early in the project will help in achieving the target ratingwithout undue impacts on the flexibility of designdecisions, budgets and the potential to influence solutions.

Figure 2 serves to highlight the linkbetween the BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (pilot) assessment and certificationstages and the project workstage. The numbers in the diagram refer to UK Building InformationModel (BIM) TaskGroup'sDigital Planof Work (DPoW), which is in alignment with ISO12006 (Part 2 Framework for classification - Organizationofinformation about constructionworks).

This figure can assist clients in timing their engagement with BREEAMand the appointment of a BREEAMAssessor.

It is important to recognise that BREEAMprimarily reflects the overall performance of the asset rather than just theopportunities or limitations placed on specific stakeholders involved in the project. This means that the client, design team,principal contractor and BREEAMAssessor, as well as other specialist disciplines, have an important role to play throughoutthe newconstructionprocess, if the desired performance level is to be achieved and reflected through the certified BREEAMrating.

The onus of orientating the brief towards sustainability needs is to come first and foremost from the client. To facilitate this,BREGlobal recommends that clients and their project teams engagewith a BREEAMAssessor no later than the briefing stage.This will ensure that realistic targets are set and canbemet, appropriate responsibilities canbe defined and understood andlowor no cost solutions to create positive environmental, social and economic impacts canbe sought and applied whereverpossible.


Engagement withBREEAM

Figure 2 BREEAMassessment and certification stages and the UK BIMTaskGroup’s Digital Planof Work (DPoW)



How to use the BREEAM New Construction Infrastructure Scheme

This BREEAMSchemeDocument is a technical document whichhas been created to:

1. Enable qualified and licensed BREEAMAssessors to complete BREEAMassessments and determine a rating2. Enable BREGlobal Ltd to complete quality assurance reviews of a BREEAMAssessor's assessment report, in accordance

with the standards to whichBREGlobal Ltd is accredited3. Act as a reference for clients and members of the project teamwhose proposed asset is being BREEAMassessed.

The schemedocument is split into six parts:

1. Introduction to BREEAM2. Scope of BREEAMNewConstruction Infrastructure (pilot) scheme3. Scoring and rating BREEAMassessed infrastructure, including minimum standards4. BREEAMevidential requirements5. Assessment criteria6. Appendices.

The Scope sectiondescribes the types of asset and stages of assessment that this versionof the BREEAMNewConstruction:Infrastructure (pilot) scheme canbe applied to. The Scope section canbe used by clients and BREEAMAssessors to checkwhether this is the correct BREEAMscheme to use for their project.

The Scoring and rating section illustrates howanasset's assessed performance is measured and rated. It outlines the BREEAMrating level benchmarks, theminimum BREEAMstandards for each rating level and the BREEAMenvironmental sectionweightings. It also includes a descriptionof the BREEAMassessment issues and 'credits', including BREEAM'Innovation credits',and howperformance against these is calculated and expressed as a BREEAMrating.

Please note that, for the purpose of formal assessment and certification, the asset's BREEAMperformancemust bedetermined by the BREEAMAssessor using the relevant BREEAMreporting and calculation tools.

The BREEAM evidential requirements sectionprovides guidance to assessors and project teams on the various types andforms of evidence required by the BREEAMAssessor to demonstrate compliancewith BREEAMcriteria. This includes adescriptionof whyBREEAMrequires an auditable trail of evidence, a table of general types of informationproduced during aproject, and therefore typically required and used as evidence of compliance, and guidance on the differing forms of evidencethat canbe used and at what stages of the assessment, such as letters of commitment.

TheAssessment criteria section includes the 43 BREEAMassessment issues, categorised in 12 environmental sections. Eachissue defines a level of performance (the assessment criteria) against which the assessed infrastructure asset demonstratescompliance (using appropriate project information, i.e. evidence) in order to achieve a corresponding number of availableBREEAMcredits.

Themajority of BREEAMissues and credits are tradable, meaning that a client and their project team canpickand choosewhich to target in order to build their BREEAMperformance score and achieve the desired BREEAMrating. Several BREEAMissues haveminimum standards,meaning that to achieve a particular BREEAMrating specific credits or criteria must beachieved (BREEAM's minimum standards are outlined in Scoring and rating BREEAMassessed infrastructure).

EachBREEAMissue is structured as follows:

1. Issue information:This contains the assessment issue reference, title, number of credits available1 and whether the issueforms part of BREEAM's minimum standards.

2. Aim:This outlines the broad objective of the issue and the impact it measures or mitigates.3. Assessment criteria: This outlines the good or best practice performance level benchmarks and criteria.Where the asset

complies with the assessment criteria, as determined by the BREEAMAssessor, the relevant number of BREEAMcreditscanbe awarded. Some issues have prerequisites; to ensure an asset demonstrates a standard level of practice beforetargeting good or best practice performance (refer to Scoring and rating BREEAMassessed infrastructure for moredetails). Some issues have Exemplary Level Criteria;where anasset demonstrates that it meets exemplary level ofperformance, a BREEAMInnovation credit canbe awarded (refer to the Innovation section for more details). Up to amaximum of 10 Innovation credits are available.


Introduction

4. Checklists and tables: This section contains any checklists and tables referenced in the assessment criteria section. Thiscan include tables of benchmarks or asset type specific performance criteria.

5. Compliance notes: These notes provide additional guidance that supports the application and interpretationof themain assessment criteria, including how to assess compliance in a particular locationor for a particular asset or situation.

6. Methodology:This section includes a descriptionof anymethodologyused to determine the number of BREEAMcredits achieved for a given level of performance. It includes, for example, calculationprocedures or guidance onhownon-BREEAMschemes, standards or qualifications referenced in the assessment criteria relate to those criteria.

7. Evidence:This sectiondescribes the types of project information that must be provided by the design team or client andgiven to the BREEAMAssessor to enable verificationof the asset's performance against the assessment criteria and sojustify the award of the relevant number of BREEAMcredits. The BREEAMevidential requirements sectionprovidesfurther guidance onevidential requirements.

8. Additional information:This section contains any further information relevant to the applicationof the assessmentcriteria, including anydefinitionof terms used in the assessment issue or sources of additional information that maybeof use in addressing the issue.

TheAppendices provide supporting information.


Scope BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

Scope of BREEAM New Construction Infrastructure

(pilot) scheme

This versionof the infrastructure scheme is a pilot schemedesigned to assess all new infrastructure assets including thoseidentified in Table 2.

Table 2List of infrastructure asset types covered under : BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (pilot)

Project type Project subtype

Aviation Runway

Associated assets

Energy Renewables - biomass, solar, tidal, wind

Refineries

Power stations - coal, gas, nuclear, oil

Transmission and distribution - pylons

Data and communication Cables - broadband, telecoms

Marine and coastal Flood defence

Harbours or ports

Offshore platform

Offshorewind farm

Sea defence

Outfall

Structures Bridge or viaduct

Platform

Retaining wall

Tunnel


Scope

Project type Project subtype

Transport Rail

Road

Tram

Water Water distribution - potable, non-potable, combined

Water treatment works

Other Contact BRE.

Assessments of other project types should be undertakenusing BREEAMBuildings NewConstruction, Refurbishment and Fit-out and InUse for buildings or BREEAMCommunities for master planning projects.

Please note that BREGlobal Limited is exploring howscores from different BREEAMschemes canbe combined to provide anoverall asset rating.

A pilot scheme

This schemewill operate as a pilot to gain feedback from projects being assessed to ensure that the criteria canbe appliedappropriately to a wide range of infrastructure assets. Learning from projects assessed during this timewill inform thedevelopment of a formalUKASaccredited infrastructure bespoke scheme.

The pilot infrastructure schemeoperates in a similar way to other BREEAMschemes, but with anelement of initial 'bespoking'to ensure that the criteria are relevant to the project being assessed.

The bespoke process

In the bespoke process, BREEAMcriteria are selected for the asset type. Amendments and additions to the standard criteriamay also be appropriate to reflect the unique nature, use and sustainability opportunities of the asset and the location.Although the bespokemethod involves adapting criteria for individual projects, it still adheres to somebasic principles interms of BREEAMstructure, credit method and content to ensure the credibility of BREEAMis maintained. The basic principlesare as follows:

Generic assessment criteria from the BREEAMInfrastructure schemewill form a large part of the criteria setWhere necessary, these aremade relevant to the asset's function and local context throughminor alterationsWhere it is not appropriate for criteria to be applied, theywill be filtered outSector and country specific codes and standards canbe incorporated where necessary.

Please note the purpose of 'bespoking' the criteria is not:

To remove those assessment criteria that maybe difficult to achieve for the project; orTo develop newassessment criteria or extensive newguidance for existing criteria unless this is determined to bebeneficial to the sustainability of the development. This should be discussed with BREGlobalwhenapplying forbespoke pilot criteria.

The final outputs from this process will be included in a bespoke project criteria appendix that must be used alongside thegeneric criteria within this schememanual to assess the asset. Refer to the Bespoke Process GuidanceNote for further details(refer to www.breeam.org/projects).



Life cycle stages not covered by the BREEAM New Construction:Infrastructure (pilot) scheme

The BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (pilot) scheme is not designed for, and therefore is not appropriate to assess,the environmental impacts of infrastructure assets at the following life cycle stages:

Early stage 'optioneering' to determine the solution to an identified need, e.g. the need to transport people from oneplace to another should be via road, rather than rail, river or airExisting asset refurbishment and fit-outExisting assets in operationExisting asset deconstruction.

For any enquiries about assessing assets at these stages, please contact BRE.

Life cycle stages covered by the BREEAM New Construction:Infrastructure (pilot) scheme

This BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (pilot) scheme canbe used to assess and rate the environmental impactsarising from a newly constructed asset (including external site areas) at the following life cycle stages:

1. Newasset strategic assessment stage (SAS) – leading to confirmationof the strategic assessment score2. Newasset design stage (DS) – leading to an interim BREEAMrating and certificate of assessment3. Newasset post-construction stage (PCS) – leading to a final BREEAMrating and certificate of assessment.

Criteria for the first stage are referred to as 'Strategic' and criteria for the second and third stages are referred to as 'Projectdetail'.

Strategic assessment stage (SAS)

The strategic assessment is carried out at the earliest stages of a project, e.g. Strategy, Brief and Concept, but after the initial'optioneering'process is completed. The aim of the SAS is to encourage projects to identify and maximise opportunities at theearliest stages of a project.

There is no actual or promised level of performance at this stage, so the quality audit will confirm the strategic assessmentscore only.

Project detail assessment: Design stage (DS)

TheDSassessment and interim BREEAMrating confirms the proposed newasset's performance at the design stage of the lifecycle. Assessment and ideally certificationwill occur prior to the beginning of constructionon site. The BREEAMrating at thisstage is labelled as 'interim'because it does not represent the asset's final, newconstructionBREEAMperformance.

To complete an assessment at this stage, the designmust be advanced to a point where the relevant design information isavailable to enable the BREEAMAssessor to evaluate and verify the asset's performance against the criteria defined in thisSchemeDocument. The interim DSassessment will therefore be completed and certified at the schemedesignor detaileddesign stages.

Project detail assessment: post-construction stage (PCS)

The PCSassessment and BREEAMrating confirms the final 'as built' performance of the asset at the newconstruction stage ofthe life cycle. A final PCSassessment is completed and certified after practical completionof the constructionworks.

There are two approaches to assessment at the post-construction stage:

A post-construction review (PCR) based ona completed interim design stage assessmentA post-construction assessment (PCA).


mailto:[email protected]

Scope

A PCR serves to confirm that the asset's 'as built' performance and rating is in accordancewith the assessment certified at theinterim design stage.Where an interim DSassessment has not been carried out, i.e. certified, and a BREEAMassessment andrating is required, a full post-construction stage assessment canbe conducted.

Assessing the project at the strategy and project detail stages

The BREEAMinfrastructure assessment includes criteria to be assessed at the strategic stage to ensure opportunities areidentified at the early stages of a project to increase the sustainable credentials of the asset. Ideally these opportunities arethen taken forward to the detail stages of the designprocess and implemented. Approximately 20%of the assessmentscore relates to the strategic stage criteria reflecting the importance of integrating sustainability at this early stage.

Where strategic credits are not achieved, or a BREEAMassessment is initiated after the concept stage, the assessment of theproject detail credits is therefore affected. Further details of howeach issuemust be assessed where strategic credits arewithheld are detailed inAppendixA - Strategic and project detail stages links.

Projects and subprojects

For some infrastructure projects, the strategic and project detail stage criteria will be applied to thewhole project, thereforeone overall scorewill be achieved for the project. However for other infrastructure projects, such as some nationally significantinfrastructure projects, it maybemore appropriate to split the project into a series of subprojects and assess theseindividually.

Whena project uses the latter approach, the strategic criteria should still be assessed for thewhole project. The scoreachieved at the strategic assessment stage is transferred to each subproject and the project detail criteria assessed at asubproject level. The strategic assessment score for thewhole project is then added to the project detail score for thesubproject resulting in anoverall score for the subproject assessment.

Whole projects maybe split where the sustainability outcomes for different subprojects maybe different. For example,where:

1. Different project teams or contractors are developing sections of the project and therefore are approaching designorconstruction in a different way across the project

2. The project is assessed across numerous sites (e.g. linear projects)where the impacts of the project will have varyingimpact on the sustainability issues covered within this scheme.

Where a client wishes to split their project for a reasonnot listed above, (for example in the case of separately tenderedenabling works), BREGlobal Limited should be contacted. As the scheme is piloted, it is envisaged that the above options forsplitting a project will be refined.

In addition, at the time of writing BREGlobal Limited is determining howsubproject scores canbe amalgamated to produceanoverall score or rating for thewhole project. This is likely to followamethodology that weights the sustainability impact ofeach subproject when combining subproject scores.

Application of system boundaries in BREEAM Infrastructure

Infrastructure assets exist as part of a complex system-of-systems and this means that the boundary of a BREEAMInfrastructure assessment – what is included or excluded – is not always immediately obvious. It is necessary to establish thissystem boundary for BREEAMinfrastructure assessments to provide a fair, accurate, and comparable assessment of thedesign and constructionof new infrastructure assets.

Due to the variety of activities and impacts that are addressed within the scheme, BREEAMdoes not define a single, overallboundary for a project (or subproject). Instead, the necessary boundaries vary by assessment issue. These are defined withinthe technical requirements of the schemebyone or more of the following:



Explicit geographical, temporal, or functional limitsNational or international standardsNational industry or government best practice guidanceDescribed, BREEAMspecificmethodologiesSpecificminimum requirements for content or activitiesConsultationwith relevant stakeholdersDeferral to the judgement of a suitably qualified professionalThe judgement of the project teamwith verification from a licensed BREEAMAssessor.

The adopted boundaries are designed to support the individual issue aims and the overall aims and objectives of this BREEAMscheme. In some cases there is greater flexibility in the definitions so that assessments remain feasible or so that unforeseenscenarios are not inappropriately excluded.

Where judgement is required to establish a boundary, either from a BREEAMAssessor or a suitably qualified professional,then the following questions should be considered:

Does including this within the assessment support the issue aim?Will including this better reflect the achieved as-built performance of the asset?Is the inclusionof this feasible, justifiable, and proportional?

In some cases it is appropriate to simplify boundaries to ensure that an assessment remains proportional to the scale of aproject and its associated impacts. The boundaries as currently defined within BREEAMInfrastructure are often scalable in thisway, including where the decisionhas beendeferred to the judgement of a suitably qualified professional. In some instancesthemethod of establishing the boundary canbe particularly complexor challenging (e.g. require specialist expertise) andalternative requirements are given for projects where this level of complexity is not appropriate.

A final commonprinciple in establishing boundaries in BREEAMInfrastructure is that benefits arising from the intendedfunctionof an asset are excluded. This is because these benefits have alreadybeenused to justify the decision to proceed withthe project – a decision that is also outside of the scope of this scheme. However, as the scheme is assessing howa projectachieves its intended function, it does consider actions that affect operational performance.

Projects of a simple nature

BREGlobal Limited is currently piloting how the BREEAMcriteria will specifically apply to projects of a simple nature. Simplifiedcriteria are being developed and informed by the piloting process. The aim of these criteria is to allowprojects that arerelatively simple, small or both to innovate and improve their sustainability performance, in a way that is cost effective andappropriate to the project. Determining whether 'simplified criteria' are applicable to the project will form part of the'bespoking'process discussed above.

Integrated design

The Integrated design (ID) section sits within the strategy and project management group of BREEAMInfrastructure. It is theonly process related section, the other 11 are all technical. The Integrated design section seeks to reward activities within thedesign and constructionprocess that are carried out in an integrated and holistic way, e.g. considering a range of technicalalternatives during options appraisal and agreeing targets and outcomeswith all contributors to the process, at an earlystage in the project life. There are a greater number of strategic issues within Integrated design compared with the technicalsections, as these address wider scope and process related issues for whichoptimum outcomes result from earlyconsideration. There are also strategic issues within the technical sections, and these should be carried out in parallelwithsomeof the strategic Integrated design issues, for example the options appraisal process (within Integrated design) andcarbon strategy (withinCarbonand energy) are best addressed inparallel, each informing the other as ideas and conceptsbecomemore defined. The aim of the Integrated design section is to reward and encourage early involvement of projectteam stakeholders, integrated teamworking, whole life and systems thinking. Using these approaches, the project team areinformed howeachof the technical sections could be addressed and whichof the project detail criteria should be targeted.Figure 3 illustrates how the Integrated design section links to the other technical sections.


Scope

Figure 3 Structure and scope of BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (pilot) scheme

The use of national best practice standards

Certain criteria in BREEAMrequire compliancewith national best practice standards or guidance or to exceed nationalregulationor legislation. BREhave defined specific International, Europeanor UK standards that canbe used by the projectteam to demonstrate compliancewith these requirements. However, in some countries theremaybe national or localequivalents of these standards that are familiar to the project teams designing and constructing new infrastructure assets.

In these cases there is the opportunity for the assessor and project team to substitute thesewith national or local standardsusing theApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL).

Further informationon theASWLand which issues this is applicable to is detailed inAppendix B - TheApproved Standards andWeightings List (ASWL). Further details on the procedure for submitting standards for inclusion in theASWL is included in theBREEAMOperationalGuidance available on the BREEAMProjects websitewww.breeam.org/projects/.


Scoring and rating BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)


Scoring and rating

Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed infrastructure

There are a number of elements that determine the overall performance of a new infrastructure project assessed usingBREEAM, these are as follows:

The BREEAMrating level benchmarksTheminimum BREEAMstandardsThe environmental sectionweightingsThe BREEAMassessment issues and credits.

How these elements combine to produce a BREEAMrating for a newasset is summarised on the following pages. This isfollowed by a description and example describing themethodology for calculating a rating.

BREEAM rating benchmarks

The BREEAMrating benchmarks for projects assessed using the BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (pilot) scheme areoutlined in Table 3.

Table 3:BREEAMrating benchmarks

BREEAM rating % score

Outstanding ≥ 85

Excellent ≥ 70

Very good ≥ 55

Good ≥ 45

Pass ≥ 30

Unclassified < 30

The BREEAMbenchmarks allowprojects to set stretching targets, encourage innovation and provide an independent score todemonstrate sustainable credentials. Wewould expect eachBREEAMrating to represent performance equivalent to:

Outstanding: Less than the top 1%of new infrastructure assets (innovator)Excellent: Top 10%of new infrastructure assets (best practice)VeryGood:Top 25%of new infrastructure assets (advanced good practice)Good:Top 50%of new infrastructure assets (intermediate good practice)Pass: Top 75%of new infrastructure assets (standard good practice).

This will be tested throughout the pilot process to inform the development of the scoring process if necessary.

Anunclassified BREEAMrating represents performance that is non-compliant with BREEAM, as it fails to meet either theBREEAMminimum standards of performance for key environmental issues or the overall threshold score required to achieveat least a Pass rating.



Minimum Standards

To maintain a flexible system BREEAMadopts a 'balanced scorecard' approach to the assessment and rating of assetperformance. This means that, to achieve a particular level of performance themajority of BREEAMcredits canbe traded,, i.e.non-compliance in one area canbe offset through compliance in another to achieve the target BREEAMrating.

However, to ensure that performance against fundamental environmental issues is not overlooked inpursuit of a particularrating, BREEAMsets minimum standards of performance in key areas, e.g. materials, water, waste etc. It is important to bear inmind that these areminimum acceptable levels of performance and, in that respect they should not necessarily be viewed aslevels that are representative of best practice for a BREEAMrating level.

To achieve a particular BREEAMrating, theminimum overall percentage scoremust be achieved and theminimum standards,detailed in Table 4,must also bemet.

Table 4:Minimum standards for BREEAMin Infrastructure

Issue Minimum standard

Pass Good VG Ex Out

ID 03 Handover and aftercare (criteria 2 –4 ) 1 1 1

ID 03 Handover and aftercare (criteria 5 –6 ) 1 1 1

ID 03 Handover and aftercare (criteria 8 –9 ) 1

Res 04 Surfacewater run-off (criteria 1 –11 ) 1 1 2 2

ST 02 Consultation and engagement (criteria 12 –15 ) 1 1 1

ST 03 Responsible constructionpractices (criterion11 ) 1 2

ST 04 Owner operator requirements (criteria 1 –8 )* 1 1 1

LW02 Social impact (criteria 7 –13 ) 1

Tra 01 Transport impact assessment (criteria 3 –10 ) 2 2 2 2

LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan(criteria 7 –11 )

1 1 1

LUE05 Protectionof biodiversity (criteria 1 –12 ) 1 2

Pol 02 Water pollution (criteria 5 –14 ) 2 2 2

Pol 03 Noise and vibration (criteria 6 –12 ) 1 1 1

Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials (criterion1 ) Prerequisite


Scoring and rating

Issue Minimum standard

Pass Good VG Ex Out

Wst 01 Constructionwastemanagement (criteria 6 –9 ) Prerequisite

Wst 01 Constructionwastemanagement (criteria 13 –17)

1

Wat 01 Water efficiencyplanning and implementation(criteria 4 –6 and 10 –16 )

1 1 1 1

Wat 01 Water efficiencyplanning and implementation(criteria 4 –6 and 19 –25 )

1 1 1

*This is the only issuewithminimum standards for the strategic stage. This is because the strategic stage requirementcannot be completed post DPoW Stage 2. Please refer to AppendixA - Strategic and project detail stages links forfurther details.

Prerequisites

Prerequisites are identified within some BREEAMissues.Where these are present theymust be achieved inorder to awardassociated credits within that issue. Prerequisites therefore differ from 'minimum standards' in that theydo not directlyinfluence the overall BREEAMrating, however theydo influence the number of credits that canbe achieved within the issue.

Environmental weightings

Environmentalweightings are fundamental to any environmental assessment method as theyprovide ameans of defining,and therefore ranking, the relative impact of environmental issues.

This BREEAMscheme uses an independently peer reviewed, BREEAMweightings methodology that provides a standardised,transparent and credible approach for assigning the relative importance to the different sustainability aspects covered byBREEAM.

Anadaptationprocess is used to reflect local conditions in a country (or region if the country has a significant land mass withvaried environmental issues). These are used to determine the relative values of the sections used in BREEAM, and theircontributions to anoverall BREEAMscore.

Using this process, BREEAMInternational theweightings are reviewed for the first project that registers for an assessment in acountry or region. Theseweightings are then set as appropriate for that project and all other projects thereafter in thatcountry or region for the life of the current BREEAMInternational versionwithin theApproved Standards and Weightings List(ASWL). The development of theseweightings is based on robust and independent information forwarded from ‘localexperts’ who have anunderstanding of local conditions. This maybe a project teammember or the assessor if they candemonstrate sufficient knowledge of the environmental conditions of the regionor country;or another individual ororganisationwith the relevant expertise.

The required information is compiled by the BREEAMAssessor using the ‘BREEAMInternational InfrastructureWeightings’form (available from the BREEAMProjects website). It is the assessor’s responsibility to correctly complete the form andsubmit this to BREGlobal, who use the information to develop appropriateweightings for that country or region.



Theweightings are tailored based on the 12 environmental sections, with sections being considered 'Global' or 'Local'. Globalcategories are those defined as having a universal impact, independent of the local context. Local categories are thosedefined as being variable locally, due to social, environmental, political or economic factors. BREGlobalwill take account ofthese factors whendetermining the relative importance of the technical sections.

BREEAM assessment issues and credits

The BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (pilot) scheme consists of 43 individual assessment issues spanning the 12environmental sections, plus an additional section called 'innovation' (described below). Each issue addresses a specific assetrelated environmental impact or issue and has a number of 'credits' assigned to it.

'BREEAMcredits' are awarded where anasset demonstrates that it meets the best practice performance levels defined forthat issue, i.e. it has mitigated a negative impact and, in some cases, enhanced a positive impact.

The number of 'credits' available for an individual assessment issuewill vary and generally the higher the number there are fora given issue, themore important that issue is in terms of mitigating its impact. Inmost cases, where there aremultiple 'credits'available, the number awarded is based ona sliding scale or benchmark, where progressively higher standards ofperformance are rewarded with a higher number of 'credits'.

It is worth noting that, in addition to the environmental section and overall score and BREEAMrating, verified performanceagainst individual assessment issues also provides users with a credible set of keyperformance indicators for a range ofembodied, operational and constructionphase impacts. In this respect, in addition to using BREEAMto define overall targets,it is possible to use themethod to define performance levels in support of specific organisational policy objectives forindividual environmental issues. Care should be takenwhen setting design targets using individual issues and credit levels inthis way as it can limit design flexibility and have an impact onproject costs.

Awarding 'credits' for innovation

It is one of the aims of BREEAMto support innovationwithin the construction industry and its supply chain. BREEAMdoes thisbymaking additional 'credits' available for the recognitionof sustainability related benefits or performance levels which arecurrently not recognised by standard BREEAMassessment issues and criteria. By doing this BREEAMis rewarding assets andprojects that go beyond best practice in terms of a particular aspect of sustainability, i.e. where the asset or its procurementhas demonstrated innovation.

Awarding 'credits' for innovation enables clients and design teams to boost their building's BREEAMperformance and, inaddition, helps to support themarket for new innovative technologies, and designor constructionpractices.

There are two ways inwhichBREEAMawards 'innovation credits' to recognise innovation in design and construction. The first isbymeeting exemplary performance criteria defined within anexisting BREEAMissue, i.e. going beyond the standard BREEAMassessment criteria and therefore best practice. Note, not all assessment issues have exemplary performance criteria. Thesecond route is where anapplication is made to BREGlobal by the registered project's BREEAMAssessor to have a particulartechnologyor feature, designor constructionmethod or process recognised as 'innovative'. If the application is successful andsubsequently compliance is verified, an 'innovation credit' canbe awarded.

Anadditional 1% canbe added to the overall score for each 'innovation credit' achieved. Themaximum number of 'innovationcredits' that canbe awarded for anyone project or subproject is 10; therefore themaximum available additional score for'innovation' is 10%. Innovation credits canbe awarded regardless of the asset's final BREEAMrating,, i.e. they canbe awardedat anyBREEAMrating level. Refer to the Innovation section for more details.


Scoring and rating

Calculating an asset's BREEAM rating

A BREEAMAssessor must determine the BREEAMrating using the appropriate assessment tools and calculators. Anindicationof performance against this BREEAMscheme canalso be determined by carrying out a BREEAMInfrastructure pre-assessment2, available from the BREEAMProjects websitewww.breeam.org/projects/.

The process of determining a BREEAMrating is outlined belowand anexample calculation included in Table 5:

For eachof BREEAM's 12 environmental sections the number of 'credits' awarded must be determined by theBREEAMAssessor in accordancewith the criteria of each assessment issue (as detailed in the process and technicalsections of this document)The percentage of 'credits' achieved is then calculated for each sectionThe percentage of 'credits' achieved in each section is thenmultiplied by the corresponding sectionweighting to givethe overall section scoreThe section scores are thenadded together to give the overall BREEAMscore

Anadditional 1% canbe added to the overall BREEAMscore for each 'innovation credit' achieved (up to amaximum of 10%)

The overall score is then compared to the BREEAMrating benchmark levels and, provided allminimum standards havebeenmet, the relevant BREEAMrating is achieved.

Note: Table 6 shows the relevant minimum standards have beenmet for this example calculation.

Table 5: Example calculation for BREEAMInfrastructure rating

BREEAM Section Creditsachieved

Creditsavailable*

%of creditsachieved

Sectionweighting*

Section score(%)

Integrated design 10 19 52.63 0.085 4.47

Resilience 9 14 64.28 0.10 6.42

Stakeholders 11 13 84.61 0.085 7.19

Localwellbeing 6 13 46.15 0.11 5.07

Transport 7 11 63.63 0.09 5.72

Land use andecology

15 21 71.42 0.08 5.71

Landscape andheritage

3 7 42.85 0.06 2.57

Pollution 9 15 60.00 0.08 4.80

Materials 10 20 50.00 0.11 5.50

Carbonand energy 6 11 54.54 0.13 7.09

Waste 3 3 100.00 0.04 4.00


http://www.breeam.org/projects/


BREEAM Section Creditsachieved

Creditsavailable*

%of creditsachieved

Sectionweighting*

Section score(%)

Water 6 9 66.66 0.03 1.99

Innovation 3 10 30.00 0.10 3.00

Overall BREEAM Score 63.53%

BREEAM Rating VERY GOOD

* This will vary based on the asset type being assessed and its location.Note: In this example the BREEAMUK sectionweightings have beenused.

Table 6:Minimum standards for a BREEAM'VeryGood' rating

Minimum standards for a BREEAM 'VeryGood' rating Achieved?

ID 03 Handover and aftercare (criteria 2 –4 ) Yes

ID 03 Handover and aftercare (criteria 5 –6 ) Yes

Res 04 Surfacewater run-off (criteria 1 –11 ) Yes

ST 02 Consultation and engagement (criteria 12 –15 ) Yes

ST 04 Owner operator requirements (criteria 1 –8 ) Yes

Tra 01 Transport impact assessment (criteria 3 –10 ) Yes

LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan (criteria 7 –11 ) Yes

Pol 02 Water pollution (criteria 5 –14 ) Yes

Pol 03 Noise and vibration (criteria 6 –12 ) Yes

Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials (criterion1 ) Yes

Wst 01 Constructionwastemanagement (criteria 6 –9 ) Yes

Wat 01 Water efficiencyplanning and implementation (criteria 4 –6 and 10 –16 ) Yes

Wat 01 Water efficiencyplanning and implementation (criteria 4 –6 and 19 –25 ) Yes


Evidence

BREEAM evidential requirements

This sectionprovides guidance to assessors and project teams on the types of evidence required to demonstrate compliancewith BREEAMissues.

Why does BREEAM require evidence?

BREEAMis a third party assessment and certification schemeoperated in accordancewith international standards. Operatingto international standards ensures that certification schemes such as BREEAMare run in a consistent and reliablemanner. TheBREEAMAssessor's assessment report and the BREGlobalQualityAssurance process are the fundamental tenets of BREEAM,ensuring consistencyof, and confidence in, the BREEAMrating awarded by the assessor.

To maintain this consistency and credibility all certificationdecisions must be based on verified and credible projectinformation that is traceable, i.e. evidence based. This is not only important for ensuring compliancewith the internationalstandards to whichBREEAMoperates, but also in terms of managing risk to clients and BREEAMAssessors in the event that acertificationoutcome is challenged.

The assessment report and the BREEAM Assessor role

It is the BREEAMAssessor who determines the BREEAMrating and the assessment report is the formal record of an assessor'saudit against the criteria defined in the TechnicalManual for a BREEAMscheme. The BREEAMcertificate issued byBREGlobalprovides assurance that the service provided by the assessor (that is, the process of producing the assessment report) hasbeen conducted in accordancewith the requirements of the scheme. The purpose of the certificate is therefore to giveconfidence to the client in the assessor's performance and processes in determining a BREEAMrating.

It is the role of the assessor to gather project information and use it to assess performance against the BREEAMscheme in acompetent and impartialmanner. To award a BREEAMcredit, the assessor must be satisfied beyond reasonable doubt thatthe evidence gathered demonstrates unambiguous compliancewith all relevant criteria defined in the BREEAMscheme. Allevidencemust be appropriately referenced in the formal report produced by the assessor and made available on requestfrom BREGlobal Ltd for quality assurance checks.

Clear, ordered and well referenced evidence for eachBREEAMissue and criterion facilitates efficient quality assurance andcertification. BREEAMAssessors can access further guidance onassessment report referencing inAssessor GuidanceNote01, and the 'Reporting process'webinar, both available from the BREEAMAssessor Guidance sectionof the BREEAMAssessorextranet.

For large infrastructure projects, theremaybe significant volumes of evidence. BREGlobal Limited willworkwith the pilotproject to explore howdemonstrating compliance canbe practicalwhile remaining credible.

Evidence types

Evidence should not necessarily need to be prepared specifically for the purpose of the BREEAMassessment. Inmanyinstances, the assessor should be able to source readily available and prepared project information for the purpose ofdemonstrating compliance. For this reason, BREEAMaims to avoid being prescriptive on the type of evidence required,although some issues do require specific documents to be provided.

The assessor and project teamwill find that many assessment issues requiremore thanone piece or type of information todemonstrate compliancewithone criterion, or alternatively, one piece of informationmaybe sufficient to demonstratecompliancewithmultiple criteria.


Evidence BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

To assist project teams and the BREEAMAssessor in their collationof asset information at each stage of assessment, thedifferent types of documentation that canbe used as evidence of compliance are listed below.

These evidence types fall broadly into three categories:

1. General evidence type2. Specific evidence type3. Other evidence type.

For some assessment issues, the assessor is likely to require amixture of general and specific evidence types.

General evidence includes a broad list of defined construction information commonly produced for an infrastructure project.One or amix of these types of construction information canbe used to demonstrate compliance for one or more of theBREEAMissues and criteria, as deemed appropriate by the BREEAMAssessor for the stage of assessment.

General BREEAMevidence types are listed in Table 7, and are not specifically listed in the ' Evidence' section found within eachBREEAMissue. Note, not all general evidence types will be appropriate for all issues and it is the responsibility of the assessorto ensure that the evidence provided specifically demonstrates compliance and is fully referenced in theAssessmentreporting tool.

Specific evidence is defined construction information that must be provided to verify compliancewith the relevant criteria forthe BREEAMcredit sought. In all cases it will be the only type of evidence that will be accepted byBREGlobal Ltd for thatparticular issue or criteria.Where specific evidence is not provided and appropriately referenced in the assessment report, theQualityAssurance checks will identify nonconformity and certificationwill be delayed. Anexample of specific evidencewouldbe a copyof the life cycle assessment report for BREEAMissueMat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts, and this is listed in theevidence table for this issue.

When required, specific evidence is defined and listed for eachBREEAMissue in the 'Evidence' section for strategic, interim andfinal stages of assessment. Although the 'Evidence' section lists the specific evidence required to demonstrate compliancewithparticular criteria, simply submitting this evidencemaynot be sufficient to demonstrate full compliance. Additional'general evidence types'may also be required.

For example,Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts requires a copyof the carbon footprint report or life cycle assessmentreport as listed in the 'Evidence' table. However, in addition to this report, further evidence is required to demonstrate how theoutputs of this report have influenced the design, i.e. general evidence types such as specifications for the asset or drawingsetc., confirming thematerial specifications to be used. Note, not all BREEAMissues will have specific evidence requirements.

Other types of evidence can still be used to demonstrate compliancewhere an information type provided by a client or designteam is not listed in Table 7 or the 'Evidence' section for each issue. To avoid nonconformities and delays in certification,undefined alternative types of evidencemust demonstrate credible, robust and traceable assurance to the same level as, orbetter than, specified or general evidence types. If in doubt, please contact BREEAMprior to accepting suchevidence.

Written commitments at the interim stage of assessment – Designstage

At the interim design stage of assessment it is permissible to use letters or emails to demonstrate intent to complywithBREEAMcriteria (provided theymeet the requirements for the communication records above). Suchevidencemust also makeclear the actions and evidence (or anunderstanding thereof) that will be undertakenand provided to ensure the project'songoing compliance, particularly at the final stage of assessment,, i.e. post construction. This is to ensure that the partywhomakes the commitment is clearly aware of the actions and evidence that needs to be supplied to demonstrate compliancewith BREEAMat the final stage of assessment. For example, inmany circumstances it would not be acceptable for the designteam to copy and paste the BREEAMcriteria into a formal commitment. The commitment should specifically detail howcriteriaare to be achieved in the context of the assessment, and often copying and pasting the BREEAMcriteria will not provide thisdetail.


Evidence

While letters of commitment canplay a role in demonstrating compliance, they are not a replacement for more formal andestablished types of project information. The assessor must not award credits where theyhave a reason to doubt the validityor intent of written commitments or where it is not unreasonable to expect formal designor specification information to beavailable to confirm compliance.

Written commitments at the final stage of assessment – Postconstruction

The 'Final post-construction stage' columnof the evidence table in each issue assumes that a design stage assessment hasbeen completed.Where a design stage assessment has not been completed, the assessor will need to reviewboth the'Interim design stage' and 'Final post-construction stage'evidence listed in the evidence table and ensure sufficient evidence issubmitted with the assessment to demonstrate compliancewith the criteria.

Evidence supplied at the post-construction stagemust be reflective of the built asset and must therefore demonstratewhathas actually been implemented. For example if sub-meters have been specified at design stage, evidence at the post-construction stagewould need to demonstrate that these have actually been installed. Appropriate evidencemaybe a siteinspection report with supporting photographs or as built drawings showing the locationof a compliant feature.

Letters of commitment cannot be used to demonstrate compliance at the final, post-construction stage of assessment. Theonly exception to this is where the criteria require an action to take place post construction,, i.e. after handover and possiblyduring the asset operation. Anexample could be awritten commitment from the asset owner making a commitment toconduct post completion commissioning. As withwritten commitments at the design stage, the BREEAMAssessor must notaward BREEAMcredits where theyhave a reason to doubt the validity or intent of written commitments or where it is notunreasonable to expect formal documentation, e.g. a schedule of services or a professional services contract or both.

Evidence principles

As described above, where specific evidence is stated in the 'evidence' tablewithin each assessment issue, this must besourced and verified by the BREEAMAssessor.

Where no specific evidence has been listed for an issue or specific criterion, this means that there are potentially a number ofdifferent types of 'general' project information, as per Table 8 that canbe sourced by the BREEAMAssessor and used todemonstrate compliance. It is the BREEAMAssessor's responsibility to source and verify the 'general evidence types' for eachrelevant criterion, where compliance and credits are being claimed by the project team.

In determining the appropriateness of 'general evidence types' for each issue, the principles outlined in Table 7 must beconsidered byBREEAMAssessors.Where the 'general evidence types'meet the principles outlined in Table 7 and,whereappropriate, the guidance provided in the 'robustness of evidence' section, suchevidence is admissible for the purpose of theassessment and the BREGlobalQualityAssurance checks.

These principles are not listed in a hierarchical order and are all equally important when considering which evidence type tosubmit to demonstrate compliance for each issue or criterion.

Table 7BREEAMevidence principles

Summary Principle Objective A question to ask to check

1 Evidenceprovided forall criteria forall creditssought

Evidencemust demonstrate that ALLrelevant* criteria and sub-criteria foreach credit sought are achieved andwhere relevant, is provided to supportcompliance notes, definitions etc.

Completeness Are all criteria and sub-criteriacovered?Have all relevantcompliance notes anddefinitions beenaddressed?



2 Unambiguousassessment

The assessment must demonstrateunambiguous compliance and theevidencemust support thisassessment. Evidence (and supportingnotes)must clearly demonstrate to a3rd party reviewer that the criteria havebeenmet.

Independentreviewcompatibility

If a 3rd party (e.g. BREGlobalLtd) reviewed my report withthe submitted evidence, wouldtheybe able to confirmcompliance and award thesame credits I have?

3 Robust 1. When selecting the Evidence type,always ensure it is robust and isrelevant to the stage ofassessment.

2. The selected Evidence contains allthe relevant basic information,with the necessary constituentparts to be deemed robust.

(Refer to Robustness of evidencesection for further details onbothofthe above.)

Proof thatevidence isrobust andfrom a reliablesource

Is this themost robust form ofevidence available todemonstrate compliancewiththis criterion?Does theevidence contain all the relevantbasic information? Is it fullyauditable?

4 Use existingevidence

Use existing project information todemonstrate compliance. Inmostcases evidence should not need to be'created' for BREEAMcompliancepurposes.

Minimisesevidence andreduces timeand cost ofcompliance

Does robust evidencemeetingthe above principles alreadyexist that I canuse? If I need toask for more evidence, is theproject seeking credits wherecompliance is not adequatelydemonstrated?

*Where the assessor or design team deem specific criteria 'not relevant' to the assessment, a full justification should becollated and then submitted as a technical query, for reviewbyBREGlobal Ltd.

Robustness of evidence

Robust evidence provides confirmation that the assessment has been carried out correctly and the asset complies with thecriteria for the BREEAMcredits sought. The assessor should consider the following whengathering project information andevaluating whether the evidence provided is as 'robust' as possible:

Is theremore thanone piece of evidence that could be used to demonstrate compliance?Is the chosenevidence themost robust and appropriate piece of evidence to demonstrate that a particular criterionhas beenachieved?

Anyevidence submitted for a BREAMassessment must be robust in terms of its source and its traceability. Below is a list of theminimum information the assessor must expect to see, when certain types of evidence are submitted:

Communication records:Any communication records used as evidencemust provide clear confirmationof the site name,author's identity and role, the date and recipient's identity.

Formal letters of correspondence:Must be on companyor organisationheaded notepaper with a signature (electronicsignatures are acceptable). Ideally letters should be a secured document. (Please see sections relating to written commitmentfor further information.)

Meeting minutes:Must include date, location and attendee information (names, organisations and roles), along with a recordof themeeting and agreed actions.


Evidence

Drawings:All drawingsmust have the asset or site name, phase (if applicable), title of drawing, date, revisionnumber and ascale.

Specification:A specificationmust be clear that it relates to the project under assessment, and it must have a date and revisionnumber.Where sections of a specification are provided the assessor should reference the extract and as aminimum submitthe front page of the specificationdetailing the project name, revisionnumber and date.

Site inspection report:A site inspection report must include the site name, date, author and summary text to detailwhat waswitnessed, confirming compliance. Photographic evidence canbe used to support the text in the report.

For other types of evidence not listed, the assessor should use the above as a guide for the sort of evidence that is suitable. Asaminimum inmost cases the evidence used to assess compliance should always contain key information such as the projectname, the author, date, revisionnumbers etc.

Table 8Document and evidence types

Ref Document orevidence type

Description and notes

E1 As constructedinformation

Informationproduced at the end of a project to represent what has been constructed. Thiswill comprise amixture of 'as built' informationor drawings and surveys from specialistsubcontractors and the 'final construction issue' from design teammembers.

E2 Buildinginformationmodel (BIM)

The BIM(or BIMfiles) used for the project containing relevant informationor evidence ofcompliance.

E3 BREGlobalcorrespondencereferencenumber

For example the reference number for a BREGlobal response to anassessor's technicalquery.

E4 BREEAMAssessor's siteinspectionreport

A formal report based on the BREEAMAssessor's own surveyof the site or asset to confirmcompliancewith BREEAMcriteria. An assessor's site inspection report will be distinct fromtheir formal BREEAMassessment report, serving as a form of evidence of compliance in itsown right, and it may include photographs takenby the assessor as part of the survey.

E5 Contracts The contract (or excerpts and clauses from it) between the client and the contractor for theconstructionof the project. In some instances, the building contract may contain designduties for either specialist subcontractors, design teammembers or both.

E6 Certificates ofcompliance(third party)

Examples include ISO14001, BES6001, FSC (Forest Stewardship Council), EPC(environmental profile certificate), EPD (environmental product declaration), ConsiderateConstructors etc.

E7 Communicationrecords

Formal communication records betweenor from relevant project stakeholders or otherthird parties confirming anappointment, actionor outcome. This maybe in the form of aletter, meeting minutes, email correspondence, publicationor another form of media.

E8 Communicationstrategy

The strategy that sets out when the project teamwillmeet, how theywill communicateeffectively and the protocols for issuing informationbetween the various parties, bothinformally and at information exchanges.



E9 Computer aidedmodellingresults andoutputs

Examples include flooding, life cycle assessment, life cycle costing, etc.

E10 Constructionspecification

The specification for the project or asset3.

E11 Constructionstage data orinformation

For example, purchase orders, metering data, log books, commissioning records, reportsetc.

E12 Contractual tree A diagram that clarifies the contractual relationship between the client and the partiesundertaking the roles required ona project.

E13 Costinformation

Project costs, including the cost estimate and life cycle costs.

E14 Curriculum vitae A brief account of a person’s education, qualifications, and previous occupations,demonstrating 'suitably qualified' status.

E15 Designdrawings4

Structural, civil, mechanical and electrical design, site plans, drainage designs, etc.

E16 Designprogramme

A programme setting out the strategic dates in relation to the designprocess. It is alignedwith the Project Programmebut is strategic in its nature, due to the iterative nature of thedesignprocess, particularly in the early stages.

E17 Designresponsibilitymatrix

Amatrix that sets out who is responsible for designing each aspect of the project andwhen. This document sets out the extent of anyperformance specified design.

E18 Feasibility study Studies undertaken to test the feasibility of the brief or concept design for the site or in aspecific context and to consider howsite-wide issues will be addressed.

E19 Final projectbrief

The initial brief amended so that it is aligned with the concept design and anybriefingdecisions made during this stage.

E20 Other third partyinformation

For example,maps, product data, product details, manufacturers' literature, government orEUstandards or codes, EU labelling.

E21 Professionalservices contract

Anagreement to provide professional or consulting services such as, designing, feasibilitystudies, or legal or technical advice.

E22 Professionalspecialistreports

Professional reports resulting from specialist surveys or studies or test results, e.g.contaminated land, ecology, flood riskassessment, surfacewater run-off report, siteinvestigation, acoustics, lowand zero carbon technologies study, transportation analysis,commissioning reports, life cycle assessment, landscape and habitat management plan etc.


Evidence

E23 ProjectExecutionorQuality Plan

The Project Execution Plan is produced in collaborationbetween the project lead and leaddesigner, with contributions from other designers and members of the project team. TheProject Execution Plan sets out the processes and protocols to be used to develop thedesign.

E24 Projectprogramme

The overall period for the briefing, design, construction and post completion activities of aproject.

E25 Project rolestable

A table that sets out the roles required ona project as well as defining the stages duringwhich those roles are required and the parties responsible for carrying out the roles.

E26 Project strategy The strategies developed inparallelwith the Concept Design to support the design and, incertain instances, to respond to the Final Project Brief as it is concluded. Examples includestrategies for sustainability, acoustics, handover, maintenance and operation, technology,health and safety, construction, travel plan, sustainable procurement plan.

E27 Riskassessment The riskassessment considers the various design risks and other risks ona project and howeach riskwill bemanaged and the party responsible for managing each risk.

E28 Schedule ofservices

A list of specific services and tasks to be undertakenby a party involved in the project whichis incorporated into their professional services contract.

E29 Strategic orinitial projectbrief

The brief prepared following discussions with the client to ascertain the project objectives,the client's business case and, in certain instances, in response to site feasibility studies.


blankpage

Integrated design

Integrated design

Category overview

Weighting (%) Minimum standards

Refer to the country reference sheet in theASWL ID 03 Handover and aftercare

Summary

This section encourages a holistic approach to option appraisal including whole systems thinking. In addition it promotescollaborativeworking throughearly involvement of key stakeholders, whole life thinking, an integrated approach to datamanagement and processes to monitor and manage target setting ensuring the asset performs as required.

Category summary table

Issue Credits

ID 01 Option appraisal and objectives Strategy - 2Project detail - 1

Setting a series of objectives relating to a range of sustainability targetsOptions appraisal against a range of holistic sustainability objectivesConsulting on the appraisal process and outcomeSetting measurable targets for the project detail stage, based on the strategic objectives

ID 02 Project team collaboration Strategy - 1Project detail - 3

Involvement of key stakeholders early in the design and constructionprocessDefining and communicating project team roles and responsibilitiesSetting,managing and monitoring performance against targetsUse of an integrated data management and information exchange system

ID 03 Handover and aftercare Strategy - 1Project detail - 4

Setting handover and aftercare objectives and budgets at the early stages of the projectManaging commissioning, handover and aftercare including post operation evaluation

ID 04 Ecosystem services Strategy - 1Project detail - 1


Integrated design BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

Issue Credits

Strategic ecosystem services assessment to establish priority ecosystem services and associated marginalchangesMeasures are implemented to mitigate identified negativemarginal changes and increase positivemarginalchange

ID 05 Whole life costing Strategy - 2Project detail - 1

Completionof strategic level service life planning and whole life costing analysis.Detailed component level life cycle cost plan to minimise life cycle costs and maximise critical value.

ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts Strategy - 2Project detail - 0

Development of a screening life cycle assessment (LCA) to establishwhere opportunities exist for reducing thewhole lifeenvironmental impact of the project


ID 01 Option appraisal and objectives Integrated design

ID 01 Option appraisal and objectives

Strategic credits available Project detail credits available Minimum standards

2 1 None

Aim

To set challenging objectives and targets for the project and encourage and reward a robust, consistent and transparentapproach to option appraisal.

Strategic assessment criteria

This stage of the issue is split into three parts:

Setting strategic objectives (prerequisite)Considerationof alternative options (one credit)Sustainability appraisal (one credit)

The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Prerequisite - Setting strategic objectives

1 The project team, including the client, agree an initial set of social, economic and environmental objectives for the projectand organise these in terms of perceived importance. The objectives:1.a Include the owner/operator requirements over thewhole life of the asset (refer to ST 04 Owner operator

requirements)1.b Include anyproject delivery team requirements, where known, e.g. organisational targets1.c Reflect any area wide sustainability appraisal objectives set bygovernment departments, local planning

authorities, special area governing bodies, e.g. statutory conservation agencies and other relevant stakeholders1.d Include objectives for eachof the subject areas identified in Table 9 (refer to CN1)1.e Are informed by any recent similar projects (refer to CN2).

One credit - Consideration of alternative options

2 Criterion1 is achieved.

3 Using an iterative approach, the following have beenundertakenby the project team and owner/operator in consideringalternative options and selecting a preferred concept design solution for submission to the planning authority (refer toCN3):3.a Identify a number of alternative solutions to the proposed project by using a systems thinking approach (refer

to CN4 and CN5)3.b Assess the risks, impacts, constraints and opportunities from the following (refer to ID 04 Ecosystem services):

3.b.i The system to the asset and vice versa3.b.ii The asset to the environment and vice versa

3.c Evaluate the options against the objectives outlined in criterion1 using a proportionate approach (refer to CN6).

4 The following are included as part of the 'Initial consultation'process detailed in ST 02 Consultation and engagement(carried out prior to finalising the brief):4.a Whyalternatives were rejected or selected for more detailed consideration4.b How the alternatives selected for more detailed consideration comparewith the preferred solution including:

4.b.i Adverse effects and how these canbe prevented, reduced or offset4.b.ii Positive effects and how these canbe enhanced



4.b.iii If and how these effects are quantified in ameaningfulway4.b.iv Stakeholder groups that will bemost impacted (bothpositive and negative), e.g. rural versus city

dwelling, young versus old, ecology versus community and vulnerable, hard-to-reachgroups4.b.v Where effects are unclear, ambiguous or require further analysis4.b.vi How the effects apply over the short, medium and long term4.b.vii Howcumulative, secondary and synergistic effects have been considered and the resulting outcomes

over the short, medium and long term.

5 The comments from this initial consultation are:5.a Reviewed by the project team5.b Considered in updated targets and objectives5.c Responded to and made available to those stakeholders who were consulted.

6 The comments from this initial consultation influence either the selection, development or both, of the final conceptdesign for the project.

One credit - Consultation on appraisal process and outcome


8 The following are included as part of the 'Further consultation'process detailed in ST 02 Consultation and engagement(carried out at concept design stage):8.a Preferred solution and associated predicted social, economic and environmental risks, impacts, opportunities

and constraints8.b Data used in the analysis and predictionof social, economic and environmental risks, impacts, opportunities and

constraints8.c Justification to support decisions (including science or evidencewhere relevant)8.d Project objectives - social, economic and environmental8.e Considered alternatives, reflecting the detail of the evaluation (i.e. somewill have been considered briefly and

dismissed and others considered more comprehensively)8.f Option appraisalmethodology including how impacts have beenassessed and onwhat basis decisions were

made8.g Howstakeholder feedbackwas collected, addressed and presented for:

8.g.i The predicted impacts, opportunities and constraints8.g.ii The objectives8.g.iii The optiongeneration and evaluation.

8.h Where stakeholder feedbackhas influenced the proposals.

9 The project team demonstrate how feedback from the consultationdetailed in criterion8 is collected, responded to andtaken forward in the project.

Project detail assessment criteria


One credit - Targets and objectives

10 The strategic objectives listed in criterion1 are translated into a series of measurable project targets, either keyperformance indicators, deliverables or both. These targets should consider:10.a The owner/operator requirements over thewhole life of the asset (refer to ST 04 Owner operator

requirements)10.b Anyproject delivery team requirements, where known, e.g. organisational targets10.c Area wide sustainability appraisal objectives set bygovernment departments, local planning authorities, special

area governing bodies, e.g. statutory conservation agencies and other relevant stakeholders10.d Targets for eachof the subject areas identified in Table 9(refer to CN7)10.e Targets and performance of any recent similar projects (refer to CN2).

11 An implementationplan is developed outlining:11.a Themeasures to monitor and evaluate progress against these objectives throughout the project and11.b The organisations or individuals responsible for achieving the objectives.



12 Progress and performance is:12.a Monitored regularly and compared with targets, objectives and client or employer's requirements (refer to CN8)12.b Regularly recorded (as appropriate to the project duration) and disseminated to the project teamwith

improvement actions identified where necessary12.c Reviewed at the end of the project construction to assess actual performance against original targets,

objectives, client and employer's requirements12.d Disseminated to inform targets, objectives and approaches for other projects with similar risks, impacts,

opportunities, constraints and constructionprocesses or elements (refer to CN9).

13 Decisions taken throughout the design and construction stages including changes to the design are reviewed by theproject delivery team, owner/occupier and any relevant specialists (refer to CN10) and assessed in terms of the impacton:13.a Risks, impacts and opportunities13.b Client or employer's requirements13.c Agreed targets and objectives13.d Added value.

Checklists and tables

Table 9: Strategic BREEAMobjectives

Subject Objectives

Resilience 1. Enhancing the resilience of the asset and the systemwithinwhich it sits through:a. Business continuity plans and strategiesb. A robust and comprehensive riskassessment processc. Liaisonwith appropriate stakeholders and resilience expertsd. Implementing appropriate and proportionatemitigationmeasurese. Managing residual risks throughoperational processes and contingencyplansf. Identifying and allowing for future needs within the current designprocess.

2. Reducing risks resulting from the following to a tolerable level, where present:a. Natural hazards and climate change impactsb. Intentional threats such as crime and firec. Future needs and durability of the asset.

Stakeholders 1. Facilitating staff wellbeing and providing opportunities for training and development2. Meeting the needs of the owner/operator and end user (where different), including a highquality

of service (where relevant)3. Ensuring ease of access to, from and around the asset4. Providing appropriate amenities, shared facilities or both5. Facilitating a safe, secure and flexibleworking environment, nowand in the future6. Facilitating operation and maintenance tasks, nowand in the future7. Enhancing the experience of the asset user (where relevant), e.g. viewing points8. Reducing the riskof asset failure during its operational lifetime to mitigate immediate and wider

implications.



Subject Objectives

Localwellbeing

1. Enhancing the local economyduring construction and operation2. Enhancing the impacted community area and providing opportunities for broader stakeholder

groups during construction and operation.The above objectives could consider success in terms of improvements in the following:

Economic growth (e.g. investment, income to the area)Economic resilience (e.g. stability of income, reliance onone income stream)EmploymentIdentified skills gapsInvestment opportunitiesFuture trends for capacity or additional servicesMigrationof people into and out of the communityLocal skills and skill shortagesAmenitiesDiversity, equality, health and wellbeingRegenerationof the areaSocial cohesion and accessibilityOpportunities to increase trainingOpportunities to provide education and knowledgeOpportunities for social regeneration.

Transport During construction and,where appropriate, operationof the asset:1. Improving the experience of the existing users of the surrounding infrastructure, because of good

transport planning2. Minimising transport emissions3. Minimising transport movements4. Minimising disruption to and impacts on the community and existing transport systems, e.g.

mitigating diversions, temporaryworks and severance,5. Minimising pollution associated withdust, noise, CO

2emissions, particulate and other emissions

6. Using and improving existing transport infrastructure7. Improvements to transport links for impacted communities, particularly sustainable transport

modes.At the construction stage:1. Implementing good management procedures for temporarymeasures including the use of

sustainablemodes of transport.

Land use 1. Using land efficiently and improving its value and condition2. Remediating any contaminated land sustainably3. Mitigationof risks arising from contaminated land to anacceptable level bothduring construction

and (where appropriate) because of the asset's operation4. Enhancing amenity value of land5. Preserving and enhancing the quality of agricultural land present, including presence of best and

most versatile land6. Enhancing soil resources and functions, where present.

Biodiversity 1. Enhancing biodiversity and avoiding damage to existing ecological features2. Where damage to biodiversitywill occur, minimising,mitigating and compensating for the impact

of the damage.

Landscapeand heritage

1. Protecting and enhancing the landscape2. Avoiding and minimising impacts onheritage assets.



Subject Objectives

Pollution Preventing and controlling air, water, noise, vibration and light pollution resulting from the constructionand operationof the asset through:1. Carrying out a robust and comprehensive riskassessment process to identify key risks and

impacts2. Liaisonwith appropriate stakeholders and pollution experts3. Implementing appropriate and proportionatemitigationmeasures4. Managing residual risks through choices of operational processes and monitoring programmes.

Materials 1. Optimise thematerial choices for permanent and temporaryworks whilemeeting the functional(and aesthetic, where appropriate) requirements of the asset, e.g. durability, health and safety. etc.Optimise in this context means considerationof LCA, reuse and recycling, leandesign andconstructionprinciples, material optimisation etc.

2. Minimising the embodied impact over the life of the asset including deconstructionor end of life3. Minimising the impacts of transporting constructionmaterials4. Sourcing temporary and permanent materials responsibly.

Carbonandenergy

Reduce carbon resulting frommaterials, transport, constructionprocesses, operational processes,waste generated and land use changes.

Waste 1. Minimising waste in linewith thewaste hierarchy2. Diverting waste from landfill3. Managing waste disposal.

Water 1. Minimising totalwater demand and potablewater consumption througheffectivemanagementand maintenance

2. Using water efficient fittings and appliances3. Reusing and recycling water during construction and over the life of the asset4. Minimising the impact from the asset on the localwater supply over its life and vice versa, e.g.

because of newdevelopment or predicted water shortages.

Compliance notes

Ref Terms Description

CN1 Setting objectives The project objectives to be set against the BREEAMInfrastructure strategicrequirements are not prescribed within this issue. In some instances projects will setchallenging targets and at other times this will not be possible due to projectconstraints. The purpose of this requirement is to reward considerationof a holisticset of targets. Thewider the scope and more challenging the objectives, themorelikely the asset will be to achieve the project detail requirements and subsequently ahigher scorewithin the scheme, but specific targets are not mandated within thisissue.

CN2 Using similar pastprojects to settargets

Other similar projects can inform objectives througha demonstrationof bestpractice, and also through lessons learnt.




CN3 Alternative options This requirement refers to early stage decisions around a proposed solution to anidentified need. See below for somebasic examples:

Example 1Identified need - improvewater quality in "A TOWN" riversProposed solution - new treatment worksEarly stage decisions might include - site location, layout, treatment options.

Example 2Identified need - stabilise embankmentProposed solution - build retaining wallEarly stage decisions might include - constructionmethods,material selection.

Example 3Identified need - reduce flood risk to catchment areaProposed solution - reservoir extensionEarly stage decisions might include - locationof extension, plan area and depthofextended reservoir, constructionmethods and materials.

Example 4Identified need - increase freight capacity onexisting rail lineProposed solution - new railway for passengersEarly stage decisions might include - route, tunnelling, cutting, constructionmethodsand materials.

CN4 Generatingalternative options

The alternatives must include the situationwithout the project intervention, i.e.without the asset being built.

CN5 Systems thinkingapproach

The asset is considered in terms of the system inwhich it sits and not in isolation.This includes identifying:

Upstream and downstream dependenciesA systems boundarywithinwhich to consider the impacts andopportunitiesIssues that might cross the identified system boundaryOpportunities for features of the asset to realisemultiple objectives, e.g.landscaped swales that reduce flood risk, increase biodiversity, encouragewalking and cycling, and provide opportunities for local power generation.

CN6 Assessingalternative options

Wheremore than three options are identified, a short list of three canbe created byreviewing eachone against high-level priority objectives, identified by the projectteam and owner/operator (refer to criteria 1 – 4 ).Options canbe rejected because they are not in alignment with the agreedobjectives. Options are selected for more detailed reviewwhere they arewellaligned with the agreed objectives.The project team are expected to reviewat least one alternative proposal in thesame amount of detail as the current preferred solution. It is expected that the levelof detail available for assessing options will increase as the process develops andinitially theremayonly be high-level information available.




CN7 Targets The requirement for targets to be informed by the contents of Table 9 does notrequire targets for all of these subject areas, however the assessor must besatisfied that a robust reviewof all subject areas has beenundertakenand whereno targets (or easy targets) have been set, there are sound technical reasons forthis.The project team aremade aware that aiming for highperformance in thesesubject areas will support a higher BREEAMrating at the project detail stage ofassessment.

CN8 Monitoring andrecordingperformancecompared withtargets

Performance against targets is reviewed at regular project teammeetings,progress and actions are noted (including bywho and for when)withinminutes orother formal records and individuals are informed of actions to be taken.

CN9 Disseminatinginformation

Information regarding targets, lessons learnt, successes etc. must be disseminatedat the end of the project.For projects withmultiple stages, these should also be disseminated at thecompletionof these stages.

CN10 Changes during thedesign andconstructionprocess

Changes (including proposed changes) during the design and constructionprocessinclude:

Information regarding targets, lessons learnt, successes etc., and must bedisseminated at the end of the project.For projects withmultiple stages, these should also be disseminated at thecompletionof these stages.

Relevant members of the project team (project delivery team, owner, operator andspecialists) then agree proposed actions and these are communicated toappropriate teams and individuals.

Methodology

None.

Evidence

Ref Strategy stage Interim design stage Final post-construction stage

All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAMevidential requirements section canbeused to demonstrate compliancewith these criteria.



Additional information

Relevant definitions

None.

Other information

None.


ID 02 Project team collaboration Integrated design

ID 02 Project team collaboration


1 3 None

Aim

To recognise and encourage an integrated design team and process resulting in optimised asset performance.


The following is required to demonstrate compliance.

One credit - Project team engagement (project delivery)

1 The following are agreed and included in formal project documentationbefore concept design stage:1.a Client requirements including:

1.a.i The functional performance requirements and outcomes for the asset in operation (refer to ST 04Owner operator requirements)

1.a.ii The environmental performance requirements and outcomes for the asset during construction andoperation (refer to ST 04 Owner operator requirements)

1.a.iii Any capital cost constraints or requirements for the project1.a.iv Anyoperating cost constraints or requirements for the asset1.a.v Project objectives and targets including target BREEAMrating, business objectives etc.1.a.vi Timescales and budget1.a.vii Constraints for the project, e.g. technical, legal, physical, environmental.

2 Before completionof the concept design key representatives of the project delivery team (refer to Relevant definitions)havemet to identify and define their roles, responsibilities and contributions for eachof the keyproject gateways (referto Relevant definitions).

3 In defining the roles and responsibilities for each keyproject gateway, the following must be considered:3.a The end user3.b Aims of the design and design strategy3.c Particular installation and construction requirements and limitations3.d Design and construction riskassessments3.e Legislative requirements, e.g. waste and heritage requirements3.f Procurement and supply chain3.g Identifying and measuring project success in linewithproject brief objectives3.h Owner/operator's budget and technical expertise inmaintaining anyproposed systems3.i Maintainability and adaptability of the proposals3.j Requirements for the productionof project and operator documentation3.k Requirements for commissioning, training, handover and aftercare support.

4 The project delivery team contributions and the outcomes of criteria 1 – 3 have influenced or changed the initial projectbrief, including if appropriate, the project executionquality plan, team communication strategy, and the concept design.

5 Representatives from the client and employer team and members of the project delivery team are appointed to worktogether to:5.a Manage and ensure delivery of the client and employer requirements (refer to ST 04 Owner operator

requirements)5.b Manage and ensure delivery of the agreed targets and objectives



5.c Identify and agree how risks and opportunities canbe shared5.d Identify and agree a proactive and collaborative approach to problem resolution.

Please note that criteria 8 , 9 and 17 also require actions to be undertakenat the concept design stage, however, as they arelinked to the detail designprocess, they are included in the project detail assessment criteria.


This stage of the issue is split into four parts:

Project team collaboration (prerequisite)Sustainability champion - design and monitoring progress (one credit)Sustainability champion - construction (one credit)Integrated data management (one credit)


Prerequisite - Project team collaboration

6 Representatives from the client and employer team and members of the project delivery team continue to worktogether (or are appointed to work together) to undertake the responsibilities and tasks outlined in criterion5 .

One credit - Sustainability champion (design andmonitoring progress, i.e. concept, definition, design)


8 Sustainability champions are appointed to facilitate the setting and achievement of BREEAMperformance targets for theproject (refer to CN1). The design stage sustainability champions are appointed to perform this role during the feasibilityor concept stages.

9 During the feasibility or concept design stage the defined BREEAMperformance targets are formally agreed betweenthe client and project delivery team (refer to Relevant definitions).

10 Sustainability champions are appointed to monitor progress against the agreed BREEAMperformance targetsthroughout the designprocess and formally report progress to the client and design team (refer to CN2).

11 To achieve credit at the interim design stage assessment, the agreed BREEAMperformance targets are demonstrablyachieved by the project design. This is demonstrated via the BREEAMAssessor's design stage assessment report.

One credit - Sustainability champion (construction, i.e. build and commission)


13 Sustainability champions are appointed to monitor the project to ensure ongoing compliancewith the relevantsustainability performance and process criteria, and therefore targets, during the construction stages (refer to CN3).

14 The defined BREEAMperformance targets form a requirement of the contractor's contract.

15 To achieve credit at the final post-construction stage of assessment, the BREEAMperformance targets for the projectare demonstrably achieved. This is demonstrated via the BREEAMAssessor's final post-construction stage assessmentreport (refer to CN4).

One credit - Integrated datamanagement


17 A process or system is implemented from feasibility or concept design stage to ensure integrated recording andexchange of information across the design, construction and operationalmembers of the project team to efficientlymanage data and support operational asset management.




None.

Compliance notes


CN1 BREEAMperformancetargets

This includes the BREEAMrating and any specific performance requirements identifiedby the client or project team.

CN2 Sustainabilitychampion -Designand monitoringprogress

The sustainability championattends keyproject and design teammeetings throughoutthe project, and is involved indiscussions about changes. They shall take notes andreport onprogress with regards to achieving the BREEAMtargets.

CN3 Sustainabilitychampion– Designand monitoringprogress

The sustainability championwill ideally be site based or will visit the site regularly to carryout spot checks, with the relevant authority to do so and require action to be taken toaddress shortcomings in compliance.The sustainability championwillmonitor site activities with sufficient frequency (refer toCN5) to ensure that risks of non-compliance areminimised. Theywill report onprogress at relevant project teammeetings including identifying potential areas ofnon-compliance and any actionneeded.

CN4 BREEAM-relatedperformancetargets

If the BREEAMperformance targets set at the end of the feasibility or concept designstage have not beenachieved at the post-construction stage, the credits awarded atthe interim design stage assessment for appointing the sustainability championmustbewithheld in the final assessment.

CN5 Frequencyof sitemonitoring

In context, visits should occur at key stages of the constructionprocess, at times where:

Works canbe observed before they are covered up or newworks or tradesstartWhere significant risks of conflicts or errors could occurWhere timing is critical to demonstrating complianceWhere key evidence is required to be produced at specific times including, butnot limited to photographic, delivery notes and other documentary evidenceWhere different trades and systems come together and one could harm theintegrity or compliance of another system's performance against the projectrequirements.

Methodology

None.



Evidence





BREEAM-related performance targetsBREEAMperformance targets refer specifically to the BREEAMrating and minimum standards required. This does notnecessarily include individual targeted BREEAMissues or credits, whichmaybe traded over the course of the projectas it evolves. In agreeing a BREEAMtarget it is recommended that individual BREEAMissues, credits and criteria aretargeted or prioritised to ensure that the agreed target is achievable, and achieved without potentially costlyalterations to the design at a later stage.

Formally agreedThe term 'formally agreed' relates to performance targets. Examples of formal agreements include a contract orletters of appointment with relevant project teammembers.

Keydesign teammeetingsKeydesign teammeetings canbe defined as thosewhere fundamental decisions that influence or affect theproposed design and its construction in accordancewith the design (and therefore the sustainability impacts andBREEAMperformance), are discussed and made. Thesemeetings would typically include representatives from at leastthe first three of the parties listed below.

Client, owner or operatorContractorDesign teamCost consultantsEnvironmental consultantsProject management consultantsSpecialist subcontractors, e.g. demolition contractorsSpecialist consultants, e.g. heritage specialists, security specialists, ecologists.

Keyproject gatewaysThe definitionof keyproject gateways refers to project delivery phases, including:

Concept designDefinitionDesignBuild and commissionHandover and close outIn-Use.

Key representatives of the project delivery teamKey representatives of the project delivery teammust include as aminimum:

ClientOwnerOperator (where different from the owner)Designer and specialist consultants (if relevant)



Contractor and specialist subcontractors (if relevant).Anobjective of this issue is to reflect the need to consider the input of key representatives of the project delivery teamfrom the earliest practical stage, to ensure smooth and successful delivery of the project's sustainability objectives.Regarding contractor involvement, it ensures their input in terms of formulating sustainable design solutions,commenting or inputting on the practicality and build ability of (one or more) design solutions and their impact onprogramming, cost etc.BREEAMrecognises that for some projects the contractor for theworks might not be appointed at the early stagesof the project and therefore compliancewith criterion2 would not be possible. In these instances, to ensure the aimof the criteria is upheld, criterion2 will bemet if a suitably experienced personwith substantial constructionorcontracting experience in projects similar to the proposed works is involved before appointment of the contractor. Asuitably experienced person could be a contractor appointed as a consultant for [missing words] stage or aconstructionproject manager.

Project Execution PlanA Project Execution Plan is a planproduced in collaborationbetween the client and project delivery team. The ProjectExecution Plan sets out the processes and protocols to be used to develop the design. It is sometimes referred to asa 'Project Quality Plan'.

Sustainability championsSustainability champions will bemembers of a relevant professional institution, wheremembership (or the level ofmembership) requires a peer reviewprocess .Sustainability champions will have the authority to make changes (or propose changes for approval)where targetsare not being met and will understand what is required at keyproject gateways (see Keyproject gateways). Theywillbe trained to provide advice to the project delivery team to facilitate timely and successful target setting, scheduling,prioritisation and monitoring of compliance relating to the design and constructionof the asset. Theymaybedifferent individuals throughout the project, i.e. the sustainability championat the design stagemaybe different fromthe sustainability championat the construction stage.Where projects require a specific 'signoff' procedure, or the sustainability champion is required to obtain approvalfor changes from a variety of individuals or teams, the assessor should ensure that proposals from the sustainabilitychampionare seriously considered as part of the process.

Team communication strategyThe team communication strategy is a strategy that sets out when the project teamwillmeet, how theywillcommunicate effectively and the protocols for issuing informationbetween the various parties, both informally andat information exchanges.

Other information

None.



ID 03 Handover and aftercare

Strategic creditsavailable

Project detail creditsavailable

Minimum standards

1 4 One credit - criteria 2 – 4 (Commissioning testing schedule andresponsibilities) - Very goodOne credit - criteria 5 – 6 (Handover) - Very goodOne credit - criteria 8 – 9 (Post operation evaluation) -Outstanding

Aim

To provide post-handover aftercare to the owner/operator during the first year of operation to ensure the asset operatesand adapts in accordancewith the design intent and operational demands.



One credit - Handover and aftercare strategy

1 The handover and aftercare requirements are agreed between the client, owner/operator and project delivery team atthe strategy stage and include:1.a Estimated cost and resources1.b Time scales1.c Training and services to be provided1.d Documentation to be provided.



Commissioning and testing schedule (1 credit)Handover (1 credit)Aftercare support (1 credit)Post operation evaluation (1 credit)

The following is required to demonstrate compliance.

One credit - Commissioning and testing schedule

2 The contractor accounts for the commissioning and testing programme, responsibilities and criteria within their budgetand mainprogrammeof works, allowing for the required time to complete all commissioning and testing activitiesbefore handover.

3 There is a schedule of commissioning and testing that identifies and includes a suitable timescale for commissioning andrecommissioning of all complex and non-complexMEICA (refer to Relevant definitions), drainage services and controlsystems.


ID 03 Handover and aftercare Integrated design

4 Anappropriate project teammember is appointed to monitor and programmepre-commissioning, commissioning,testing, and where necessary, recommissioning activities onbehalf of the client.

One credit - Handover

5 Handover documentation is prepared by the contractor and agreed or reviewed by the owner/operators beforehandover. This documentation contains the following as aminimum, either as part of the operation and maintenance(O&M)manual or within an integrated data management system (refer to ID 02 Project team collaboration criterion17 ):5.a The asset's performance requirements (refer to ST 04 Owner operator requirements)5.b The available aftercare provision and aftercare teammain contacts, including anypost operational or phased

commissioning and post operational evaluation5.c Introduction to, and demonstrationof, installed systems and key features, particularly automated systems,

controls and their interfaces5.d Service life plan and maintenance requirements, including anymaintenance contracts and regimes in place5.e Introduction to other relevant documentation, e.g. designdata, technical guides,maintenance strategy,

commissioning records, log book,materials register etc.

6 Training is provided to the owner/operator before the handover. As aminimum this includes the contents of thedocumentationdescribed in criterion5 .

One credit - Aftercare support

7 There is (or will be) operational infrastructure and resources in place to provide aftercare support to theowner/operator, which includes the following as aminimum:7.a Ameeting scheduled to occur between the aftercare team or individual and the owner/operator (before

operation) to:7.a.i Introduce the owner/operator to the aftercare support available, including training schedule and

content7.a.ii Present key information about the asset including the design intent and how to operate and maintain

it as efficiently and effectively as possible.7.b Training in operating and maintaining the asset as appropriate7.c Initial aftercare support provision as agreed with the client or employer at the start of the contract7.d Longer term aftercare support provision for owner/operators for at least the first 12 months from operation,

e.g. a helpline, nominated individual or other appropriate system.

One credit - Post Operation Evaluation (POE)

8 The client, owner or operator makes a commitment to carry out a post operation evaluation (POE) exercise one yearafter the asset becomes operational. This is done to gain in-use performance feedback from operators and users toinform operational processes, including recommissioning activities, and maintain or improve productivity, health, safetyand comfort. The POE is carried out by an independent party and needs to cover:8.a A reviewof the design intent and constructionprocess (reviewof design, procurement, construction and

handover processes).8.b Feedback from awide range of stakeholders including operators, users and impacted community (where

relevant) on the design and operating conditions covering:8.b.i Comfort conditions (light, noise, temperature, air qualitywhere relevant)8.b.ii Control, operation and maintenance8.b.iii Facilities and amenities (where present)8.b.iv Access and layout8.b.v Other relevant issues.

8.c Sustainability performance (energy, carbon, water consumption, performance of any sustainable features ortechnologies, e.g. materials, renewable energy etc.).

9 The client or owner/operator makes a commitment to carry out the appropriate disseminationof informationon theasset's post operationperformance (refer to CN1 and CN2). This is done to share good practice and lessons learnt andinform changes in user behaviour, asset operational processes and procedures, and system controls.




None.

Compliance notes


CN1 Appropriatedisseminationofpost operationevaluationinformation

Appropriate dissemination includes communication to immediate stakeholders such asowner, operators and also external communication.Inmost cases, this will be the production and publicationof a case study throughone ofthe following means:

Client's or owner/operator's ownwebsite, publicly available literature or pressreleaseIndustry, sector, government or local authority sponsored website orinformationportals.

Where there is a demonstrably justifiable reasonwhypublic dissemination is notpossible, for example, the information is commercially or security sensitive, compliancecanbe demonstrated by a commitment to produce and disseminate the relevantinformation at anorganisational level or to appropriate internal or externalstakeholders. Alternatively, the sensitive parts of the relevant information fordissemination canbe omitted from the publication.

CN2 Relevantinformation fordissemination

The information for dissemination includes the following about the asset, itsconstruction and performance:1. A basic descriptionof the project and asset2. BREEAMrating and score3. Any key innovative and low impact features or measures4. Project cost5. Facilities available for community use (where relevant)6. Any steps takenduring the constructionprocess to reduce environmental

impacts, i.e. innovative constructionmanagement techniques7. Predicted and actual carbondioxide emissions8. Outcomes of the post occupancy evaluation study, to share lessons learnt from

the project including:a. Feedback from the owner/operator, community or bothb. Energy and water consumption including renewable energygeneration, level

of rainwater or greywater provision, as applicablec. Wasteminimisation.

Methodology

None.


ID 03 Handover and aftercare Integrated design

Evidence





Independent third partyWith respect to using an 'independent third party', the client or project delivery team need to demonstrate thatEITHER:1. Theyhave used a third party independent of the design and constructionprocess to conduct the necessary Post

Operation Evaluation exercise using a compliant method OR;2. If the POE is to be carried out by anorganisation involved with the asset designor construction, then theymust

present the assessor with the evidence that demonstrates the independence of the POEprocess from the designand constructionprocess. BREEAMhas not attempted to definewhat form this exercisemust take, the onus is onthe project team or relevant individual to clearly demonstrate to the BREEAMAssessor a credible level ofindependence.

MEICAMechanical, electrical, instrumentation, control and automation services.

Other information

None.



ID 04 Ecosystem services


1 1 None

Aim

To identify and protect the ecosystem services affected by the project.



One credit - Strategic ecosystem services assessment

1 A strategic ecosystem services assessment is undertaken (CN1) for the selected option for the project. This includes:1.a Identifying the boundary of the area under consideration (refer to CN2) and cross boundary issues, e.g. services

produced in the study area fromwhichothers beyond it might benefit or suffer and also services producedoutside the study area that might cause benefit or suffering to thosewithin the study area, e.g. flooding, airquality

1.b Identifying themainor 'priority' ecosystems and ecosystem services present including those produced andconsumed outside of the boundary but affected by the project (refer to CN3)

1.c Identifying the connections (or flows) and interactions betweenecosystem services1.d Identifying the relative importance of these services, this might be informed by consultationwith key

stakeholders or specialist advice and could be presented using anappropriateweighting system (refer to Table10).

2 The likely impacts of the selected solutionon the priority ecosystem services are identified and the associated marginalchanges compared with the existing baseline situation (refer to CN4). This is considered over the predicted life of theproject.

3 The assessment identifies measures to reduce negativemarginal changes and increase positivemarginal changes.

4 The identified ecosystem services are included as part of the ‘Further consultation’ process detailed in ST 02 Consultationand engagement. The final strategic ecosystem services assessment is influenced by the feedback from the localcommunity.

5 The ecosystem assessment report includes a detailed descriptionof the process, method and findings of theassessment, in relation to the options considered and the ecosystem services detailed in Table 11 The report alsoincludes a non-technical executive summary.


One credit - Detailed ecosystem services assessment

6 The process required within the strategic stage assessment (criteria 1 – 5 ) is undertakenwith the updated projectdesign (refer to CN5).

7 Measures are implemented to mitigate identified negativemarginal changes and increase positivemarginal changes.


ID 04 Ecosystem services Integrated design


Table 10: 'Likelihood of impact' scoring system

Score Assessment of likely impact

++ Potential significant positive impact

+ Potential positive effect

0 Negligible effect

- Potential negative effect

– Potential significant negative effect

? Gaps in evidence or contention



Table 11:TheMillennium EcosystemAssessment classificationof ecosystem services

Type of ecosystem service

Provisioning:

FreshwaterFood (e.g. crops, fish, fruit)Fibre and fuel (e.g. timber, wool)Genetic resources (used for crop or stickbreeding and biotechnology)Biochemicals, naturalmedicines, pharmaceuticalsOrnamental resources (e.g. shells, flowers).

Regulatory action:

Air quality regulationClimate regulation (local temperature, precipitation, greenhouse gas, sequestration)Water regulation (timing and scale of run-off, flooding)Natural hazard regulation (e.g. storm protection)Pest regulationDisease regulationErosion regulationWater purification and waste treatmentPollination.

Cultural services:

Cultural heritageRecreation and tourismAesthetic valueSpiritual and religious valueInspirationof art, folklore, architecture etc.Social relations (e.g. fishing, grazing, cropping communities).

Supporting services:

Soil formationPrimary productionNutrient cyclingWater recyclingPhotosynthesis (productionof atmospheric oxygen)Provisionof habitat.


ID 04 Ecosystem services Integrated design

Compliance notes


CN1 Ecosystem servicesassessment

The ecosystem services assessment must:1. Take anecosystem services approach to assessing impacts2. Be informed by national ecosystem assessment data3. Use appropriate tools aligning with national best practice guidance (refer to

Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL))4. Be carried out by a number of professionals with expertise in someof the priority

ecosystem services being assessed, e.g. biodiversity, water quality etc. Theprofessionals seekadvice from other experts and members of the project teamfor technical or specialist areas that are highlighted as being relevant through theecosystem services assessment process. This specialist consultation is evidencedin the assessment document.

Note: Theremaybe crossover herewith the options appraisal exercise.

CN2 Project boundary This is decided by the project delivery team, client and owner/operator. It should takeinto account the objectives and drivers for the project. Some iterationof boundariesmaybe necessary as the project progresses.

CN3 Ecosystem services The identification considers all ecosystem services identified, or classified in Table 11.

CN4 Strategic stageassessment of'marginal' changes

At this stage the assessment is expected to be rapid, accounting for the likely rangeand magnitude of impacts, and not considered indetail.An appropriate 'likelihood of impact' scoring system could be used (refer to Table 10)to inform decision-making or act as an initial filter to identifywhere further informationis needed. It maybe necessary to undertakemore detailed studies for contentious oruncertain development proposals.As a guide, where the risks are low, all that is necessary is anoverviewof the likely rangeand magnitude of the impacts.However, if the risks are high, a more detailed evaluationmaybe necessary to quantifyimpacts (noting that this does not always refer to anexact value but to illustrate themagnitude and extent of the impact) and value predicted changes.The assessment must include defensible evidence for identified likely impacts and aclarificationof uncertainties.

CN5 Detailedassessment of themarginal changes

At this stage the same approach to ecosystem services assessment is undertakenasfor the strategic stage criteria but using themore detailed information for the project.It may also be necessary to providemore detail for contentious or uncertain issues.

Methodology

None.



Evidence



1 – 5 Ecosystem services assessment N/A N/A



Marginal changesMarginal changes recognise the difference betweena 'baseline' state and a 'post intervention' state. In ecosystemservices assessments these are considered more robust thanpredicted actual values due to the large numbers ofuncertainties and assumptions used in this type of study.When considering marginal changes these uncertainties areapplied to both the 'baseline' and the 'outcome' status which to a certain extent cancels them out.

Priority serviceThis canbe identified where one of the following are true:

The project affects the ability of others to benefit from the ecosystem service AND it is important to theirlivelihoods, health, safety or culture AND there are no viable alternatives to this ecosystem serviceThe ecosystem service could change inways that affect operational performance of the project AND thereare no viable alternatives to this ecosystem service.

Other information

For more information see:

Institutionof Environmental Sciences. Ecosystem services:How to do one inpractice [Internet]. InstitutionofEnvironmental Sciences;2013 [cited 2015 Oct 10]. Available from:https://www.the-ies.org/sites/default/files/reports/ecosystem_services.pdfTheWorld Resources Institute (WRI) publicationweaving Ecosystem Services into Impact Assessmentwww.wri.org/publication/weaving-ecosystem-services-into-impact-assessmentTheMillennium EcosystemAssessment www.millenniumassessment.org/en/index.html


http://www.wri.org/publication/weaving-ecosystem-services-into-impact-assessment

http://www.millenniumassessment.org/en/index.html

ID 05 Whole life costing Integrated design

ID 05 Whole life costing


2 1 None

Aim

To encouragewhole life thinking and design and construction choices based on the life of the asset.


This stage of the issue is split into two parts:

Service life planning (1 credit)Whole life cost (1 credit)


One credit - Service life planning

1 A strategic service life plan is developed before the end of the briefing stage in linewith the principles detailed in ISO15686-15 .

2 The following are confirmed with the client, owner/operator and project delivery team and included in the strategicservice life plan:2.a The required design life and estimated service life of the asset (refer to CN1 and CN2)2.b Minimum functional performance criteria for eachelement over the asset's design life2.c Components required to be easily repairable, maintainable, or replaceablewithin the design life of the asset2.d Predicted maintenance and replacement requirements and activities over the life cycle of the asset2.e Howuncertainty in the estimated service lifewill be taken into account as the designof the project continues2.f Whenand how the service life of the project will be reviewed and compared with the estimated service life

identified in the client's brief, to ensure that the predicted service life is adequate throughout the design andconstruction stages

2.g Any significant service life implications that cannot be designed out.

3 The strategic stage service life planprovides assurance that the estimated service life of a newasset on the proposedsite, operated as specified in the designbrief and with appropriatemaintenance and replacement, is at least as long asthe design life.

One credit -Whole life cost (WLC)

4 A strategicwhole life cost assessment is undertaken, based on initial assumptions, in linewith ISO15686-5:20086 andused to compare alternative design and construction solutions for the project.

5 Anelemental life cycle cost (LCC) analysis has been carried out at Process Stage 2 (equivalent to concept design),together with anydesignoption appraisals in linewith ISO15686-5:2008 (refer to CN3).

6 The LCC analysis shows:6.a Anoutline LCC plan for the project based on the asset's basic structure, appraising a range of options and

based onmultiple cash flowscenarios, e.g. 20, 30, 60, 100+ years6.b The structure and servicing strategy for the project outlining services component options over a 15-year period,

in the form of an 'elemental LCC Plan'.



7 The following are included in thewhole life cost plan (WLC), (refer to CN4):7.a Information and results from the elemental LCC7.b Income7.c Non-construction costs7.d Externalities (as defined in ISO15686-5:2008 relevant to the project)7.e A predicted singleWLC cash flowoutput7.f Whenand how theWLCof the project will be updated and compared with the requirements of the client's brief,

to ensure that critical value is maximised throughout the design and construction stages.

8 Demonstrate, using appropriate examples provided by the design team, how the elemental level LCC planhas beenused to influence the structure and services of the design and final asset to minimise life cycle costs and maximise criticalvalue.


One credit - Component level LCC Plan

9 A component level LCC planhas beendeveloped by the end of Process Stage 4 (equivalent to technical design) in linewith ISO15686-5:2008 and includes the following component types (where present):9.a Structural, e.g. replacement or maintenance of track, wind turbine blades, road surface9.b Services, e.g. ventilation systems, drainage, cabling, pumps9.c External spaces, e.g. alternative hard landscaping.

10 The results are fed back to the client to inform thewhole life cost (WLC) plan for the asset.

11 Demonstrate, using appropriate examples provided by the design team, how the component level LCC planhas beenused to influence the structure, services and external spaces of the design and final asset (where relevant) to minimise lifecycle costs and maximise critical value.


None.



Compliance notes


CN1 Service life of theasset

The service life of the asset considers or takes account of:

Service lives of the individual elements and critical components that arerequired within the asset to provide anestimate for thewhole asset, includinghow to:

Minimise obsolescence (including material scarcity)Adapt the asset for future useOptimise reuse at demolition.

Performance expectations of each component within the project conditionsincluding:

Likely failuremodesCauses of loss of serviceabilityRiskof premature failure.

CN2 Predicted estimatesand projections

Projections are based ondata whichhave beenassessed for robustness and reliability,and records of the data sources are kept. Data can come from:

Data produced using the procedures within ISO15686-2Data produced using the procedures within ISO15686-2 adjusted using theprocedures in ISO15686-8Documented service life data as described in ISO15686-7.

CN3 Elemental life cyclecost

For the elemental life cycle cost assessment, only key elements need to be consideredand thesewill vary from project to project. Guidancewithin ISO15686-5:2008 shouldbe followed to establish the key elements for the project.Informationmaybe amix of typical benchmarkcosts for key elements, comparativecost modelling or approximate estimates and must be reported as:

Cost per unit of process or function.

Examples of this format may include:

Cost per passenger per mile travelled (road)Cost per litre of sewage treated (sewage treatment works)Cost per megawatt (MW)of energygenerated (power station).

CN4 Whole life costpredictions

Evaluations are based ona fixed 'life'period that takes account of major costconsequences of the initial choice or contractual responsibilities for fundingmaintenance, e.g. 40 years for road pavements. It is proposed that for the elementallife cycle cost assessment, only significant elements need to be considered.

CN5 Appropriateexamples(see criteria 8 and11 )

The options selected to demonstrate how life cycle costs have beenminimised andcritical valuemaximised must be appropriate to its relative impact onproject costs,futuremaintenance burdenand size (volume or area).



Methodology

None.

Evidence



1-3 Service life plan N/A N/A

4 Strategicwhole life costassessment

N/A N/A

5-6 Elemental life cycle cost analysis N/A N/A

9 N/A Component level life cycle costplan

N/A

10 N/A Updated whole life cost plan N/A



Life cycle cost (LCC)The cost of an asset, or its parts throughout its life cycle, while fulfilling the performance requirements; amethodology for systematic economic evaluationof life cycle costs over a period of analysis, as defined in the agreedscope.

Elemental level LCC planThis is commonly used for developing solutions at project level during option appraisals. Costs are normally atelemental level on the entire asset. Informationmaybe amix of typical benchmarkcosts for key elements,comparative cost modelling or approximate estimates (refer to CN3).

Component level LCC planA component level LCC plan is commonly used for cost planning specification choices of systems, elements orcomponent levels during designdevelopment. Component level LCC appraisal for service life planning at thefeasibility stage requires the environment of the asset and other local conditions to be identified, and thefundamental requirements to bemet in planning the service life of the building. Decisions should bemade on:

The likely design life of the asset (rather than the contractual design life)Minimum functional performance criteria for each component over the asset's design lifeComponents that must be repairable, maintainable or replaceablewithin the design life of the building.

Service life



This is the service life that an asset of an assembled system (part of works)would be expected to have in a set ofspecific in-use conditions, determined from reference service life data after taking into account anydifferences fromthe reference and in-use conditions (adapted from ISO15686-1:2011).

Other information

When to undertake life cycle costing

Life cycle costing is relevant throughout the asset's life cycle, in particular during the project planning, design and constructionand also during the in-use phases.

Useful references

Achieving Whole Life Value in Infrastructure and Buildings, BR476, 2005, BRE.


ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts Integrated design

ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts


2 0 None.

Aim

To establish thewhole life environmental impacts of the infrastructure asset over its lifetime.



Option1: screening carbon footprint (one credit)Option2: screening life cycle assessment (two credits)


Option 1 - One credit - Screening carbon footprint

1 A screening carbon footprint is completed before finalising the concept by a suitably qualified carbonpractitioner (referto Relevant definitions) to establish the total carbonequivalent impact associated with the following life cycle stages ofthe asset (as shown in Figure 4 ):1.a Extraction and manufacturing of materials (Modules A1 – A3)1.b Transport of materials from gate to site (Module A4)1.c Constructionprocesses and installation (Module A5) including use of plant and machinery, site accommodation

and facilities and transport and disposal of waste (site to grave)1.d Operational processes (Module B1 and B6) as a result of the infrastructure design (refer to Relevant definitions)1.e Maintenance, repair, replacement and refurbishment (Modules B2-B5)1.f End of life (Modules C1-C4)1.g Benefits and loads beyond the system boundary (Module D), such as land use changes (refer to Relevant

definitions) included if suitable scenarios canbe developed and shown to be relevant and justified (i.e. optionalmodule).

Module D provides the net benefits relating to exported energy and secondarymaterials, secondary fuels or secondaryproducts resulting from reuse, recycling and energy recovery that take place beyond the system boundary.

2 The screening identifies the significant sources of emissions over the expected lifetime of the asset (refer to CN1) andtotal carbonequivalent emissions or GlobalWarming Potential (kgCO

2e) are reported. Please refer to theMethodology

section for details of how this should be calculated.

3 Recommendations aremade to the project team to inform future designdecisions and include the goal and scope of afurther assessment.

4 The suitably qualified carbonpractitioner uses standards and sources of data in accordancewith Table 12 anddocuments the assessment process with all decisions justified (refer to CN2).

5 Total carbonequivalent emissions of the asset are reported within the BREEAMInfrastructureOnline tool. Results shall bepresented separately for all the building life cycle stages and for module D (if reported).



Option 2 - Two credits - Screening life cycle assessment (LCA)

6 A screening LCA is completed before finalising the concept designby a suitably qualified LCA practitioner (refer toRelevant definitions) to establish the environmental impact associated with the life cycle stages given in criterion1 of theasset in linewith the principles set out in EN 15978 and the EeBGuidance document (refer to CN3, , CN4 and Otherinformation).

7 The screening identifies significant sources of the following indicators over the expected lifetime of the asset (refer toCN1) and these are reported:7.a Total carbonequivalent emissions and GlobalWarming Potential (kgCO

2e)

7.b Net use of freshwater (m3)7.c Hazardous waste disposed (kg)7.d Non-hazardous waste disposed (kg).

8 Recommendations aremade to the project team to inform future designdecisions and include the goal and scope ofany further assessment.

9 The suitably qualified LCA practitioner sources data in linewith the principles set out in EN 15978 and the EeBGuide anddocuments the assessment process with all decisions justified.

10 The results of the screening LCA are reported in the BREEAMInfrastructureOnline Tool for all indicators listed in criterion7. Results shall be presented separately for all the building life cycle stages and for module D as detailed in EN 15978 (ifreported).


None.


Table 12: Standards and data used to inform the carbon footprint (criterion4 only)

Activities Approved standards Suggested data sources

Embodied carbonof products - cradle-to-gate

EN 15978:20117

ORISO14064-2:20068

ORGHGProtocol9

One standard should beselected.

Sourced as detailed in EN 15804(EPDs) and EN15978 or ISO21930 (outside EUonly).

Transport of constructionproducts to site

Construction activities on site (plant andmachinery used on site & staffaccommodation)

Transport and disposal of waste from thesite

Operational carbonand energy

Land use change impact Land Use, Land Use Change andForestry (LULUCFGHG) Inventory

LULUCFGHG Inventory data




Where a standard or data source not listed above is proposed by the suitably qualified carbonor LCA practitioner, BREGlobal should be contacted to confirm it canbe used as a compliant standard or data source.

Compliance notes


CN1 Expected lifetime ofthe asset

The impacts should bemeasured over the expected lifetime of the asset as indicated inthe design specification. If the lifetime is not specified then theworking lifetimesdetailed in national best practice standards for the asset type should be used (refer toAppendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).

CN2 Cut-off criteria forthe screeningcarbon footprint

Where the carbonequivalent impact of an activity is estimated to account for no morethan1%of the total impact of that module, that activitymaybe omitted from theassessment.The proportionof total neglected activities within amodule, e.g. per module A1-A3,A4-A5, B1-B5, B6-B7, C1-4 and module D (where calculated) should not exceed 5%ofthe total impact within that module.Although this rule should be upheld where possible it is appreciated that at thescreening stage not all details of the project will be known. The practitioner canexceedthis cut-off criteria where the corresponding impact canbe deemed negligible andjustified.This note cannot be applied in order to hide data. Any applicationof the cut-off criteriashould be documented.Note: This compliance note is not relevant to projects undergoing the screening LCA(criteria 6 – 10 ) - these projects should refer to EN 15978 and the EeBGuidanceDocument for details of how to apply cut off criteria (refer to CN3).

CN3 Use of EN 15978and the EeBGuidancedocument

EN 15978 and the EeBGuidance document (refer to Other information) have bothbeenwrittenwith a focus onbuildings, however the principles and rules within these areequally applicable to infrastructure projects.Dependent on the infrastructure type, the suitably qualified LCA practitioner canmodify the requirements of these documents where justified as necessary andappropriate, and also record the rationale for these decisions.For projects outside of the EuropeanUnion refer to CN4

CN4 Assets outside ofthe EuropeanUnion

The standards EN 15978 and EeBGuidance documents are currently regarded as bestpractice globallywith respect to the sustainability of constructionworks, life cycleassessments and environmental product declarations.For the purposes of a BREEAMInfrastructure assessment BREGlobal requires that theprinciples of EN 15978 and EeBGuidance are followed inorder to provide a consistentapproach to life cycle assessment. The suitably qualified LCA practitioner canmodifythe requirements of these documents further to account for regional variations ifnecessary for the assessment.If an alternative national best practice standard for life cycle assessment ofinfrastructure projects is commonly used, BREGlobal should be contacted to confirmwhether these standards canbe used inplace of EN 15978 and the EeBGuidancedocument.



Methodology

Coverage of total carbon equivalent (kgCO2e) emissions for the screening carbon footprint

Total carbonequivalent (kgCO2e) emissions should be reported for each life cycle stage shown in Figure 4 over the expected

lifetime of the asset. This includes:

Embodied carbon equivalent from construction products - Modules A1-A3

This includes whole life energy and carbon impacts from constructionproducts - cradle-to-gate. The impact of materials mustbe calculated in accordancewith EN 15804 and consider all products within the asset (refer to Relevant definitions and CN2cut-off criteria).

Total carbon equivalent from transport of construction products from gate to site - Module A4

This includes direct (Scope 1) and indirect (Scope 2) emissions from energyused to transport constructionproducts fromsupplier to construction site. The total volume of constructionproducts and the distance they are transported is established.Anappropriate emission factor for themode of transport is used to calculate the carbonequivalent emissions.

Total carbon equivalent from construction and demolition activities on site (plant andmachinery used onsite & staff accommodation) - Module A5, B1-B5 & C1 (as relevant to the life cycle stage)

This includes direct (Scope 1) and indirect (Scope 2) emissions from energyused within the site boundary for on-siteconstruction,maintenance and disposal of the asset. The amount of carbonarising from on-site energy use is determined bythe plant and equipment used, its output rating, its efficiency, the type of fuel it uses and the hours of use.

On-site generationplant should not be included inmain list of equipment. Instead the average operational efficiencyof thegenerationplant and the average emission factor for the fuels is needed. These values are used to calculate the averagecarbonemission factor for plant and equipment whichuse electricity generated on site.

Total carbon equivalent from transport and disposal of waste from site - Module A5, B1-B5 & C2-C4(continued)

This includes direct (Scope 1) and indirect (Scope 2) emissions from energyused to transport waste products from the site tothe disposal site plus any energy and carbonarising after disposal for wastewhich is not reused or recycled. This is calculatedbased on the quantity of waste removed from site, the type of waste and the disposal option. UK emission factors forenvironmental company reporting, or similar, canbe used.

Total carbon equivalent from operation of the asset - Module B6

This includes direct (Scope 1) and indirect (Scope 2) emissions arising from operationof the asset, including commissioningand standbyemissions, repair, maintenance and replacement.

Where anasset has no operational energy consumption associated with the planned or operated asset, then this categorycanbe excluded from the assessment.

Total carbon equivalent from land use change - aModule D consideration

Land use change as a result of the construction and operationof the infrastructure asset should be assessed to determinewhether carbonequivalent savings canbe demonstrated. Considerationof land use change is restricted to the constructionsite during construction and demolition and over the expected operational life of the asset (refer to CN1).

The actual operational land use is determined based on the following land use categories above over the lifetime of the asset:

1. Forest land2. Crop land3. Grassland4. Wetlands



5. Settlements6. Other land.

The carbonequivalent impacts arising from land use changes should be quantified based onaverage values derived from themost recent GHG Inventory data for the UK.

Refer to LUE07 Land use changes for project detail requirements.

Evidence


ALL One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAMevidential requirements sectioncanbe used to demonstrate compliancewith these criteria.

1 – 4 Carbon footprint report includingrecommendations and justifications from thesuitably qualified LCA practitioner

N/A N/A

6 – 9 LCA report including recommendations andjustifications from the suitably qualified LCApractitioner

N/A N/A



Direct (Scope 1) and indirect (Scope 2) emissionsTheGHGProtocol Corporate Standard10 classifies a company's GHGemissions into three 'scopes'. Scope 1emissions are direct emissions from owned or controlled sources, e.g. emissions from combustion in owned orcontrolled boilers, furnaces, vehicles, etc. Scope 2 emissions are indirect or out-of-scope emissions from thegenerationof purchased energy, e.g. electricity, imported heat that is purchased. Scope 3 emissions are all indirectemissions that occur in the value chain of the reporting company, including bothupstream and downstreamemissions.

Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs)ISO14025:200611 defines anenvironmental label or environmental declaration as a claimwhich indicates theenvironmental aspects of a product or service. ISO14020:2012 goes on to state that environmental labels anddeclarations provide information about a product or service concerning its overall environmental character, a specificenvironmental aspect, or any number of aspects. BREare anexample of an EPD provider via the BREEnvironmentalProfiles Schemewhich is being replaced by the newEN15804 compliant BREEPD Verification scheme.

Independently verified third party Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs)For this BREEAMissue, the independently verified third party EPDs can cover:

Partial life cycle (cradle-to-gate or cradle-to-gatewithoptions*)ORWhole life cycle (cradle-to-grave)

*Partial life cycle EPD can cover:



The product stage only: such an EPD covers rawmaterial supply, transport, manufacturing and associatedprocesses; this EPD is said to be "cradle to gate"The product stage and selected further life cycle stages: such an EPD is said to be "cradle-to-gatewithoptions".

In both cases, the EPDmust be produced in accordancewith the requirements within EN 15804 , ISO21930 or the ISO14020 series, particularly ISO14025 and ISO14040 and 14044 (life cycle assessment).

Land use changeChanges in energy and carbonarising from land use changewithin the site boundary over the life cycle of the asset.Change in land use canhave very significant carbon impact for some infrastructure projects, in particular thosewhichinvolve large-scale removal or planting of trees. These changes canhave a significant effect on the total carbonimpact of the project over its lifetime,whereby land use changes can result in positive and negative carbon impacts.

Operational processes as a result of the infrastructure designFor the purpose of BREEAMInfrastructure, the impact of operational processes should be considered inorder toinvestigate potential savings which are attributed to the designof the asset itself rather than to expect savings to bemade due to theway inwhich the asset is operated. For example, consideration should be given to savings fromsmoother road surfaces and more gradually curved corners leading to road traffic running more efficiently; gravitydrainagewithin a pipeline leading to a reduced pumping capacity, etc.

Suitably qualified carbonpractitionerAn individualwho canmeet the following requirements canbe deemed 'suitably qualified' for the purpose of aBREEAMassessment:1. Has aminimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Suchexperiencemust clearly

demonstrate a practical understanding of LCA and its methodology. This includes familiarity and use of ISO14040 and ISO14044 and use of carbon footprinting tools or other carbon life cycle assessment methodologies

2. Has experience in undertaking assessments of the carbonand energy impact (or life cycle impacts for the suitablyqualified LCA practitioner - see below)of constructionprojects

3. Candemonstrate that theydo not have a vested interest in the outcomeof the infrastructure project and shouldnot be professionally connected with any energy company, lowor zero carbon technologyor manufacturer.

Suitably qualified LCA practitionerAn individualwho canmeet the following requirements canbe deemed 'suitably qualified' for the purpose of aBREEAMassessment:1. Meets the requirements 1-3 specified for a suitably qualified carbonpractitioner PLUS2. Their knowledge and experience includes preparationof Type III environmental declarations, including familiarity

and use of ISO14025 and ISO21930.3. Their knowledge and experience includes applicationof Type III environmental declarations in the construction

context, specifically awareness of EN 15978:2011 and EN15804:2012+A1:2013. (Refer to CN4 above forprojects outside of the EU.)

Total carbonequivalent (kgCO2e)

Carbon should be reported for emissions including carbondioxide (CO2), methane (CH

4), nitrous oxide (N

2O),

hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs), perfluorocarbons (PFCs) and sulfur hexafluoride (SF6)measured as CO

2e to reflect the

relative globalwarming potential of these gases.

Other information

Purpose and completeness of a screening carbon footprint or life cycle assessment

A screening carbon footprint or LCA study serves as an initial overviewof the environmental impacts of an asset at an earlydesign stage.With a screening carbon footprint or LCA it is not possible to retrieve detailed results on the environmentalperformance of the asset, however this type of study is designed to yield anestimate of the environmental performance,which canbe helpful in the early stages of a project to identify environmental hotspots that would require an additional, in-depth assessment.



A screening studywould typically focus on themain contributors to the system under assessment, including (but not limitedto) the input materials, water and energy use, and the transportationof users (if relevant). In carrying out the screening carbonfootprint or LCA care is needed to ensure that omitted products are not significant for the chosenenvironmental indicators.

Carbon footprinting and LCA tools

It is not necessary to use a specific tool to carry out the LCA or carbon footprint, however reputable sources of data should beused as detailed in EN 15978 (Section10 - particularly 10.3 and 10.4) and the EeBGuide. The following sources canbedeemed appropriate for the screening LCA indicators:

1. Total carbonequivalent and GlobalWarming Potential (see Table 12 under 'suggested data sources').2. Net use of freshwater:Water footprint tools canbe used to obtain relevant data. A list of tools canbe found here:

www.waterfootprint.org/waterfootprints3. Combined hazardous and non-hazardous waste disposed:Data canbe taken from resourcemanagement plans or

tools.

SimaPro and GaBi are LCA software packages that also contain data. These are appropriate for suitably qualified carbonorLCA practitioners.

BS EN 15978:2011 and BS EN 15804:2012+A1:2013

BSEN15978 Sustainability of constructionworks —Assessment of environmental performance of buildings —Calculationmethod has beendeveloped for buildings rather than civil engineering works. Currently there is not anequivalent standard forcivil engineering projects and as such the life cycle assessment required within this issue should be carried out in linewith theprinciples set out in EN 15978 as interpreted by a suitably qualified LCA practitioner.

Modules A1 to C4 cover environmental impacts and aspects that are directly linked to processes and operations taking placewithin the system boundary of the asset, whilemodule D provides the net benefits relating to exported energy andsecondarymaterials, secondary fuels or secondary products resulting from reuse, recycling and energy recovery that takeplace beyond the system boundary.

The environmental assessment at the asset (or building) level requires information from products and services to inform theLCA and EN15804 or ISO21930 should be applied to gather this information. EN 15804 or ISO21930 applies equally tocivil engineering projects and building projects.


http://www.waterfootprint.org/?page=files/LinksWaterFootprints

http://www.simapro.co.uk/

http://www.gabi-software.com/uk-ireland/index/


Figure 4 Life cycle stages as defined in EN 15978

EeBGuide Project

EeBGuide's Info Hub provides a wealth of information for LCA in the construction sector.

The guidance provided draws on the ILCD handbookdeveloped by the Institute for Environment (IES) and Sustainability in theEuropeanCommission Joint ResearchCentre (EC JRC) and EN15804 and EN15978 developed by the EuropeanCommitteefor standardisation/Technical Committee 350 – Sustainability of constructionworks (CEN/TC 350). It has been separated intotwo parts:

For products (Part A) andFor buildings (Part B).

Althoughpart B is targeted at buildings the guidancewithin this canbe applied to infrastructure by a suitably qualified LCApractitioner and support a standardised approach to LCA.

For more informationplease visit www.eebguide.eu/ .


http://www.eebguide.eu/

Resilience

Resilience

Category overview


Refer to the country reference sheet in theASWL Res 04 Surfacewater run-off

Summary

This category encourages proactive hazard identification, riskevaluation and riskmanagement for the asset and theinfrastructure systemwithinwhich it sits. The issues also cover business continuity, certificationof products and systems,specific flood mitigationmeasures, climate change adaptation and meeting future needs.


Issue Credits

Res 01 Business continuity Strategic stage – 1Project detail – 0

Implementationof procedures that incorporate resilience into organisations and their assets

Res 02 Riskassessment and mitigation Strategic stage – 4Project detail – 2

Appointing resilience specialistsIdentifying and liaising withdependenciesHazard identificationRiskassessment and evaluationRiskmitigationmeasures and contingencyplanningFlood impact mitigation

Res 03 Designing for future needs Strategic – 1Project detail – 2

Assessing and implementing measures to meet future needs

Res 04 Surfacewater run-off Strategic – 0Project detail – 2

Reducing peak flow rate and volume of surfacewater run-off

Res 05 Durability Strategic – 0Project detail – 2


Resilience BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

Issue Credits

Material durabilityCertificationof products and systems


Res 01 Business continuity Resilience

Res 01 Business continuity


1 0 None

Aim

To encourage anorganisational level approach to resilience and business continuity.


One credit - Business continuity management system

1 The organisation responsible for the asset's future operation (refer to CN1) has an ISO2230112 compliant businesscontinuitymanagement system that is certified by anaccredited third party certificationbody.


None.


None.

Compliance notes


CN1 Organisationresponsible for theasset's futureoperation

This is likely to be the owner or operator of the asset. If the asset owner or operator isnot knownat the strategic assessment stage then it canbe the organisation thatoperates the system that the asset will be part of (for example, the national railwaynetworkoperator in the case of a rail project).

Methodology

None.



Evidence


All



None.

Other information

None.


Res 02 Riskassessment and mitigation Resilience

Res 02 Risk assessment and mitigation


4 2 None

Aim

To evaluate risks the asset is likely to be exposed to over its life and introduce appropriatemeasures and procedures toreduce riskarising from natural and intentional threats and enhance resilience of the asset.



Identifying dependencies (one credit)Project riskassessment (up to three credits)


One credit - Identifying dependencies

1 Models, tools or other formalmethods (refer to CN1) are used to analyse the infrastructure asset and associatedsystems to identify physical, geographical, digital and organisational dependencies (upstream, downstream and inter) ata business and project level.

2 The project team consult relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions) to:2.a Determine incidents that might impact the project site and simultaneously affect anydependencies2.b Share informationwith relevant stakeholders to ensure:

2.b.i Effective system resilience across identified dependencies2.b.ii Standard arrangements for business continuity across affected sectors.

3 Include anyupstream dependencies as part of the standard business continuitymanagement (BCM).

Up to three credits - Project risk assessment

Prerequisite

4 The project team (including the owner/operator) identify the criticality of the infrastructure or asset (e.g. nationally,regionally, locally) and its components.

5 A riskassessment is carried out in linewith ISO3100013 (refer to CN2) using current data (refer to CN3) and Table 13forthe following:5.a Construction5.b Operation.

6 Appropriate consultants (refer to Relevant definitions) are appointed to advise on the following in accordancewith thelevel of risk identified within the riskassessments carried out:6.a Issues relating to flooding and other relevant natural hazards6.b Issues relating to intentional threats.

7 The project delivery team or contractor's brief includes:7.a Minimum regulatory requirements relating to resilience7.b Corporate requirements relating to resilience



7.c Business dependencies that influence the project development process7.d Recommendations made by the appropriate consultants including proposed measures to mitigate the risks

identified.

One credit - Natural hazards and risk evaluation (1)

8 Criteria 4 – 7 are achieved.

9 The riskassessment includes flooding and other relevant natural hazards (refer to CN2) for construction and operationof the asset.

10 This riskassessment for relevant natural hazards follows national best practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).

11 The data used to inform the riskassessment are current and primarily qualitative (refer to CN3).

One credit - Natural hazards and risk evaluation (2)

12 Criteria 4 – 7 are achieved for the construction and operationof the asset and criteria 8 —11 are achieved for theconstruction stage only.

13 Where the riskof flooding or other relevant natural hazards is found to bemedium or high as defined in national bestpractice planning policy or guidance (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)), afurther quantitative assessment of potential hazards and associated risk (refer to CN3) is carried out for the operationofthe asset.

This credit will be scoped out where the riskof flooding or other natural hazards is found to be lowas defined in national bestpractice planning policy or guidance.

One credit - Intentional threats and risk evaluation


15 The riskassessment includes intentional threats including physical (e.g. fire, vandalism) and cybersecurity threats (refer toRelevant definitions).



Updated project riskassessment (prerequisite)Project resilience planning (one credit)Resiliencemeasures (one credit)


Prerequisite - Updated project risk assessment

16 The project riskassessment developed at the strategic assessment stage is updated (or developed in accordancewithstrategic assessment criteria 4 –7 ) and includes:16.a Relevant natural hazards16.b Intentional threats, including cyber and physical security.

One credit - Project resilience planning

17 Criterion16 has beenachieved.

18 A project resilience plan (PRP) is developed (refer to CN4) and includesmeasures to reduce the risks and impacts of thefollowing (where relevant) to within the agreed 'maximum tolerable levels' (CN5):18.a Flooding18.b Other relevant natural hazards18.c Intentional threats, including cyber and physical security.



19 Changes to the designor constructionprocess (refer to CN6) are:19.a Assessed in terms of their impact on resilience19.b Communicated to, and where relevant agreed by, all relevant stakeholders19.c Reflected in the project resilience plan.

20 A contingencyplan (refer to CN7) is developed for any residual risks and impacts (as agreed between the project team,owner/operator and other relevant stakeholders) to ensure the asset can continue to operate or be recovered in atimelymanner.

21 Mitigation and management measures required at the operational stage are included in handover documentation suchas the operation and maintenancemanuals.

One credit - Resiliencemeasures


23 For flooding,measures are implemented to reduce the risks and impacts identified to within the agreed 'maximumtolerable levels' (refer to Step 2 of Table 13) and this includes:23.a A site specific flood riskassessment (FRA) confirming the asset is situated in a flood zone that is defined as

having a lowannual probability of flooding in accordancewith current national best practice (refer to AppendixB - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL) and CN9)OR

23.b A site specific FRA confirming the development is situated in a flood zone that is defined as having amedium orhigh annual probability of flooding in accordancewith current national best practice planning guidance (refer toAppendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL) and CN9) and EITHER23.b.i Critical and vulnerable structures and equipment are at least 600mm above the design flood level of

the flood zone inwhich the assessed development is located OR23.b.ii The final designof the asset and thewider site reflects the recommendations made by anappropriate

consultant in accordancewith a hierarchical riskapproach (refer to Relevant definitions).

24 For other relevant natural hazards,measures are implemented to reduce the risks and impacts identified to within theagreed 'maximum tolerable levels'.

25 For intentional threats, measures are implemented to reduce the risks and impacts identified to within the agreed'maximum tolerable levels'.


Table 13:Approach to riskassessment and mitigation

Stage Requirements

Step 1 Natural hazard identification1. A series of DesignBasis Events (DBEs) are formulated that:

a. Include all relevant natural hazards and sources of flooding (refer to Other information)b. Are informed by consultation and advice from relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions)c. Address highprobability low impact events and lowprobability high impact eventsd. Consider potential hazards over the life of the asset, including the influence of climate change and

expected future needs (refer to CN8).Intentional threat identification2. A series of DesignBasis Threats (DBTs) are formulated that:

a. Are informed by consultation and advice from relevant stakeholdersb. Address highprobability low impact events and lowprobability high impact eventsc. Consider potential intentional threats over the life of the asset, including physical and cybersecurity.



Stage Requirements

Step 2 Riskanalysis and evaluation1. The identified DBEs, DBTs and dependencies are used to determine the risks associated with the asset.2. The project team and owner/operator define the project's tolerable level of riskby:

a. Reviewing the scope of possible hazards including construction and operational phases identifiedthrough theDBEs and DBTs, e.g. flooding, vandalism, theft etc.

b. Rating the severity of impacts resulting from these hazards or threats and a likelihood, i.e. high,medium or low for each scenario or impact

c. Identifying 'maximum tolerable' impact and likelihood criteria (refer to CN9) for the agreed scopeof disruptive events.

3. The identified risks are evaluated against the agreed identified 'maximum tolerable' levels.4. Resilience options are appraised taking into account:

a. Effectiveness in reducing risksb. Proportionality given the risksc. Whole life costs and the service life of the asset including maintenance, replacement, upgrades and

operational costsd. Impacts ondependenciese. The balance between investment in the infrastructure and investment in emergency response and

recovery capabilitiesf. Uncertainties over the life of the asset.

5. Mitigationmeasures that are likely to reduce the risks to within the agreed 'maximum tolerable' levelsare identified.

Compliance notes


CN1 Models, toolsor methodsfor identifyingdependencies

As aminimummodels or tools must:1. Be either independent, peer reviewed or both2. Consider 'one level up'or direct dependencies, i.e. parts of the system that, if

impacted, would have a direct effect on the asset such as the energy supply orcommunication system

3. Be current and up to date.Dependencies can also be identified throughengaging with relevant stakeholders,e.g. througha series of structured workshops.




CN2 Riskassessment

Assessment of risk includes the scale and durationof impact of risks associated withthe following as aminimum:1. Health and safety of operators, users or others2. Commercial or economic losses, e.g. failure to meet contractual obligations3. Risks to reputation, e.g. negativemedia coverage, loss of trust4. Business disruption, e.g. loss of essential services5. Regulatory action, e.g. loss of life, serious injury, environmental damage6. The environment, e.g. damage to the natural environment7. The impacts of climate change.As aminimum flood riskassessment includes:1. The characteristics of the site2. The use and designof the proposed development3. The size and area likely to flood (throughuse of flood maps)4. Depthof water, likely flow rate and path, rate of rise and duration5. Existing flood preventionmeasures - extent, standard and maintenance

regime6. The allowance of freeboard (refer to Relevant definitions)7. Cumulative effects of development, especially the loss of flood storage

capacity8. Cross boundary effects9. Effects of a flood onaccess including by emergency services10. Effects of flood onproposed open spaces including gardens11. The extent to which the development, its materials and construction are

designed to bewater resistant.As aminimum flood riskassessment considers:1. The nature of the hazard - the source2. Theway inwhich the flood water will reach the site - the pathway3. The impact of the flood water - the receptor4. The likelihood that a flood will occur in terms of percentage annual probability,

the depthof flood water across the site, the duration and flowvelocity5. All current and future sources of flooding (refer to Other information section).




CN3 Current androbust data -types andsources

As aminimum data sources should:1. Be from an independent source and have been subject to peer review2. Include national risk registers, where available3. Include sector specific resilience plans , where available4. Include strategic level riskassessments for flooding or other relevant natural

hazards (regional or local level).For security and crime related threats this might include:1. Local police statistics2. National crime statistics3. Insurance claim data4. Corporate expenditure onmaintenance and repair.For relevant natural hazards this must include:1. Qualitative - flood/hazard maps, local information, historical records2. Quantitative - modelling and costed impact assessments, factors for climate

change and specific impacts. For flooding, specific impacts includes fromincreased rainfall and higher sea levels to accurately determine flood depths,duration and flowvelocities at various percentage annual probability, e.g. byusing hydraulic and hydrologicalmodels and digital terrain data.

Factors for climate change should be based on climate projections from a nationalbody (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).Wheremajor investment in long term infrastructure is being considered, results frominternational climatemodelling centres should also be referred to. For example, theresults from the Intergovernmental Panel onClimate Changemodels canbe viewedusing the IPCCData DistributionCentre data visualisation tools.

CN4 Projectresilience plancontent

The scope of the project resilience plan is approved by the owner/operator beforebeing implemented and includes the following:1. The scope of disruptive events agreed with the owner/operator2. Planning and designmeasures used to reduce vulnerabilities of the as built

asset, e.g. increasing asset resilience reliability, redundancy and facilitatingeffective response and recovery

3. Assumptions made regarding the role of operations inmitigating risks, e.g.policy, procedures and available resources

4. Contingencyplans for dealing with residual risks that cannot feasibly bemitigated throughphysical changes to the infrastructure (refer to CN7)

5. Anymeasures required to mitigate risks during infrastructure construction andphased handover.




CN5 Riskmitigationmeasures

These include considerationof the following as aminimum:Riskmitigationmeasures:1. Planning

a. Site selectionor infrastructure routing (linear systems)b. Spatial and land use planningc. Site access and circulationd. Asset orientatione. Topography and landscapingf. Infrastructure planning and site connections.

2. Designa. Networkor system designb. Architectural designc. Urbandesign and landscapingd. Infrastructure designe. Use of appropriate standards, testing and certificationf. Materials selectiong. Technology solutions, e.g. wireless or hard-wired networksh. Innovative design solutions, new technologies and materials that can

reduce the likelihood and impacts of disruptive events.

CN6 Change to thedesignorconstructionprocess

This criterion canbe deemed compliant where changes are considered in terms ofresilience at regular project teammeetings attended by representatives of theproject team including designer, contractor, owner/operator and relevant resilience(or other) specialists. The extent and scope to which this is considered will beproportionate to the changes being made.

CN7 Contingencyplan

The contingencyplan is integrated within the corporate BCMsystem,where present,and includes:1. Critical elements of the asset and measures in place to ensure these continue

to operate as planned2. Features of the asset that are designed to be resilient, inwhat circumstance it

might be breached, predicted impacts and necessary operationalmeasures inthe event of a breach

3. Full plans to enable recovery and repair work to be undertakenas necessary4. Identificationof agreed emergencyprocedures and supply of alternative

services to customers5. Engagement with emergency services as necessary.

CN8 Allowance forclimatechange

Anallowance for climate change should bemade in accordancewith current bestpractice and planning policy. This should be applied to all identified natural hazardsincluding both the before and after development flood risk.Climate change allowances will be dependent on the site's context and location.Please refer to theOther information sectionof this issue for further details onhowto account for climate change.

CN9 Likelihoodrating

Whendetermining the project's 'tolerable' risk level, likelihood ratings are required,this could be high,medium or lowwhere eachof these is defined appropriately forthe impact, e.g. flooding maybe defined in terms of a certain probability of flooding.




CN10 Third partydefences

There aremanydefences, owned by third parties, whichdue to their location act as aflood defence bydefault, e.g. motorway, railway embankments, walls etc. It canbeassumed that suchembankments will remain in place for the lifetime of thedevelopment, unless the assessor or project team have reason to believe otherwise.For walls, assurancemust be sought that thewall is likely to remain for the design lifeof the asset affected.

CN11 Downgradeflood riskdueto flooddefences

A site's flood riskmaybe downgraded to a lower flood risk category because offlood defence installations. This mayoccur in the following circumstances:

Where permanent new flood defences are planned (mentioned in formalplanning documents withbudgets allocated) to minimise the riskofflooding to the site and its localityWhere the development is located ona site benefiting from existingmaintained flood defences.

In these circumstances, flood riskwill be downgraded frommedium to low floodrisk, as defined inbest practice and planning policy guidelines, and the relevantrequirements canbe deemed compliant. All of the following evidencewill beneeded to demonstrate compliance:

Confirmation from a national flood defence agency that the flood risk levelfor the sitewill be reduced to a low flood riskConfirmation from the flood defence agency that there are plans tomaintain the defences for the lifetime of the asset (for private flooddefences, evidencemust be provided that there is a contractual agreementto cover themaintenance of the defences for the lifetime of the asset)The flood riskassessment clearly demonstrates that the residual risks havebeen identified and will bemanaged appropriately.

CN12 Areas thathistoricallyhave a lowflood risk

Developments in areas that historically have a low riskof flooding (e.g. desertregions), may still experience a riskof infrequent flash flooding. In these instances theriskassessment should still consider flooding but the level of detail required willreduce. For example, an acceptable assessment of flood risk could be a brief reportcarried out by the design team confirming the riskof flooding from all sources offlooding, including informationobtained from the local authority or statutory body,site investigation, and local knowledge.

CN13 Nationalsecurity andconfidentialityrequirements

Informationproduced for assessment of this issuemaybe linked to national securityand confidentiality requirements.Where this is the case, the assessor should use thesecure BREEAMinbox ([email protected]) to submit evidence in relation toassessment of this issue. Only staff with security clearance to Security Check (SC) levelwill be able to access this information for theQualityAssurance (QA)process.

Methodology

None.


mailto:[email protected]?subject=National security and confidentiality requirements


Evidence

Ref Strategy stage Interim design stage Final post-constructionstage

All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAMevidential requirementssection canbe used to demonstrate compliancewith these criteria.

5 , 8 – 15 Riskassessment Updated riskassessment As Interim design stage

18 N/A Project resilience plan Refer to generic evidencetypes

20 N/A Contingencyplan Updated contingencyplan

23 N/A Site specific FRA Updated site specific FRA



Appropriate consultantFor flooding this is a consultant with qualifications and experience relevant to designing SuDSand flood preventionmeasures and completing peak rate of run-off calculations.Where complex flooding calculations and preventionmeasures are required, this must be a specialist hydrological engineer.For other natural hazards, this is a consultant with relevant technical and professional experience able to:1. Determine the potential for natural hazards in the regionof the development2. Determine the likely impacts on the site, the asset and the locality, and3. Subsequently identify appropriatemitigationmeasures.For intentional threats, this is a consultant with experience in designing appropriate and relevant securitymeasuresand a relevant professional qualification.

Appropriate statutory bodyThis refers to either the appropriate national body, or the relevant local authority or internal drainage board whoseduty it is to carry out the planning approval function.

Critical infrastructureThose physical and information technology facilities, networks, services and assets which if disrupted or destroyedhave a serious impact on the health, safety, security or economicwellbeing of citizens or effective functioning ofgovernments .

DependencyA dependency is a relationship between two products or services inwhichone product or service is required forgenerating the other product or service.

DesignBasis EventsA series of disruptive events based onnatural hazards.

DesignBasis ThreatsA series of disruptive events based on intentional threats.



Design flood levelThemaximum estimated water level during the design storm event. The design flood level for a site canbedetermined througheither knownhistorical data or modelled for the specific site.

Design flood eventA historic or notional flood event of a given annual flood probability, against which the suitability of a proposeddevelopment is assessed and mitigationmeasures, if any, are designed.

Design storm eventHistoric or notionalweather conditions of a given annual probability, against which the suitability of a proposeddevelopment is assessed and mitigationmeasures, if any, are designed.

Digital dependencyA cyber connectionbetween infrastructure or a shared dependencybetween two or more elements on the transferof information from a third party.

Downstream dependencyWhere the infrastructure asset provides a service to another infrastructure asset which is dependent on that service.

Flood defencesFlood defences do not completely remove the riskof flooding, but theydo reduce it. Building in areas where flooddefences are present (and appropriately designed to withstand a certainmagnitude of flooding) is thereforepreferable to building inmedium or high riskareas without defences. However, for the purpose of this issue, it is stillpreferable to build in areas of low risk thanencourage development of new flood defences in areas with a higher riskof flooding purely for the sake of a newdevelopment.

Flood eventA flooding incident characterised by its peak level or flow, or by its level or flowhydrograph.

Flood probabilityThe estimated probability of a flood of givenmagnitude occurring or being exceeded in any specified time period.For example, the 100-year flood has a 1% chance of occurring in anygiven year.

Flood riskThe combinationof the flood probability and themagnitude of the potential consequences of the flood event.

Flood risk assessmentA study to assess the riskof a site flooding, and to assess the impact that any changes or development on the sitewillhave on flood risk to the site and elsewhere. A flood riskassessment (FRA) should be prepared according to relevantplanning policy and technical guidance documents. The FRAmust account for future climate change and detail anynecessary adaptationmeasures where or if required.Wheremore than five years have passed since the FRAwascarried out, evidencewould be required to demonstrate that the basis of the FRA has not changed in that time.

Flood storageThe temporary storage of excess run-off or river flow inponds, basins, reservoirs or on the flood plain during a floodevent.

Flood zonesFlood zones are defined in the relevant planning, policy and technical guidance documents for each country (refer toAppendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).

FreeboardThe difference between the crest level of a flood defence and the flood water level.

Geographical dependencyThe close proximity of infrastructure assets, systems or networks makes them susceptible to the same incident.

Hierarchical Risk Assessment



This should be a risk-based approach taken inorder to ensure resiliencemeasures are considered with regards toflood risk. In order to complywith this issue the assessor would need to determinewhether or not the final designofthe asset has considered the recommendations made in accordancewith this approach. Anexample of a bestpractice riskbased hierarchywould typically follow these steps:

Stage 1 - Assessing and understandingStage 2 - Avoiding the riskStage 3 - SubstitutionStage 4 - Control and management IncorporationStage 5 - Resistance and resilient building techniquesStage 6 - Safety

For further informationonnational guidance for riskassessments refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standardsand Weightings List (ASWL).

Intentional threatsMan-made threats including fire and crime (theft, arson, vandalism, terrorist attacks, cybersecurity etc.). These are notusefully informed byhistorical data due to their nature and are best assessed using a series of credible threat eventsto allow riskanalysis and assessment of asset vulnerability.

Maximum tolerable levelsThe level of risk the client, owner or operator of the asset is willing to accept and manage as part of the asset’soperational procedures.

Natural hazardsA natural process or phenomenon that may cause loss of life, injury or other health impacts, property damage, loss oflivelihoods and services, social and economic disruption, or environmental damage. These include, but are not limitedto:1. Flooding2. Hazards of geological origin such as volcanic eruptions, earthquakes and landslides3. Hazards of climatic or meteorological origin such as droughts, avalanches, wave surges including tsunamis and

tidalwaves, and wind storms including cyclones, hurricanes, tornadoes, tropical storms, and typhoons4. Wildfires.Relevancewill be dependent on local geography, geology, hydrology and climate factors. The assessment of naturalhazards tends to be based onhistorical data. However, it should also consider climate scenarios and potential futurerisk.

Organisational dependencyShared ownership, governance, financing mechanisms 'soft' infrastructure.

Peer reviewPeer review is defined as the process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or fullmembers maintain a standard of knowledge or experience required to ensure compliancewith a code of conductand professional ethics.

Physical dependencyA physical connectionbetweendifferent infrastructure assets, systems or networks, e.g. one asset uses fuel suppliedby another.

Relevant stakeholdersFor the purpose of this issue, relevant stakeholders include as aminimum:1. The owner/operator, where known2. Representatives from local public services, including the emergency services, local authorities, health services and

environmental agencies3. Stakeholders upstream and downstream of the project; as a minimum those considered to be reasonably at risk

of impacts arising from the project or those reasonably considered to have an impact on the project4. Flooding, natural hazard and security stakeholders.Additional relevant stakeholders could include:



1. Sector resilience leads2. Climate change experts3. Owner/operators of other similar infrastructure assets4. Customers5. Members of the public, where affected.Relevant stakeholders for flooding could include:1. Regulators in flood management2. Appropriate statutory bodies (refer to definition above).3. Local flood groups4. Internal Drainage Boards5. Water companies.Relevant stakeholders for intentional threats could include:1. Corporate ICT and cybersecurity specialists2. National security organisations3. Police forces4. Security specialists.

ResilienceThe ability of assets, networks and systems to anticipate, absorb, adapt or rapidly recover from a disruptive event.Note that this is sometimes considered in a range of ways including:

Resistance resilience - This considers designing the asset to withstand predicted impacts, e.g. barriers toprevent water entering the asset or walls with the strength to withstand the impact of flood water.Reliability resilience - This considers the asset or systems required to operate under a range of setconditions for a specified period of time, this might include raising critical components above the designflood level, or using specifications that address identified risks, e.g. burglar alarms or anti-graffiti coatings.It can also include non-technical items such as flood warning schemes, staff training and good practiceguidance to ensure that staff can respond to flood events to ensure continuity of service in a safemanner.Redundancy resilience - This considers the availability of backup installations or spare capacitywithin asystem to enable operations to be switched or diverted to alternative parts of the system in the event ofdisruption to ensure continuity of service. The resilience of networks reduces when running at or nearcapacity, although in some sectors or organisations it is recognised that it maynot always be feasible tooperatewith significant spare capacitywithin the network.Recovery resilience - This considers preparations for fast and effective response and recovery fromdisruptive events and will include processes for dealing with anevent if it occurs to ensure that the asset cancontinue to operate.

NOTE: In flooding terms, resilience and resistance are oftenused, resistancemeaning wheremeasures prevent waterfrom being in contact with the asset and resiliencemeaning where the asset is designed to withstand contact with thewater.

Upstream dependencyWhere the infrastructure asset is dependent ona service provided byother infrastructure.

Other information

Identification of relevant stakeholders

Relevant stakeholders canby identified by asking the following questions outlined in ISO26000:2010 Guidance onSocialResponsibility14:

1. To whom does the organisationhave legal obligations?2. Who might be positively or negatively affected by the organisation's decisions or activities?3. Who is likely to express concerns about the decisions and activities of the organisation?4. Who has been involved in the past when similar concerns needed to be addressed?5. Who canhelp the organisation address specific impacts?6. Who canaffect the organisation's ability to meet its responsibilities?7. Who would be disadvantaged if excluded from the engagement?8. Who in the value chain is affected?



Sources of flooding and flood risk

The following list identifies the typical areas or sources that maybe indanger or riskof flooding:

1. Streams and rivers: flooding that can take place from flows that are not contained within the channel due to high levelsof rainfall in the catchment

2. Coastal or estuarine: flooding that canoccur from the sea due to a particularly high tide or surge, or a combinationofboth

3. Groundwater:where thewater table rises to such a height where flooding occurs.Most common in low-lying areasunderlain bypermeable rock (aquifers), usually due to extended periods of wet weather

4. Sewers and highwaydrains: combined, foul or surfacewater sewers and highwaydrains that are temporarilyoverloaded due to excessive rainfall or due to blockage

5. Surfacewater: the net rainfall falling ona surface (onor off the site)which acts as run-off whichhas not infiltrated into theground or entered into a drainage system

6. Infrastructure failure: canals, reservoirs, industrial processes, burst water mains, blocked sewers or failed pumpingstations.

Allowance for climate change

Professionals completing the flood riskassessment should refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and WeightingsList (ASWL) for national allowances for climate change.

Flood protection

To meet the requirements of criterion23 (the requirement to implement measures to protect or defend the site fromflooding) the designneed not be restricted to flood defences. A site canbe protected from flood water using variousmethods including solutions such as use of topography, attenuation and storage of flood waters. This canensure that floodwater is kept away from the development. These types of solutions maybe appropriate in some instances. However,assurances must bemade that the solutions do not create issues further downstream and will not inconvenience the localarea. It is the responsibility of the relevant professional to determine themost appropriate solution for the development.


blankpage

Res 03 Designing for future needs Resilience

Res 03 Designing for future needs


1 2 None

Aim

To recognise and encourage designof the asset that allows for opportunities for interdependencies, increased capacity andfuture proofing.



One credit - Future needs assessment

1 The project team consults relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions) to carry out an assessment of futureneeds.

2 The assessment uses well informed data to support predictions and considers the following as aminimum (refer toMethodology):2.a Populationgrowth and changing demographic (refer to CN1)2.b Customer expectations2.c Integrated systems2.d Resource availability2.e Newand existing technology2.f Flexibility of the asset2.g Industry changes.

3 Opportunities for how the design canbe adapted to address future needs are identified and a qualitative assessment ofeach is included within the report addressing:3.a Cost (saving and expenditure)3.b Benefits and disadvantages.

4 Opportunities for addressing future needs are included in the project delivery team or contractor's brief.



Up to two credits - Designing in capacity for future needs

One credit

5 The opportunities identified within the strategic stage assessment are reassessed by the project team (including theowner/operator) using updated information to:5.a Identifywhichof the areas identified in criterion2 aremost critical to the either the sector, asset or both5.b Make recommendations about how future needs canbe addressed.



6 The design is influenced by recommendations in three areas identified in criterion5 as being themost critical for thesector or asset (refer to CN2).

7 Themeasures allow the predicted future needs to be accommodated withminimal disruption (refer to Relevantdefinitions) to the asset and without destruction.

Two credits


9 The design is influenced by recommendations in five areas identified in criterion2 as being themost critical for either thesector, asset or both, (refer to CN2).

10 Themeasures allow the predicted future needs to be accommodated withminimal disruption to the asset and withoutdestruction.


None.

Compliance notes


CN1 Changingdemographic

Whenassessing the changing demographic, consideration should be given to thefollowing:1. Age (children, young people, older people and the ageing population)2. Disability3. Gender and sexual orientation4. Religionor belief5. Race6. Deprivation ( this includes: income;employment; health and disability; education,

barriers to housing and services; crime;and the living environment)7. Health (life expectancy, obesity, physical activity, mortality associated with illnesses,

dementia, depression,mental health)8. Employment (sectors, incomes, businesses, working patterns, economic activity,

unemployment)9. Education, skills and training10. Populationprojections.The current demographic profile should be available from the local authority andcensus data.




CN2 Most critical areas The project team, including the owner/operator make a judgement about themostcritical areas based on the assessment of future needs. For:

One credit - the threemost critical areas must be considered within the designand constructionof the assetTwo credits - this increases to the fivemost critical areas.

This requirement is unrelated to the number of recommendations, but instead relatedto addressing the areas detailed in theMethodology section. It is expected that as aminimum, populationgrowth, future demographics, integrated systems, resourceavailability, and industry changes will be relevant to a greater or lesser extent dependingon the size and complexity of the asset.

Methodology

The future needs assessment must include predictions using well informed data covering the following content:

Population growth and changing demographic

To appreciate future needs with regards to populationgrowth and changing demographic the assessment must consider:

1. Predicted future demand and capacity including;a. Potential future expansion and upgradesb. Whether further assets will be required to meet predicted needsc. How future growthor adaptation canbe safeguarded (e.g. land) or incorporated into the current design to allow

future needs to bemore easilymetd. How innovation could be used to meet the demands of a growing population.

2. Potential future functional changes3. Potential future access requirements.

Customer expectations

To appreciate future needs with regards to customer expectations the assessment must consider:

1. Howcustomers will interact with the asset in the next 5, 10, 20(+) years2. Improved cost efficiencyover the life of the asset3. Meeting increasing customer expectations for reliability, comfort, safety, security and information (where relevant)4. Accessibility of services for future upgrades.

Integrated systems

To appreciate future needs with regards to Integrated systems the assessment must consider:

1. The asset as part of the systemwithinwhich it operates nowand over its life2. How technical aspects of the asset interact with (potentially changing) operational aspects over the life of the asset (e.g.

telecommunications, energy sectors)3. Opportunities for current or future interconnections to other assets of the same sector or different sector, e.g.

water/water, energy/water4. Potential shared facilities, energy and infrastructure, e.g. sustainable drainage systems (SuDS), amenity spaces and cables5. Working withother organisations, throughmulti-agency communication and coordination6. Future dependencies (upstream and downstream) and also interdependencies throughuse of tools, models, and

consultationwith (upstream and downstream) stakeholders. Being aware and planning for potential dependency iscrucial to designing for future needs; if these dependencies are not taken into account, themeasures taken to design forfuture needs will be at best limited and at worst totally ineffective.



Resource availability

To appreciate future needs with regards to resource availability the assessment must consider:

1. Future demand of resources needed by the asset over its life and delivered by the project over its life including:a. Materials requirements over the life of the asset in terms of robustness and predicted or possible changes in

material supplyb. Energy and water requirements over the life of the asset and predicted or possible changes in supply, demand and

(for energy) type (refer to CE03 Operational carbonand energy and Wat 01 Water efficiencyplanning andimplementation).

Technology

To appreciate future needs with regards to technology the assessment must consider:

1. Smart technology for operation and maintenance purposes, e.g. intelligent distributionnetworks that automaticallyreroutewhenequipment fails and smart metering to allowcustomers to make informed decisions about when to usetheir power

2. Techniques and technologies that could be implemented to meet predicted future needs, e.g. dual use for an asset suchas a road tunnel that can act as stormwater storage at times of high rainfall.

Flexibility

To appreciate future needs with regards to flexibility the assessment must consider:

1. Flexibility of the asset or system, e.g. through identifying a diverse set of solutions to meet customer and operator needs2. Layered fall backarrangements to mitigate unavailability3. Implementing ideas whichwill allowprojects to be self-sufficient, e.g. generatemore of their ownenergyor have dual

functionality4. How to ensure the functionality of the asset is not compromised based on future predictions5. Whether the asset canbe designed to be part of a flexible system nowand in the future (possiblymore relevant for

energy and communications sectors).

Industry changes

To appreciate future needs with regards to industry changes the assessment must consider:

1. How legislation is likely to change and what effect this will have on the service provided by the asset2. Predicted changes to the infrastructure industry and howmight this affect the service provisionof the asset.

Evidence





Minimal disruptionThis cannot be clearly defined as it will differ for eachproject, however the assessor should look for evidence thatdisruption to the asset and future asset users has beenaddressed in the process of considering future needs.



Relevant stakeholdersFor the purpose of this issue, relevant stakeholders include as aminimum:1. The owner/operator, where known2. Individuals with:

a. Experience in operating similar assetsb. Specialist knowledge and experience of the sector nowand in the futurec. Anunderstanding of newand relevant technologiesd. Anunderstanding of sector specific dependencies, e.g. energy, communicationse. Anunderstanding of the asset's resource requirements and availability, e.g. energy and water.

The relevant stakeholders should be knowledgeable and representative.

Other information

None.



Res 04 Surface water run-off


0 2 One credit - any criteria 1 – 11 - GoodTwo credits - all criteria 1 – 11 - Excellent

Aim

To avoid, reduce and delay the discharge of rainfall to adjacent land, public sewers and watercourses, minimising the riskandimpact of localised flooding onand off site.


None.



Appropriate consultant (prerequisite)Peak rate of run-off for the asset in operation (1 credit)Volume of run-off for the asset in operation (1 credit)


Prerequisite - Appropriate consultant

1 Anappropriate consultant (refer to Relevant definitions) is appointed to carry out, demonstrate or confirm thedevelopment's compliancewith the following criteria:

One credit - Peak rate of run-off for the asset in operation


3 Where drainagemeasures are specified in order to ensure that the peak rate of run-off from the site to thewatercourses (natural or municipal) is no greater for the developed site than it was for the pre-development site. Thisshould comply at the 1-year and 100-year returnperiod events.

4 Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified sustainabledrainage systems (SuDS) are in place.

5 Calculations should bemade in accordancewith current national best practice planning guidance (refer to Appendix B -TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)) and should account for climate change.Where no guidance existswithin the country of assessment the following canbe used for compliance:


Res 04 Surfacewater run-off Resilience

Table 14:Allowance for climate change according to annual probability of flooding

Annual probability of flooding Allowance for climate change

Low 10%

Medium 20%

High 30%

One credit - Volume of run-off for the asset in operation


7 Where flooding of the asset or the surrounding area will not occur in the event of local drainage system failure (causedeither by extreme rainfall or a lackof maintenance)AND EITHER:7.a Drainage designmeasures are specified to ensure that the post-development run-off volume, over the

development lifetime, is no greater than it would have beenprior to the assessed site's development for the100-year 6-hour event, including anallowance for climate change

7.b Any additional predicted volume of run-off for this event is prevented from leaving the site by using infiltrationor other SuDS techniques.

OR (onlywhere criteria 7.a and 7.b for this credit cannot be achieved for technical reasons, e.g. impermeable soils).

8 Justification from the appropriate consultant indicating why the above criteria cannot be achieved, i.e. where infiltrationor other SuDS techniques are not technically viable options.

9 Drainage designmeasures are specified to ensure that the post-development peak rate of run-off is reduced to thelimiting discharge. The limiting discharge is calculated in accordancewith theMethodology section and defined as thehighest flow rate from the following options:9.a The pre-development 1-year peak flow rate;OR9.b Themeanannual flow rateQbar;OR9.c 2L/s/ha.

Note: The pre-development 1-year peak flow rate (criterion9.a) is equivalent to the 1-year returnperiod event described inthe peak rate of run-off credit (criterion3 ) above.

10 Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified SuDSare inplace.

11 For either option, above calculations must include anallowance for climate change; this should bemade in accordancewith current national best practice planning guidance (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and WeightingsList (ASWL) or Table 14).


None.



Compliance notes


CN1 Discharge to the seaor tidal estuaries

The peak rate of run-off and volume run-off criteria canbe deemed to bemet bydefault if the site discharges rainwater directly to a tidal estuary (refer to Relevantdefinitions) or the sea.The sitemust discharge run-off directly into the tidal estuary or the sea, if these criteriaare to be awarded bydefault. Typically, this would mean that drainage pipes wouldonly carry run-off from the site and that theywould not need to cross privately ownedland outside the boundary of the development before reaching the sea.

CN2 No change inimpermeable area

Where theman-made impermeable area draining to thewatercourse (natural ormunicipal) has decreased or remains unchanged post development, the peak rate andvolume run-off requirements for the surfacewater run-off credits will bemet bydefault.Flow rate calculations will not need to be provided. Instead, drawings clearly showingthe impermeable areas of the site draining to thewatercourse should be provided forthe pre and post-development scenarios. Figures must also be given (ideally on thedrawings) to showa comparisonbetween the areas of drained impermeable surfacespre- and post-development.In this instance a flood riskassessment must be carried out and anyopportunitiesidentified to reduce surfacewater run-off are implemented.

CN3 Limiting dischargeflow rate

For the surfacewater run-off credits, where the limiting discharge flow ratewouldrequire a flow rate of less than5L/s at a discharge point, a flow rate of up to 5L/s maybe used where required to reduce the riskof blockage.

CN4 Derelict sites If the site has beenderelict for over five years, the appropriate consultant must assessthe previous drainage networkand make reasonable assumptions to establishprobable flow rates and volumes. To do this they should use best practice simulationmodelling to determine the 1-year and 100-year peak flow rates at the relevantdischarge points. To complete the calculations, a site visit prior to development will berequired unless accurate data already exist from a previous survey. The resultantprofessional report can thenbe used to determine the pre-development volumes andrates of run-off. Without this professional input, the sitemust be deemed greenfieldpre-development.

CN5 Rainwaterharvesting

National best practice guidance should be followed where rainwater harvestingsystems are used (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List(ASWL)).

Compliant drainagesolutions

For criteria 7.a and 7.b, SuDSand other infiltration techniques are acceptable. Criterion9is only applied where there are technical reasons whydrainage solutions would notwork, e.g. in clay soils. For this reason, storage solutions may also be consideredcompliant for criterion9



Methodology

Limiting discharge rate

The following outlines the process to assess criterion9 :

The limiting discharge for eachdischarge point should be calculated as the flow rates from the pre-developed site. Thecalculation should include the total flow rate from the total area of the site feeding into the discharge point (this shouldinclude bothBREEAM-assessed and non-BREEAM-assessed parts of the development, if applicable).

The discharge point is defined as the point of discharge into thewatercourse or sewers (including rivers, streams, ditches,drains, cuts, culverts, dykes, sluices, public sewers and passages throughwhichwater flows, see Relevant definitions).Wherethis calculation results in a peak flow rate of less than5L/s, the limiting discharge ratemaybe increased up to a level of nomore than5L/s at the point of discharge from the site to reduce the riskof blockage.

For example, if the flow rate for the 1-year and 100-year events were 4L/s and 7L/s respectively, then the limiting dischargeswould be 5L/s and 7L/s. Similarly, if it was calculated to be 2L/s and 4L/s, then amaximum of 5L/s limiting discharge rate couldbe applied to bothdischarge points.

Evidence





Appropriate consultantA consultant with qualifications and experience relevant to designing SuDSand flood preventionmeasures andcompleting peak rate of run-off calculations.Where complex flooding calculations and preventionmeasures arerequired, this must be a specialist hydrological engineer.

Appropriate statutory bodyThis refers to either the appropriate national bodyor the relevant local authority or internal drainage board whoseduty it is to carry out the planning approval function.

CatchmentThe area contributing surfacewater flow to a point on a drainage or water course. It canbe divided into sub-catchments.

Control devicesAnydrainage structure or unit designed to control the run-off of stormwater. Examples of SuDScontrol devices arecheckdamswithin swales and basins, and combined weir or orifice controls for ponds. Examples of traditionalcontrol devices are throttles constructed withpipes and vortex controls. The control devices must be capable ofregular inspection and maintenance, and the system should be fail-safe so that upstream flooding does not resultfrom blockage or other malfunction.



Design flood levelThemaximum estimated water level during the design storm event. The design flood level for a site canbedetermined througheither knownhistorical data or modelled for the specific site.

Discharge pointThe discharge point is the point at which the run-off from the site leaves the site boundary and enters a watercourse.

GreenfieldA sitewhichhas either never beenbuilt on, or onewhichhas remained undisturbed for five years or more.

Greenfield run-off rateThe rate of run-off that would occur from the site in its undeveloped and therefore undisturbed state.

Hard surfacesThese include roofs, car parks, access roads, pavements, delivery areas, service yards and external hard landscaping.Footpaths less than1.5 mwidewhichhave free drainage to soft landscaped areas onboth sides maybe excluded.

SuDS hierarchyThe hierarchyof SuDS techniques considered in the development of the SuDSmanagement train is defined as follows:1. Prevention– the use of good site design and site housekeeping measures to prevent run-off and pollution (e.g.

sweeping to remove surface dust and detritus from car parks), and rainwater reuse and harvesting. Preventionpolicies should generally be included within the sitemanagement plan

2. Source control – control of run-off at or very near its source (e.g. soakaways, other infiltrationmethods, greenroofs, pervious pavements)

3. Site control – management of water in a local area or site (e.g. routing water from building roofs and car parks toa large soakaway, infiltrationor detentionbasin)

4. Regional control – management of run-off from a site or several sites, typically in a balancing pond or wetland.

SuDS management trainAnapproach to drainage design that combines a sequence of appropriate surfacewater drainage structures usingSuDSsystems for management of the run-off to treat the flow, reduce run-off volume and restrain the run-off rate tominimiseman's impact on the environment. Additional benefits associated withoperation and maintenance, ecologyand amenity are aspects which are considered whendesigning amanagement system. Themanagement trainincorporates a hierarchyof techniques:1. Source control. Examples of SuDS techniques include:

SoakawaysPorous or pervious pavingRoof water directed to garden (rather thanpiped drains)Rainwater reuse and harvestingGreen roofsOther surface infiltration, attenuation and conveyance techniques that dealwith run-off at source.

2. Site or local control. Examples of SuDS techniques include:SwalesPondInfiltrationbasinsDetentionbasinLarger soakawaysPervious (porous or permeable) paving.

3. Regional control. Examples of techniques include:Balancing pondsWetlandsLarge detentionbasin.

SuDS techniquesOne or more components built to manage surfacewater run-off to prevent flooding and pollution, including forexample:wet ponds, infiltrationbasins, detentionbasins, swales, reed beds, pervious (porous or permeable) paving,soakaways, rainwater harvesting, filter strips, filter drains and trenches withor without perforates pipes, green roofsand underground attenuation storage.



Surfacewater run-offWater flowover the ground surface to a drainage system. This occurs if the ground is impermeable, is saturated or ifthe rainfall is particularly intense.

Tidal estuaryA tidal estuary is defined as a semi-enclosed coastal bodyof water whichhas a free connectionwith the open seaand withinwhich seawater is measurably diluted with freshwater derived from land drainage. Anestuary should beunconstrained tidalwaters, i.e. there should be no barriers or constricted shorelines that would restrict the free flowof water into the open sea in any conditions. The impact on the total volume of run-off from the site (and other siteswhichmay in future discharge into the estuary) should be insignificant in terms of the overallwater levels in theestuary. Tidal rivers (i.e. where no or limited measurable seawater content is present during normal tidalmovements)cannot be included as part of the estuary for the purposes of BREEAM.

Volume of run-offThe volume of run-off that is generated by rainfall occurring on the site. This is typicallymeasured in cubicmetres.Additional predicted volume of run-off is the difference between the volumes of run-off pre- and post-development.

Watercourses and sewersA term that includes rivers, streams, ditches, drains, culverts, dykes, sluices, sewers and passages throughwhichwaterflows.

Other information

SuDS - sustainable drainage systems

A sequence of management practices and control structures designed to drain surfacewater in amore sustainable fashionthan some conventional techniques. Examples of SuDSdevices include:

Holding pondsSwalesReed bedsPermeable paving - in areas where local geological and hydrological conditions allow this to function, e.g. blockpavedsurface onpermeable subbase over gravel bed to store thewater and allow it to seep into the soil. For lesspermeable soils, the gravel layer might be deeper and thewater taken to a soakaway although this is not anoption insome areasLocal or centralised soakaways either as full systems or as 'overflow'or 'holding' systems, in areas where localgeological and hydrological conditions allow them to functionRun-off from roofs collected as a part of a rainwater harvesting systemRun-off from roofs directed to a local soakawayor other holding facility such as tanks, ponds, swales etc.Green roofs.



Res 05 Durability


0 2 None

Aim

To reduce the replacement and maintenance of materials through careful design and specificationof more durable solutions.


None.



Asset durability (1 credit)Security product certification (1 credit)


One credit - Asset durability

1 The project team identify elements of the asset that are prone to material degradationdue to environmental factorsand consider possible degradation effects, as shown in Table 15.

2 Appropriate design and specificationmeasures are incorporated for these elements to limit material degradationdueto environmental factors (refer to CN1).

Refer to theMethodology section for the process to assess this credit.

One credit - Security product certification

3 All security products and systems used are third party tested and certified where anappropriate International, Europeanor national standard is available (refer to CN2 and Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).This includes:3.a Electronic components of security systems, e.g. cabling3.b Physical components of security systems, e.g. doors, windows, barriers.

4 All security products and systems installations are subject to third party testing before project handover (refer to CN2).


Res 05 Durability Resilience


Table 15: Environmental factors and material degradation effects to consider

Environmental factors and material degradation effects

Environmental factors

1. Environmental agents, including:a. Solar radiationb. Temperature variationc. Water, moistured. Winde. Precipitation, e.g. rain and snowf. Extremeweather: highwind speeds, flooding, driving rain, snow.

2. Biological agents, including:a. Vegetationb. Pests, insects.

2. Pollutants, including:a. Air contaminantsb. Ground contaminants.

Material degradation effects (includes, but not necessarily limited to the following)

1. Corrosion2. Dimensional change, e.g. swelling or shrinkage3. Fading, discolouration4. Rotting5. Leaching6. Blistering7. Melting8. Salt crystallisation9. Abrasion.

Compliance notes


CN1 Varyingenvironmentalfactors across thesite or differentsites

The project team should consider whether environmental factors that may causematerial degradation vary across the sites, in particular for linear projects which aremore likely to experience different durability issues in different locations.The project team should demonstrate that different environmental factors have beeninvestigated based on the locationof the asset (or part of the asset).

CN2 Third party testingof security productsand systems

This credit will be filtered out where:

No standard exists for the security products or systems presentThere are no security products or systems present.



Methodology

Protecting exposed parts of the asset frommaterial degradation

The following outlines the process to assess criterion2 :

1. Identify the elements likely to be affected bymaterial degradation2. Establish from the 'environmental factors' list those factors that are likely to causematerial degradation effects and

where in the asset this is likely to occur.3. Confirm the design and specificationmeasures in place to limit these degradation effects4. The assessor should use their professional judgement in determining whether the design team have adequately

demonstrated that they have designed and specified materials or measures whichwill be effective in preventingunnecessary deterioration so reducing frequent replacements, repairs and maintenance through the life cycle of theasset

5. At post-construction stage, where the design and specificationmeasures installed differ from that proposed at designstage, the assessor must ensure that thesemeasures stillmeet the aims of the criterion as detailed in point 4 above.

Evidence



3 – 4 N/A Refer to generic evidence types Third party certificationcertificates



SecurityRefer to Res 02 Riskassessment and mitigation.

Other information

None.


Stakeholders

Stakeholders

Category overview


Refer to the country reference sheet in theASWL. ST 02 Consultation and engagementST 03 Responsible constructionpracticesST 04 Owner operator requirements

Summary

This category encourages the project team to consult with all relevant stakeholders relating to the project in order tounderstand their needs and incorporate their knowledge and requirements into the project. Issues in this category focus onputting together a plan for consultation, carrying out consultation and engagement throughout the design and construction,and evaluating the success of the process.


Issue Credits

ST 01 Consultationplan Strategy - 1Project detail - 1

A consultationplan is developed at the pre-planning stage to effectively engage key stakeholders andestablish a communication strategyAnevaluationof the consultationprocess is conducted during handover and close out to establish thesuccess of the process and disseminate key learning outcomes

ST 02 Consultation and engagement Strategy - 3Project detail - 1

An initial consultation is carried out in linewith the consultationplanbefore finalising the project briefAn inclusive design strategy is developed with technical specialists and vulnerable groups to establishmeasures that enhance inclusivity in and around the assetFurther consultation and continued engagement occurs throughout design and construction to ensure theproject incorporates community knowledge and inclusive designmeasures

ST 03 Responsible constructionpractices Strategy - 0Project detail - 5Exemplary - 1

Aworkforce plan is developed, implemented,monitored and evaluated with contractor involvementThe principal contractor demonstrates sound environmentalmanagement practices and consideration forneighbours across their on-site activities and fleet


Stakeholders BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

Issue Credits

ST 04 Owner operator requirements Strategy - 1Project detail - 1

Strategic Operational Performance Indicators (OPIs) are developed with the owner and operator of the assetto inform the asset design and constructionThe project specific objectives achieved and evaluated to facilitate enhanced operationof the asset over itslife


ST 01 Consultationplan Stakeholders

ST 01 Consultation plan


1 1 None

Aim

To encourage early and ongoing engagement of stakeholder groups during the planning, design and constructionof theasset and to evaluate the success of the process employed.



One credit - Consultation plan

1 During preparationof the brief a consultationplan is developed to identify the relevant stakeholders to consult with(refer to Relevant definitions) and the activities or impacts of the project to consult on. The plan includes timescales andmethods of consultation, clearly identifying for each stakeholder group:1.a Who will be consulted1.b How theywill be consulted and have their input collected,, i.e. what methods or media will be employed (refer to

CN1)1.c A named stakeholder championor champions (refer to Relevant definitions)1.d At which stages theywill be engaged,, i.e. planning, design, constructionor handover. As aminimum, an initial

consultation should occur during preparationof the brief and a further consultationduring concept designstage

1.e How theywill be kept informed about progress of the project1.f Howand when feedbackwill be provided on consultation input, including how it will be considered and what

actions could be takenas a result1.g How the consultationwill bemonitored or reported throughout the project to inform evaluationof the

complete programme.

2 For the community stakeholder group specifically, the consultationplan establishes the following:2.a The approach that will be taken to target and provide for minority and hard-to-reachgroups (refer to CN2) and

what measures will be implemented to meet their needs2.b The facilitated community consultationmethods (refer to Relevant definitions) that will be used to engage the

community on the project.

3 The consultationplan is used to develop a communication strategy for disseminating the results of the consultations.The results of the consultation includes informationonhowstakeholder input has been incorporated into the project.



Prerequisite - Updated consultation plan

4 The consultationplandetailed at the strategic assessment stage is updated (or developed) as necessary at keyprojectgateways (refer to Relevant definitions)with inputs from stakeholder champions (refer to CN3).



5 The plan is revised as necessary to ensure the consultationmethods employed are appropriate for the project's scale,delivery stage and stakeholders.

One credit - Consultation evaluation


7 During handover and close out of the completed asset to the owner/operator, an evaluationof the success of theconsultationprogramme is conducted by an independent party (refer to Other information).

8 The evaluation employs a variety of qualitative and quantitativemethods such as analysis of complaints, surveys, focusgroups, interviews and workshops (refer to CN4).

9 The scope of the evaluationmust include:9.a The success of the consultationprocess to provide anunderstanding of what worked well and what could be

done differently in the future9.b The delivery of the project to enhance positive and mitigate negative impacts9.c Identificationof actions to be given to the owner/operator to ensure positive outcomes for the community

during the operationof the asset.

10 Lessons learnt and suggestions for improvement are collated and appropriately disseminated (refer to CN5) to informfuture projects.


None.

Compliance notes


CN1 Consultationmethods to beemployed

A variety of consultationmethods should be employed by the project to ensure theconsultationprocess is inclusive for all stakeholders. Different stakeholder groupsmaybe consulted separatelywhere appropriate (e.g. supply chain engagement exercises).The scale and impact of the project will affect the scope of the consultation. The designteam should justify the scope of consultationmethods employed; for smaller projectsthis willmeanaminimum of two methods.Bothproactive and reactivemethods should be employed throughout the consultationprocess, with proactivemeasures prioritised during the strategic and design stages.Proactivemeasures include letters, meetings, project websites, press articles, doorknocking, site visits, stakeholder mapping, opendays and visitor centres. Reactivemeasures include helplines and complaints procedures.




CN2 Consultationapproach forminority and hard-to-reachgroups

The consultation approach should actively engagewithminority and hard-to-reachgroups who may commonly be excluded from suchexercises.The plan should demonstrate howcommunity demographics have been considered toactively include these groups who may include:1. Elderly2. Young3. Parents, guardians or carers4. Persons with a disability5. Minority due to race, religionor belief6. Non-native speakers7. Thosewith limited time to participate.The approach should consider issues such as the use of jargonand technical languagewhich can act as a barrier, translationof documents into other languages if necessary,and ensuring that the needs of minority groups are taken into account in the timing andlocationof meetings.

CN3 Updatedconsultationplan(criterion4 )

This does not have to be the original document, it canbe a separate documentcontaining up-to-date information. It does not need to be completed by the author ofthe strategic stage document.

CN4 Consultationevaluation and scaleof the project

The purpose of the consultation evaluation is to ensure the processes employedthroughout the project are reviewed and undertaken transparently.When carrying out the evaluation the independent party should justify themethodstheyuse, and therefore the scope of the evaluation, based on the scale of the project.For example, small projects mayemploy informal door knocking and surveys that aredocumented, whereas large projects may carry out facilitated evaluation.

CN5 Appropriatedissemination

Appropriate dissemination includes communication to immediate stakeholders such asthe asset owner/operator, contractors and design team.In addition information should be communicated externally, such as production andpublicationof the consultation evaluation report throughone of the following means:1. Asset owner/operator's ownwebsite, publicly available literature or press release2. Industry or sector or government or local authority sponsored website or

informationportals.Where there is a demonstrably justifiable reasonwhypublic dissemination is notpossible, for example the information is commercially or security sensitive, compliancecanbe demonstrated by a commitment to produce and disseminate the relevantinformation at anorganisational level or to appropriate internal or externalstakeholders. Alternatively, the sensitive parts of the relevant information fordissemination canbe omitted from the publication.

Methodology

None.



Evidence


One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAMevidential requirements section canbe used todemonstrate compliancewith these criteria.

1 ConsultationplanStakeholder champions nameand contact details

N/A N/A

2 Facilitated communityconsultationmethodology

N/A N/A

7 – 10 N/A Refer to generic evidencerequirement above

Consultation evaluation report



Facilitated community consultationThere aremanymethodologies available to engage communities about the formulation and designof developmentproposals. For BREEAM, the following principles must be adhered to:1. The consultation exercise has a clearly communicated purpose2. Participants understand how their viewswill be used within the project3. Expectations are set as to whichoptions are open for discussion and revision4. Reasonable advance notice is given to potential participants of the consultation exercise5. Efforts aremade to include hard-to-reachgroups and jargon is avoided during the consultation exercise6. The consultation is facilitated by a personor organisation that is independent from the developer.

Independent party (evaluation)With respect to compliancewith the criteriononusing an independent party, the client or design team needs todemonstrate one of the following options has beenmet:1. Theyhave used a party independent of the designprocess to conduct the necessary evaluationprocess, using a

formalmethod OR2. If the evaluation is to be carried out by anorganisation involved with the designof the asset then theymust

present the assessor with evidence that robustly demonstrates the independence of the evaluationprocess.BREEAMhas not attempted to definewhat form this evidencemust take; the onus is on the design team orrelevant individual to clearly demonstrate to the BREEAMAssessor a credible level of independence.

Keyproject gatewaysThis definitionof keyproject gateways refers to project delivery phases. shown in chronological order in reference todelivery as:1. Concept design2. Definition3. Design4. Build and commission5. Handover and close out6. In-use.



Relevant stakeholdersFor this issue, relevant stakeholders to be consulted as aminimum include:1. Local community, including residents, businesses and other organisations located in the neighbourhood (e.g.

schools) that maybe impacted by the site or sites during construction and the completed asset in use2. Wider community, including regional business interests who maynot be located in the immediate vicinity but who

maybe impacted by the project3. Owner/operator of the asset4. End users (where different from above) and their representative bodies (e.g. in the case of a road this could be

drivers, road haulage companies, emergency services)5. National or local statutory bodies6. Relevant regulatory bodies7. Relevant interest groups and organisations (e.g. heritage organisations)8. Contractors and their supply chain (e.g. trades professionals)9. Technical specialists (e.g. inclusive design specialists, costs specialists, etc.)where impacts relating to their area of

expertise are considered significant10. Any statutory consultees.

Stakeholder championAn individual formally tasked by the client with the responsibility to deliver the consultation activities and champion theoutcomes in the project team. The individual canbe internal or external to the project teamwith sufficient authority toinfluence the designof the project and advise the client, design and construction teams.

Stakeholder mappingMaps that are developed to act as a visual aid to showwhere local stakeholder groups are located in relation to theproject and to showconsultation activities that have beenundertakenor are planned in that location.

Other information

Consultation terminology

The terms communication, consultation, and engagement are oftenused interchangeably. The accepted view is that there is acontinuum:

Communication:provision and exchange of information, oftenonly one-wayConsultation:process of jointly examining and discussing issues of mutual concern through seeking acceptablesolutions and involves activelymeeting and taking account of views beforemaking a decisionEngagement:working collaborativelywith and throughgroups to address issues affecting them, following a processthat ensures communities are empowered and have control over the decision-making process.

For the purposes of the BREEAMInfrastructure scheme, the focus should be different depending on the stakeholder groupand stage of the project. In general the focus will be on consultationwhere stakeholders are not just provided withinformationbut have the opportunity to have some involvement in decision-making; although theywill not drive the designprocess. However, for other groups such as the owner/operator, it should bemore of anengagement process. At laterstages within the project, such as when the asset is being constructed, communicationmaybemore appropriate to informpeople about site activities and timetables.

Scope of the evaluation process

The scope of the evaluationprocess is intended to understand fully the success of the consultationprocess itself and thesuccess of themitigation and enhancement measures implemented to provide a whole life based approach to assessing theimpact of the proposed asset on the community.

In assessing the consultationprocess itself, questions could include howwell the stakeholders feel that the process gave thema chance to express their opinions, did the process use the right methods for them, did they feel theywere listened to andtheir concerns addressed, were theygiven feedback in a timely and usefulmanner, etc.

In assessing the delivery of the project, questions could include howsuccessfulwere anymitigationmeasures, howwell didpositive enhancements work, howgood was the communication from the site (e.g. timings of works), howwell did they feelthat the complaints process worked, etc.



ST 02 Consultation and engagement

Strategic credits available Project detail creditsavailable

Minimum standards

3 1 Criteria 12 – 15 (Continued engagement andimplementation) - Very good

Aim

To address any concerns and maximise positive impacts from the asset for key stakeholders during construction andoperation.



Initial consultation (one credit)Further consultation (one credit)Inclusive design strategy (one credit)


One credit - Initial consultation

1 Criteria 1 – 3 in ST 01 Consultationplanhave beenachieved.

2 During the options appraisal process, prior to finalising the project brief, an initial consultation is carried out (inaccordancewith the consultationplan)with relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions) and their feedback isused to inform the proposed scheme.

3 Theminimum consultation content is covered (refer to CN1).

4 The project team demonstrate how the stakeholder contributions and the outcomes of the early consultationprocesshave influenced or changed the initial project brief, including if appropriate, the project executionplan, communicationstrategy, the tender specifications and the Code of Construction Practice (CoCP) (refer to Relevant definitions).

5 Consultation feedbackhas beenprovided to all participating stakeholder groups and theyhave acknowledged receiptof this (refer to CN2). The feedback includes justification for decisions that have been taken.

One credit - Further consultation

6 Criteria 1 – 3 in ST 01 Consultationplanhave beenachieved.

7 Aminimum of one consultation is carried out at concept design stage. The consultation includes all relevant stakeholders(see Relevant definitions) and theminimum content (refer to CN1) as appropriate to each stakeholder group and thestage of the project.

8 The project team demonstrates that stakeholder feedbackhas been collected and considered by keymembers of theproject team, such as the design team, contractor, client or operator as appropriate.

9 The outcomes of the consultationprocess have influenced or changed the project.


ST 02 Consultation and engagement Stakeholders

One credit - Inclusive design strategy

10 An inclusive design strategy (refer to Relevant definitions and CN3) is produced that considers the impact of the projecton the community throughout its life cycle stages (construction, operation,maintenance and decommissioning).

11 The inclusive design strategy, as a minimum:11.a Is developed in consultationwith interest groups, inclusive design specialists and vulnerable groups11.b Covers a range of measures that will enhance inclusivity in and around the asset such as signage, wayfinding,

accessibility and reducing severance11.c Includes a planof how themeasures canbe implemented and monitored during construction.



One credit - Continued engagement and implementation

12 Criteria 4 – 5 in ST 01 Consultationplan are achieved.


14 Prior to completionof the detailed design, consultation feedbackhas beenprovided to all participating stakeholdergroups highlighting how their input has influenced the design and siteworks and theyhave acknowledged receipt of this(refer to CN2). The feedback includes justification and reasons for decisions that have been taken.

15 The named stakeholder championor champions (refer to Relevant definitions) continue to communicatewith therelevant stakeholders throughout the detailed design and construction stages of the asset by:15.a Implementing the communication strategy (refer to ST 01 Consultationplan - criterion3 )15.b Monitoring and reporting to the project team on themeasures implemented to enhance positive and mitigate

negative impacts on the community for the construction stage15.c Ensuring complaints received during design and construction stages are promptly and satisfactorily dealt with15.d Ensuring that hard-to-reachgroups are aware of and able to benefit from implemented measures through

signage, communications etc. at both the construction and in-use stages.

16 The inclusive design strategy is updated (or developed in linewith criteria 10 – 11 ) as appropriate to the project and themeasures within it are implemented.


None.



Compliance notes


CN1 Minimumconsultationcontent

In addition to any statutory consultation content, for the purposes of a BREEAMassessment, the stakeholder consultation should consider the following as aminimum:1. Impacts of the development upon the surrounding community in construction

and following completion (including the protectionof areas of historic or heritagevalue, biodiversity, water quality, amenities, etc.)

2. Socio-economic and environmental impacts of the proposed schemeon thecommunity during construction and operation and howanynegative impacts canbemitigated

3. Designquality and inclusivity4. Management, maintenance or operational issues5. Measures where benefits canbe provided to enhance the area for the community

during construction and operation6. Opportunities for shared use or provisionof facilities and infrastructurewithor

for the existing community.Within the BREEAMInfrastructuremanual, across the technical sections, the assessor isrequired to engage, consult or communicatewith stakeholders. There are two specificways that the stakeholder consultationwithin the technicalmanual links with this issue.These are as follows:

Areas that linkdirectly to ST 02 inorder to achieve credits (generally consideredas 'wider consultation')Areas that do not link to ST 02 inorder to achieve credits, but take the principlesof consultation from this issue (generally considered as 'Specialist stakeholderconsultation').

Refer to theOther information sectionof this issue for descriptions of 'Widerconsultation' and 'Specialist stakeholder consultation' and the issues associated withthese.

CN2 Providingconsultationfeedback

Feedbackmust be accessible to all participating stakeholders but does not have to besent directly to each individual. It should be provided to each stakeholder group inaccordancewith the provisions made in the consultationplan. At least one namedstakeholder champion from each stakeholder group must have acknowledged receiptof the feedback.

CN3 Scope of theinclusive designstrategy

An inclusive design strategywill go beyond minimum legislative requirements andrecognise the different ways projects need to address inclusivity. This includesmeasures in and around the asset during construction and operation, i.e. for asset usersand also individuals or groups likely to be affected by any changes outside of the siteboundary such as diversions and signage changes. The specific impacts and relevantmeasures will vary from project to project in accordancewith the asset's function andits location.

Methodology

None.



Evidence

Ref Strategy stage Interim design stage Final post-constructionstage


10 – 11 Inclusive design strategy N/A N/A



Code of Construction Practice (CoCP)The Code of Construction Practice (CoCP) is a formal document containing a series of measures and standards ofwork to be applied by the contractors throughout the constructionperiod. This will provide a consistent approach tothemanagement of construction activities on a project.Where no CoCP has beendeveloped, but anequivalent document is in place, it must containmeasures appropriate tothe project and be compliant where specified within this, and other issues within themanual.

Facilitated community consultationThere aremanymethodologies available to engage communities about the formulation and designof developmentproposals. For BREEAM, the following principles must be adhered to:1. The consultation exercise has a clearly communicated purpose2. Participants understand how their viewswill be used within the project3. Expectations are set as to whichoptions are open for discussion and revision4. Reasonable advance notice is given to potential participants of the consultation exercise5. Efforts aremade to include hard-to-reachgroups and jargon is avoided during the consultation exercise6. The consultation is facilitated by a personor organisation that is independent from the developer.

Inclusive design strategyAn inclusive design strategy is one that considers the needs of the full range of humandiversitywith respect to ability,language, culture, gender, age and other forms of humandifference.The strategy should aim to be:1. Inclusive so everyone canuse the asset or facilities provided by the project safely, easily and withdignity2. Responsive and therefore taking into account what people say they need and want3. Flexible so different people canuse the asset or facilities provided by the project in different ways4. Convenient so everyone canuse the asset or facilities provided by the project without too mucheffort or

separation5. Accommodating for all people, regardless of their age, gender, disability, faith or circumstances6. Welcoming with no disabling barriers that might exclude somepeople7. Realistic and therefore offering more thanone solution to help balance everyone's needs and recognising that

one solutionmaynot work for all.

Relevant stakeholdersFor this issue, relevant stakeholders to be consulted as aminimum include:1. Local community, including residents, businesses and other organisations located in the neighbourhood (e.g.

schools) that maybe impacted by the site or sites during construction and the completed asset in use2. Wider community, including regional business interests who maynot be located in the immediate vicinity but who

maybe impacted by the project



3. Owner/operator of the asset4. End users (where different from above) and their representative bodies (e.g. in the case of a road this could be

drivers, road haulage companies, emergency services)5. National or local statutory bodies6. Relevant regulatory bodies7. Relevant interest groups and organisations (e.g. heritage organisations)8. Contractors and their supply chain (e.g. trades professionals)9. Technical specialists (e.g. inclusive design specialists, costs specialists, etc.)where impacts relating to their area of

expertise are considered significant10. Any statutory consultees.

Stakeholder championAn individual formally tasked by the client with the responsibility to deliver the consultation activities and champion theoutcomes in the project team. The individual canbe internal or external to the project teamwith sufficient authority toinfluence the designof the project and advise the client, design and construction teams.

Vulnerable groupsA vulnerable group is onewhosemembers have a need for care and support, are experiencing or at riskof abuse orneglect, or thosewho are unable to protect themselves against harm or exploitation. Refer to ST 01 Consultationplan:CN2 for examples of thosewho maybe included within vulnerable groups.

Other information

Crossover with Local wellbeing section

The criteria within this issue linkdirectlywith the issue LW02 Social impact. This issue is looking to reward the process ofconsulting with the community and ensuring measures implemented as part of the infrastructure project meet the needs ofall community stakeholders considering the full life cycle of the asset through reviewing the implemented measures.

The focus of LW02 Social impact is to assess and reward themeasures implemented and how they address communityneeds, rather than rewarding the process followed to provide these outcomes.

Consultation links within the Infrastructure scheme

Wider stakeholder consultation

Some issues require a wide community consultationon the assessment and proposals for the issue. The following issuesinclude this type of consultation:

ID 01 Option appraisal and objectivesID 04 Ecosystem servicesLW02 Social impactTra 03 Transport connectivityLUE01 Land use and valueLSH 01 Landscape and visual impactLSH 02 Heritage assetsPol 01 Air qualityPol 03 Noise and vibrationPol 04 Light pollution.

The above issues are directly linked with this issue (ST 02). To achieve credits within these issues, consultationon the content ofthese issues must be carried out in accordancewith the process outlined within the 'Further consultation credit', i.e. prior to theend of the concept design stage) unless otherwise stated in the issue.

Please refer to these issues and their compliance notes for a full explanationof the consultation requirements. For example: toachieve the ‘Connectivity assessment’ credit in Tra 03 Transport connectivity, details of the following must be included in the'further consultation'minimum content:



Connectivity assessmentConnectivity impacts resulting from the project in construction and operationProposals for enhancing connectivity andProposals for minimising and mitigating negative impacts onexisting connections.

The BREEAMInfrastructureOnline tool reminds assessors of this linkand will not allowcredits to be awarded in the aboveissues until the credit within ST 02 for ‘Further consultation’ is achieved.

Specialist stakeholder consultation

Specialist stakeholder consultationdiffers from thewider consultation in that involves amore concentrated and directconsultationwith specialists and experts. The following issues include this type of consultation:

Res 02 Riskassessment and mitigationRes 03 Designing for future needsLUE03 Remediationof land contaminationPol 02 Water pollutionWst 01 ConstructionwastemanagementWat 01 Water efficiencyplanning and implementation.

This issue requires local, rather than specialist, knowledge to be gathered througha consultationprocess and references thisissue as ameans to gather this information, but there is currently no formal link to these requirements.

One exception to the above scenarios is found in LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan. This issue requireslocal, rather than specialist, knowledge to be gathered througha consultationprocess and references this issue as ameans togather this informationbut there is currently no formal link to these requirements.



ST 03 Responsible construction practices


Minimum standards

0 5 One credit - criterion11 (Considerate construction) -ExcellentTwo credits - criterion11 (Considerate construction) -Outstanding

Aim

To recognise construction sites that offer enhanced considerationof thewelfare and development of their staff and thecontribution theymake to anenvironmentally and socially accountable site.


None.

Please note that criterion1 requires actions to be addressed from the briefing stage, however, as the requirementsare linked to the building and commissioning of the asset, they are included in the project detail assessment criteria.



National health and safety legislation (prerequisite)Implementationof a workforce plan (one credit)Environmentalmanagement (one credit)Considerate construction (up to two credits)Considerate fleet operations (one credit)


Prerequisite - National health and safety legislation

1 All national health and safety legislation and regulation for construction sites is considered, addressed or implementedduring:1.a The designof the asset; to minimise health and safety risks1.b Pre-constructionworkplanning and organisation; to collate health and safety information from all relevant

stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions)1.c Site set-up; to implement health and safety features1.d Construction; to manage,monitor and report on the health and safety of construction site staff.

One credit - Implementation of aworkforce welfare plan


3 Before constructionbegins a plan is developed with the contractors (refer to CN1) that clearly identifies measures toenhance thewelfare and development of the construction siteworkforce on the project. The plan covers, as a minimum:


ST 03 Responsible constructionpractices Stakeholders

3.a Provisionof staff facilities (refer to Relevant definitions)3.b Opportunities to improve thewelfare and development of theworkforce that go beyond legal requirements

(refer to Relevant definitions)3.c Promotionof sustainableworking practices (refer to Relevant definitions)3.d Methods for monitoring workforce satisfaction (refer to CN2).

4 Theworkforce plan is implemented and at least one named stakeholder champion (refer to Relevant definitions)monitors workforce satisfaction throughout the construction stage (refer to CN2).

5 Theworkforce plan is reviewed, and where necessary updated, by the contractors as the project progresses. This takesinto account newproject details and any input from theworkforce.

6 Anevaluationof workforce satisfaction is undertakenprior to handover to establish howsatisfied theworkforce havebeenwith:6.a The facilities6.b The opportunities for training and development6.c Their input into the success of the project.

7 The lessons learnt are disseminated to the contractor, design team and client.

One credit - Environmental management


9 Prior to construction starting on site, the principal contractor operates anenvironmentalmanagement system (EMS)covering their mainoperations. The EMSmust be either:9.a Third Party Certified, to ISO14001/EMASor equivalent9.b Followan incremental approach to implementing an EMSsystem (see Relevant definitions) as defined in national

best practice standards (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)) and havereached the stage of 'implementation and operation'of the EMSsystem

9.c .

Up to two credits - Considerate and responsible construction


11 The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:11.a One credit:Where the principle contractor achieves six items in eachof the four sections withinAppendixC.11.b Two credits :Where the principle contractor achieves all of the items in eachof the four sections withinAppendix

C and the contractor's performance has been confirmed by an independent assessment and verification (referto CN3 and CN4)

One credit - Considerate and responsible fleet operations

12 Where all operators travelling to or from the construction site have achieved all of the items in the five sections withinAppendixD.

Exemplary level criterion

The following outlines the exemplary level criterion to achieve one innovation credit for this BREEAMissue:

13 With reference to the considerate construction criterion11 where the principal contractor has achieved compliancewiththe criteria of a ‘BREEAMcompliant’ organisational, local or national considerate and responsible construction scheme,and the performance has been confirmed by independent assessment and verification.


None.



Compliance notes


CN1 Contractorinvolvement

Where theworkforce plan is created before the appointment of the contractor orcontractors, then compliancewith this criterion can still bemet providing that a suitablyexperienced personwith substantial constructionor contracting experience in projectssimilar to the proposed works is involved. A suitably experienced person could be acontractor appointed as a consultant for this stage or a constructionproject manager.Theworkforce plan should still be reviewed, and where necessary updated, as theproject progresses and the contractors are appointed.

CN2 Monitoringworkforcesatisfaction

Monitoring workforce satisfaction is intended to allowchanges to bemade during theconstructionof the asset that empower theworkforce. It should seek to determinesatisfactionwith the staff facilities, implemented site policies, and availabledevelopment opportunities.BREEAMdoes not specify howmonitoring is carried out, however, examples include asuggestions boxwith a feedbackmechanism or a regular agenda, i.e. at meetings orbriefings.

CN3 CompliancewithAppendixC

In instances where items inAppendixC are not relevant due to the scope of works onsite, the assessor should seekguidance from BREGlobal on the appropriate number ofitems required.

CN4 Independentassessment andverification

Anassessment of the site activities against AppendixCwhich is carried out by anindividualwho candemonstrate their independence from the project delivery, i.e.someone not employed by (or working under a contract for) the contractorsorganisation. The individualmust have at least five years' experienceworking within theconstruction industry either as a contractor or as part of a design team.Where theassessor meets these requirements, they can fulfil this role.

Methodology

None.

Evidence



3 N/A Workforce plan N/A


ST 03 Responsible constructionpractices Stakeholders


6 N/A Refer to generic evidencerequirement above

Workforce evaluation report


A copyof the principal contractor'sEMSor EMAScertificate or evidence oftheir status, e.g. a copyof their phase 4audit

11 – 13 N/A Refer to generic evidencerequirement above

Scheme certificate or compliancereport



Compliant organisational, local or national and responsible considerate construction schemesWhere a considerate and responsible construction scheme exists and is not listed as a BREEAMcompliant scheme, thescheme administrator or operator can apply to BREGlobal for recognition as a compliant scheme.Prior to any application the operator should first review their scheme against the requirements of GuidanceNote 11(GN11). If theybelieve their schemedemonstrates compliancewithGN11, they should contact BREGlobal. BREGlobalwill review the scheme and, if appropriate, add them to the list of compliant schemes and define appropriatebenchmarks of performance for achieving BREEAMcredits using the scheme.

EnvironmentalManagement Systems - An Incremental ApproachInorder to complywith criterion9.a, a process must be followed that enables the contractor to improve on theirenvironmental performance and develop their supply chain business through step by step implementationof anenvironmentalmanagement system (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).

Welfare and development of theworkforceConsideration should be given to the development of policies and procedures that support thewelfare anddevelopment of theworkforce over and above any legal requirements (including health and safety law). This shouldinclude:1. Encouraging the promotionof health and safety throughout theworkforce2. Respecting thewellbeing of all staff including mental and emotionalwellbeing throughpolicies such as anti-

bullying, harassment and ensuring these are followed3. Promoting equality and diversity across theworkforce4. Maximising opportunities for staff personal and career development throughpractices and policies such as

diversity and equality, training and skills and career development5. Providing staff with the opportunity to make suggestions for improving theworking environment and working

practices to support a culture of ownership. This could include a staff suggestion schemewith incentives toencourage input and feedbacksurveys.

The abovemust be considered for all staff working on the site including subcontractors and self-employedindividuals.

Promotionof sustainableworking practicesSustainableworking practices canbe promoted throughprovisionof staff training that raises awareness of thepractices used on site. This should cover:



1. The site's environmental and social impacts2. Stakeholder interfaces and sensitive issues3. Risks and mitigationmethods for potential incidents, e.g. that impact on the community4. Working practices on site including the correct operationprocedures for plant and equipment to maximise

energy and carbonefficiency and minimisewaste, and to mitigate or minimise pollution from noise, vibration, dustand other emissions

5. Health and safety riskassessments (e.g. procedures for dealing with spills of fuels and chemicals) carried out tomeet the legislativeminimum are not considered as a part of this process.

Provisionof staff facilitiesFacilities for the construction siteworkforce that demonstrate best practice and exceed the requirements oflegislation including the provisionof:1. Toilets2. Washing and changing facilities3. Facilities for eating and preparing food4. Shelter5. Accommodation (where relevant).Facilities that would exceed the requirements of legislation include, but are not limited to, provisionof:1. Rest and recreation facilities2. Healthcare facilities3. Faith facilities or quiet room4. Canteen (if appropriate)5. Internal condition and specificationof facilities provided.

Relevant stakeholdersFor this issue, relevant stakeholders to collate health and safety information from include, as aminimum:1. Client2. Design team3. Main and subcontractors4. Specialist contractors and consultants5. Equipment and material suppliers6. National health and safety executives, if relevant.

Stakeholder champion for theworkforceAn individual formally tasked by the client with the responsibility to monitor theworkforce satisfaction and championthe outcomes of theworkforce planon site. The individual canbe internal or external to the project teamwithsufficient authority to influenceworking practices on site and advise the client, design and construction teams.

Other information

None.


ST 04 Owner operator requirements Stakeholders

ST 04 Owner operator requirements


Minimum standards

1 1 Two credits - criteria 1 –8 (Operational performance) -Very good

Aim

To engagewith the asset owner/operator throughout the design and constructionphases to facilitate operationover the lifeof the asset.



One credit - Strategic operational performance indicators (OPIs)

1 At the briefing stage , technical scoping discussions are held with the project owners and existing, or future operators, toevaluate designoptions for the asset that optimise performance of the asset in regards to their operationalrequirements (refer to CN1).

2 Owners/operators and their staff from existing similar infrastructure projects are consulted based on their experience ofdelivering and operating their asset.

3 The proposed options for the asset are evaluated against key criteria and are used to develop operational performanceindicators (OPI) for the project (refer to CN2).



One credit - Operational performance


5 A regular review is undertakenat keyproject gateways (refer to Relevant definitions)with the owner or future operatorof the asset to ascertainwhether the proposed designwillmeet the operational performance indicators (OPI) andtherefore their in-use needs.

6 AllOPIs are achieved for the project (refer to CN3).

7 A post project reviewof the delivery process is undertakenprior to handover and covers as aminimum:7.a How the owner/operator input has influenced the design and constructionof the asset7.b How the completed asset meets the project specific OPIs7.c Lessons learnt from implementing theOPIs.

8 The information is disseminated to all stakeholders involved in the process (from the briefing stage to handover) andwhoever will beworking on future projects for the owner/operator.

Note: Theremaybe crossover with the KPIs referred to in Integrated design.




None.

Compliance notes


CN1 No assetowner/operator atthe strategic stage

If no owner/operator has been identified at the feasibility stage, input should beobtained from contractors or owners or operators of other similar assets to providefeedbackon lessons learnt from their experience of long term operational issues.

CN2 Developingoperationalperformanceindicators

Key criteria that must be established with the owner/operator and used to inform theoperational performance indicators (OPI) for the asset should include as aminimum:1. Technical feasibility2. Maintenance and repair requirements3. Resilience: Extremeweather events, future needs or capacity4. Feedback from current operators on their experience of what works and what

does not5. Environmental impacts6. Cost – Capital and operational costs7. Value for money8. Safety9. Accessibility10. Integrationwithother planned actions in the area11. Dependencies withother sectors road, rail, waterways, utilities etc.TheOPIs must be established before finalising the concept stage for any credits to beawarded for this issue.

CN3 Achieving all OPIsfor the project

BREEAMrecognises that as the project progresses the operational requirements mayalso be adapted to meet the needs of the owner and operator.Where anyof theOPIs are not achieved for the asset at completion, full justificationmustbe provided along withwritten confirmation from the asset owner and operator thatthe operationof the asset will not be compromised to award the 'Operationalperformance' credit.

Methodology

None.


ST 04 Owner operator requirements Stakeholders

Evidence



1 – 3 Strategic OperationalPerformance Indicatorsdocumentation

N/A N/A


Post project review



Keyproject gatewaysThis definitionof keyproject gateways refers to project delivery phases. shown in chronological order in reference todelivery as:1. Concept design2. Definition3. Design4. Build and commission5. Handover and close out6. In-use.

Other information


Local wellbeing BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

Local wellbeing

Category overview


refer to country reference sheet in theASWL LW02 Social impact

Summary

This category encourages project teams to consider how the construction and operationof the asset affects the localcommunity. Issues in this category establish local economic and social priorities through completionof impact assessmentsand reward is givenwheremeasures are implemented that mitigate negative and create positive impact.


Issue ID Credits

LW01 Economic impact Strategic stage - 1Project detail - 5

Demographic profiling and defining the local area impacted by the project to establish the existing socio-economic systemwithinwhich the asset will sitEconomic impact assessment informed by input from key representatives and a baseline established to quantifythe economic impact of the projectMeasures for mitigating negative impacts and opportunities for creating positive impacts identified andimplemented resulting in net positive economic impactAdditional credits for implementing measures that have a local economic benefit beyond the regulatoryminimum

LW02 Social impact Strategic stage -1Project detail - 6

Social impact assessment informed bydemographic profiling and input from key representatives. Proposals areconsulted onwith the community to establishmeasures of local priorityNegative social impacts are sufficientlymitigated as agreed with relevant stakeholders and one or more of thecommunity highpriority needs for positive social impact are implementedAdditional credits for implementing measures that have a local social benefit beyond the regulatoryminimumand of priority to the community


LW01 Economic impact Local wellbeing

LW 01 Economic impact


1 5 None

Aim

To assess issues relating to the local economyand implement measures that result in a net positive economic impact in thelocal area.



Defining the local area of impact (prerequisite)Economic impact assessment (one credit)


Prerequisite - Defining the local area of impact

1 The project team consult with relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions) to define the local areas likely to beimpacted by the asset's construction and operation (refer to CN2). As aminimum the consultation should consider theeffects on local:1.a Businesses (e.g. technical or industrial facilities)1.b Social infrastructure (e.g. schools, hospitals and open space)1.c Connectivity and accessibility (e.g. transport, energy and communications).

2 A reviewof the current demographic profiles and future trends is carried out for the local impacted area (refer to CN3).This is compared with local, regional, and national data to provide context for appropriately addressing local needs.

One credit - Economic impact assessment


4 Aneconomic impact assessment (refer to Relevant definitions) is developed by an independent party (refer to Relevantdefinitions) before completionof the concept. The assessment clearly identifies the economic needs within the local areaand the opportunities for mitigating negative and creating positive economic impacts.

5 The assessment uses a baseline to quantify the economic impact of the project on the local area. Scenarios aremodelledwith and without the asset in-situ in order to assess the positive and negative impacts, or demonstrate that no significanteffects are likely. The studyperiod of themodelling should alignwith the service life of the asset (refer to ID 05 Whole lifecosting).

6 Relevant stakeholders are involved in reviewing the project's opportunities to mitigate negative and create positiveeconomic impacts.

7 The project delivery team or contractor (as applicable) commit to:7.a Implement measures that mitigate anynegative impact from the project on the local economy7.b Implement measures that create a positive impact on the local economybeyond the regulatoryminimum (refer

to CN4)



7.c Regularly review throughout design and construction the impacts of the implemented measures (bothmitigation and positivemeasures) on the local economy. This includesmonitoring, reviewing, and adjusting(where necessary) any specific targets that are set.



Net positive economic impact (one credit)Measures that create a positive economic impact (up to four credits)


One credit - Net positive economic impact

8 Themeasures for mitigating negative impacts and creating positive impacts identified in the strategic stage assessmentare reviewed, and where necessary updated, based ondetailed designproposals and the latest needs within the localimpacted area.

9 Changes to either the designor constructionprocess continue to be assessed in terms of their net economic impact bythe project team (refer to CN5). Newsignificant impacts or measures are reflected in the economic impact assessment.

10 Measures to mitigate negative and create positive economic impact are implemented beyond the regulatoryminimum(refer to CN4).

11 The development will result in a net positive impact oneconomic activity in the local area (refer to CN6).

Up to four credits -Measures that create a positive economic impact


13 Additional credits canbe awarded in accordancewith Table 16 where a percentage of relevant measures (refer to CN7)are implemented that:13.a Provide local procurement opportunities during constructionor operation13.b Provide local people access to off-site employment during constructionor operation13.c Provide local people access to on-site employment during constructionor operation13.d Provide opportunities for inward investment or consumer expenditure in the local area13.e Provide training opportunities that upskill local unemployed or vulnerable groups13.f Support continuity of local income13.g Support local enterprise13.h Support local productivity13.i Support local trades, skills, training providers (refer to Additional information) or facilities.

Table 16:Credits associated with implementationof measures that create local positive economic impact

Requirements Associated credits

25%of relevant measures implemented 1







Note:Only full credits canbe awarded within BREEAMand therefore the relevant percentage achieved should berounded down to the lower credit allocation.For example, if fivemeasures are deemed relevant and three out of five (60%) are implemented then two creditsshould be awarded.


Table 17:Measures for creating positive local economic impact and examples of their implementation

Measure Example of implementation

Training opportunities that up-skill locally unemployed andother vulnerable groups

The project supports and promotes the provisionof training or apprenticeships inthe local area during planning, designor construction.

Local trades, skills, trainingproviders or facilities

The client or contractor partners with a training provider to promote andcontribute to a legacyof enhanced training and skills for local residents andbusinesses that continues beyond the constructionof the asset.

On-site employment duringconstruction and operation

Jobs associated with the constructionor operationof the asset are advertisedlocally througha number of media. Jobs canbe:1. Temporary or permanent2. Part-time or full-time3. Apprenticeships

Off-site employment duringconstruction and operation

Direct (e.g. designoffice jobs or factory production) and indirect jobs (e.g.management of newservices or social infrastructure) associated with the design,construction and operationof the asset and surrounding infrastructure areadvertised locally througha number of media.

Continuity of local income No financial loss is incurred by local businesses as a result of the constructionof theasset. Businesses that remainopenare compensated for any loss of incomethroughout the constructionperiod (where losses are clearly demonstrated). Forbusinesses that cannot continue to operate compensation is provided to cover allreasonable costs, including relocation costs and any loss of incomeduringrelocation.



Measure Example of implementation

Procurement opportunitiesduring construction andoperation

Opportunities to provide products or services are advertised locally and relevantbusinesses are identified and invited to tender at the beginning of the tenderprocess. Local businesses are given sufficient time to respond to the invitation.Opportunities could include:1. Short term contracts related to the constructionof the asset2. Long term contracts related to the operationof the assetConsideration should be given to howprocurement contracts might improve theeconomic, social and environmentalwellbeing of the area before the constructionprocess is started.The award of contracts should be based ona balance of factors including localproximity of the supply chain.

Opportunities to attract inwardinvestment or consumerexpenditure

Opportunities can include newor enhanced:1. Amenities2. Facilities3. Services4. Businesses.

Local enterprise Support is given to promote innovationor growth in local businesses.

Local productivity For example, providing:1. Improved access to jobs2. Enhanced infrastructure for local businesses.

Compliance notes


Simplified criteria

CN1 Simplified criteria For assessment of this issue for projects of a simple nature, refer to theMethodologysection for further information.

General

CN2 Local area of impact The local area of impact is the area likely to experience significant socio-economicimpact due to the construction and operationof the asset. Significant socio-economicimpact should be determined considering:1. The probability, duration, frequency and reversibility of the effects2. The cumulative nature of the effects3. Themagnitude and spatial extent of the effects4. The value and vulnerability of the community likely to be affected.Where relevant, and whenagreed by all relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevantdefinitions), the local area of impact can alignwith the area considered by anenvironmental impact assessment.




CN3 Demographicprofiles

The demographic profile should include information about:1. Age (children, young people, older people and the ageing population)2. Persons with a disability3. Gender and sexual orientation4. Religionor belief5. Race6. Health (life expectancy, obesity, physical activity, mortality associated with illnesses,

dementia, depression,mental health)7. Employment (sectors, incomes, businesses, working patterns, economic activity,

unemployment)8. Education, skills and training9. Populationprojections.Only data available from the local authority or another appropriate statutory body andcensus data need to be considered for the purpose of BREEAM.Where all informationlisted 1-9 is not included, only data available need to be considered for the impactassessment.

CN4 Measures beyondthe regulatoryminimum

For this issue the regulatoryminimum is defined as anymeasures required by theappropriate statutory body (refer to Relevant definitions), e.g. measures mandated togain approval to construct the asset.Measures that go beyond the requirements of the appropriate statutory bodybut aresubsequently incorporated into a planning obligation canbe considered compliantproviding it canbe clearly demonstrated that the project proposed themeasuresabove and beyond anything requested originally.

CN5 Change to thedesignorconstructionprocess (criterion9 )

This criterion canbe deemed compliant where changes are considered in terms ofeconomic impact at regular project teammeetings attended by at least the designer,contractor and relevant socio-economic specialists. The extent to which the economicimpact is considered will be proportionate to the changes being made.

CN6 Net positive impactoneconomic activity

The total net gain in economic activity as a result of the project must be demonstratedagainst the baseline described within criterion5 .To calculate the total net gain in economic activity, the project teammust take intoaccount anynegative economic impacts due to the construction and operationof theasset. Total net gain canbe reported as either:

Gross value added (GVA)EarningsEmployment levelsSkill levels.

CN7 Relevant measuresfor creating localpositive economicimpact

Onlymeasures listed in Table 17 that are relevant to the project need to be includedwhen calculating the percentage of relevant measures achieved.Relevant measures are those included in the economic impact assessment andthereforemeet the needs of the local demographic and are demonstrated to create apositive impact for the local economy.Wheremeasures have been identified as creating local positive economic impact butare not included in Table 17, BREGlobal should be contacted for further guidance.



Methodology

Scope of the economic impact assessment for projects of a simple nature

The scope of the economic impact assessment and resulting actions to create a positive economic impact for projects of asimple nature should reflect the significance and impact of the project on the local community. Theworkundertakenby theproject delivery team in relation to the standard criteria detailed above is described here for these projects.Where specificcriteria are not listed, it would be expected that the criteria aremet as detailed above.

Criterion 1 : Defining the local area of impact

As detailed inCN2 the local area of impact is the area likely to experience significant socio-economic impact due to theconstruction and operationof the asset. For a simple project theremaybeminimal impact beyond the site boundary (forexample, in a rural area) and therefore the area to consider would be the area within the site boundary.

Criterion 2 : Demographic profiles and future trends

For a simple project with little socio-economic impact the demographic profiling maybe a short report to highlight that alimited number of peoplewill be affected by the development.Where this is the case the local authority area should beprofiled and the priorities of the local authority used to inform the economic impact assessment.

Criteria 4 – 7 : Economic impact assessment

Where little socio-economic impact is envisaged because of the project, the economic impact assessment maybe a briefreport. The relevant stakeholders need not include socio-economic specialists where local statutory bodies agree the impactwill beminimal.

Potential positive economic impacts must still be identified and measures established with relevant stakeholders to mitigatenegative and create a positive impact on the local economy.

Criterion5 does not apply to simple projects with little impact on the local community.

Criteria 8 – 11 : Net positive economic impact

Criteria 8 , 9 and 11 do not need to be achieved where the project will have little impact on the local community. However,evidencemust clearly demonstrate that criterion10 (to mitigate negative and create positive economic impact) has beenachieved through verificationby a third party, such as a local authoritywith expertise in economic impact assessment.

Criterion 13 : Measures that create a positive economic impact

For simple projects the number of relevant measures for creating local positive economic impact (refer to CN7)maybesignificantly less than for other larger projects with a greater impact on the local area. Provided the economic impactassessment details relevant measures that are a priority for the local authority and meet the needs of the local demographic,only thesemeasures need to be considered whenawarding credits using Table 16.

For example, if only two measures are deemed of local importance, two credits canbe awarded for implementing onemeasure (or 50%of all relevant measures); four credits canbe awarded for implementing two measures (or 100%of allrelevant measures).

It should be highlighted that measures do not always need to be provided within the local area of impact, but should beaccessible to the community residing within the local area. For example, a client or contractor might choose to partner with atechnical college in a nearby town to contribute to local training and skills. As long as it canbe demonstrated that this isaccessible to local residents or businesses, and is promoted to them, then this canbe seenas aneconomic benefit to the localarea.



Evidence


All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAMevidential requirements section canbe usedto demonstrate compliancewith these criteria.

1 ,2

Demographic and site profiles N/A N/A

4 ,9

Economic impact assessment Updated economic impactassessment

As interim design stage

5 ,11

Economic baseline calculation Calculation to demonstrate netgain in economic activity




Appropriate statutory bodyThis refers to the statutory or legal organisationor entitywhose duty it is to carry out the planning approval functionfor the development area.

Economic impact assessmentThe economic impact assessment should focus on local needs,mitigationmeasures and opportunities for creatinglocal positive impact. As aminimum the assessment includes:1. Considerationof demographic profiles and future trends in the local area (as defined in criteria 1 and 2) and the

priorities of the local authority2. A reviewof local and national planning policy, if relevant, to inform the assessment3. Identificationof potential impacts and their consequential effects on the local economyduring construction and

operationof the proposed project4. Mitigationmeasures to reduce negative impacts of the project on the local economy5. Measures to incorporate into the project to create a positive impact on the local economy.

Independent partyWith respect to compliancewith the criterion relating to using an independent party, the client or design team needsto demonstrate they have used a party independent of the designprocess to conduct the assessment withknowledge and experience of economic impact assessment processes including howeconomic activity, enhancedskills and productivity canbe affected bydevelopment. For simple projects a member of the project teamwhosework is independently verified canbe deemed appropriatewhere verification is provided by a third party, such as alocal authoritywith expertise in economic impact assessment.

Relevant stakeholdersFor the purpose of this issue, relevant stakeholders include national or local statutory bodies, local business networksand socio-economic specialists.

Training provider



A training provider could include (but is not limited to):1. Technical colleges2. Universities3. Higher educational institutions4. Apprenticeship schemeproviders.

Vulnerable groupsA vulnerable group is onewhosemembers have a need for care and support, are experiencing or at riskof abuse orneglect, or thosewho are unable to protect themselves against harm or exploitation. Refer to ST 01 Consultationplan:CN2 for examples of thosewho maybe included within vulnerable groups.

Other information

Socio-economic impact assessments

Major infrastructure projects required to undertake anenvironmental impact assessment are likely to address socio-economic impacts in someway. Socio-economic impact assessments canbe used for this purpose.

Where a socio-economic impact assessment is developed and the scope covers the requirements of this issue, this canbeused as evidence to demonstrate compliance in place of aneconomic impact assessment.

Crossover with issue LW 02 Social impact

BREEAMrecognise that there is crossover between the economic and social impact assessment and measures that create alocal positive impact. However, reward is given independently to recognise the importance of addressing bothof theseissues.

Measures that are equally valuable for economic and social enhancement canbe rewarded inboth issues. For example,althoughhealth benefits are included asmeasures that can create a positive local impact in LW02 Social impact, where it canbe demonstrated that themeasures also create a positive impact on the local economy these canbe included whencalculating the net increase in economic activity.


LW02 Social impact Local wellbeing

LW 02 Social impact



Minimum standards

1 6 One credit - criteria 7 – 13 (Measures that mitigate negativeand create positive social impact) - Outstanding

Aim

To identify issues of importance to the local community and implement measures that mitigate negative impact and result ina positive social impact in the area.



Prerequisite - Defining the local area of impact

1 Criteria LW01 Economic impact: 1 – 2 are achieved.

One credit - Social impact assessment


3 A social impact assessment (SIA, refer to Relevant definitions) is developed by an independent party (refer to Relevantdefinitions) before completionof the concept stage. The assessment clearly identifies the social needs within the localareas and the opportunities for mitigating negative and creating positive social impacts (refer to CN2).

4 Relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions) are involved in:4.a Reviewing opportunities defined in the SIA and commenting on their appropriateness to the scale of the project4.b Defining the project's scope to create a positive social impact (refer to CN3)4.c Establishing anappropriate dispute resolutionprocess to ensure negative social impacts will be effectively be

mitigated (refer to CN4).

5 The following are included as part of the 'Further consultation'process detailed in ST 02 Consultation and engagement:5.a The project's scope to create a positive social impact5.b The social impacts resulting from the project in construction and operation5.c Proposals for mitigating negative social impacts within the local area or areas, and measures that create a

positive social impact5.d Themeasures of local social importance and their relative priority in order of desirability, e.g. low,medium and

high, taking into account any strategies for the local area

6 The project delivery team or contractor (as applicable) commit to:6.a Implement measures that mitigate negative impact from the project on the local community.6.b Implement measures that create a positive impact on the local society beyond the regulatoryminimum (refer to

Appendix B)6.c Regularly review throughout design and construction stages the impacts of the implemented measures (both

mitigation and positivemeasures) on the local community. This includesmonitoring, reviewing, and adjusting(where necessary) any specific targets that are set





Up to six credits -Measures that mitigate negative and create a positive social impact

7 Themeasures for mitigating negative impacts and creating positive impacts identified in the strategic stage assessmentare reviewed, and where necessary updated, to account for the consultation feedbackand the latest needs of the localdemographic.

8 The project demonstrates that feedbackhas influenced the design and constructionof the final asset.

9 Changes to the designor constructionprocess continue to be assessed in terms of their social impact by the projectteam (refer to CN5). Newsignificant impacts or measures are reflected in the social impact assessment.

10 Oncemeasures to mitigate negative impact have been fully defined (during definition and design), the relevantstakeholders are given the opportunity to review these. If they are not agreed to be sufficient, the dispute resolutionprocess (refer to criterion4.c) should be used to ensuremitigation is appropriate (refer to CN4) and the agreedmeasures are implemented.

11 Measures to mitigate negative and create positive social impact are implemented beyond the regulatoryminimum (referto CN6).

12 Measures to create a positive social impact are prioritised to reflect the needs of the community (refer to criterion5.d)taking into account any strategies for the local area.

13 Credits are awarded based on the level of local needs and priorities that have been incorporated into the project andimplemented as detailed in Table 18, i.e. one or more of the local highpriority needs are incorporated into the projectand implemented (refer to CN7).

Table 18:Credits associated with implementationof measures that enhance local social impact


One or more of the highpriority needs 1

All of the highpriority needs 3

All of the high and medium priority needs 5

All of the high,medium and lowpriority needs 6

Note:The enhanced social impact credits canonly be awarded where the needs of the community are being met.Table 19 gives some examples of measures that can increase the social impact of the project, however, these are notmandatory to achieve compliance.




Table 19: Examples of measures that could be implemented to enhance local social impact

Measure Example of how to implement

Opportunities foreducation and knowledgetransfer

The project could support and promote the provisionof education and knowledgetransfer in the local area during the planning, constructionor operationof the asset. Thisincludes:1. Providing constructionupdates for the local community and wider public2. Providing access to site (e.g. throughorganised site visits or a viewing platform)3. Communicating the aim of the project and wider issues it tackles4. Supporting engineering education and knowledge transfer (e.g. through local

science, technology engineering and maths (STEM)networks or professionalinstitutions)

5. Providing education in schools on the impact of the project.

Maintaining or enhancingexisting communityfacilities and amenities

The project could support themaintenance or upgrade of facilities and amenities, such as:1. Community buildings or localmeeting places2. Education and library services3. Leisure facilities (free or priced) and other sports facilities (e.g. tennis courts, football

pitches, swimming pools, etc.)4. Health and social care services (e.g. pharmacies, medical centres, GP surgeries, etc.)5. Shops or markets6. Allotment space or places for growing freshproduce7. Communication services such as public internet access or postal facilities8. Banks or cashmachines9. Public houses10. Places of religious worship.Maintenance could include physical improvements to existing facilities or facilitating longtermmanagement of these services.

Providing or upgradingnatural green space (referto Relevant definitions)

The project could support the development of newor improved natural green space,such as:1. Public parks2. Village greens3. Children's playgrounds4. Local nature reserves.The space should be accessible green space (refer to Relevant definitions).



Measure Example of how to implement

Sustaining or enhancingthe perceptionof safety inand around the sites andpreventing opportunitiesfor crime

The project could enhance the perceptionof safety in and around the site duringconstruction and operation. The following principles fromwithin BRE's Environmental sitelayout planning guidance should be applied:1. Prospect, i.e. the view length in all directions from a specific viewing point. A low

prospect will reduce the possible control of a given area bypotential victims2. Refuge, i.e. howeasy it is for a potential attacker (or perceptionof an attacker) to

hide in or next to anopen space. Refuge can include hiding places, dark spots, treesand shrubs, parked cars and building enclosures

3. Escape, i.e. degree to which a space affords anopportunity for escape:either anexitroute from a potential threat, or by reaching someone elsewho could respond incase of an attack, e.g. shops, bars, open receptions

Lighting, where properly designed canalso support safety perception and reduceopportunities for crime.

Enhancing accessibility tosocial infrastructure (healthservices, leisure facilities,open space, transporthubs, etc.)

The project team could enhance accessibility to social infrastructure by applying inclusivedesignprinciples to newor existing access ways or signage. Please refer to ST 02Consultation and engagement for further details of the inclusive design strategy.

Enhancing accessibility orconnectivity toMEICA services (refer toRelevant definitions)

The project team could enhance accessibility or connectivity to MEICA services throughinstallationof newservices or improvement of existing services.

Opportunities to enhancehealth

Opportunities to enhance health could include improving air or water quality, reducingnoise, or increasing uptake of active travel. However, this should exclude the intendedfunctionor service provided by the asset (refer to CN7).

Compliance notes


CN1 Simplified criteria For assessment of this issue for projects of a simple nature, refer to theMethodologysection for further information.




CN2 Potential socialimpacts

The social impact assessment may look to address:1. Sustaining existing communities2. Sustaining existing amenities and (where feasible and desired) inclusionof new

amenities3. Enhancing accessibility to social infrastructure (health services, leisure facilities,

open space, etc.)4. Opportunities to enhance health (e.g. improve air quality, reduce noise, encourage

active travel etc.)5. Opportunities to reduce crime and enhance community safety6. Opportunities to eliminate discrimination, harassment and victimisation7. Opportunities to enhance social cohesion and advance equality between local

minorities and other groups8. Opportunities for education and knowledge transfer

CN3 Clearly defining theproject's scope tocreate a positivesocial impact

It is important that the scope of the social impact assessment is clearly defined so thatcommunity aspirations for social enhancement are achievable and the process is notdominated bydisputes outside of the scope of the project. For example, anybudgetarylimits or measures outside of the control of the project should be clearlycommunicated.The scale of the consultation and measures implemented will be dependent on thescale of the project and the locationof the site (urbanor rural, densely or sparselypopulated).However, a consistent approach should still be takenas detailed in ST 02 Consultationand engagement.

CN4 Appropriatedispute resolutionprocesses

The dispute resolutionprocess should be one inwhich an independent party (refer toRelevant definitions) facilitates communications between the client and design teamand the relevant stakeholders. The independent party should be agreed between theseindividuals at the concept design stage.Mediationor conciliationwould be anappropriate dispute resolutionprocess for the purpose of this issue (refer to Otherinformation).At the project detail assessment stage, the dispute resolutionprocess only needs to beimplemented if mitigationmeasures are not agreed to be sufficient. If a resolutioncannot be agreed with the relevant stakeholders, the credits can still be awarded if theindependent party is satisfied that the process is undertaken robustly and mitigation isappropriate to the scale of the project.It should be noted that it is not expected that all significant impacts will be eliminated;however, this requirement is included to ensure the best approach for reducingnegative impact is achieved througha transparent process.

CN5 Change to thedesignorconstructionprocess (criterion9 )

This criterion canbe deemed compliant where changes are considered in social impactat regular project teammeetings attended by at least the designer, contractor andrelevant socio-economic specialists. The extent and scope to which the social impact isconsidered will be proportionate to the changes being made.




CN6 Measures beyondthe regulatoryminimum

For this issue the regulatoryminimum is defined as anymeasures required by theappropriate statutory body (refer to Relevant definitions), e.g. measures mandated togain approval to construct the asset.Measures that go beyond the requirements of the appropriate statutory body, but aresubsequently incorporated into a planning obligation, canbe considered compliant;providing it canbe clearly demonstrated that the project proposed themeasuresabove and beyond anything requested originally.

CN7 Measures thatcreate a positivesocial impactbecause of theproject

Opportunities to create a positive social impact because of the project should excludethe intended functionor service provided by the asset. For example, a flood defencescheme should always protect property and people, and therefore this would not berewarded as a social benefit for this type of project. The holistic approach to deliveringan infrastructure asset that meets the inherent need for the project is rewarded inintegrated design.Within this issue, BREEAMwill reward projects that show improved social enhancementbeyond the intended functionof the asset, for example a flood defence scheme thatimproves water quality locallywould be rewarded.

Methodology

Scope of the social impact assessment for projects of a simple nature

The scope of the social impact assessment and resulting actions to create a positive social impact for projects of a simplenature should reflect the significance and impact of the project on the local community. Theworkundertakenby the projectdelivery team in relation to the standard criteria detailed above is described here for these projects.Where specific criteria arenot listed, it would be expected that the criteria aremet as detailed in the standard criteria.

Defining the local area of impact

Criterion1

Refer to the simplified methodology in LW01 Economic impact.

Note: The area of impact maybe the same for both LW01 Economic impact and LW02 Social impact, however, the prioritiesof the local authoritywould be those of social, rather thaneconomic, importance for this issue.

Social impact assessment

Criteria 3 – 6 :

Where little socio-economic impact is envisaged because of the project, the social impact assessment maybe a brief report.The relevant stakeholders need not include socio-economic specialists where local statutory bodies agree the impact will beminimal. A dispute resolutionprocess should still be established, however, this should reflect the scale of the project and canbe an informal process as agreed with the relevant stakeholders.

Consultation carried out in ST 02 Consultation and engagement canbe scaled to reflect the impact of the project and only thefollowing needs to be included:

1. The project's scope to create a positive social impact (refer to CN3)2. Proposals for mitigating negative social impacts within the local area and measures that create a positive social impact3. Themeasures of local social importance and their relative priority, e.g. medium or high, taking into account any strategies

for the local area



Measures that mitigate negative and create a positive social impact

Criteria 7 – 13 :

Criteria 7 and 9 do not need to be achieved where the project will have little impact on the local community. However,evidencemust clearly demonstrate that criteria 8 and 10 – 12 have beenachieved.

In reference to criterion13 , the number of relevant measures for creating local positive social impact (refer to CN7)maybesignificantly less than for other projects with a greater impact on the local area. Provided the results of the consultationconfirm the relevant high and medium priority needs of the community, only thesemeasures need to be considered whenawarding credits using Table 20 rather thanTable 18 in themain criteria.

Table 20:Credits associated with implementationof measures that enhance local social impact for projects of a simplenature


One or more of the highpriority needs 1

All of the highpriority needs 3

All of the high and medium priority needs 6

In some instances, due to the scope of measures that canbe encompassed by the project, theremaybe only one highpriorityneed and therefore three credits could be awarded for only onemeasure being implemented. This would need to beconfirmed through the results of the SIA and consultation.

It should be highlighted that measures do not always need to be provided within the local area of impact, but should beaccessible to the community residing within the local area. For example, a client or contractor might choose to maintainexisting community facilities in a neighbouring area. As long as it canbe demonstrated that this is accessible to local residentsor businesses, and it is a priority to them to address, then this canbe seenas a social benefit to the local area.

Evidence


All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAMevidential requirements section canbe usedto demonstrate compliancewith these criteria.

1 Demographic and site profiles N/A N/A

3& 9

Social impact assessment Updated social impactassessment




Accessible green space



Places that are available for the general public to use free of charge and without time restrictions (although somesites maybe closed to the public overnight and theremaybe fees for parking a vehicle). The places are available to all,meaning that every reasonable effort is made to ensure the space is inclusive (refer to the relevant definitionof'Inclusive design strategy' in ST 02 for general principles). An accessible placewill also be known to the target users,including potential users who livewithin the site catchment area.

Appropriate statutory bodyThis refers to the statutory or legal organisationor entitywhose duty it is to carry out the planning approval functionfor the development area.

Independent partyWith respect to using an independent party to develop the SIA, the client or design team needs to demonstrate theyhave used a party independent of the designprocess to conduct the assessment with knowledge and experience ofsocial impact assessment processes including howhumanhealth, equality and social cohesion canbe affected bydevelopment. Amember of the project teamwhosework is independently verified canbe deemed appropriatewhere verification is provided by a third party, such as a local authoritywith expertise in social impact assessment.The independent party for the dispute resolutionprocess should have the same independence, knowledge andexpertise, however, they cannot be amember of the project team, therefore different individuals maybe required.

MEICAMechanical, Electrical, Instrumentation, Communication and Automaton services.

MEICA connectivityMEICA connectivity refers to a safe and reliable connectionbetween systems and the customer. The system should beadaptable to the customer, for example offering reliable connection and appropriate technology to allow the serviceto be accessible.

Negative social impactsNegative social impacts because of the construction and operationof a project canbewide ranging where notadequately addressed by the project team. As such, BREEAMdoes not look to definitively define all of these, however,impacts could include:1. Noise and vibration2. Poor air quality3. Light pollution4. Ground and surfacewater pollution5. Transport disruption6. Severance7. Displacement of people from their homes (compulsory purchase)8. Displacement of businesses

Natural green spacePlaces where human control and activities are not intensive so that a feeling of naturalness is encouraged topredominate. Natural and semi-natural green space exists as a distinct typologybut also as discrete areas withinmost other green space typologies.

Relevant stakeholdersFor the purpose of this issue relevant stakeholders include national or local statutory bodies, local communityorganisations and socio-economic specialists.

Social impact assessmentThe social impact assessment should focus on local needs and opportunities. As aminimum the assessment includes:1. Considerationof demographic profiles and future trends in the local area and the priorities of the local authority2. A reviewof local and national planning policy if relevant, to inform the assessment3. Identificationof potential impacts and their consequential effects on the local community during construction and

operationof the proposed project (refer to CN2)4. Mitigationmeasures to reduce negative impacts of the project on the local community5. Actions to incorporate into the project to create a positive social impact



Other information

Socio-economic benefits of green space

The 2012 review, 'Microeconomic Evidence for the Benefits of Investment in the Environment'15 published byNatural Englandprovides evidence for the economic and social benefits of green infrastructure. These benefits include:economic growth,health and productivity, attractiveness, housing and property values, climate changemitigation and adaptation, air qualityimprovement, noise reduction, tourist and recreation attraction, community cohesion, and economic and social dynamism.

Socio-economic and other impact assessments

Major infrastructure projects required to undertake anenvironmental impact assessment are likely to address socio-economic impacts in someway. Socio-economic impact assessments canbe used for this purpose.

Where a socio-economic impact assessment is developed and the scope covers the requirements of this issue, this canbeused as evidence to demonstrate compliance in place of a social impact assessment. Similarly, where a project has completedother assessments (e.g. equalities impact assessments or health impact assessments)which cover the requirements of thisissue then these can also be used as evidence for demonstrating compliance.

Mediation and conciliation

Mediationor conciliation refers to a process inwhich an independent third party reopens or facilitates communicationsbetweenparties and so aids the settlement process. The process canbe facilitative in that the third partymerely tries to aidthe settlement process (usually referred to mediation), or evaluative in that the third party comments on the subject matter ormakes recommendations as to the outcome (usually referred to as conciliation).


Transport BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

Transport

Category overview


Refer to the country reference sheet in theASWL Tra 01 Transport impact assessment

Summary

This category encourages effectivemanagement of transport by identifying the impacts in a transport impact assessmentand implementing mitigationmeasures as part of a travel and logistics planduring construction and operationof the asset.

Category summary

Issue Credits

Tra 01 Transport impact assessment Strategic stage - 1Project detail - 2

Assessing the transport impact of the proposed asset

Tra 02 Travel and logistics plan Strategic stage - 1Project detail - 5

Development, implementation and monitoring of the travel and logistics plan

Tra 03 Transport connectivity Strategic stage - 1Project detail - 1

Completionof a transport connectivity assessment and implementing measures that enhance transport linkswithin the community impacted by the construction and operationof the asset


Tra 01 Transport impact assessment Transport

Tra 01 Transport impact assessment


1 2 Two credits - all criteria 3 – 10 - Good

Aim

To assess the potential transport impacts and reduce traffic congestiongenerated in and around the asset duringconstruction and operation.



One credit - Strategic transport impact assessment

1 A strategic transport impact assessment or statement is carried out to determine key transport impacts due to theconstruction and operationof the asset on a project wide scale.

2 The assessment covers theminimum content (refer to CN1) and relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions) areconsulted on the content. Feedback from stakeholders is incorporated into the assessment.



Updating the transport impact assessment (prerequisite)Transport assessment at the construction stage (one credit)Transport assessment at the operational stage (one credit)


Prerequisite - Updating the transport impact assessment

3 The transport impact assessment or statement detailed within the strategic assessment criteria is updated for theconstruction and operational stages, to be in linewith the project details (refer to CN2 and CN3).

4 Relevant stakeholders are consulted on the content of the updated assessment or statement. Feedback fromstakeholders is incorporated into the assessment.

5 The assessment or statement follows national best practice guidance for transport impact assessments (refer toAppendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)) and contains as aminimum:5.a Existing site information including locationof the site, access and constraints5.b Existing transport needs and facilities at the site and how these relate to the proposed transport needs and

facilities for the newdevelopment including anassessment of baseline data (refer to Relevant definitions).

One credit - Transport impact assessment at the construction stage


7 The assessment or statement includes:



7.a Anassessment of potential transport impacts on the community and environment as a result of theconstructionprocess (refer to CN4)

7.b Options for mitigating the identified transport impacts7.c Targets and objectives to demonstrate best practice.

Note: Table 21 provides examples of possiblemitigationmeasures for constructionof the asset.

One credit - Transport impact assessment at the operational stage


9 The assessment or statement includes:9.a Anassessment of potential transport impacts on the community and environment as a result of the operation

of the asset (refer to CN4)9.b Options for mitigating the identified transport impacts9.c Targets and objectives to demonstrate best practice.

10 The assessment or statement considers the impacts and benefits of the following situations:10.a The asset is not constructed10.b The proposed asset in operation.

Note: Table 22 contains examples of possiblemitigationmeasures for operationof the asset.


Table 21:Considerations for mitigationmeasures to be included as part of the transport impact assessment for theconstructionof the asset

Area of mitigation Considerations

Constructionof the asset

Optimising construction site traffic 1. Assess size of vehicles versus frequencyof movements2. Provide awareness courses, promoting safe and efficient driving for

drivers of all transport modes (refer to ST 03 Responsible constructionpractices)

3. Provide on-site services such as catering to reduce travel off-site duringtheworking day

4. Use lowemission vehicles and plant5. Maintain standard working hours where practicable6. Minimise the loss of parking and loading facilities7. Assess off-site assembly for appropriate components (balanced with

distances travelled and loads transported)8. Plan and carry out multi-purpose or linked trips9. Assess opportunities to reduce themass or volume of material that

needs to be transported10. Source localmaterials or suppliers where appropriate, e.g. inviting

appropriate local suppliers to tender for work11. Address impacts resulting from the scale of development.




Efficientlymanage constructiontraffic

1. Reduce combined impacts from adjacent developments, e.g. throughliaising with adjacent development teams and adjusting delivery times orreprogramming works

2. Adapt the road networkor footpaths to support construction traffic3. Change the road network to accommodate construction traffic and

access to site, to mitigate impact onexisting journey times, distancestravelled and public transport services

4. Implement systems to reduce congestion caused by vehicles entering andleaving site, e.g. advanced notificationof arrival times, queuemanagement processes

5. Plan construction transport routes to avoid residential areas, businessesand sensitive receptors and identify backup routes approved by therelevant authority

6. Coordinatewith local transport authorities and transport operators7. Implement procedures for managing use of a transport networkwhere

the project takes over part of the road network, railway lines orwaterways.

Efficientlymanage temporarymeasures

1. Plan temporary road closures to be as short as practicable2. Complete diversions before closing existing routes3. Put controls in place to ensure safe pedestrian and cycle routes4. Provide suitable signage, lighting and barriers5. Ensure diversions are fully accessible and in linewith national legislationor

best practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standardsand Weightings List (ASWL)), where practicable

6. Provide alternative transport services or amenities where severancewillbe for anextended time, e.g. more than threemonths.

Minimising pollution including dust,noise, CO

2emissions, NO

x, particulate

and other emissions

1. Determine themost sustainable transport options based on the averageCO

2emissions (kg/km) for construction labour and the average CO

2emissions (kg/tonne/km) for materials or waste

2. Use low-emission vehicles and equipment3. Inform staff, subcontractors and visitors about adopting sustainable

driving practice, e.g. engines are turned off whilewaiting to be unloadedetc.

4. Provide regular maintenance of construction vehicles.

Reduction in severance 1. Maintain access where it is reasonably practicable2. Minimise the lengthof time the community is affected3. Limit the need for diversions of public rights of way, cycle routes and limit

the length and time the diversions are in place4. Provide local residents and businesses with advancewarning of the dates

and durationof closures.

Table 22:Considerations for mitigationmeasures to be included as part of the transport impact assessment for theoperationof the asset


Operationof the asset




Optimising transportmovements andminimising pollution

1. Public transport accessibility to, from and around the asset, reducing the need foradditional car movements

2. Design routes to, from and around the site to avoid residential areas and sensitivereceptors (in some cases it may also be appropriate to avoid businesses)

3. Coordinatewith local transport authorities and transport operators where applicable4. Encourage sustainablemodes of transport, e.g. throughprovisionor maintenance of

cycle paths, walkways, access to public transport, electric recharging stations5. Good signage, lighting, accessibility to minimise unnecessary journeys.

Reduction in severance 1. For permanent changes in travel patterns ensure journey times are the same or lessthan the original route including access to public amenities, services and facilities

2. Limit the need for diversions of public rights of way, cycle routes, etc.

Other considerations 1. Minimise the loss of existing parking and loading facilities, where appropriate.

Compliance notes


CN1 Minimum contentfor the strategictransport impactassessment

The strategic transport impact assessment should cover the following as aminimum:1. Existing site information including locationof the site access and any constraints2. Existing transport needs and facilities at the site and how these relate to

proposed transport needs and facilities for the newdevelopment3. Transport impacts onboth the community (including vulnerable groups) and the

environment and options for mitigating those impacts4. Opportunities for using sustainablemodes of transport5. Resource strategy for transporting waste and materials.

CN2 Updated transportassessment orstatement (criterion3 )

This does not have to be the original document, it canbe a separate documentcontaining up-to-date information. It does not need to be completed by the author ofthe strategic stage document.




CN3 Transportstatement

A transport statement is suitablewhen the proposed development is expected togenerate relatively lownumbers of trips or traffic flows, withminor transport impacts,e.g. operational transport for a water treatment works. The requirement for atransport statement or assessment will depend on the interactionof proposedtransport with sensitive receptors in the community. As aminimum a transportstatement should include:1. Existing site information including existing uses, site specific considerations and

plans for the site such as whether the site has poor air quality or possible accessconstraints

2. Baseline transport data including existing site travel characteristics, publictransport provision, description and classificationof the surrounding highwaynetworkand analysis of any associated injury accident records

3. Plans for the proposed site layout, scale of development and proposed land usesand main features

4. Expected 'person-trip'generation, distributionof trips across modes and adescription (based on recent site observations) of the travel characteristics of theproposed development.

CN4 Potential transportimpacts

Potential transport impacts must consider the effect on the following as aminimum:1. Public transport2. Walking and cycling3. Road networkand traffic levels4. Levels of pollution including dust, noise, CO

2emissions, NO

x, particulate and any

other significant emissions5. The health and safety of all users of the asset and the surrounding area6. The impacts of phased development and handover, where appropriate7. Hours of operation and seasonal changes if appropriate8. Future uses of anyundeveloped areas of the site and the associated impacts.

CN5 Multiple siteprojects

A project maybe split into a series of smaller subprojects whichmay include lengths ofa linear project or multiple sites. Amultiple site project is defined to be two or moresites.For these larger projects site specific transport assessments are required.

CN6 Analysing theimpacts

Analysing the impacts can include the following indicators:1. Changed journey times, distances or frequencies for private and commercial

vehicle occupants, public transport, pedestrians, cyclists, vulnerable road usersand waterwayusers

2. Permanent changes that will affect roads, public transport, vulnerable users andwaterwayusers

3. Riskof transport accidents4. Number of alterations to road layout, closures, diversions and the associated

impacts5. Changes in access to properties and places of work.The data analysis should include:1. The proposed number of current and proposed 'person trips'or 'vehicle trips'2. The characteristics of the proposed development3. Knownand anticipated peakpatterns of demand for transport systems4. Development generated trips.



Methodology

None.

Evidence



1 – 2 Strategic Transport ImpactAssessment

N/A N/A

3 – 10 N/A Detailed or updated TransportImpact Assessment

As Interim design stagerequirements



Baseline transport dataThis refers to the collectionof data onexisting transport conditions which canbe used to comparewith the expectedfuture conditions for the construction and operationof the asset.

Relevant stakeholdersFor the purpose of this issue relevant stakeholders include as aminimum:

Local authoritiesHighways authorities.

Additional relevant stakeholders could include:Local transport operators (e.g. train or bus companies)Local business representativesRegional, national and specialist transport authoritiesRelevant interest groups or organisations (e.g. transport-related non-governmental organisations (NGOs),charities and associations).

SeveranceThis is the actionof separating the community from facilities and services they usually access.

Sustainable transport modesTransport modes with lowenvironmental impact. For people, examples include travel by foot, bike or publictransport. For materials, examples could includemovements byboat or rail.

Other information

None.


Tra 02 Travel and logistics plan Transport

Tra 02 Travel and logistics plan


1 5 None

Aim

To recognise and encourage effectivemanagement of transport during the construction and operationof the asset



One credit - Strategic level travel and logistics planning

1 A transport liaisongroup is formed by a suitably qualified professional (refer to CN1, CN2 and Relevant definitions) toreviewand comment on the strategic transport impact assessment and:1.a Highlight anyomissions or inaccuracies1.b Suggest priority areas and impacts1.c Make recommendations onmitigationmeasures1.d Suggest how to measure and monitor the success of the transport mitigationmeasures, e.g. surveys, traffic

monitoring1.e Include input from the public, staff, local authorities and transport operators, where applicable.

2 A strategic travel and logistics plan is produced by a suitably qualified professional including, as a minimum:2.a Results of the strategic level transport impact assessment2.b Proposals for mitigating transport impacts2.c Recommendations from the transport liaisongroup2.d Proposed mechanisms to measure and monitor the success of the transport mitigationmeasures.



Travel and logistics plan for the construction stage (one credit)Monitoring the transport of constructionmaterials and waste (one credit)Success of the construction stage travel and logistics plan (up to two credits)Travel and logistics plan for the operational stage (one credit)


One credit - Travel and logistics plan for the construction stage

3 A detailed travel and logistics plan is developed for the construction stage by a suitably qualified professional andreviewed by the transport liaisongroup.

4 The travel and logistics plan:4.a Is informed by the:

4.a.i The travel and logistics plan carried out during the strategic stage assessment4.a.ii The detailed transport impact assessment



4.a.iii Comments from the transport liaisongroup.4.b Includes targets and objectives for the project detail stage (refer to CN3)4.c Includes agreed transport impact mitigationmeasures4.d Encourages sustainablemodes of transport and movements of materials and people4.e Is updated in collaborationwith the transport liaisongroup as travel patterns change or new initiatives are

introduced.

5 Data are collected to monitor the success of the travel and logistics planusing the following indicators as aminimum(refer to CN4):5.a Travel times for the surrounding community5.b The ease of travel and accessibility to, from and around the asset5.c The comfort of travel, e.g. overcrowding onpublic transport or incidents related to road surface quality5.d The proportionof workforce (and materials where relevant) travelling by sustainablemodes of transport.

One credit -Monitoring the transport of construction materials and waste

6 Monitor and record data on transport activities resulting from themovement of themajority of constructionmaterialsto site and constructionwaste from site. As aminimum this must cover:6.a Transport of constructionmaterials from the factory gate to the construction site (refer to Relevant definitions),

including any intermediate storage and distribution. Scope of this monitoring must cover the following as aminimum:6.a.i Materials used for key elements of the infrastructure asset (refer to Mat 01 Environmental life cycle

impacts: Table 36)6.a.ii Materials used for earthworks.

6.b Transport of constructionwaste from the constructiongate to waste disposal processing or recovery centregate. Scope of this monitoring must cover the constructionwaste groups outlined in the project's ResourceManagement Plan (RMP).

7 Using the collated data, report separately for materials and waste, the total transport-related carbondioxide emissions(kgCO

2eq) via the BREEAMInfrastructureOnline tool (refer to theMethodology section for how this must be calculated).

Up to two credits - Success of the construction stage travel and logistics plan

One credit


9 The data collected (refer to CN4) demonstrate that the development has not had a negative impact on:9.a Travel times for the surrounding community9.b The ease of travel and accessibility to, from and around the asset.

Two credits

10 Criteria 8 – 9 are achieved

11 The data collected (refer to CN4) demonstrate that the development has:11.a Not had a negative impact on the comfort of travel11.b Increased the proportionof 'person trips' for sustainablemodes of transport.

One credit - Travel and logistics plan for the operational stage

12 Criteria 3 and 4 are carried out with respect to the operational stage of the development

13 Transport modelling to, from and around the operational asset predicts that there are no adverse effects on theindicators outlined in criterion5

14 Where the asset provides a non-transport-related service, e.g. water treatment, flood defence, the asset requires nonew transport infrastructure.

15 Recommendations for monitoring the impact of transport to, from and around the asset once operational (refer toCN5) are provided in the handover documentation. The handover documentation indicates the predicted movementsand provides guidance onhow to measure existing trafficmovements and compare thesewith the predictions.




None.

Compliance notes


CN1 Simple projects For simple projects, a member of the project team canundertake the role of the'suitably qualified professional'where the transport impact is deemed negligible by thelocal authority. In these cases compliancewith criteria 1 , 3 and CN2 would not require a'suitably qualified professional'.

CN2 Transport liaisongroup see criterion1

The transport liaisongroup can consist of one single group or multiple smaller groups.The groupsmust be organised and managed by a suitably qualified professionalresponsible for developing and implementing the travel and logistics plan.The overall number of people forming the transport liaisongroup will beproportionate to the scale of the project and themake-up should be representative ofthe affected community. Advicemust be sought from relevant stakeholders (refer toRelevant definitions).The transport liaisongroup and the individuals within it may:1. Form part of thewider stakeholder consultation2. Include different individuals at the strategic and project detail stages.

CN3 Setting andmonitoring traveltargets for theconstruction stage

The suitably qualified professional responsible for the travel and logistics plan engageswith the relevant local authorities and organisations onappropriate targets andmonitoring arrangements to ensure that:

Realistic targets are setPeriodic surveys are used to monitor the effectiveness of the travel andlogistics planTargets are set so that it is possible to verify the success of the travel andlogistics plan.

CN4 Data to monitor thesuccess of the traveland logistics plan

Various indicators canbe used to assess the success of the travel and logistics planincluding:

Number of vehiclemovements during peakand off peak timesLengthof journey timesDuration and frequencyof delays and blockagesIncidents of people losing their waybecause of road closures or changes toroad layoutUtilisationof public transportProportionof travel undertakenusing sustainable transport modes.

The data may come from relevant third parties, including local transport operators ortransport authorities, and maybe collected at discrete points throughout the project.To achieve compliance, the assessor must consider the data robust, complete andrepresentative of the project being assessed.




CN5 Monitoringrecommendationsfor in-use stage

Monitoring recommendations will only be necessarywhere travel patterns after theconstructionof the asset are changed because of the newasset.

CN6 Multiple siteprojects

A project maybe split into a series of smaller subprojects whichmay include lengths ofa linear project or multiple sites. Amultiple site project is defined to be two or moresites. These larger projects will require:

Site specific travel and logistics plansA travel and logistics plan coordinator to oversee the implementationof theproject, for smaller multiple site projects this canbe a suitably qualifiedprofessional alreadyworking onone of the sites.

CN7 Small negativeimpacts on travelduring theconstruction stage

Criteria 9 and 11.a require the development has not had a negative impact on:1. Travel times for the surrounding community2. The ease of travel and accessibility to, from and around the asset3. Comfort of travel.Some projects mayhave successfullymitigated construction stage impacts on localtravel but still result in small adverse effects on these transport indicators, e.g. an extra60 seconds walking around a bollard. The credits can still be awarded where smallnegative impacts are recorded if the assessor deems the adverse effects to travel (to,from and around the asset during construction) to be negligible and non-disruptive.In these instances the credits canonly be awarded if all of the following are alsoachieved:1. The transport impact assessment and travel plan credits have beenachieved at

the project detail stage2. Themost current travel and logistics planhas been consulted onand approved by

the local authority and anyother statutory bodies that are impacted by theworks,e.g. highways authorities.

3. The commitments and proposals outlined in themost current travel and logisticsplanhave been fully implemented.

Methodology

Calculating total transport-related carbon dioxide emissions (kgCO2e)

National best practice (Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)) fuel and vehicle-distanceconversion factors should be used to calculate the carbondioxide emissions frommodes of transport for which carbonconversion factors are available. For other modes of transport (freight, rail, sea tanker, cargo ship, planes) refer to carbonfactors for freighting goods.

The first of themethodologies below that is practical to implement must be followed for each vehicle type:

1. If data are available on the amount of fuel consumed, then this should bemultiplied by the fuel emission factor tocalculate the emissions produced.

2. If data are available on the cost of the fuel consumed, then this should be divided by the price (specific supplier’s pricewhere possible, historic average otherwise) to give the amount of fuel consumed,which can thenbe used to calculatethe emissions produced (via method 1).

3. If data are available on the distance travelled, vehicle loading and fuel efficiencyof the vehicle at that loading, then thedistance should be divided by the efficiency to give anestimate of the amount of fuel consumed,which can thenbe usedto calculate the emissions produced (via method 1).



4. If data are available on the distance travelled and fuel efficiencyof the vehicle at average loading, then the distanceshould be divided by the efficiency to give anestimate of the amount of fuel consumed,which can thenbe used tocalculate the emissions produced (via method 1).

5. If data are available on the distance travelled and vehicle loading, then the distance should bemultiplied by the distanceemission factor appropriate for the vehicle type and loading to calculate anestimate of the emissions produced.

6. If data are available only on the distance travelled, then the distance should bemultiplied by the distance emission factorappropriate for the vehicle type at average loading to calculate anestimate of the emissions produced.

Evidence



1 – 2 Strategic Travel and logistics plan N/A N/A

3 – 11 N/A Detailed travel and logistics plan As interim design stagerequirements and collected data

7 N/A Refer to generic evidencerequirement

Calculations for total transport-related carbondioxide emissions



Factory gateFor the purposes of this issue, the factory gate is defined as being the product manufacturer gate (i.e. wheremanufacture and pre-assembly finishes and the product or material is in its final form).Examples might include:1. Quarry gate for aggregate and sand2. Concrete plant for concrete3. Sawmill and timber processing plant for timber4. Dredging or excavation location for soils.

Relevant stakeholdersFor the purpose of this issue relevant stakeholders include:

Local authoritiesHighways authoritiesLocal transport operators (e.g. train or bus companies)Local business representativesRegional transport authoritiesEmergency servicesRelevant interest groups or organisations (e.g. transport-related non-governmental organisations (NGOs),charities and associations).

Suitably qualified professionalAn individual achieving all the following items canbe considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purposes of aBREEAMassessment:



1. Is a practising transport and logistics professionalwith two years relevant experiencewithin the last five years2. Demonstrate competence in performing the role of a transport and logistics professional, as detailed below.The role of the suitably qualified professional is to:1. Develop,manage and monitor the travel and logistic plans2. Promote and encourage the use of sustainable transport through the plan3. Establish and manage a transport liaisongroup with relevant stakeholders4. Coordinate travel surveys to monitor the progress of the travel plan5. Act as a point of information and contact with transport operators, businesses and transport authorities to

coordinate plans and initiatives6. Liaisewithparties within and outside the organisation.These tasks will be scalable depending on the size of the project.

Sustainable transport modesTransport modes with lowenvironmental impact. For people, examples include travel by foot, bike or publictransport. For materials, examples could includemovements byboat or rail.

Travel and logistics planA travel and logistics plan comprises site specific initiatives that aim to improve themovement of people andmaterials to and from a development. It incorporates mitigationmeasures outlined in the transport impactassessment.

Other information

None.


Tra 03 Transport connectivity Transport

Tra 03 Transport connectivity


1 1 None

Aim

To enhance the connectivity of transport networks for community benefit.



One credit - Connectivity assessment

1 A connectivity assessment is developed before finalising the concept stage. The assessment establishes opportunitiesfor enhancing connectivity in and around the asset and includes:1.a A studyof existing connectivitywithin the impacted community (refer to Relevant definitions)1.b Opportunities to enhance connectivity during construction and operationof the asset.

2 The project team reviewopportunities with relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions) to enhance and protectthe existing transport networks, where applicable.

3 The following are included as part of the 'Further consultation'process detailed in ST 02 Consultation and engagement:3.a The connectivity assessment3.b The connectivity impacts resulting from the project in construction and operation3.c Proposals for enhancing connectivity3.d Proposals for minimising and mitigating negative impacts onexisting connections.

Note: Future needs of the community in terms of connectivity are not addressed in this issue. These are considered within thescope of the issue Res 03 Designing for future needs.



One credit - Enhanced connectivity

4 The opportunities for enhanced connectivity identified within the strategic stage assessment are reviewed and updatedto account for the consultation feedbackand input from relevant stakeholders.

5 The project demonstrates that feedbackhas influenced the design (and construction) of the final asset.

6 Measures are implemented, based on the findings of the updated connectivity assessment that enhance transport linkswithin the community impacted by the construction and operationof the asset.

7 At least two measures are implemented that result in an aspect of enhanced connectivity as shown in Table 23 to awardthe credit (refer to CN1).




Table 23:Aspects of enhanced transport connectivity

Ref Aspect of enhanced transport connectivity

A Reduced travel times within the community

B Greater choice of travelmode, a higher frequencyof service, or both

C Greater choice of routes, e.g. newaccess roads, public footpaths, bridleways, cycle paths, etc.

D Improving existing access ways, e.g. resurfacing, widening, delineating routes to improve accessibility andconnectivity

E Reduced severancewithin the community (either existing or because of the asset)

Compliance notes


CN1 Implementingmeasures asappropriate to thescale of the project

The criteria requires that a minimum of two connectivitymeasures are implemented inlinewith the recommendations in the connectivity assessment. This is relevant to simpleprojects.Where the impact of the project on the community is large, for example in denselypopulated areas or highprofile projects, then the number of measures implementedshould be agreed with the local authority.

CN2 Scope of measuresfor transportprojects

For transport projects, such as road and rail, the transport connectivity items A-Emightbe achieved because of the functionof the asset.To award the credit for this issue,measures must also be implemented that improveconnectivity beyond the intended functionof the asset. For example, a road project maylookat improving connectivitywith other road networks, junctions, etc. A rail projectmay lookat improving connectivity for onward travel from the asset.

CN3 Measure identifiedwithin theconnectivityassessment notlisted within Table23

Where ameasure is identified that enhances transport connectivity for the assessedproject is not listed in Table 23, BREGlobal should be contacted for further guidance.

Methodology

None.


Tra 03 Transport connectivity Transport

Evidence



1 – 4 Connectivity assessment Detailed or updated connectivityassessment




ConnectivityThe directness of links and density of connections in a transport network.

Connectivity studyThe studyonexisting transport connectivity and links within the impacted community should establish as aminimum:1. Good transport links and services2. Poor transport links and services3. Current and future projects affecting transport links and services in areas impacted by the project.

Key representatives of the project teamSee ID 02 Project team collaboration .

Relevant stakeholdersFor the purpose of this issue relevant stakeholders include:

Owner or operator of the assetLocal authoritiesLocal highway authoritiesLocal transport operators (e.g. train or bus companies)Local business representativesLocal, regional or national transport authoritiesRelevant interest groups or organisations (e.g. transport-related non-governmental organisations (NGOs),charities and associationsSuitably qualified transport professionals.

Transport connectivityTransport connectivity refers to the directness of links and the density of connections in a transport network. A highlypermeable networkhasmany short links, numerous intersections, and minimal dead-ends. As connectivity increases,travel distances decrease and route options increase, allowing more direct travel betweendestinations, creating amore accessible and resilient transportation system.16

Other information

None.


Land use & ecology BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

Land use and ecology

Category overview


Refer to the country reference sheet in theASWL

LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplanLUE05 Protectionof biodiversity

Summary

This section encourages efficient use of lowvalue land, increasing land valuewhere possible, sustainable remediation forcontaminated land and assessment, protection and enhancement of existing biodiversity and soil resources.


Issue ID Credits

LUE01 Land use and value Strategy - 1Project detail - 3

Use of lowvalue landEnhancing existing land valueEfficient land use

LUE02 Soil and vegetationmanagement Strategy - 1Project detail - 2

Assessing and planning soil resourcemanagementManaging soil resources and vegetation clearance during construction

LUE03 Remediationof land contamination Strategy - 0Project detail - 2

All appropriate site investigations have takenplace to identify and assess possible contaminationPromoting the implementationof sustainable land remediation techniques as verified by a land contaminationspecialist

LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan Strategy -1Project detail - 1

Ecological impact assessment carried out by a suitably qualified ecologist (SQE)Provisionof anecology strategyBiodiversityAction Plan


Land use & ecology

Issue ID Credits

LUE05 Protectionof biodiversity Strategy - 0Project detail - 3

Measures to encourage good management of existing ecological features (as deemed appropriate by the SQE),rewarded in a hierarchy as follows:

ProtectionMitigationCompensation

LUE06 Enhancement of biodiversity Strategy - 0Project detail - 4

Enhancements as deemed appropriate by the SQE including:

Percentage of ecologist recommendations implementedChange in ecological value of the site before and after construction

LUE07 Land use changes Strategy - 1Project detail - 2

Appointing a carbon specialist to advise on the carbon impacts of land use changes over the life of the asset andprovide recommendations to create, enhance and preserve existing carbon sinksDetermining the change in carbon stock (or carbonequivalent emissions or savings) over the life of the assetresulting from land use changes



LUE 01 Land use and value


1 3 None

Aim

To encourage a robust assessment of land constraints, prioritisationof lowvalue land, efficient use of land and enhancementsin land value onand around the project site.



One credit - Assessment of land value

1 A constraints mapping exercise is undertaken to identify either potential routes, sites or both for the project (refer toCN1). Themapping includes:1.a Natural environment, ecological, soil function and agricultural land quality constraints1.b Surfacewater constraints1.c Land ownership, tenure and management constraints1.d Land use constraints (e.g. contaminated land, land stability)1.e Cultural heritage constraints1.f Landscape and amenity constraints1.g Roads and transport constraints.

2 The following are included as part of the 'Further consultation'process detailed in ST 02 Consultation and engagement,(note for this issue the local community stakeholders are to include owners, occupiers and managers of land beingconsidered):2.a The value (or perceived value) of impacted local land areas (refer to Relevant definitions)2.b Proposals for enhancing the local land use (refer to CN2)2.c Proposals for minimising and mitigating impacts onareas perceived by the community and environmental

specialists to have value.

3 The constraints mapping exercise is updated to account for the stakeholder feedbackand key representatives of theproject team identify opportunities to:3.a Minimise use of and impact on valuable land types3.b Maximise efficiencyof project footprint3.c Enhance land use, value and condition (refer to CN2)3.d Input into the stakeholder consultationprocess with respect to land use issue.

4 The project delivery team or contractor's brief includes the following requirements:4.a To evaluate further opportunities to maximise land efficiencyor minimise use of valuable land types or both4.b To evaluate further opportunities to enhance land use, value and condition.




LUE01 Land use and value Land use & ecology

Use of lowvalue land (one credit)Local land value (one credit)Efficient use of temporary land (one credit)


One credit - Use of low value land

5 The constraints mapping exercise and opportunities identified within the strategic stage assessment are reviewed andupdated as the designdevelops with input from key representatives of the project team.

6 For non-linear projects at least 75%of the proposed development's footprint (refer to CN3) is:6.a Onanarea of land whichhas previously beenoccupied by industrial, commercial or domestic buildings or fixed

surface infrastructure6.b Is deemed to be of lowecological value by a suitably qualified ecologist (SQE) (refer to CN8, CN9 and LUE04

Ecological impact assessment and actionplan for a definitionof a SQE).

7 For linear projects:7.a At least 75%of the proposed development's footprint is on land identified as being with 'no constraints' or 'low

constraints' including permanent and temporaryworks7.b The land identified in criterion7.a is also deemed to be on land of lowecological value, as defined by a SQE (refer

to CN8, CN9 and LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan for a definitionof a SQE)7.c The remainder of the proposed development's footprint is on land identified as being with 'moderate

constraints'.

One credit - Local land value

8 The following are enhanced because of the project (refer to CN2, CN4 and CN5):8.a Land use8.b Land value and condition8.c Land usemulti-functionality (refer to Relevant definitions).

9 Land usemanagement and maintenance requirements are identified and included within a long term land managementplan for the operational stage of the project. The plan includes all aspects of land management required to maintain:9.a The operationof the asset9.b Anymitigationmeasures or benefits implemented because of the project and its associated works.

10 The plan is given to the owner/operator at handover with training on the contents of the plan and any specialistrequirements (refer to CN6).

One credit - Efficient use of temporary land

11 The land use involved in the temporaryworks is evaluated by the contractor to seewhere efficiencies canbemade,including considerationof:11.a Choice of land11.b Phasing of work11.c Off-site constructionwhere relevant (refer to Mat 04 Reuse and recycling)11.d 'Just in time'deliveries11.e Clearly defined and wellmaintained material storage areas11.f Any land surveys, assessments and expert recommendations.

12 Efficiencies are demonstrated at the construction stage (refer to CN7).

13 Anynegative impacts on the land because of the temporaryworks are remediated and the land is left in a condition thatis the same or better than the conditionpre-development.


None.



Compliance notes


CN1 Constraintsmapping

This mapping is carried out to determine areas of land onand around the proposedsite or route that fall into one of the following categories:

Areas with high constraints (e.g. legally protected areas, nature reserves,residential areas, buffer zones to protected areas): these areas will requireadditional approvals, surveys and stakeholder consultation, conditions maybeimposedAreas withmoderate constraints (e.g. areas with some flora and fauna,amenity or cultural value): these areas are likely to require additional surveys,stakeholder consultation and mitigationmeasures such as species and habitatrelocationAreas with lowconstraints (e.g. areas that canbe protected throughmitigationmeasures and management plans such as areas adjacent to water courses orgreen corridors): these areas may require additional surveys, approvals andstakeholder engagementAreas with no constraints (e.g. previously developed land with no ecologicalvalue).

The categories will need to be defined by the project team, and will be influenced by theeconomic, social and environmental value of the land. For all projects this should involveexisting datasets and also datasets collected through site investigation. For a largenumber of projects, using geospatialmapping softwarewould be helpful for thisprocess.

CN2 Enhancing local landuse

This refers to positivemeasures to increase the land or amenity value of the site. It couldinclude:

Remediating the land so it canbe used by the community, e.g. for recreationpurposesProviding amenities for the local community, e.g. benches, pathways, recreationareas, community orchards, safewalkways, allotment spaces, greeninfrastructure, etc.Regenerating anexisting community areaEnhancing the quality of agricultural land present in the area, including presenceof best and most versatile land.

CN3 The developmentfootprint

This includes all land areas affected by theworks and so includes both temporary andpermanent land uses.

CN4 Enhanced land use,condition andamenities

This requirement must take into account the improvements identified as a priority forthe community through the stakeholder consultationprocess (refer to ST 02Consultation and engagement).Where priorities are not identified through thisprocess, an informal consultationmust be carried out with local groups andcommunities who will be impacted by the changes, and these groupsmust considerthe proposed improvements to be positive.


LUE01 Land use and value Land use & ecology


CN5 Improved land use The project is deemed to be improving the land use, value, conditionor functionality ofthe project's land footprint and its environs where it provides anenhanced area forpeople, wildlife and community activity.

CN6 Training on land usemanagement

The extent of this training will depend on the extent of the land management andmaintenance required. The training is given to those responsible for managing andmaintaining the land (this maybe a number of individuals, particularly for a largeproject). The training canbe one to one or in a group, but the project teammustdemonstrate that the relevant informationhas been transferred to amember ormembers of the owner/operator team responsible for the land management andmaintenance. It includes the following where relevant:

Management procedures for either the various land types or amenitiesprovided (short and long term), e.g. watering requirements, requirements forgreen infrastructure, footpath (or other amenity)maintenancePotential risks and impacts if land is not managed or maintained in linewith therecommendationsPotential risks and impacts on the land because of the asset's operationAny seasonal or timing constraints.

CN7 Efficiencies intemporary land use

It maynot be possible to demonstrate efficiencies in all areas of criterion11 due toregulatory or other constraints. The contractor must demonstrate that eachof theareas has been considered and measures are in place or decisions have been taken toreduce the size and impact on temporary land use.

CN8 Land of lowecological value

Whendefining land as being of 'lowecological value,' the SQEmust base their findingsondata collected from a site visit conducted at appropriate times of the year, whendifferent plant and animal species are evident. The content of the EcologyReport is tobe representative of the existing site’s ecologyprior to the commencement of initial sitepreparationworks (i.e. before build and commission).Where the ecologist has notvisited the site at the appropriate times the credit cannot be awarded (except in thecircumstances indicated inCN9).

CN9 Site clearance priorto purchase of site

For sites cleared prior to purchase of the site and less than five years beforeassessment, a SQEshould estimate the site’s ecological value immediately prior toclearance using available desktop information (including aerial photography) and thelandscape type or area surrounding the site.Where it is not possible for the SQE todetermine that the sitewas of lowecological value prior to the site clearance then thecredits must bewithheld, i.e. where there is no evidence and therefore no justificationfor awarding the credits.For sites cleared more than five years ago, the ecological value of the site is to be basedon the current situationon the basis that within five years, ecological features wouldhave started to re-establish themselves and therefore act as an indicator of the site’secological value.

Methodology

None.



Evidence



1 – 3 Constraints mapping exercise N/A N/A



Constraints mappingA broadscale desk top assessment tool to guide the planning of site and route selectionwithin the project area.

Key representatives of the project teamFor issues relating to this issue thesewould include the project delivery team, owner/operator and also experts in landuse, ecology, amenity, social provision, landscape, heritage and contamination as appropriate.

Land usemulti-functionalityThis refers to using the land for a number of purposes, e.g. providing benches and picnic areas ona public footpathor providing a green infrastructure corridor as part of an amenity space.

Previously developed landFor the purposes of this issue BREEAMdefines previously developed land as an area which is, or oncewas, occupiedby a permanent structure, including any associated fixed surface infrastructure. The definition excludes:1. Land that is or has beenoccupied by agricultural or forestry buildings2. Land that has beendeveloped for minerals extractionor waste disposal by landfill purposes where provision for

restorationhas beenmade throughdevelopment control procedures3. Land inbuilt-up areas such as parks, recreationgrounds and allotments which, although theymay feature paths,

pavilions and other buildings, have not beenpreviously occupied4. Land that was previously occupied but where the remains of the permanent structure or fixed surface structure

have blended into the landscape in the process of time (to the extent that it can reasonably be considered as partof the natural surroundings).

Value or perceived valueLand with amenity or habitat value as determined througha representative stakeholder consultation (includingcommunity and relevant interest groups) and deskbased research.

Other information

None.


LUE02 Soil and vegetationmanagement Land use & ecology

LUE 02 Soil and vegetation management


1 2 None

Aim

To encourage best practice in soil and vegetationmanagement during construction.


The following are required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Soil strategy and resource plan

1 A soil survey and assessment of soils is undertaken to identify the quality of soils present within the site boundary.

2 A soil strategyor resource plan is developed to identify opportunities for:2.a Reusing permanently displaced soils2.b Storing and protecting temporarily disturbed and displaced soils, including peat where present2.c Restoring land, e.g. for agriculture, forestry, landscaping and biodiversity2.d Preserving and enhancing the quality of agricultural land present in the area to be developed in linewith national

best practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL))2.e Enhancing soil resources and functions, where present.



Up to two credits - Construction stage land management

One credit - Soil resourcemanagement

3 The following are carried out in linewith national best practice guidance or legislation (Appendix B - TheApprovedStandards and Weightings List (ASWL)):3.a A soil resource survey is carried out on site by a suitably qualified soil scientist or practitioner (refer to Relevant

definitions) before any earthworks operations.3.b The results of the soil resource survey are incorporated into either the ResourceManagement Plan (RMP),

MaterialManagement Planor both (refer to Mat 04 Reuse and recycling and Wst 01 Constructionwastemanagement for more informationon these documents)

3.c A Soil Resource Plan is developed, taking into account the results of the soil resource survey, and implemented atthe construction stage. The plan includes the following as aminimum:3.c.i The areas and type of topsoil and subsoil to be stripped3.c.ii Haul routes3.c.iii Themethods to be used for soil handling3.c.iv The location, types and management of each soil stockpile3.c.v Soil placement and reinstatement.



4 Recommendations from a suitably qualified soil scientist or practitioner for maintaining healthy top soil and peat on thesite are included in a land management plan for both long and short term stages. These recommendations arediscussed and agreed with any ecologists responsible for protecting and enhancing biodiversity on site.

5 A suitably qualified soil scientist or practitioner verifies that theworkhas been carried out in compliancewith nationalbest practice guidance or legislation (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).

One credit - Vegetationmanagement

6 The following are included within the vegetation clearance proposals of a land management plan:6.a The areas of vegetationor habitats that require clearing (minimum and maximum)6.b The seasonal timing of vegetation clearance6.c Phasing of vegetation clearance6.d Buffer zones that need to be established6.e Themanagement of invasive floral species including the control of dust and weeds6.f Any international regulations relating to vegetation clearance that will affect sitework6.g Opportunities for composting cleared vegetation excluding invasive species as appropriate6.h Applicationof the 'wood use hierarchy' (only relevant wherewoody vegetation is being cleared from site - see

Other information)6.i Pollution control (refer to the Pollution section)6.j Generalwildlife disturbance prevention (refer to LUE05 Protectionof biodiversity)6.k Preventionof formationof wildlife hazards (refer to LUE05 Protectionof biodiversity)6.l Where vegetation is disposed of off site it is diverted from landfill and sent to a composting or bioenergy facility

where the transport distance is not significantly further than the distance to alternative disposal facilities.

7 The vegetation clearance proposals in the land management planhave been implemented. Changes to the proposalsfor vegetation clearance are agreed with key representatives of the project delivery team.


None.

Compliance notes


None

Methodology

None.


LUE02 Soil and vegetationmanagement Land use & ecology

Evidence



1 – 3 N/A Soil resource survey and plan Refer to generic evidencerequirements above

6 – 7 N/A Land management plan Refer to generic evidencerequirements above



Key representatives of the project delivery teamFor this issue key representatives of the project delivery team include the client, designer, contractor and specialistssuch as ecologists, soil specialists and landscape architects.


Suitably qualified soil scientist or practitionerAn individual achieving all the following items canbe considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purpose of a BREEAMassessment:1. Holds a degree, PhD or equivalent qualification in soils and earth sciences2. Has aminimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Suchexperiencemust clearly

demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting sustainable use of soils in relation to construction andthe built environment; including, acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for short and longterm land management planning

3. Is covered by a professional code of conduct and subject to peer review.

Other information

The wood use hierarchy

Wherewoody vegetation is being cleared on site the following hierarchy (similar to thewaste hierarchy)must be taken intoconsiderationbefore sending wood materials to landfill:

1. The use of timber on site to create deadwood habitats (subject to the advice of a suitably qualified ecologist)2. The productionof solid wood for local use3. The productionof solid wood for national use4. The productionof reconstituted wood product for boards5. Avoiding landfill by sending woodybiomass cleared from site to a bioenergy facility6. Landfill.



LUE 03 Remediation of land contamination


0 2 None

Aim

To encourage the appropriate use of land affected by contamination and to promote sustainable land and ground waterremediation.


None.



Land contamination site investigation and riskassessment (prerequisite)Verificationof site investigation and riskassessment (one credit)Sustainable remediation (one credit)


Prerequisite - Land contamination site investigation and risk assessment

1 Anappropriate site investigation and riskassessment has beenundertakenwhich shows that land within the site is 'landaffected by contamination' (refer to CN1).

One credit - Verification of site investigation and risk assessment


3 A land contamination specialist (see Relevant definitions) verifies the site investigation and riskassessment (refer to CN1and CN2).

One credit - Sustainable remediation


5 A land contamination specialist verifies that the remediation techniques used in the project are themost sustainablesolutions based onanappropriate assessment of the sustainability of potential remediationoptions for the project(refer to CN3).


None.


LUE03 Remediationof land contamination Land use & ecology

Compliance notes


CN1 Appropriate siteinvestigation andriskassessment

Land contamination, site investigations and riskassessments must be carried out inaccordancewith established procedures and national best practice guidance (refer toAppendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)). It is theresponsibility of the land contamination specialist to ensure that work is performed inaccordancewith all relevant procedures and best practice guidance.The specialist is not required to undertake these investigations and assessments but isrequired to verify that they have beenundertakenappropriately.

CN2 Timing ofinvestigation

The investigationmust be completed prior to workcommencing on site for thesecredits to be awarded. The verificationof the report can take place at any time beforecertification.However the project team should bemindful that the verifier may request to see thesite before anyground works take place. There is a risk that by leaving this verification tolater in the process, the credit becomes unavailable.

CN3 Sustainableremediationassessment

The land contamination specialist needs to demonstrate to the assessor that anappropriate assessment has been carried out and that themost sustainableremediation solutions have been selected. The specialist is not required to carry out theassessment themselves, but must verify that it has been carried out appropriately.BREEAMdoes not prescriptively define the process for undertaking sustainableremediation assessments, but expects such assessments to be carried out accordingto current industry national best practice (refer to Appendix B and theMethodologysection).Note: the sustainable remediation assessment could form part of a wider sustainabilityassessment covering other project issues.

CN4 Design life ofremediationsolutions

Where a remediation solutiondoes not remove contamination from the site (e.g. uses aphysical containment method such as a cover layer or barrier system), appropriateconsiderationmust be paid to the design life of the remediation solution to ensure itsdurability and long term effectiveness (e.g. resilience to flooding, drought, accidentaldamage, possible future additional development or changes in land use such as roadwidening, etc.).

CN5 Post-constructionmonitoring andmaintenance ofremediation

Where a remediation solution requires ongoing monitoring and maintenance postconstruction, a comprehensivemonitoring and maintenance programme that definesfuture responsibilities for this workmust be in place before handover of the project.

CN6 Asbestos Where the only remediation required is the removal of asbestos within the fabric ofexisting buildings or structures, the site cannot be classified as 'land affected bycontamination'. However, where asbestos is found to be present in the ground this willbe classed as contamination for the purposes of assessing this issue.



Methodology

Sustainable remediation assessment

The following keyprinciples should be considered in the design, implementation and reporting of sustainable remediationschemes:

Protectionof humanhealth and thewider environmentSafeworking practicesConsistent, clear and reproducible evidence based decision-makingRecord keeping and transparent reportingGood governance and stakeholder involvementSound science.

The process of sustainable remediation requires an assessment of the environmental, social and economic aspectsassociated with remediation, to demonstrate that net benefit exists, i.e. the benefits delivered by remediation exceed thecosts of undertaking remediation. A number of activities are required in this process, including:

Agreeing or setting objectives for the sustainability assessmentIdentifying stakeholders for consultation and engagementSpecifying boundary conditions for the assessment (e.g. system, life cycle, spatial, temporal)Specifying the scope of the assessment including selectionof appropriate environmental, social and economicindicatorsDeciding themethodology to be used for the assessment (e.g. qualitative, semi-quantitative, quantitative)Deciding how to dealwith uncertainty (e.g. sensitivity analysis)Clear recording of decisions and of the assumptions used to make decisions.

Sustainability indicators that could be used in an assessment include, but are not limited to, the following:

Environmental indicatorsAir (e.g. emissions affecting climate change and air quality)Soil and ground conditions (e.g. changes in physical, chemical, biological soil condition that affects theecosystem functiongoods or services provided by soils)Groundwater and surfacewater (e.g. changes in the release of contaminants (including nutrients), dissolvedorganic carbonor silt and particulates; impacts of water abstraction; flooding issues)Ecology (i.e. impacts onecology and biodiversity)Resources and waste (e.g. impacts of primary resource use, waste generation, energy and water use).

Social indicatorsHumanhealth and safety (e.g. safeworking practices, riskmanagement)Ethics and equality (e.g. regulatory compliance; community engagement; equality impact assessment)Neighbourhood and locality (e.g. effects from dust, light, noise, odour and vibrations during works andassociated with traffic)Communities and community involvement (e.g. effective communicationwith local community; stakeholderengagement in decision-making)Uncertainty and evidence (e.g. quality of investigations, assessments and plans;optimised data collection).

Economic indicatorsDirect economic costs and benefits (e.g. direct financial costs and benefits of remediation for organisation;consequences of capital and operation costs, and sensitivity to alteration)Indirect economic costs and benefits (e.g. long term or indirect costs and benefits including avoidingfinancing debt, prosecutionor fines through regulatory compliance, changes in site, local land or propertyvalues)Employment and employment capital (e.g. job creation; skills and training; local employment)Induced economic costs and benefits (e.g. opportunities for inward investment; ability to affect otherprojects in the area by client to enhance economic value)Project lifespanand flexibility (e.g. climate changemitigationor adaptation, long term institutional control).


LUE03 Remediationof land contamination Land use & ecology

Evidence


1 & 3 Site investigation and riskassessmentVerification from the landcontamination specialist

N/A N/A

5 N/A Assessment report on thesustainability of potentialremediationoptionsRemediation strategy andimplementationplan for theprojectVerification from the landcontamination specialist

Verification report for theremediationworks and, ifapplicable, the long termmonitoring and maintenanceprogramme



Construction zoneFor this BREEAMissue, the construction zone is defined as any land on the sitewhich is being developed (andtherefore disturbed) for the asset, buildings, hardstanding, soft landscape, site access, plus a 3mwide zonemeasured outward from the boundary. It also includes any areas used for temporary site storage and buildings. If it isnot knownexactlywhere the asset, buildings, hardstanding, site access and temporary storagewill be located it mustbe assumed that the construction zone is the entire site.

Land affected by contaminationLand that could not be legally or safely developed or built on to the proposed end usewithout the remediationofcontamination. Contamination is defined as any substance or agent in, or on the ground within the construction zone,whichpresents anunacceptable risk to humanhealth, property or the environment. For the purposes of BREEAM,substances or agents that could present unacceptable contamination risks are defined as those that act as a barrierto the development of land, which could include certain plant species such as, but not limited to, Japanese knotweedand Giant hog weed.

Land contamination specialistA senior professionalwho has a degree in a relevant subject (e.g. civil engineering, geology, earth sciences, chemistry,environmental science), is a chartered member of an appropriate professional bodywith at least ten years'experience of working in the land contamination industry, and therefore a broad awareness, knowledge andunderstanding of land contamination and remediation issues.

RemediationAny activity undertaken to prevent, minimise, remedyor mitigate the risk caused by land affected by contamination tohumanhealth, property or the environment.

Sustainable remediation



For the purposes of this issue BREEAMdefines sustainable remediation as "the practice of demonstrating, in terms ofenvironmental, economic and social indicators, that the benefit of undertaking remediation is greater than its impactand that the optimum remediation solution is selected through the use of a balanced decision-making process".

Other information

Sustainable Remediation Forum (SuRF) International

Sustainable remediationhas become anarea of development globallywith public and private sector organisations becominginvolved in a number of projects and networks intended to improve remediationpractice and make it more sustainable, withinitiatives in Europe, North and SouthAmerica, Australia, NewZealand and Asia.

The chairs of the international Sustainable Remediation Forums (SuRF) and associated partners meet ona quarterly basis withthe aim to share progress and learning amongst the different networks and develop opportunities for collaboration. Formore informationoneach visit www.claire.co.uk/surfinternational


LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan Land use & ecology

LUE 04 Ecological impact assessment and action plan


Minimum standards

1 1 One credit - criteria 7 – 11 (Site specific biodiversity actionplan) - Very good

Aim

To assess and mitigate the impact of the development onexisting habitats, and to promotemeasures that enhancebiodiversity on the site and in the locality.



One credit - Ecological impact assessment

1 A SuitablyQualified Ecologist (SQE) is appointed at or before the briefing stage. The SQEundertakes an Ecological ImpactAssessment (EcIA) before the end of the concept design stage (refer to CN1, CN2 and CN6) to identify:1.a Valued ecological features (including those off site that maybe affected by the development)1.b The locationof green infrastructure1.c The extent of green infrastructure1.d The connectivity of habitats1.e Potential impacts from the development.

2 The Ecological Impact Assessment takes account of any local knowledge of ecological issues througha process ofconsultation (this could use informationgathered from the process outlined in ST 02 Consultation and engagement).

3 Anecology strategy, covering the site preparation, construction and operationphases, has beendrawnup by a SQE toavoid damage to any valued ecological features onor near the site. The strategy is based on the findings of the EcIA(refer to CN3 and CN4).

4 Where it is unavoidable that damage to a valued ecological featurewill occur, either a mitigationplan, compensationplanor bothhas beenagreed by the appropriate statutory body and the SQE to ensure there is no net loss of anyof thevalued ecological features (refer to CN5).

5 The SQEconfirms that the plans conform to the ecology strategy.

6 Using information from the EcIA and any existing biodiversity actionplan (BAP) information, a site specific biodiversityactionplan (BAP) is developed or updated by the SQE to cover both construction and in-use phases of the project (referto CN7).


One credit - Site specific biodiversity action plan

7 Prior to build and commission the site specific biodiversity actionplan (BAP), detailed within the strategic assessmentcriteria, is updated (or developed) by the SQE to cover both construction and in-use phases of the project (refer to CN7).



8 A Biodiversity Champion (refer to Relevant definitions) is nominated for the constructionphasewith the authority toinfluence site activities and ensure that impacts on-site biodiversity aremanaged in linewith the recommendations of aSQE.

9 The siteworkforce are trained onhow to protect site ecologyduring the project. Training is based on therecommendations for protectionof ecological features highlighted by the SQE.

10 The contractor is responsible for:10.a Recording actions taken to protect biodiversity and monitoring their effectiveness throughout key stages of the

constructionprocess10.b Committing to make such records availablewhere publicly requested.

11 The long term BAP is provided to the owner/operator of the asset at handover with appropriate training andinformation to ensure the BAP canbe implemented.


None.

Compliance notes


CN1 Ecological ImpactAssessment (EcIA)

AnEcological Impact Assessment may form part of anenvironmental impactassessment in order to complywithplanning applications for large-scaledevelopments within your country of assessment (refer to Appendix B - TheApprovedStandards and Weightings List (ASWL)). The following should be covered by theassessment process:

ScopingLikely zone of influenceEcological features likely to be affectedLikely biophysical changes and impactsValued ecological resourcesRefinement measures to improve the projectConsequences for decision-makingProvision for monitoring outcomes.




CN2 SuitablyQualifiedEcologist (SQE)

An individual achieving all of the following items canbe considered 'suitably qualified'for the purpose of compliance:

Holds a nationally recognised degree or equivalent qualification in ecologyor arelated subjectIs a practising ecologist with aminimum of three years relevant experience(within the last five years). Suchexperiencemust clearly demonstrate a practicalunderstanding of factors affecting ecology in relation to construction and thebuilt environment; including acting in an advisory capacity to providerecommendations for ecological protection, enhancement and mitigationmeasures. Examples of relevant experience are: ecological impact assessments;habitat restorationprojects and practical ecology surveys. The relevantexperiencemust relate to the country of assessment.Is covered by a professional code of conduct and subject to peer review (referto Relevant definitions).

CN3 Ecology strategy The strategy should follownational best practice guidance for ecology strategies (referto Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)) and identifyactions to address or achieve:

Protection, enhancement and creationof local ecological habitats and theprocesses that sustain them (including water supply and quality; nutrientcycling; shelter; ecosystem hierarchies etc.)Opportunities for maximising the presence of flora and fauna species onornear to the siteProtection, enhancement and creationof wildlifemovement and migrationroutesPotential damage or disturbance arising from the proposed development andits ongoing useThe optimal balance betweenecological, social and economic benefits of theproposed development and predicted damage and disturbanceProtection and enhancement of existing ecological features.

CN4 Valued ecologicalfeatures

To determine the value of ecological features on site, the following factors must beconsidered:

Biodiversity and ecosystems servicesSocial benefits to the communityEconomic value.

CN5 Unavoidabledamage orcompensation

Where unavoidable damage to ecological features occurs, the ecologist shouldprioritisemitigationor compensatory activities within the development boundary ofthe assessed site.




CN6 Small scale projects For small scale infrastructure projects, e.g. the installationof cables, broadband etc. afull EcIA is not required;however as aminimum anEcIA deskstudy and habitat andvegetation survey is undertaken. The habitat surveywill identify themainplantcommunities and habitat types that maybe affected by the project and provide adocumented basis for determining the scope of more detailed surveys. These initialsurveys will inform the developer if any further studies need to be carried out, e.g. forlegal purposes for issues surrounding protected species. for issues surroundingprotected species.

CN7 Biodiversity actionplan (BAP)

This includes1. Identifying and assessing the likely ecological impacts of the infrastructure

construction and in-use plans. This stage aligns with the baseline data andinformation that are collected whenundertaking an EcIA, and the identificationoflikely ecological impacts

2. Establishing and implementing amanagement schedule and monitoringprogramme to enable the effects onbiodiversity to be assessed. This stageensures appropriate actions and amonitoring programme are implemented toenable the effects onbiodiversity to be assessed and the biodiversity actionplanreviewed

3. Creating targets and performance indicators to identify potential opportunitiesfor ecological enhancement, or avoidance of impacts, and to measure progressusing a performance indicator. This stage aligns with an EcIA by confirming thepotential opportunities for ecological enhancement or avoidance of impacts;however a further step canbe taken in terms of setting realistic targets for theimplementationof the BAP. For some targets progress maybe easilymeasurableusing a performance indicator

4. Procedures for monitoring, reviewing and reporting to ascertain if the targets setare being achieved, if they are realistic or if they need adjusting, and tocommunicate these results. A BAP should be reviewed ona regular basis toascertain if the targets set are being achieved, if they are realistic, or if adjustmentsto targets and performance indicators need to bemade

5. The site BAP being fully integrated with any country specific biodiversity strategyand any local BAPs.

Methodology

None.

Evidence






1 – 2 Ecological impact assessment(EcIA)

N/A N/A

3 – 4 Ecology strategy,mitigation andcompensationplan

N/A N/A

6 Site specific BAP

7 N/A Updated site specific BAP As Interim stage requirements



Biodiversity ChampionThis role canbe undertakenby amember of the project delivery team.

CompensationMeasures taken to make up for the loss of, or permanent damage to, biological resources through the appropriateprovisionof replacement areas. Any replacement area should be similar to or with appropriatemanagement, havethe ability to reproduce the ecological functions and conditions of those biological resources that have been lost ordamaged.

Green infrastructure (GI)Green Infrastructure (GI) is a networkof highquality greenand blue spaces and other environmental features. It needsto be planned and delivered at all spatial scales from national to neighbourhood levels. The greatest benefits will begained when it is designed and managed as amultifunctional resource capable of delivering a wide range ofenvironmental and quality of life benefits (ecosystem services) for local communities. Green Infrastructure includesparks, open spaces, playing fields, woodlands, wetlands, grasslands, river and canal corridors, allotments and privategardens.

Integrity of the siteThe coherence of its ecological structure and function, across its whole area, that enables it to sustain the habitat,complexof habitats or the levels of populations of the species for which it was classified.

MitigationMeasures taken to avoid or reduce negative impacts.Measures may include locating the development and itsworking areas and access routes away from areas of highecological interest, fencing off sensitive areas during theconstructionperiod, or timing works to avoid sensitive periods. Anexample of a reductionmeasure is a reed bed silttrap that is designed to minimise polluted water running directly into anecologically important water course. See alsocompensation, which is separate frommitigation.

No net lossThe point at whichhabitat or biodiversity losses equal their gains, bothquantitatively and qualitatively.

Net gainThe point at which the quality and quantity of habitats or species improves compared to their original condition, i.e.improvements over and above those required for mitigationor compensation.

Peer review



Peer review is defined as the process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or fullmembers maintain a standard of knowledge or experience required to ensure compliancewith a code of conductand professional ethics.

Valued ecological featuresThis is determined by the suitably qualified ecologist, building on their knowledge of the area and consultationwithlocal groups. They are ecological features that contribute to the biodiversity or ecosystem services that provide socialand economic benefits to the local community.

Other information

None.


LUE05 Protectionof biodiversity Land use & ecology

LUE 05 Protection of biodiversity


0 3 One credit - any criteria 1 – 12 - ExcellentTwo credits - any criteria 1 – 12 - Outstanding

Aim

To protect and mitigate damage to existing biodiversity.


The strategic stage requirements for this issue are linked to LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan. See projectdetail criterion1 .



Ecologist assessment and recommendations (prerequisite)Protection,mitigation and compensation (up to three credits)


Prerequisite - Ecologist assessment and recommendations

1 AnEcological Impact Assessment (EcIA) is carried out in linewith LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan:1and 2 before the end of the concept design.

2 In consultationwith the client, the SQEprovides recommendations (refer to CN1) for:2.a Maximising the area of green infrastructure given the identified constraints2.b Maximising the ecological value and connectivity of each area of green infrastructure in the site's givenecological

context2.c Protecting and enhancing the integrity and connectivity of the site2.d Eachof the following topics unless robust case for exception is made. Note:one recommendationmay cover

several of these items:2.d.i Provision and protectionof habitats of principal importance (refer to CN2)2.d.ii Provision and protectionof species of principal importance (refer to CN2)2.d.iii Provision for local biodiversity actionplan (BAP) species2.d.iv Provision for other species of conservation concern2.d.v Provision for long termmanagement and maintenance2.d.vi Local provenance of plant and seed stock2.d.vii Engagement of the public in nature conservation.

2.e Protecting existing ecological features, habitats and species2.f Anynecessary and appropriatemitigationor compensationmeasures.

3 Recommendations include issues to be considered at planning, construction and in-use phases and areweighted toreflect the impact of the recommendation (refer to CN3).



4 Key recommendations are highlighted (refer to Relevant definitions) and include long termmanagement andmaintenance requirements.

Up to three credits - Protection, mitigation and compensation


6 Up to three credits are achieved for ONEof the following as indicated in criteria 7 – 12

Three credits - Protection of biodiversity and existing ecological features

7 All valued on-site and near-site ecological features (as identified by the SQE) including wildlife corridors are preserved andprotected during the development works in linewith the SQE recommendations.

8 Measures are provided to ensure that the ecological integrity and value of the site is maintained in linewith SQErecommendations resulting in no net loss in biodiversity, e.g. management, buffer zones, creating meaningful corridorsor links from and to, creationof supporting habitat etc. This includes:8.a Areas within the physical site boundary8.b Areas off-site that will be affected by the project, e.g. species and habitats are not located on the site but will be

affected because of the project.

Two credits -Mitigating impact on biodiversity and existing ecological features

9 Where recommended by the SQE,measures are implemented during the design and construction stages to mitigate (i.e.avoid or reduce) impact onexisting ecological features bothonor near to the site, for example throughone or more ofthe following:9.a Choice of site9.b Designdevelopment9.c Constructionprocesses9.d Programmeof works.

10 The SQEconfirms that there is no net loss in biodiversity

One credit - Compensating impact on biodiversity and existing ecological features

11 Where recommended by the SQE,measures are implemented during the design and construction stages to compensatefor any impact onexisting ecological features onor near to the site.

12 The SQEconfirms that because of thesemeasures there is no net loss in biodiversitywhen considering the area losingbiodiversity and the area gaining biodiversity.


None.

Compliance notes


CN1 Ecologist'srecommendations

The SQE's recommendations for enhancing and protecting the ecological value of thesite are to include, and exceed, themost onerous of all relevant local, regional, nationaland (where relevant) international legislation relating to protected species and habitats.


LUE05 Protectionof biodiversity Land use & ecology


CN2 Species and habitatsof principalimportance

The SQEmust consider species and habitats of principle importance as defined innational best practice guidance and legislation (refer to Appendix B - TheApprovedStandards and Weightings List (ASWL)).

CN3 Ecologist'sweightedrecommendations

The SQEmust state the relevant importance or weighting of each recommendation inthe report.Where the SQEconfirms that one of the recommendations is twice asbeneficial to the local ecology as another recommendation this canhold twice as muchweight in the percentage assessment detailed in LUE06 Enhancement of biodiversity.This approach canbe applied to more thanone recommendation and where there isconsidered to bemore (or less) than twice as muchbenefit as confirmed by the SQE.

CN4 Damage orcompensation

Where damage to ecological features occurs, the ecologist should prioritisemitigationor compensatory activities within the development boundary of the assessed site.

Methodology

None.

Evidence



1 – 12 N/A Ecologist's report Refer to generic evidencerequirements above.



Key recommendationsThese are recommendations that the SQE identifies as essential to the integrity of the enhancements.

CompensationRefer to LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan.

Green infrastructure (GI)Refer to LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan.

Integrity of the siteRefer to LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan.

Mitigation



Refer to LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan.

No net lossRefer to LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan.

Valued ecological featuresRefer to LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan.

Other information

None.


LUE06 Enhancement of biodiversity Land use and ecology

LUE 06 Enhancement of biodiversity


0 4 None

Aim

To ensure that the project enhances biodiversity on site through its design and construction.


The strategic stage requirements for this issue are linked to LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan. See projectcriterion1 and LUE05 Protectionof biodiversity.



Ecologist assessment and recommendations (prerequisite)Ecologist recommendations (up to two credits)Increasing value of site (one credit)Higher plant weighted area average species richness (one credit)


Prerequisite - Ecologist assessment and recommendations

1 Criteria LUE05 Protectionof biodiversity: 1 – 4 are achieved.

Up to two credits - Ecologist recommendations

One credit


3 All of the suitability qualified ecologist's (SQE) key recommendations are implemented.

4 More than50%of the SQE's weighted recommendations are implemented (refer to LUE05 Protectionof biodiversity).

Two credits


6 All of the SQE's key recommendations are implemented.

7 More than75%of the SQE's weighted recommendations are implemented (refer to LUE05 Protectionof biodiversity).

One credit - Increasing value of site



Land use and ecology BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

9 The SQEvalues eachhabitat affected by theworks according to a national best practice scale of value and geographicalframe of reference (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL) and CN1). Thegeographical frames are either those defined in national best practice or as follows:9.a Negligible9.b Zone of ecological influence9.c Local or community9.d District9.e Regionor above.

10 The SQEconfirms that the scale of impact of the site increases byone geographical frame of reference, e.g. fromnegligible to zone of ecological influence, local to district or etc. (refer to CN2).

One credit - Higher plant weighted area average species richness


12 The SQEvalues the site and anyoff-site areas affected by the project by higher plant weighted area average speciesrichness in each stand type before and after the proposed works (refer to CN3 and CN4).

13 The SQEconfirms that there is an increase in ecological value of the site (including off-site areas affected), with an increaseof six higher plant species richness or greater and that this has been calculated using actual plant species numbers (referto CN5).


Table 24: Sizes of quadrat for higher plant weighted area average species richness

Stand type Quadrat size

Woodlands 50m x50m for canopy and shrub layers

4mx4m or 10m x10m for ground layer

Scrub 10m x10 m;exceptionally 50m x50m inopenpatchy scrub

Hedges and boundaries 30 m lengths for canopy

10m lengths for ground flora

Heaths and mires 2m x2m or 4m x4 m;exceptionally 10m x10m in veryimpoverished or grossly structured vegetation

Grasslands 2m x2m or 4m x4mwhere thick tufts or clumps ofvegetation is present

Aquatics 2m x2m or 4m x4m

Swamps and tall herb fens 4m x4m or 10m x10m

Saltmarshes 2m x2m or 4m x4m



Stand type Quadrat size

Sand dunes 2m x2m or 4m x4m

Sea cliffs 2m x2m or 4m x4m

Shingle 2m x2m or 4m x4m

Ruderals* 2m x2m or 4m x4mwhere thick tufts or clumps ofvegetation is present

*Ruderal species are those that are first to colonise disturbed lands. The disturbancemaybe natural (e.g. wildfires oravalanches) or a consequence of humanactivity, (e.g. constructionor agriculture).

Compliance notes


CN1 National scale ofvalue andgeographical frameof reference

If national best practice guidance is not available the SQEshould define thegeographical frames of reference for assessment in that country. Input from localexperts (refer to Relevant definitions)must be sought to ensure country specificecological and administrative typologies are reflected (refer to Other information).The different frames of reference should be relative to the scale of the country (in termsof size and ecological importance) to ensure local resources are valued at differentscales.

CN2 SQEconfidence inpredictions

It is recognised that the SQEwill need to make predictions in order to establish the pre-and post-development geographical frame of reference. The SQEmust document andrationalise confidence in their predictions. Only predictions that are certain, near-certainor probable should be included in assessing the change. However, if an unlikelypredictionwill have aminimal impact on the value of the site, the SQEcan include this,where justified.'Extremely unlikely' positive effects should not be included. However, if these effects arenegative, although theymaybe very improbable, they canbe extremely serious if theyoccur and hencemerit contingencyplanning.

CN3 Higher plant species Native floral or plant species contributing to local, regional or national priority speciesand habitats, or those species specified by the SQEwith a knownattractionor benefitto localwildlife canbe considered for increasing the number of species on site, as wellas general enhancement. The planting area, density and mixture of different speciesmust be specified with input from both the SQEand the landscape architect (whereemployed), to address the following three points:

The enhancement of the ecological value of the siteThe best possible chance of establishment and long term survival of thespecies within the habitatLinks to and support of the local ecosystem beyond the site boundary.


Land use and ecology BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)


CN4 Higher plantweighted areaaverage speciesrichness

Higher plant weighted area average species richness in each stand type should bedetermined in linewith the sampling methodologies set out in national best practiceguidance (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).If national best practice guidance is not available the SQEshould follow themethodology and use quadrat sizes for each stand type as detailed in theHandbookof BiodiversityMethods17. The stand types and quadrat sizes are extracted in Table 24and the SQEmust classify the vegetation type appropriately. For example, a mangrovealthoughecologically intertidal canbe classified as a woodland.Stand types should only be combined where they are similar in ecological function andrelatively close to eachother on site. If they are separated or have a different ecologicalfunction (within the same stand type), they should be considered separately.Where the asset is in anurban setting, the SQEshould adopt a sensible rationale, basedon these guidelines, to determine the shape and quadrats required for the area beingmeasured.

CN5 Increase inecological value

For criteria 12 – 13 , BREEAMuses higher plant weighted area average species richnessas an indicativemeasure of ecological value of the assessed site.Where the SQEidentifies that an increase in the ecological value of the site canbe achieved withoutmeeting the target of an increase of six plant species the criteria canbe deemedcompliant if there is clear evidencewhich addresses the following three points:

The enhancement of the ecological value of the siteThe best possible chance of establishment and long term survival of thespecies within the habitatLinks to and support of the local ecosystem beyond the site boundary.

The BREEAMAssessor must rely on the professional judgement of the SQEwhendetermining compliance on this issue.

CN6 Small scale projects For small scale infrastructure projects, e.g. the installationof cable, broadband etc., it isacceptable to have sought recommendations from recognised 'local' ecologicalexpertise and generic guidance in the form of either published guidance documents,information leaflets or both, to inform the adoptionof locally relevant ecologicalmeasures that enhance the ecological value of the site. Thesemeasures may include:1. Planting of native species or thosewith a knownattractionor benefit to local

wildlife2. Adoptionof horticultural good practice (e.g. no or lowuse of residual pesticides)3. Installationof bird, bat or insect boxes at appropriate locations on the site.Only native floral species or thosewith a knownattractionor benefit to localwildlife canbe considered for enhancing the ecological value of the site.The number of credits available and assessed for these project types will be detailed ina project's bespoke criteria appendix.

Methodology

None.



Evidence



1 – 13 N/A Ecologist's report Refer to generic evidencerequirements above



Refer to LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan and LUE05 Protectionof biodiversity for definitions.

Local expertsFor the purpose of this BREEAMissue local experts must include as aminimum:

Local ecologists or local conservationorganisationsLocal administrations, e.g. towncouncils, local authorities, etc.

Other information

Use of a scale of value and geographical frame of reference

The criteria for this credit are included to encourage the uptake of a system to quantify howecological resources are affecteddue to the constructionof an asset. Key to the approach is recognising howpeople define ecological value locally. Thereforethe approach requires ecological and administrative typologies to be reflected together whenestablishing appropriategeographical frames of reference. For example, if a national park is situated across three administrative areas (such as adistrict ), this should be reflected in the geographical frames of reference used.

This will vary significantly from country to country. Anexample used near an airport in Singapore is givenbelowas anexample:

NegligibleWithin the context of the site and its immediate zone of ecological influenceWithin the context of the Local Township (Bedok)Within the context of District 16: ‘Bedok, Upper East Coast, Eastwood, KewDrive, Chai Chee, Siglap’Within the context of East Region (93.1km2)Above the regional context would be

Within the Context of Singapore (National)International

The CIEEMEcIA Guidelines18(althoughUK specific) canbe referenced by the SQE to facilitate the use of this system if nationalbest practice guidance is not available.



LUE 07 Land use changes


Minimum standards

1 2 None

Aim

To encourage land use change that mitigates the carbon impact of the asset.



One credit - Carbon stock estimate

1 The potential increase or decrease in carbon stock resulting from land use changes is estimated in accordancewith theprocess outlined in theMethodology sectionbelow.

2 Measures to increase the potential carbon stockand minimise potential carbon losses as a result of land use changesover the lifetime of the project, e.g. by siting the asset to minimise emissions from soil disturbance, reducing thedestructionof existing carbon sinks and increasing the capacity of existing carbon sinks are identified.

3 Opportunities for increasing the carbon stockpotential and minimising potential carbon losses are identified in theproject team or contractor's brief.



Prerequisite - Appointment of carbon specialist

4 A carbon specialist (refer to Relevant definitions) is appointed to:4.a Carry out calculations relating to the carbon impacts resulting from land use changes4.b Provide recommendations for reducing carbonemissions resulting from land use changes and land

management issues4.c Produce, or input into, a land management plandetailing land management processes with a carbon impact at

the construction and operation stage of the asset, including as aminimum:4.c.i Carbon impacts arising from land use and management over the life of the asset, e.g. soil

displacement, fertilisers, maintenance equipment4.c.ii Maintenance requirements relating to peat (refer to CN1).

One credit - Carbon stock potential


6 The potential change in carbon stock resulting from land use changes, determined at the strategy stage, is updated bythe carbon specialist incorporating:6.a Changes to the proposed design including agreed recommendations related to the carboneffects of land use

suggested by the carbon specialist


LUE07 Land use changes Land use & ecology

6.b Site specific information replacing the generic values outlined in theMethodology section.

7 The carbon specialist demonstrates how the approachused to determine the carbon impacts of land use changes isaligned with the approachoutlined in the Land Use, Land-Use Change, and ForestryGuidance for GHGProjectAccounting publication.

8 The estimated total carbonequivalent emissions or savings are inserted into the BREEAMInfrastructure online tool.

One credit - No net decrease in carbon stock due to land use changes


10 The updated calculations outlined in criterion6 indicate no net decrease in equivalent carbonemissions over the life ofthe asset.


None.

Compliance notes


CN1 Maintenancerequirementsrelating to peat

Where peat is present, measures are implemented to ensure the hydrologicalconditions necessary for its maintenance in the long term, e.g. through creating asuitable landformwith impeded drainage, to prevent the peat oxidising and increasingCO

2emissions.


The carbon impacts should bemeasured over the expected lifetime of the asset asindicated in the design specificationwhichhas received planning consent. If the lifetimeis not specified then theworking lifetimes detailed in national best practice standardsfor the asset type should be used (refer to Appendix B).

CN3 Land use changepost construction

All land use change used to calculate the carbonequivalent savings should becompleted once the project is constructed and handed over to the operator. However,in the case of complex sites or project completiondates that do not fallwithin anappropriate planting season, land use enhancements must be completed within 18months.The client or contractor must provide evidence to confirm that the features will beadded at a later date in an appropriate planting seasonwithin 18 months fromcompletionof the development.

Methodology

Calculating increase in carbon stock (or carbon equivalent emissions or savings) from land usechange

The potential change in carbon stock resulting from land use changes is determined, taking into account activities resultingfrom construction, demolition (where this will occur) and any expected changes over the lifetime of the asset (refer to CN2). Ifthe expected lifetime is less than50 years, a 50-year lifespan should be used.



Themethodology for calculating carbonequivalent land use savings shown in the following steps is in accordancewith TheGreenHouseGas Protocol, The Land Use, Land-Use Change, and Forestry (LULUCAF)Guidance for GHGProject Accounting19 .

Step 1- Determine the change in land types as a result of land use changes

Table 25 is completed for the following situations:

Firstly for the case of 'no change' indicating land type areas prior to any construction site activities (including siteclearance and demolition). The 'From'and 'To' represent how these land uses might expect to change over theexpected life of the proposed asset, but assuming it is not built. Inmost cases the land types would remain the sameSecondly for the case of 'asset constructed and operated' indicating land type areas expected post constructionofthe asset and how these are expected to change over the life of the asset.

Table 25: Expected change in land type areas

Changes in land types(hectares)

Forestland

Crop land Grassland Wetlands Settlements Otherland

From Forest land

Crop land

Grassland

Wetlands

Settlements

Other land

The land types indicated are as defined in the top-level land categories for greenhouse gas (GHG) inventory reporting and aredefined inmore detailwithinOther information.

Step 2 - Calculate changes in the carbon stock of the land resulting from land use changes

'The figures identified in Step 1 for the 'no change'and 'asset built and operated' scenarios are thenmultiplied by averagefigures for changes in carbon stockbetween land types in Tonnes CO2e/hectares. The data for these figures canbe from oneof the following sources:

Average values derived from the country's most recent GreenHouseGas Inventory data (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL))Average values derived from a neighbouring country’s most recent GreenHouseGas Inventory data ORWhere neither of these are readily available, the UK values shown in Table 26 canbe used as default values.

Note

The figures in Table 26 represent average values derived from themost recent GHG Inventory data for the UK20 andindicate the changes in carbon stockbetween land types in Tonnes COe/hectares.The figures in Table 26 that reflect carbon stockchanges from 'Land type 1' to 'Land type 1', might be expected to be'1', however there are reductions or increases in carbon stockover time for a particular land type, and this is what isreflected in these numbers.


LUE07 Land use changes Land use & ecology

Table 26: Factors associated with changes in carbon stockas a result of land use changes

Tonnes CO2e/hectares Forest

landCrop land Grassland Wetlands Settlements Other

land

From Forest land 0.75 -4.23 -3.75 N/A -3.89 N/A

Crop land 2.79 -0.36 0.59 N/A -1.84 N/A

Grassland 2.71 -1.17 0.10 N/A -3.44 N/A

Wetlands N/A 0 0 N/A N/A N/A

Settlements 2.76 0.89 1.65 N/A -0.72 N/A

Other land 2.79 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Note:TheN/A figures arewhere no generic data are available. This is not expected to prevent this calculation forBREEAMInfrastructure assessments as (i) it is unlikely that many infrastructure projects would convert a land type to orfrom awetland and (ii) the available land types will hopefully cover land types found for an infrastructure project. Ifmore detail is required refer to the Land Use, Land Use Change and Forestry (LULUCF)Guidance for GHGProjectAccounting,World Resource Institute

Step 3 - Determine the carbon equivalent emissions released over the life of the asset.

Add the figures in the appropriate tables together to predict the change in carbon stock for (i) the 'no change'situation and (ii) the 'asset built and operated' situationSubtract the figure for the 'asset built and operated' from the 'no change' figure to determine the difference incarbon stock (or carbonequivalent emissions or savings) over the life of the asset.

Note:

Where this total figure is negative, this indicates a release in carbonemissions over the life of the asset.Where thisfigure is positive this indicates an absorptionor saving in carbonemissions over the life of the asset.Where there is no difference in the allocationof land use areas between the 'no change' case and the 'asset built andoperated'no further quantification is required as the differencewill be zero.

Evidence


ALL One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAMevidential requirements section canbeused to demonstrate compliancewith these criteria.

1 – 3 Calculations N/A N/A

4 N/A Land management plan Land management plan

4 , 6and 10

N/A Calculations Calculations





Carbonand energy specialistsAn individual achieving all the following items canbe deemed a carbonand energy specialist for the purpose of aBREEAMassessment:1. Holds a degree or equivalent qualification in carbonassessment or a related subject2. Is a practising carbon specialist with aminimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Such

experiencemust clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting carbon stockbreakdown inrelation to land use changes;protection and adaptationof the built environment; and assessment of carbonandenergy impacts on constructionprojects

3. Is covered by a professional code of conduct and subject to peer review.This role canbe undertakenbymore thanone personwhere this experience is found through two or more expertsworking together.

Carbon stockIn the context of this BREEAMissue it refers to the amount of carbon stored in the actual or proposed land types interms of living biomass, dead organicmatter and soils. Where there is a change in carbon stock, this canbeen seenascarbonequivalent emissions or savings (see also total carbonequivalent definitionbelow).






2O),


2e to reflect the


Other information

None.


Landscape & heritage

Landscape and heritage

Category overview


Refer to the country reference sheet in theASWL None

Summary

This category encourages protection and enhancement of the existing landscape including impact on visual and landscapereceptors, heritage assets and microclimate.

Category summary

Issue Credits

LSH 01 Landscape and visual impact Strategy - 1Project detail - 3

Undertaking a landscape and visual impact assessment and providing recommendationsImplementing a percentage of the landscape architect's recommendations

LSH 02 Heritage assets Strategy - 1Project detail - 2

Developing a strategy for heritage assetsImplementing proposed protection and mitigationmeasuresRecording, reporting and disseminating measures taken


Landscape & heritage BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

LSH 01 Landscape and visual impact


1 3 None

Aim

To ensure the character of the landscape is respected and,where possible, enhanced through the locationof features anddesign appropriate to the local environment.



One credit - Landscape and visual impact assessment

1 A suitably qualified landscape architect (SQLA) is appointed at the briefing stage to be part of the project team.

2 The SQLA develops an independent landscape and visual impact assessment (LVIA) (refer to Relevant definitions andCN1) in accordancewith national best practice guidelines (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards andWeightings List (ASWL)).

3 Key representatives of the project team are involved in reviewing opportunities to enhance and protect the existinglandscape.

4 The following are included as part of the 'Further consultation'process detailed in ST 02 Consultation and engagement:4.a The LVIA4.b The landscape and visual impacts resulting from the project4.c Proposals for enhancing the landscape4.d Proposals for minimising and mitigating negative landscape and visual impacts.



Up to three credits - Enhancing and protecting landscape character and visual impact

5 The LVIA is updated by the SQLA to account for opportunities identified within the strategic stage assessment,consultation feedbackand updated project details (refer to CN1).

6 The LVIA includes weighted recommendations for enhancing and protecting landscape character (refer to CN2 andCN6).

7 The LVIA includes weighted recommendations for reducing visual impact (refer to CN3).

8 The LVIA includes weighted recommendations for reducing the impact of temporaryworks (refer to CN4 and CN6).

9 Credits are awarded based on the percentage of weighted SQLA recommendations implemented in accordancewithTable 27

10 Any landscapemaintenance is identified and included in a long term land management plan.


LSH 01 Landscape and visual impact Landscape & heritage

Table 27:Credits associated with the landscape character and visual impact recommendations implemented

Percentage of implemented recommendations(weighted where appropriate - refer to CN6)

Associated credits

25%or more 1

50%or more 2

75%or more 3


None.

Compliance notes


CN1 Verificationof areport writtenby alandscape architect

For the purposes of this issue, a landscape architect that does not meet theBREEAM definitionof a SQLA (refer to Relevant definitions) can carry out the LVIA andassociated recommendations, where these are reviewed and verified by a SQLA, asdefined byBREEAM.

CN2 Recommendationsfor protecting andenhancinglandscape character

This includes recommendations for:

Retention and protectionof aspects which are identified in the LVIA ascontributing to the structure of the landscape, e.g. topography, woodland,vegetative belts or hedgerows, surfacewater and other structuringcomponents lending positive character such as disused railway lines, historicsettlement patterns, field patterns, estate boundarywalls and fences, etc. Thisshould also include key views, where these contribute to landscape characterEnhancement and restorationof aspects which are identified in the LVIA ascontributing to the structure of the landscape as listed above, but which are ina conditionwhich limits their current landscape valueRetention and protectionof specific features which are identified in the LVIA ascontributing to the character of the landscape, e.g. monuments, keybuildingsand other structures, specimen trees, public artworks, etc.Enhancement and restorationof specific features which are identified in theLVIA as contributing to the character of the landscape as listed above, butwhich are in a conditionwhich limits their current landscape value.

Examples of how these could bemeasured are given inOther informationFor assets where the landscape canaffect the user's experience, e.g. railways,recommendations canbe related to enhancing the user experience, however, as aminimum, theremust be equal considerationgiven to the impact of the landscape onthe areas surrounding the asset.




CN3 Recommendationsfor reducing visualimpact

This includes recommendations for:

Adaptationof the development design to fully address negative impacts uponvisual receptors as identified within the LVIAIntegrationwith local landscape character and visual identity throughpositivedesignmeasures.

Examples of how these could bemeasured are given inOther information

CN4 Temporaryworks This includes recommendations for:

Effectivemitigationmeasures regarding temporaryworks from theircommencement to reduce themagnitude of visual impacts identified withinthe LVIA.

Examples of how these could bemeasured are given inOther information

CN5 Recommendationsand statutoryrequirements

Recommendations to meet statutory requirements (to enhance and protect existinglandscape character and minimise negative visual impact) cannot be included in thiscalculation.

CN6 Weightingrecommendations

Where deemed appropriate by the suitably qualified landscape architect,recommendations canbeweighted to reflect their importance and impact on thelandscape character and visual impact. Theseweightings are then included within thepercentage calculation for credit allocation. For example, where the SQLA confirms thatone of the recommendations is twice as beneficial as another recommendation thiscanhold twice as muchweight in the percentage assessment. This approach canbeapplied to more thanone recommendation and where there is considered to bemore(or less) than twice as muchbenefit as confirmed by the SQLA.

CN7 Value andimportancedecisions

Themeasurement of value decisions and importance are determined by the suitablyqualified landscape architect in accordancewith national best practice guidance (referto Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)) based on:

The sensitivity of the landscape and visual receptors andThemagnitude of the landscape and visual effect.

Methodology

None.



Evidence



1 – 4 Strategic LVIA N/A N/A

5 – 9 N/A Detailed or updated LVIA Refer to generic evidencerequirements above

10 N/A Long termmanagement plan As Interim design stagerequirements



Appropriate to the settingTo be judged by the competent landscape architect because of their experience, specialist advice and stakeholderfeedback.

Effective screeningTo be judged by the competent landscape architect because of their experience, specialist advice and stakeholderfeedback.

Independent LVIAFor BREEAMthis is defined as a LVIA uninfluenced by the client or project delivery team. It maybe that the final LVIA isinfluenced by the client, e.g. in terms of including only recommendations they arewilling to implement, however theLVIA referred to in this issue is the precursor to the influenced report and defines all options identified by the SQLA.

Key representatives of the project teamFor this issue, key representatives of the project team include client, owner/operator, designer, contractor and alsoexperts in land use, ecology, amenity or social provision, landscape and heritage.

Landscape receptorsLandscape receptors are components of the landscape likely to be affected by the proposed scheme

Most important (aspects or actions)Refer to CN7 for informationondecisions relating to the importance of landscape features

Most valued (aspects)Refer to CN7 for informationon value decisions.

Negative impactsThe judgement of negative impacts is a fundamental stage of the LVIA process as set out in the LVIA guidance. Thejudgement is thereforemade by the author of the LVIA, in this case a competent landscape architect.

Notable new landscape feature



To be judged by the competent landscape architect because of their experience, specialist advice (including theproject architect) and stakeholder feedback.


Specific featuresThese refer to physical components of the landscapewhichmake a defining contribution to landscape character andwhich are identified in the LVIA for doing so.

SuitablyQualified LandscapeArchitectAn individual achieving all the following items canbe considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purposes of aBREEAMassessment:1. Holds a degree or equivalent qualification in LandscapeArchitecture or a related subject.2. Is a practising landscape professionalwith aminimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years).

Suchexperiencemust clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting landscape theories anddesign in relation to construction and the built environment; including acting in an advisory capacity to providerecommendations for landscape protection, enhancement and mitigationmeasures. Examples of relevantexperience are: landscape architecture and engineering within landscapes;preservation, conservation andrestorationwithin historic landscapes, etc.


VernacularMaterials used in local architecturewhich characterise the local landscape and are identified within the landscapecharacter assessment as doing so, e.g. 'cob' stones inNorfolk, red brick in industrial settlements.

Visually lowkeymaterialsMaterials which, in the judgement of the competent landscape architect, are not vernacular but nonetheless arecomplementary to local landscape character.

Visual receptorsThe peoplewho will be affected by the changes in views and visual amenity - to be determined by the competentlandscape architect.

Other information

Examples of how recommendations to address landscape character and visual impact issues could bemeasured are givenbelow:

Descriptionof requirement Measurement

Landscape character

Retention and protectionof aspects which are identified in theLVIA as contributing to the structure of the landscape, e.g.topography, woodland, vegetative belts or hedgerows, surfacewater and other structuring components lending positivecharacter such as disused railway lines, historic settlementpatterns, field patterns, estate boundarywalls and fences, etc.This should also include key views, where these contribute tolandscape character.

Retention and protectionof a percentage of themost valued of the key aspects identified in the LVIA.



Descriptionof requirement Measurement

Enhancement and restorationof aspects which are identified inthe LVIA as contributing to the structure of the landscape aslisted above, but which are in a conditionwhich limits their currentlandscape value.

Delivery of someor all of themost importantenhancement or restoration actions identified in theLVIA.

Retention and protectionof specific features which are identifiedin the LVIA as contributing to the character of the landscape, e.g.monuments, keybuildings and other structures, specimen trees,public artworks, etc.

Retention and protectionof themost valued offeatures (%).

Enhancement and restorationof specific features which areidentified in the LVIA as contributing to the character of thelandscape as listed above, but which are in a conditionwhichlimits their current landscape value.

Delivery of someor all of themost importantenhancement or restoration actions identified in theLVIA.

Visual impact

Adaptationof the development design to fully address negativeimpacts upon visual receptors as identified within the LVIA.

Removal of negative impacts upon themostsignificant (%) of visual receptors throughpositivedesignmeasures.

Integrationwith local landscape character and visual identitythroughpositive designmeasures.

Use of vernacular or visually lowkeymaterials whenviewed from the nearest visual receptors.

Considerationof colour in the designprocess anduse of material colours appropriate to the settingas defined in the LVIA.

Use of off-sitemitigationmeasures to furtherreduce visual impacts throughadditional screening,softening or filtering views as defined in the LVIA.

Use of characterful and distinctive architecture tocreate a positive and notable new landscapefeature visible to the public.

Temporaryworks

Effectivemitigationmeasures regarding temporaryworks fromtheir commencement to reduce themagnitude of visual impactsidentified within the LVIA.

Impact magnitude reduced from a significant levelto an insignificant level for (number of) visualreceptors.



LSH 02 Heritage assets


1 2 None

Aim

To minimise the impact of the development onheritage assets.



Establishing a baseline (prerequisite)Strategy for heritage assets (one credit)


Prerequisite - Establishing a baseline

1 In accordancewith the appropriate national best practice guidance or legislation (refer to Appendix B - TheApprovedStandards and Weightings List (ASWL)) projects affecting heritage assets collate the following information and share itwith the appropriate statutory body:1.a The significance of the heritage asset or assets affected1.b Any contributionmade by the setting of the heritage asset to its significance1.c Detail that is proportionate to the asset's importance and no more than is sufficient to understand the potential

impact of the proposal on its significance1.d Results from any consultationwith appropriate local and national statutory bodies1.e Where necessary, the results of anydeskbased assessments, field evaluationor both, to characterise the

significance of specific heritage assets or locations1.f Outlinemitigationproposals to be developed and implemented.

One credit - Strategy for heritage assets


3 Heritage specialists (refer to Relevant definitions) are integrated into the project team at the options appraisal stage andrequired to:3.a Establish project wide heritage principles and practices to promote a consistent approach to heritage assets

where the project is linear or consists of numerous development site locations3.b Develop a heritage strategy including how the project will protect, preserve and mitigate damage to ‘expected’

heritage assets (refer to CN1)3.c Comment on the constructionprogramme and proposals suggesting where changes could lower the riskand

impacts to both the project and the heritage assets. For example, areas of 'expected'discoveries canbeprogrammed into a non-critical time of working to minimise risks to the constructionprogramme

3.d Carry out the baseline assessments to:3.d.i Establish the existing situation and 'value'or 'significance'of heritage assets as required bynational

best practice guidance or legislation and3.d.ii Reduce the riskof 'unexpected discoveries'.


LSH 02 Heritage assets Landscape & heritage

4 Proposals for heritage assets are included as part of the 'Further consultation'process detailed in ST 02 Consultation andengagement. The documents outlined in criterion3 are amended to account for feedbackand stakeholders areinformed of actions takenas a result of feedback.

5 The constructionprogramme reflects any special considerations or requirements to enhance, preserve and mitigatedamage to knownand expected heritage assets as identified in the strategydocument, baseline assessment andcalculation.



Planning protection and mitigationmeasures (one credit)Implementation, reporting and disseminating information (one credit)


One credit - Planning protection andmitigation measures


7 Heritage specialists (including input from local experts or individuals from relevant organisations representing localinterests) are or continue to be integrated as part of the project team and are required to:7.a Confirm that works are planned and undertaken in accordancewith national best practice guidance or

legislation appropriate to the project7.b Re-evaluate the project design and scope of investigation7.c Confirm or develop the project wide principles and practices (refer to criterion3.a)7.d Nominate an individual to oversee and be a central point of contact for all heritage issues ona project7.e Comment ondesigndecisions that have an impact onexisting heritage assets7.f Suggest amendments or additions to the investigativeworks as appropriate7.g Review the proposals within themitigation strategy (identified in criterion3.b), and amend these (if necessary) to

address updated information and implement into project procedures.

8 The heritage specialists are required to develop or approve the following for knownheritage assets:8.a How the approachwill support enhancement, preservation,mitigation and compromisewith respect to the

heritage assets8.b Documentation explaining why the final approachwas selected as being themost acceptable or appropriate

for each site in the overall context of the project8.c That the approach is proportionate to the significance of the asset and canbe scrutinised by a third party if

appropriate, e.g. if challenged (refer to Relevant definitions)8.d An 'expected discoveries procedure' indicating:

8.d.i Trained or accredited staff required to monitor workaround the identified heritage assets8.d.ii Notification and assessment procedures and potential level of investigationor recording required for

anticipated heritage assets.

9 The heritage specialists develop or approve a procedure for the unexpected discovery of heritage assets (refer to CN2).

One credit - Implementation, reporting and disseminating information

10 The heritage specialists will be required to:10.a Be present during constructionworkaround particularly sensitive heritage assets or at particularly sensitive

times, e.g. times that might prove critical to finding and protecting heritage assets such as the start of work in asensitive area

10.b Review the status or significance of heritage assets throughout the constructionprocess and determine if itchanges or requires a different approach to that indicated within current plans

10.c Develop or approve documentation indicating that agreed mitigationmeasures have been carried out10.d Undertake full reporting of themitigationworks and monitoring, including whether themitigationhas been

successfully implemented (e.g. throughpost-excavation assessment, analysis, reporting).



11 The heritage reports outlined in criterion10 are:11.a Disseminated and made easily accessible to the public11.b Appropriately archived.

12 In consultationwith the heritage specialists and local experts, opportunities are identified and taken for proactivelysharing or disseminating heritage information, e.g. schools, museums, heritage and local interests groups. This maybethrough talks, visits or virtual technology etc.

13 The project teamworkwith the heritage specialists, statutory organisations and local authorities to:13.a Identify suitablemuseums and storage facilities (ideally local to the point of origin) for depositing artefacts and

records generated by investigationworks and13.b Consider how the project could fund improvements to localmuseums or sites.


None.

Compliance notes


CN1 Strategy forprotecting'expected'heritageassets

The strategy includes:

Proposals for undertaking heritage investigationsProposals for the protection and preservationof heritage assetsMitigation strategies and measuresDetails of howactions and results will be recorded, analysed, reported andarchived.

CN2 Procedure for theunexpecteddiscovery ofheritage assets

This procedure or plan includes:

Provision for themonitoring of ground works byprofessionally accreditedstaff to ensure that, where found, unexpected heritage assets are identifiedAgreed notification and assessment procedures to determine the significanceof the finds and the level of investigation and recording requiredUnexpected discoveries are appropriately investigated and recorded.Appropriate training of site staffA requirement to review the potential impact of 'unexpected discoveries'onthe planned programme and costs.


LSH 02 Heritage assets Landscape & heritage


CN3 Where no heritageassets are expected

A questionwithin the online toolwill ask if heritage assets are expected.Where theanswer is 'no' the toolwill automatically award the 'Strategy for heritage assets' creditand the 'Planning protection and mitigationmeasures' credits. This reflects and rewardsa site that avoids impacting existing heritage assets. In this situation the'Implementation, reporting and dissemination' credit will be filtered from theassessment as it is not relevant in this situation. It should be noted that robust evidencemust still be provided to demonstrate how the project team have determined thereare no ‘expected’ heritage assets.Where heritage assets are not expected but subsequently found during the siteworks(i.e. during the project detail assessment stage), the online tool responses must beamended. In this case the 'Strategy for heritage assets' credit will remain awarded,however the requirements for the 'Planning protection and mitigationmeasures' creditand the 'Implementation, reporting and dissemination' credit will be reinstated andform part of the assessment.

Methodology

None.

Evidence





Heritage assetA heritage asset is defined as all archaeological remains, historic buildings, and historic landscapes nationallydesignated or locally listed that merit considerationby statutory authorities. It includes all aspects of the environmentresulting from the interactionbetweenpeople and places through time.

Heritage specialistsHeritage specialists would include a lead specialist and input either from local experts or individuals from relevantorganisations representing local interests, e.g. local archaeologists or conservation specialists. A lead heritagespecialist must achieve the following items for the purpose of a BREEAMassessment:1. Holds a degree or equivalent qualification in heritage conservationor a related subject2. Is a practising heritage conservationist with aminimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five

years). Suchexperiencemust clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting heritageconservation, protection and adaptationof the built environment which include both structures and landscape.The specialist must also seek to promote regeneration, revitalisation and heritage education, while enhancingareas to provide a sense of place, identity and local character.



3. Is covered by a professional code of conduct and subject to peer review.Note: The individual's qualification and experience should be relevant to the heritage assets present on site, e.g. abuilding conservation architect maynot have experience in archaeology and vice versa.


Proportionate assessment and mitigationmeasuresThis is not defined in this issue, but instead it is suggested that a third party reviews the justifications for a certainapproachwhere a disagreement or challenge to procedures arises.

Relevant stakeholdersFor this issue relevant stakeholders include client, owner/operator, project delivery team, specialists, local communityand relevant interest groups or organisations.

Setting (of a heritage asset)The surroundings inwhich a heritage asset is experienced. Its extent is not fixed and may change as the asset and itssurroundings evolve. Elements of a setting maymake a positive or negative contribution to the significance of anasset, may affect the ability to appreciate that significance or maybe neutral.

Significance (of a heritage asset)The value of a heritage asset to this and future generations because of its heritage interest. That interest maybearchaeological, architectural, artistic or historic. Significance derives not only from a heritage asset's physical presence,but also from its setting.

Other information

Definitions of heritage

Cultural heritage asset as defined by the Council of Europe in the FrameworkConventionon the Value of Cultural Heritage forSociety (Faro 2005):

'a group of resources inherited from the past whichpeople identify, independently of ownership, as a reflection andexpressionof their constantly evolving values, beliefs, knowledge and traditions. It includes all aspects of theenvironment resulting from the interactionbetweenpeople and places through time.'

Thewide 'group of resources'defined here form the heritage assets covered in this study. The term heritage asset is definedinNational Planning Policy FrameworkPlanning PolicyGuidelines Annex2 as:

'A building,monument, site, place, area or landscape identified as having a degree of significancemeritingconsideration in planning decisions, because of its heritage interest. Heritage asset includes designated heritageassets and assets identified by the local planning authority (including local listing)'.

TheHighways AgencyDesignManual for Roads and Bridges (DMRB)Volume 11 Section3 Part 2 HA 208/07 subdivides thewide group into three subtopics - Archaeological Remains, Historic Buildings and Historic Landscapes. DMRB11 3.2comments that:

'eachof these subtopics contains a range of assets that may survive as upstanding or buried remains, whichmaybemore or less extensive, and, while acknowledging that cultural heritage is a seamless resource, these subtopics areidentified because techniques for their study and themitigationof impacts on them require different specialistapproaches'.


Pollution

Pollution

Category overview


Refer to the country reference sheet in theASWL

Pol 02 Water pollutionPol 03 Noise and vibration

Summary

This category encourages project teams to address and minimise pollution resulting from the construction and operationofthe asset. Issues in this section focus on carrying out riskassessments, developing and implementing appropriatemitigationstrategies and monitoring the effectiveness of themitigationmeasures.

Category summary

Issue Credits

Pol 01 Air quality Strategy - 1Project detail - 2

Strategic air quality assessment (AQA)developed by anappropriate air quality consultant with input from thelocal authorityDelivery of air qualitymitigationmeasures in linewithAQA for construction and operationMonitoring of the effectiveness of the air qualitymeasures

Pol 02 Water pollution Strategy - 1Project detail - 3

Strategic reviewof the activities required to construct and operate the asset and establishing resulting risks towater qualityA detailed riskassessment by anappropriate consultant to establish allwater pollutionhazards and measuresdeveloped and implemented to mitigate the riskof water pollutionMonitoring of effectiveness of water pollutionmeasures including anemergency response plan and handover ofa protection and monitoring programme for the operationof the assetImplementationof best practicemeasures to minimisewatercourse pollutionduring operation

Pol 03 Noise and vibration Strategy - 1Project detail - 4


Pollution BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

Issue Credits

Strategic reviewof noise and vibration likely to arise due to the construction and operationof the asset anddeterminationof appropriatemagnitudes of impact and effect levels from the asset by a suitably qualifiedacousticianA detailed noise and vibration impact assessment including a baseline noise and vibration survey and predictionof exposure levels for sensitive receptorsA constructionnoise and vibrationplandeveloped and implemented in linewithbest practice guidance tomitigate the riskof noise and vibration from site activitiesMonitoring of effectiveness of noise and vibrationmitigationmeasuresA permanent noise and vibrationplandeveloped and implemented that mitigates noise and vibration toappropriatemagnitudes of impact and effect levels throughbest practicablemeans

Pol 04 Light pollution Strategy - 1Project detail - 2

Strategic reviewof lighting required to construct the asset and the impact of any subsequent light pollutiononsensitive receptorsA temporary lighting plandeveloped and implemented to mitigate the riskof light pollution and appropriate sitetrainingMonitoring of effectiveness of light pollutionmitigationmeasuresA permanent lighting plandeveloped and implemented that mitigates light pollution in linewithbest practiceguidance


Pol 01 Air quality Pollution

Pol 01 Air quality


1 2 None

Aim

To control and minimise air pollution from the construction and operationof the asset.



Prerequisite - Air quality assessment (AQA)

1 The project delivery team and anappropriate air quality consultant liaisewith the local authority or other appropriatestatutory bodybefore completing a full air quality assessment (AQA) , to discuss the proposed scope,methodology andapproach to the assessment (refer to CN1, CN2 and CN3).

2 AnAQA is completed before finalising the concept stage by anappropriate air quality consultant (refer to Relevantdefinitions) to determine the potential impact of the construction and operationof the asset on local air quality. TheAQAis carried out in linewith national best practice guidance (refer to CN4 and Appendix B - TheApproved Standards andWeightings List (ASWL)) and covers theminimum content (refer to CN5).

3 The following are included as part of the 'Further consultation'process detailed in ST 02 Consultation and engagement:3.a TheAQA3.b The air quality impacts resulting from the construction and operationof the asset, including residual impacts3.c Proposals for mitigating adverse air quality impacts.

One credit - Construction and operation air quality strategy

4 Criteria 1 – 3 have beenachieved.

5 The project delivery team's or contractor's brief includes the following requirements:5.a To carry out a detailed riskassessment for the construction and operation stages and evaluate further

opportunities to reduce negative impacts onair quality5.b To implement measures appropriate to the project that mitigate the impact on air quality as detailed in the

Code of Construction Practice (CoCP), or equivalent (refer to Relevant definitions)5.c To carry out air qualitymonitoring before and during construction to ensure best practicemeasures are being

adhered to.



Minimising construction and operational stage air pollution (prerequisite)Monitoring construction stage air quality (one credit)Reduction in pollutants from non-road mobilemachinery (NRMM) (one credit).




Prerequisite -Minimising construction and operational stage air pollution

For criteria 10 – 14 only)

6 Informed by theAQA (carried out at the strategic assessment stage) a method statement and riskassessment forpreventing and minimising the impact of construction site activities on air quality is developed detailing appropriatemitigationmeasures (refer to CN11).

7 Mitigationmeasures identified for construction and operation are implemented.

8 The developer and contractor follow the air quality requirements outlined within the CoCP, or equivalent.

One credit -Monitoring construction stage air quality


10 Anair qualitymonitoring plan is developed by the project delivery team in linewith national best practice guidance (referto CN4 and Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)), agreed with the local authority or otherappropriate statutory body and implemented by the contractor.

11 An individual is appointed to carry out monitoring of air quality on and around the site (refer to CN12) and undertakestheir role throughout constructionof the asset (refer to CN13).

12 Site induction and specific training is provided for all site staff (refer to CN15) identifying how their activities may affect airquality. This should include training on the procedures included within the CoCP, or equivalent, and how to eliminate orreduce the potential for an air quality incident.

13 Lessons learnt and suggestions for improvement are collated and fed into the consultation evaluation (refer to ST 01Consultationplan: criteria: 7 – 10 ).

14 The project delivery team prepare and hand over an 'operation stage'monitoring programme to the operator of theinfrastructure asset in linewith national best practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards andWeightings List (ASWL) and ).

One credit - Reduction in pollutants from non-road mobile machinery

15 Engines for all non-road mobilemachinery (refer to Relevant definitions) used during the construction stage either:15.a Use engines compliant with national best practice legislation against the emissionof gaseous and particulate

pollutants from internal combustion engines (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and WeightingsList (ASWL))OR

15.b Are fitted with suitable after-treatment devices compliant with published emission requirements for gaseousand particulate pollutants (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL))


None.



Compliance notes


CN1 Assessment ofprojects with asmall impact on airquality

Where activities associated with the constructionor operationof the asset are unlikelyto have a significant impact on air quality, the criteria still apply. However, the detail ofthe approach to AQAmaybe a simple analysis of the likely risks and appropriatemitigationmeasures proposed.

CN2 Recognisedapproach andaccompanyingsoftwaremodels

BREEAMdoes not specify the approachor softwaremodels that should be used forthe AQA. However, the appropriate air quality consultant should use their judgementas to anappropriate approach and model and confirm these are acceptable to therelevant local authority or other appropriate statutory body.Recognised air quality approaches and air pollutant dispersionmodelling softwareincludes theADMSpackages, Caline etc.

CN3 Local authority orother appropriatestatutory bodyconsultation

If the local authority has expertise inAQA, they should be consulted early in theprocess in order for them to have the opportunity to review the proposals and adviseon the scope of theAQA of the particular infrastructure asset.Where the asset will be situated inmore thanone local authority area the discussionsshould involve them all.If the local authority does not have the expertise, another appropriate statutory body(refer to Relevant definitions) should be given the opportunity to reviewand commenton the proposed approach.

CN4 National bestpractice guidance

The appropriate air quality consultant should determine best practice guidance that isappropriate to the project, i.e. the construction and operational activities related tothe infrastructure asset. These should be produced by a reputable independent thirdparty and be current at the time of assessment (refer to Appendix B - TheApprovedStandards and Weightings List (ASWL)).It should be noted that relevant local guidance or legislation should also beconsidered whenundertaking theAQA.




CN5 Minimum contentfor AQA

TheAQA should cover the following as aminimum:1. A descriptionof the project details and any alternatives being considered2. A reviewof relevant and latest national and regional legislation and planning

policies in relation to air quality3. Anassessment of the baseline air quality (refer to CN6)4. A descriptionof air quality sensitive receptors, likely impacts and their proximity

to the project (refer to Relevant definitions and CN7).5. The predicted air quality impacts on the identified sensitive receptors for the

following scenarios (refer to CN8):a. The baselineb. Construction stage (this may includemore thanone scenario and will

depend on the proposed activities, refer to CN9)c. Future ordinary operationd. Worst case operation.

6. Measures to prevent or mitigate the predicted negative air quality impacts (referto CN10), considering and proportionate to the size and significance of theimpact

7. Any local requirements for air quality, e.g. within local planning requirements orsimilar

CN6 Baseline air quality The baseline air quality is determined using existing monitoring or modelling data orpreferably actualmonitored data gathered byon-sitemonitoring throughout anextended period.Where there are particularly sensitive receptors or where small differences in air qualitywill have a big impact, the air quality consultant should discuss using air quality datathat aremonitored specifically for the project with the local authority to see if this is apreferred way to proceed.

CN7 Sensitive receptor -ecology

Where biodiversity could be deemed a sensitive receptor, input from a suitablyqualified ecologist (SQE) (refer to LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan) should be sought to determine the sensitivity of the receptor. This informationshould be used by the appropriate air quality consultant to identify the significance ofthe effect in accordancewithbest practice.

CN8 Scenarios Differing air quality scenarios are determined to establish the full scope of the effectsof the project on local air quality. Scenarios are determined through considerationof arange of factors such as:1. Addition and reduction in traffic2. Emissions from different processes (e.g. boilers, combined heat and power

plant (CHP) and other industrial processes)3. The emissions from different processes under different modes of operation.The cumulative effect of relevant factors and nearby air pollution sources outside theboundary of the project are taken into account whendetermining the range ofscenarios.

CN9 Construction stageassessment of airquality impacts

This includes an assessment (qualitative or quantitative) of pollutant emissions fromdemolition and construction activities following national best practice guidance (referto Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).




CN10 Appropriatemitigationmeasures

Appropriatemitigationmeasures are:

Established based on the likely impact on air quality through the scenariomodellingInformed by the adverse impacts identified in the assessment process.

CN11 Riskassessmentand methodstatement

The riskassessment and method statement should be site specific and cover thedurationof the construction stage. Themethod statement should cover all air qualityrisks during construction, and thereforewhere constructionprocesses evolve thisshould be reviewed and updated where required. Aminimum time scale for review isset as every sixmonths or where constructionprocesses are changing on site.It should be noted where the air quality impact assessment highlights there is no (orlow) riskof anynegative impacts to air quality during construction criterion6 canbeignored. BREGlobal expect this to be unusual, and only relevant to particularly smallinfrastructure projects, where there is no riskof dust or transport pollution.

CN12 Individualresponsible forimplementing andmonitoring airquality plans

This is an individual or teamwith the responsibility for implementing and monitoringair quality plans and influencing site activities so that they complywith the air qualityrequirements and objectives as detailed within the CoCP or equivalent. The individualmust have sufficient authority, time on site and knowledge of construction to carry outthe role. This individual need not be anair quality specialist but should have experiencein air qualitymonitoring, sufficient understanding of air quality issues and how they areaffected by activities on site.Note:Where other pollutants are also being monitored, one individualwith sufficientknowledge could be appointed to carry out these responsibilities for all pollutiontypes.

CN13 Role of theindividualresponsible forcarrying out site airqualitymonitoring

Their role includes:1. Carrying out monitoring before and during constructionworks (to include dust,

PM2.5,PM

10and other gaseous pollutants such as nitrogendioxide (NO

2) and

volatile organic compounds (VOCs) if required by the local authority or otherappropriate statutory body (refer to CN14)

2. Varying monitoring to take account of the nature of the construction activities3. Analysing the data collected and using this in regular air quality reports4. Ensuring best practice guidance (refer to CN4) is being following to reduce

pollutant emissions from construction activities taking place5. Monitoring and investigating the effectiveness of the air qualitymitigation

measures on the local environment and sensitive receptors6. Ensuring national air quality objectives (refer to Appendix B) have not been

breached by the project (refer to Other information)7. Ensuring accessible avenues of complaint are available for stakeholders, such as

a complaints line or public site reception8. Investigating and responding to events or causes for a change in air quality.

Events must be reported and corrective actions, if necessary, documented. Thismaybe triggered by complaints from local residents or a site inspection

9. Ensuring complaints received during the construction stage are promptly andsatisfactorily dealt with

10. Ensuring air quality data monitored by the project team, are publicly availablewith appropriatemetadata for understanding.




CN14 Monitoring ofpollutants asrequired by thelocal authority

Themonitoring carried out is determined by assessment based or means testing andagreed with the local authority or other appropriate statutory body. If a pollutant isshown to be relevant, thenmonitoring is required for this pollutant.For example, polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs)would not be relevant for mostinfrastructure projects, but for some, such as industrial processes including AnaerobicDigestion Plants, these could be released and therefore should bemonitored.

CN15 Site inductiontraining for all sitestaff

In the context of this issue this includes all site staff, including subcontractors,undergoing activities that could be polluting to air quality if not appropriatelymanaged or mitigated.

Methodology

None.

Evidence



1 – 3 AQA. N/A N/A

6 N/A. Method statement and riskassessment

Monitored data and siteinspection

10 N/A Air quality plan Monitored data or siteinspection



Air quality sensitive receptorsLandscapes, buildings or cluster areas where the occupiers or wildlife are likely to be sensitive to air pollution createdby the constructionor operationof the asset, including:1. Hospitals, schools and housing close to the development2. Receptors alongside roads significantly affected by the development even if they arewell away from the

development site3. Air qualitymanagement areas4. Ecologically sensitive areas.The sensitive receptors for the project must be determined by the air quality consultant and agreed with the localauthority.



Appropriate air quality consultantFor the purpose of a BREEAMassessment, an individual achieving all of the following items canbe considered to be anappropriate air quality consultant:1. Holds a university or higher educationqualificationor equivalent in science, technology, engineering or maths

(STEM)2. Has aminimum of four years relevant experience (within the last five years). Suchexperiencemust clearly

demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting air quality in relation to construction and the builtenvironment. This may include experience in completing AQAs, air dispersionmodelling, odour and dustassessments and air qualitymanagement and monitoring.


Appropriate statutory bodyThis refers to the statutory or legal organisationor entitywhose duty it is to carry out the planning approval functionof the asset.

Code of Construction Practice (CoCP)A Code of Construction Practice (CoCP) is a formal document containing a series of measures and standards of workto be applied by the contractors throughout the constructionperiod. This will provide a consistent approach to themanagement of construction activities on a project.To demonstrate compliancewith this issue the CoCP, or anequivalent document, must containmeasuresappropriate to the project that mitigate the impact on air quality as defined within theAQA and method statement.

Non-road mobilemachinery (NRMM)Non-road mobilemachinery (NRMM) is defined as anymobilemachine, i.e. of transportable industrial equipment orvehicle, (with or without bodywork), that is:

Not intended for carrying passengers or goods on the roadInstalled with a combustion engine - either an internal spark ignition (SI) petrol engine, or a compressionignitiondiesel engine

Examples of non-road mobilemachinery include, but are not limited to:1. Gardenequipment, such as hedge trimmers and handheld chainsaws2. Generators3. Bulldozers4. Pumps5. Constructionmachinery6. Industrial trucks7. Fork lifts8. Mobile cranes.


Other information

Air Quality Standards

Air Quality Standards provide pollutant concentration values which are used as benchmarks for setting objectives. Thestandards are set purely concerning existing scientific and medical evidence on the effects of the particular pollutant onhealthand on thewider environment. Air quality legislation internationally and inparticular in Europe is derived from health-basedevidence provided by theWorld HealthOrganisation (WHO). TheWHOhas published various guidelines for bothglobal airquality and Europeanair quality based on the latest research from around theworld21 These guidelines are neither standardsnor legally binding criteria; they are designed to offer guidance in reducing the health impacts of air pollutionbased onexpertevaluationof current scientific evidence.



Pol 02 Water pollution


1 3 Two credits - criteria 5 – 14 - Very good

Aim

To ensure that measures are put in place to protect the localwatercourse from pollution and environmental damage.



One credit - Construction and operation water pollution prevention strategy

1 A strategic reviewof the activities required to construct and operate the asset is completed before finalising the conceptstage by anappropriate consultant to determine the level of riskassociated withwater pollution and methods tominimise this. The strategy identifies:1.a All possible sources of pollutants from construction and operationof the asset, including any existing

contamination1.b Possible pathways throughwhich the pollutant may travel1.c The possible receptors that maybe affected, including locationof surfacewater and groundwater, ecosystems

dependent on thewater and the sensitivity of the underlying aquifer and its users, such as watercourseprotected from potentially polluting activities.

2 The strategy covers theminimum content (refer to CN2) to demonstrate that measures and procedures have beeninvestigated to reduce the likelihood of surface and groundwater pollution.

3 Relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions) are consulted on the content of thewater pollution strategy and thestrategy amended to reflect feedback.

4 The project delivery team's or contractor's brief includes the following requirements:4.a To carry out a full assessment of surface and ground water resources within the locationof the infrastructure

asset4.b To carry out a detailed riskassessment for the construction and operation stages of the project and evaluate

further opportunities to reducewater pollution4.c To apply the principles of thewater pollution strategy to the project and implement measures appropriate to

the project in linewith national best practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards andWeightings List (ASWL)).


The stage of the issue is split into four parts:

Water pollution riskassessment (prerequisite)Minimising watercourse pollution (construction) (one credit)Monitoring water pollution (construction) (one credit)Minimising watercourse pollution (operation) (one credit)


Pol 02 Water pollution Pollution


Prerequisite -Water pollution risk assessment

5 A detailed riskassessment is carried out by anappropriate consultant before finalising the project definition stage andincludes or builds on the content of the strategic review (criteria 1 – 2 ) for construction and operation (refer to CN4).The assessment is informed by anappropriate pre-works survey (refer to Relevant definitions) and identifies:5.a Allwater pollutionhazards associated with the infrastructure and related activities and the level of potential risk,

including:5.a.i The nature of pollution (source)5.a.ii Theway inwhich the pollutionwill reach the surface or ground water (pathways) and5.a.iii The impact on the surface or ground water (receptor).

5.b The location and potential impact on surfacewater and groundwater5.c Any existing contamination and risks of further dispersal of this contamination, e.g. opening newor additional

pathways5.d Keyhabitats and designated areas onor adjacent to the site that could be affected bywater course pollution,

e.g. local nature reserves, Special Areas of Conservation (SACs), Ramsar sites and other managed areas.

One credit -Minimising watercourse pollution (construction)


7 A plan for minimising watercourse pollutionduring construction is developed by the appropriate consultant in linewithnational best practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)) andimplemented on site. The planbuilds upon the content of the construction and operationwater pollution strategy(criteria 1 – 2 ) and information from thewater pollution riskassessment (criterion5 ).

8 The plan covers the good practice requirements detailed in Table 28.

9 Anappropriate consultant designs pollutionpreventionmeasures to ensure that the run-off from all hard surfacesreceives an appropriate level of treatment (refer to CN5).Measures are in accordancewithguidance produced by theappropriate statutory body (refer to Relevant definitions) and national best practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).

10 Site induction and specific training is provided for all site staff (refer to CN7) identifying how their activities may affectsurface or ground water pollution. This should include training on the emergency response plan and how to eliminate orreduce the potential for a water pollution incident.

One credit -Monitoring water pollution (construction)


12 A 'construction stage'protection and monitoring plan is developed and implemented by the contractor.

13 An individual is appointed to carry out on-sitemonitoring of ground and surfacewater pollution (refer to CN8) andundertakes their role throughout construction (refer to CN9).

14 Lessons learnt and suggestions for improvement are collated and fed into the consultation evaluation (refer to ST 01Consultationplan: criteria 7 – 10 ).

One credit -Minimising watercourse pollution (operation)


16 The good practice requirements in Table 29 aremet.

17 Anappropriate consultant designs systems to ensure that the run-off from all hard surfaces receive an appropriate levelof treatment (refer to CN5).

18 Allwater pollutionprevention systems are designed and installed following the recommendations within national bestpractice guidance (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).

19 Where present, all external storage and delivery areas are designed and detailed following national best practiceguidance (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).



20 The project delivery team prepare and hand over to the operator of the infrastructure asset:20.a Anemergency response plan for the operation stage to include procedures for dealing withpollution incidents

and emergencies20.b A comprehensive and up-to-date drainage planof the site (refer to Relevant definitions)20.c Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified

sustainable drainage systems (SuDS) (refer to Relevant definitions)20.d An 'operation stage'protection and monitoring programme (refer to CN10).

See also CN12 for companies operating a portfolio of infrastructure assets.


Table 28:Construction stage implementationof good practice surfacewater and groundwater pollutionpreventionmeasures

Item Requirements

Planning and set up 1. Any existing drainage on the site (grey and green) is included in site development drawings,where it is to be retained, and flowcharacteristics determined.

2. Areas of high riskof contamination (refer to Relevant definitions) are located away fromwatercourses and drainage paths and buffer strips and working or storage distancesfromwatercourse are identified.

3. Timing of siteworks with a high risk to watercourse are planned to avoid sensitive times ofthe year.

4. Anemergency response plan for the construction stagewith a procedure for dealing withincidents and emergencies is developed and communicated to all site staff at siteinduction. Site staff responsible for taking actionmust be:a. Aware of their responsibilitiesb. Trained to use the necessary equipment such as spill control equipment and shut off

valves.5. A process is in place to accommodate variation to the permanent works, temporary

works, programmeor workmethods and a clear communication strategydevelopedbetween the site and /design team to ensurewatercourse pollution is not exacerbated.

Site clearance 1. Unnecessary vegetation clearance is avoided to prevent destabilisationof the banks or bedof thewatercourse or make themmore vulnerable to erosion.

2. Invasive or noxious plants (refer to Relevant definitions) are removed beforeworkscommence.

3. Buffer zones are established around watercourses and protected habitats or species.4. Removed vegetation and debris is prevented from entering watercourses.

Construction - Sitestorage

1. All fuel, oils and chemicals are stored onan impervious basewithin a bund able to containat least 110%of the volume stored.

2. Use biodegradable oil in all plant and machinery used inor near water.

Construction -Volume ofcontaminated run-off

1. The volume of contaminated run-off being generated is minimised by:a. Diverting cleanwater away from exposed soils and working areasb. Minimising erosion, including erosionof exposed soilsc. Preventing contaminated water from entering watercourses untreated.



Item Requirements

Construction -Working in or nearwater

1. Where engineering works are carried out in or on the banks of surfacewater, theworkareais isolated and de-watered.

2. All discharges from de-watering must receive an appropriate level of treatment beforedischarge. The pollutants likely to be present are assessed to identify the type of treatmentrequired.

Construction -temporary rivercrossings

1. Before constructionof a temporary river crossing anassessment is required to determinewhether (if possible):a. Works canbe carried out from the banksb. Existing bridges canbe used for crossing the river.

2. Where a temporary river crossing is deemed necessary national best practice guidance forconstructionof river crossings is followed (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standardsand Weightings List (ASWL)).

Post construction -reinstatement ofbeds and banks

1. When the permanent works are complete, the bed and banks of rivers or lakes or lochsshould be appropriately reinstated.

2. Surveys are carried out before theworks commence on site to ensure the beds and bankscanbe reinstated to their pre-works condition, or an improved conditionwhere possible.

Table 29:Operational stage implementationof good practice surfacewater and groundwater pollutionpreventionmeasures

Item Requirements

Site layout andstorage

1. Areas of high riskof contamination (refer to Relevant definitions) are located away fromwater courses and drainage paths.

2. All fuels, oils and chemicals are stored within a bund able to contain at least 110%of thevolume stored.

Volume ofcontaminated run-off

1. The volume of contaminated run-off being generated is minimised by:a. Diverting cleanwater away from exposed soils and working areasb. Minimising erosion, including erosionof exposed soilsc. Preventing contaminated water from entering watercourses untreated.

Treatment ofcontaminatedwater

1. In areas with a low risk source of watercourse pollution, an appropriate level of pollutionprevention is provided, using appropriate SuDS techniques.

2. Where there is a high riskof contaminationor spillage of substances an appropriate type ofseparator (or an equivalent system) is installed in surfacewater drainage systems

3. Where the site has chemical or liquid gas storage areas, a means of containment is fitted tothe site drainage system (i.e. shut-off valves) to prevent the escape of chemicals to naturalwatercourses (in the event of a spillage or bunding failure).



Compliance notes


CN1 Assessment ofprojects with asmall impact onwatercourse

Where activities associated with the constructionor operationof the asset are unlikelyto have a significant negative impact onwatercourse, the criteria still apply. However,the detail of the strategic reviewmaybe a simple analysis of the likely risks andappropriatemitigationmeasures proposed. A qualitative riskassessment would beadequate in these situations.

CN2 Minimum contentfor water pollutionstrategy

Thewater pollution strategy should cover the following as aminimum:1. Options for locating the infrastructure asset and high risk construction activities

away from surfacewater and groundwater that is used for the abstractionofdrinking water (refer to CN3)

2. A reviewof risks associated withpreventionmeasures or managementprocedures and planning how thesewould operate during construction andoperation

3. A reviewof watercourse legislation and regulations for construction andoperation

4. Identificationof watercourse incidents and emergencies (refer to Relevantdefinitions)which could arise during construction and operation and establishingproposals for potentialmeasures and emergencyprocedures

5. Planning for site activities so that works which are a risk to water pollution avoidsensitive times of the year, e.g. fish spawning, fishmigration time and birdnesting season

6. Allocationof sufficient space for SuDS, including facilities such as settlementponds for use during construction and options for retaining or converting theseinto permanent SuDS to serve the operational asset assessed

7. Exploring options for operational processes that seek to minimisewasteeffluent and other types of waste.

CN3 Locationof theasset away fromground and surfacewater

The locationof the asset and locating construction activities away from ground andsurfacewater is required to minimise the riskof water pollution.Where this is nottechnically possible, for example, where the asset must be located inor near water orthere are site restraints, the appropriate consultant should identify preventionmethods, using construction techniques and technologies to control spillages, run-off,leaching and direct discharge into thewatercourse.

CN4 Riskassessmentcoveringconstruction andoperation

It is important that the design and construction aspects of the infrastructure asset areclosely aligned so that risks and opportunities to eliminate or reduce these areconsidered holistically.In regards to pollutionof surface and groundwater, there is a risk that there could beinterchange of pollutionbetween surface and ground water and pollution sourcesand pathwaysmaybe common. As such this should be addressed within the riskassessment and appropriate action taken.




CN5 Appropriate levelof treatment

In all cases the appropriate consultant should use their professional judgement todetermine the optimum strategy for minimising watercourse pollution and,whererequired, pollutionpreventionmeasures should be supported by calculations ornumericalmodelling to ensure pollutiondoes not occur. Treatment and disposalmethods should be considered dependent upon the type of contamination expected.Examples include:1. Sustainable drainage systems (SuDS) (refer to CN6)2. Settlement lagoons3. Filtration including mechanical filtration4. Infiltrationor pump to grassland5. Discharge to sewer6. Disposal of water off site or tanker off site.For the construction stage options, the use of SuDSshould be explored andpreference given to these systemswhere theywill provide suitable treatment.For the operational stage SuDSmust be prioritised where technically viable.

CN6 Sustainabledrainage systemsused for theconstruction andoperationof theasset

Where SuDSare to be included as a permanent feature of the constructed asset (e.g.ponds or wetlands) it should be possible to use the area designated for the SuDS todealwith drainage or contaminated run-off from the construction site.


In the context of this issue this includes all site staff, including subcontractors,undergoing activities that could be polluting to watercourse if not appropriatelymanaged or mitigated.

CN8 Individualresponsible formonitoring groundand water coursepollution

An individualwith responsibility for monitoring ground and water course pollutionand influencing site activities so that they complywith the required pollutionpreventionplans and guidelines, and that themeasures outlined in thewater pollutionmonitoring plan are implemented. The individualmust have sufficient authority, timeon site and knowledge of construction to carry out the role. This individual need not bea specialist but should have experience inwater quality sampling, sufficientunderstanding of water pollution issues and how they are affected by activities on site.Note:Where other pollutants are also being monitored, one individualwith sufficientknowledge could be appointed to carry out these responsibilities for all pollutiontypes.




CN9 Role of theindividualresponsible for sitemonitoring

Their role includes:1. Using data collected on 'receptors'before the construction stage beganas a

reference during construction to identifywhere pollution is occurring2. Ensuring guidance and procedures for maintaining, inspecting and testing the

pollutionpreventionmeasures and any existing pipeworkat the site is followed3. Monitoring of land, surfacewater or groundwater (where necessary) to ensure

pollutionpreventionmeasures are effective4. Formally recording monitoring results to demonstrate the land and water

courses during and post construction are in a satisfactory state (refer to CN11)5. Ensuring national best practice guidance, legislation and regulations are being

adhered to6. Ensuring accessible avenues of complaint are available for stakeholders, such as

a complaints line or public site reception7. Investigating and responding to events, or causes for a change inwater quality.

Events must be reported and corrective actions, if necessary, documented. Thismaybe triggered by complaints from local residents or a site inspection

8. Ensuring complaints received during the construction stage are promptly andsatisfactorily dealt with.

CN10 Operation stageprotection andmonitoringprogramme

The protection and monitoring programme for the operation stagemust include:1. The operationalwater pollution riskassessment (refer to criterion5 )2. Guidance and procedures for maintaining, inspecting and testing thewater

pollutionpreventionmeasures at the site throughout the life of the asset toensure effective operation

3. Reference data collection requirements for substances used during constructionfor whichpollution could or is occurring

4. Monitoring requirements of land, surfacewater or groundwater (wherenecessary) to ensure pollutionpreventionmeasures are effective and to providewarning of the failure of pollutionpreventionmeasures

5. A formal record of themonitoring results at handover to demonstrate the landat the installation is in a satisfactory state (refer to CN11)

6. Identificationof who will have ongoing long term responsibility forimplementing the programme.

CN11 Land andwatercourses in asatisfactory state

Land and watercourses are deemed to be in a satisfactory state based ona reviewfrom the appropriate consultant and where:1. The project complies with all relevant legislation2. The situationpost construction is considered to be the same or better thanpre-

construction3. The project has not incurred any regulatory penalties.A formal record of the appropriate consultant's report including robust justificationfor deeming the land and watercourses to be of a satisfactory state is presented.

CN12 Companiesoperating aportfolio ofinfrastructureassets

Manyoperators of infrastructurewill be in the business of operating a portfolio ofinfrastructure assets. In these businesses, interdependencies betweenassets in theportfolio maybe quite significant and thereforemanagement and maintenanceprocedures handed over by the operator must alignwith their corporate approach topreserve and enhance the value of these assets as a portfolio.This is also detailed within the Resilience section.



Methodology

None.

Evidence



1 – 2 Water pollution strategy N/A N/A

5 N/A Water pollution riskassessment As interim design stage

7 N/A Minimising water coursepollutionplan

Monitored data or siteinspection

20 N/A Emergency response plan As interim design stage



Appropriate consultantA consultant with qualifications and experience relevant to surface and groundwater riskassessment, designing SuDSand pollutionpreventionmeasures and completing run-off calculations.Where complexpreventionmeasures arerequired, this must be a specialist hydrological engineer.

Appropriate pre-works surveyAnappropriate pre-works surveymust include bothof the following:1. Deskbased reviewof all available reports, site plans, operational records,material inventories, records of

pollution incidents, etc. to establish the environmental setting and history of any land or groundwater pollution atthe site.

2. Site reconnaissance (or walkover) to make site based observations and verify the deskbased review.

Appropriate type of separatorsThere are different types of oil separator that are designed for different functions, as follows:1. Class 1 Separators: These are designed to achieve a concentrationof less than5 mg/l oil under standard test

conditions. They should be used when the separator is required to remove very small oil droplets, such as thosearising from car park run-off.

2. Class 2 Separators: These are designed to achieve a concentrationof less than100 mg/l oil under standard testconditions. They are suitable for dealing withdischarges where a lower quality requirement applies or fortrapping large spillages.

Both classes canbe produced as 'full retention'or 'bypass' separators:



1. Full retention separators: These treat the flow that canbe delivered by the drainage system,which is normallyequivalent to the flowgenerated by a rainfall intensity of 50mm/hr.

2. Bypass separators: These fully treat all flows generated by rainfall rates of up to 5mm/hr. Flows above this rateare allowed to bypass the separator. These separators are used when it is an acceptable risknot to provide fulltreatment for high flows.

Appropriate statutory bodyThis refers to the statutory or legal organisationor entitywhose duty it is to carry out the planning approval functionof the asset.If theydo not produce relevant guidance, only the national best practice guidance as detailed inAppendix Bneeds tobe followed.

Areas of high risk of contaminationFor BREEAM, areas of high risk to watercourse pollution include:1. Fuel and chemical storage2. Refuelling areas3. Material stockpiles4. Vehicle and equipment washing areas5. Site compounds, parking areas and vehiclemanoeuvring areas6. Waste disposal facilities.

Comprehensive and up-to-date drainage planFor BREEAMa comprehensive and up-to-date drainage plan includes:1. The locationof and directionof flow for all sewers and drains on the site2. The locationof all drain covers and gullies3. All surfacewater drain outfalls4. The destinationof all foul sewers or combined drains5. The locationof all pollution control facilities, for example oil separators6. A planof sources - pathways - receptors onand surrounding the site.

GroundwaterGroundwater is allwater below the surface of the ground in the saturation zone and indirect contact with the groundor subsoil.

Invasive or noxious plantsNon-indigenous species that adversely affect the habitats they invade economically, environmentally or ecologically.

Low risk areasLow riskareas canbe defined as areas where the riskof contaminationor spillage of substances such as petrol and oilis reduced. For this credit, roofs and small car parks maybe considered as low riskareas.

Ramsar siteRamsar sites arewetlands of international importance designated under the Ramsar Convention.

Relevant stakeholdersFor this issue relevant stakeholders include the appropriate statutory body, local flood specialists, drainage Boards,river trusts and water companies.

SurfacewaterSurfacewater include rivers, lakes, reservoirs, ponds, streams, canals, ditches, including those that are temporarily dry,estuaries and coastalwaters up to threemiles offshore.

Sustainable drainage systems (SuDS)A sequence of management practices and control structures designed to drain surfacewater in amore sustainablefashion than some conventional techniques. Examples of SuDSdevices include:



1. Holding ponds2. Swales3. Reed beds4. Permeable paving - in areas where local geological and hydrological conditions allow this to function, e.g. block

paved surface onpermeable subbase over gravel bed to store thewater and allow it to seep into the soil. For lesspermeable soils, the gravel layer might be deeper and thewater taken to a soakaway although this is not anoption in some areas

5. Local or centralised soakaways either as full systems or as ‘overflow’ or ‘holding’ systems, in areas where localgeological and hydrological conditions allow them to function

6. Run-off from hard surfaces collected as a part of a rainwater harvesting system7. Run-off from hard surfaces directed to a local soakawayor other holding facility such as tanks, ponds, swales etc.8. Green roofs.

WatercourseFor the purpose of this issue 'watercourse' refers to surface and groundwater (as defined above).

Watercourse incidents and emergenciesPossible incidents and emergencies to watercourse include:1. Pollution incidents such as spillages, failure of temporaryworks, bankcollapse, vandalism and fire2. Extremeweather events such as heavy rainfall, flooding and severe frost or snow.

Other information

The source-pathway-receptor approach

The source-pathway-receptor approachhas the following terms:

The source is the activity (for example, the discharge of sewage effluent to an infiltration system, a landfill, etc.).The pathway is throughengineered measures (for example, a landfill lining system, infiltration system, etc.) and themigrationof contaminants through the unsaturated zone and saturated zone to anagreed receptor incorporatingall the processes of attenuation that maybe present.The receptor is a groundwater dependent ecosystem or use of groundwater and / or the groundwater resourceitself or anyother identified conservation-site that maybe at risk).



Pol 03 Noise and vibration



Minimum standards

1 4 One credit - criteria 6 – 12 (Monitoring constructionnoise andvibration) - Very good

Aim

To manage and mitigate noise and vibrationpollution from the asset and its construction.



One credit - Construction and operational noise and vibration strategy

1 A strategic reviewof the noise and vibration likely to arise due to the construction and operationof the asset iscompleted before finalising the concept stage by a suitably qualified acoustician (SQA) (refer to Relevant definitions andCN2).

2 For operational noise and vibration, the SQA defines project specific benchmarks for the following with reference toTable 31 and guidance contained in local or national planning documentation for noise and vibration (refer to AppendixB - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL), CN3, CN4 and CN5):2.a The lowest observed adverse effect level (LOAEL)2.b The significant observed adverse effect level (SOAEL).

3 The proposals for these benchmarks are reviewed byeither a local planning authority or other appropriate statutorybody (refer to Relevant definitions) and are confirmed to be appropriate for the project.

4 The following are included as part of the 'Further consultation'process detailed in ST 02 Consultation and engagement:4.a The noise and vibration strategic review (criterion1 )4.b The noise and vibration impacts resulting from the construction and operationof the asset, including residual

impacts4.c Proposals for mitigating noise and vibration impacts during construction and operation.

5 The project delivery team's or contractor's brief includes the following requirements:5.a To evaluate further opportunities to minimise noise and vibrationduring construction and operation5.b To apply the principles of the noise and vibration strategy to the project.



Detailed construction and operational noise and vibration assessment (prerequisite)Monitoring constructionnoise and vibration (one credit)Operational noise and vibration (up to three credits)



Pol 03 Noise and vibration Pollution

Prerequisite - Detailed construction and operational noise and vibration assessment

6 A SQA:6.a Carries out a detailed noise and vibration impact assessment, identifying the location and details of noise and

vibration sensitive receptors6.b Undertakes a baseline noise and vibration survey in accordancewith the guiding principles of the ISO1996 series

(refer to CN6) and establishes existing exposure to noise and vibration6.c Predicts exposure to noise and vibration from the construction and operationof the asset for each sensitive

receptor and6.d Makes anassessment of the impact and effect for each sensitive receptor based on the data and available

national best practice guidance (refer to CN7)6.e Confirms the SOAELand LOAELbenchmarks identified at the Strategic stage of this issue are still appropriateOR

determines these in accordancewith criteria 2 – 3

7 For the construction stage, a noise and vibrationplan:7.a Is informed by the noise and vibration strategic review (criterion1 )7.b Is developed by the SQA in compliancewith national best practice guidance for constructionnoise and vibration

(refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL) and CN7) and is implemented onsite through the Code of Construction Practice (CoCP), or equivalent (refer to Relevant definitions).

7.c Includes a process for early and ongoing engagement with relevant stakeholders (refer to Relevant definitions),to keep them informed of likely noise and vibration impacts and effects and actions that have been taken tomitigate these

7.d Includes amonitoring plan for noise and vibrationon site.

8 In alignment with national pollution regulations, where present, action is taken to acquire consent to construct beforeconstructionbegins. This application for consent should detail themeasures employed to demonstrate best practicablemeans (BPM) for minimising noise and vibrations resulting from theworks (refer to Relevant definitions).

One credit -Monitoring construction noise and vibration


10 An individual is appointed to carry out on-sitemonitoring of noise and vibration (refer to CN8) and undertakes their rolethroughout construction (refer to CN9).

11 Site induction and specific training is provided for all site staff (refer to CN10), identifying hownoise and vibration fromtheir activities may affect sensitive receptors. This should include training on the procedures included within the noise andvibrationplan and how to reduce the potential impact on sensitive receptors.

12 Lessons learnt and suggestions for improvement are collated and feed into the consultation evaluation (refer to ST 01Consultationplan: criteria 7 – 10 ).

Up to three credits - Operational noise and vibration


14 A noise and vibrationplan is developed by the SQA for the in-use or operation stage of the asset. The plan:14.a Is informed by the noise and vibration strategic review (criterion1 )14.b Follows national best practice guidance (refer to CN7)14.c Identifies measures to reduce noise and vibration levels to best practice levels.

15 Measures to minimise the risks and impacts of noise and vibration are implemented and do not compromisefunctionality.

16 Measures implemented achieve best practice levels as identified in Table 30



Table 30 :Credits associated with reduction in operational noise and vibration

Requirement Associated credits

Operational noise and vibration is less thanor equal to LOAEL 3

Operational noise and vibration is less than SOAEL throughuse of BPM* 2

Operational noise and vibrationhas beeneffectivelymanaged throughuse of BPM* 1

* The local planning authority or other regulatory authoritymust confirm best practicablemeans (BPM)have beenachieved (refer to Relevant definitions).


Table 31:TheNoise Exposure Hierarchy

Perception Examples of outcomes Increasing effectlevel

Action

Notnoticeable

No effect No observed effect No specificmeasures required

Noticeableand notintrusive

Noise canbe heard but does not cause any changeinbehaviour or attitude. Can slightly affect theacoustic character of the area but not such thatthere is a perceived change in the quality of life.

No observedadverse effect

No specificmeasures required

Lowest observedadverse effect level(LOAEL)

Noticeableand intrusive

Noise canbe heard and causes small changes inbehaviour or attitude, e.g. turning up volume oftelevision, speaking more loudly;where there is noalternative ventilation, having to closewindows forsomeof the time because of the noise. Potential forsome reported sleep disturbance. Affects theacoustic character of the area such that there is aperceived change in the quality of life.

Observed adverseeffect

Mitigate and reduceto aminimum

Significant observedadverse effect level(SOAEL)



Perception Examples of outcomes Increasing effectlevel

Action

Noticeableand disruptive

The noise causes amaterial change inbehaviour orattitude, e.g. avoiding certain activities duringperiods of intrusion;where there is no alternativeventilation, having to keep windows closed most ofthe time because of the noise. Potential for sleepdisturbance resulting in difficulty getting to sleep,premature awakening and difficulty getting back tosleep. Quality of life diminished due to change inacoustic character of the area.

Significant observedadverse effect

Avoid

Noticeableand verydisruptive

Extensive and regular changes in behaviour or aninability to mitigate effect of noise leading topsychological stress or physiological effects, e.g.regular sleep deprivationor awakening; loss ofappetite, significant, medically definable harm, e.g.auditory and non-auditory.

Unacceptableadverse effect

Prevent

Compliance notes


CN1 Scope of thisBREEAM issue

Not all projects will have noise and vibration impacts, either during constructionoroperation. Therefore it maynot be necessary to take forward proposals for either ofthesemeasures beyond the initial scoping.Criterion1 within the strategic reviewshould be completed for all projects withproposals for noise or vibration as relevant to the project.Criterion2 and 3 are only applicable to projects with operational noise.Criteria 6 – 12 are applicable to all projects, however, dependent on the constructionactivities only noise or vibrationmaybe relevant.The operational noise and vibration credits are only applicable to projects that willhave anoperational impact. Therefore criteria 13 – 16 will be filtered from theassessment for projects with no operational noise, e.g. a retaining wall.

CN2 Minimum contentfor the noise andvibration strategy

The noise and vibration strategy should identify the following as aminimum:1. The sources and nature of existing noise onand around the site2. Noise and vibration sensitive receptors (refer to Relevant definitions), particularly

numbers of people and habitats potentially adversely affected3. The type of noise or vibration that maybe generated by the different activities

on site, including demolition and construction4. The type of noise or vibration that maybe generated due to the operationof

the asset including maintenance activities5. The predicted distance the noise or vibration is likely to travelwhere adverse

effects might occur, e.g. creationof noisemaps6. The kind of media the noisemay travel through (airborne, ground-borne, water-

borne, structure-borne)7. Measures to mitigate noise and vibration.




CN3 Noise and vibrationbenchmarks

Noise and vibrationbenchmarks for the SOAELand LOAEL levels are determined bythe SQA for reviewand agreement with the local planning authority or otherregulatory authority (see Relevant definitions). These are developed considering thenoise and vibration sources relevant to the infrastructure project including, asappropriate:1. Airborne noise2. Ground-borne noise and vibration3. Water-borne noise and vibration4. Structure-borne noise and vibration.For example, anoffshorewind farmmay require examinationof the potential forwater-borne noise and its impact on sensitive ecosystems. Anunderground railwaysystemmay require examinationof the potential for ground-borne noise, whichwilloftenbe considered alongside vibration.Whereas airborne noisemaybe themostappropriate for other projects, such as roads.Benchmarks should be derived for SOAELand LOAELconsidering:1. All local sensitive receptors2. The identified risks and impacts on these receptors because of the predicted

noise and vibration from the project3. That impacts on receptors may vary because of the same noise and vibration

level, e.g. hospitals and business parks, humans and wildlife species. As a result itmaybe necessary to provide different LOAELand SOAELdepending on thenature of sensitive receptors present.

CN4 Appropriatebenchmarks forincreasing effectlevels

Table 31 details the noise exposure hierarchyAlthough the table refer to noise, theapproach should also be applied to vibration and benchmarks derived by the SQA forbothnoise and vibration.

CN5 Sensitive receptor -wildlife

Wherewildlife is defined as a sensitive receptor, input from a suitably qualifiedecologist (refer to LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan) is sought todetermine the appropriate values.

CN6 Guiding principlesof ISO/DIS1996

ISO/DIS1996-1 Description,measurement and assessment of environmental noise:includes guiding principles for the description and assessment of environmental noise,basic requirements and definitions. Surveys undertaken in accordancewithotherstandards may also satisfy the basic requirements and definitions within ISO/DIS1996-1. This standard is cited to ensure consistency inmeasurement and descriptionof noise surveys. Assessments in accordancewith the requirements of nationalstandards in alignment with the ISO1996 series for constructionor operationwouldsatisfy this requirement (where relevant to the type of noise).

CN7 National bestpractice guidelinesfor noise andvibration ( operation)

Given the large variations in types and effects of noise, specialist technical guidance orgood practice guides mayexist examining noise sources of particular character andcomplexity.For example, operationalwind turbine noisewill be different to that generated from aroad or airport.The design team should demonstrate they have used appropriate best practiceguidance for the operationof the asset type.




CN8 Individualresponsible formonitoring noiseand vibration

An individualwith responsibility for monitoring noise and vibration and influencing siteactivities so that measures outlined in the constructionnoise and vibrationplan areimplemented. The individualmust have sufficient authority, time on site andknowledge of construction to carry out the role. This individual need not be anacoustic specialist but should have sufficient understanding of noise and vibrationissues and how they are affected by activities on site.Note:Where other pollutants are also being monitored, one individualwith sufficientknowledge could be appointed to carry out these responsibilities for all pollutiontypes.


Their role includes:1. Ensuring effectivemanagement of noise and vibration from the construction

activities that impact on the local environment and surrounding sensitivereceptors. This canbemeasured throughmeasurement of noise and vibrationor analysis of complaints received (refer to CN11)

2. Ensuring accessible avenues of complaint are available for stakeholders, such asa complaints line or public site reception

3. Investigating and responding to events or causes for a change in noise andvibration. Events must be reported and corrective actions, if necessary,documented. This maybe triggered by complaints from local residents or a siteinspection

4. Ensuring complaints received during the construction stage are promptly andsatisfactorily dealt with

5. Ensuring current and historic noise and vibrational data, as monitored by theproject team, are publicly availablewith appropriatemetadata forunderstanding.


In the context of this issue this includes all site staff, including subcontractorsundergoing activities that result in noise and vibration that mayhave a significantadverse effect on sensitive receptors if not appropriatelymanaged or mitigated.

CN11 Methods tomonitor effectivemanagement ofnoise and vibration

Themethod of monitoring effective noise and vibrationmanagement will varydepending on the type of sensitive receptor.For human receptors the individual responsible for monitoring noise and vibrationmay identify the types of complaints received, the action takenand the outcomes andcircumstances whenany specified noise conditions were contravened.For non-human receptors such as a sensitivewildlife population,measurements ofnoise or vibration at the receptor would be required based onadvice from a suitablyqualified ecologist.Measurement should be takenduring different stages of the constructionbased onthe predicted noise profile and as advised by the SQA.

Methodology

None.



Evidence



1 Noise and vibration strategy N/A N/A

2 Calculations for LOAELandSOAELbenchmarks

N/A N/A

7 N/A Noise and vibrationplan Monitored data or siteinspection



Applicationof ConsentWhere the constructionof an asset is likely to result in noise or vibration, an application for consent must be submittedto the local authority in order to demonstrate best practicablemeans for minimising noise and vibration. Thisapplication typically should include the following: theworks, and themethod bywhich they are carried out; and thesteps proposed to be taken to minimise noise and vibration resulting from theworks.This is only applicablewhere a local planning authority or other appropriate statutory bodyexists within the areawhere the asset will be constructed.

Appropriate statutory bodyThis refers to the statutory or legal organisationor entitywhose duty it is to carry out the planning approval functionof the asset.

Best practicablemeans (BPM)BPMor 'all reasonable steps', is the provisionof mitigation that ensures all reasonablemeasures have been taken toreduce exposure to noise and vibration. This includes investigationof alternative layouts and materials that reducenoise or vibration. BPMrecognises that there are technical and financial limits on actions that might reasonably berequired to abate a nuisance. For BREEAM, BPMmust be confirmed throughan independent reviewof the project'snoisemitigationmeasures by the local planning authority or other regulatory authority.

Code of Construction Practice (CoCP)A Code of Construction Practice (CoCP) is a formal document containing a series of measures and standards of workto be applied by the contractors throughout the constructionperiod. This will provide a consistent approach to themanagement of construction activities on a project.To demonstrate compliancewithin this issue, the CoCP, or anequivalent document, must containmeasuresappropriate to the project that mitigate the impact of noise and vibration as detailed in the construction stage noiseand vibrationplan.

Effect of a noise or vibration impact on a sensitive receptorThe noise or vibration effect is linked to the level of the impact, the sensitivity of the receptor and other keymatterssuch as the existing acoustic environment.



ImpactThe introductionof a newsound or vibration into anexisting environment.

LowObserved Adverse Effect Level (LOAEL)Refer to Other information section.

Noise and vibration sensitive receptorsLandscapes or buildings where the occupiers or wildlife are likely to be sensitive to noise or vibration created becauseof the construction and operationof the asset, including:1. Residential areas, nearbydwellings and shared community openareas2. Hospitals, health centres, care homes, doctor's surgeries etc.3. Schools, colleges and other teaching establishments4. Libraries5. Places of worship6. Historic, heritage or listed buildings7. Nature reserves, wildlife areas, historic landscapes, parks and gardens8. Special Areas of Conservation (SACs), Ramsar sites and other managed areas9. Anyother development that canbe considered noise or vibration sensitive.

No Observed Effect Level (NOEL)Refer to Other information section.



Relevant stakeholdersFor this issue, relevant stakeholders are receptors sensitive to noise or vibrationdue to the constructionof the asset.This is likely to include, where present, local residents, businesses, operators of community groups and socialinfrastructure and ecologists (where localwildlife is affected).

Significant Observed Adverse Effect Level (SOAEL)Refer to Other information section.

Suitably qualified acoustician (SQA)An individual achieving all the following items canbe considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purpose of a BREEAMassessment:1. Holds a degree, PhD or equivalent qualification in acoustics or sound testing2. Has aminimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Suchexperiencemust clearly

demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting acoustics in relation to construction and the builtenvironment; including, acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for suitable acousticperformance levels and mitigationmeasures


Suitably qualified ecologistSee LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan.

VibrationVibration canbe defined as oscillationof matter about a fixed reference point. Units of displacement, velocity oracceleration are used to describe and quantify vibrations. 22



Other information

BREEAMOperational noise and vibration benchmarks

Themethodology for operational noise and vibrationused in this issue is derived from the toxicology approach23 used bytheWorld HealthOrganisation.

In this approach, instead of seeking to apply a static 'one size fits all' acoustics criteria, at the strategic stage anassessment willdefine values following criteria, based onguidance, research and good practice available at the time, and evaluate thepredicted levels from the development against these criteria.

No Observed Effect Level (NOEL) - This is the level belowwhichno effect canbe detected. In simple terms, below thislevel there is no detectable effect onhealth and quality of life due to anynoise or vibration.Lowest Observed Effect Level (LOAEL) - This is the level abovewhich adverse effects onhealth and quality of life canbedetected.Significant Observed Adverse Effect Level (SOAEL) - This is the level abovewhich significant adverse effects onhealthand quality of life occur.

The UK government web resource Planning Practice Guidance for Noise provides guidance onhow these are arrived at, in theform of the table of noise hierarchy (reproduced in Table 31). Although the tables and guidance all refer to noise, theapproach canbe applied to vibrationwithout difficulty as criteria and values are defined specific to eachproject.


Pol 04 Light pollution Pollution

Pol 04 Light pollution


1 2 None

Aim

To ensure that external lighting is concentrated in appropriate areas and that lighting is minimised, reducing unnecessary lightpollution, energy consumption and nuisance.



One credit - Construction and operational lighting strategy

1 A strategic reviewof the lighting required to construct and operate the asset (refer to CN2) is completed beforefinalising the concept stage by anappropriatemember of the project team.

2 The following are included as part of the 'Further consultation'process detailed in ST 02 Consultation and engagement:2.a The strategic reviewof the lighting (criterion1 )2.b The impact of lighting resulting from the construction and operationof the asset2.c Proposals for mitigating the impact of lighting during construction and operation.

3 The project delivery team's or contractor's brief includes a requirement to evaluate opportunities to minimise lightpollutionduring construction and operation.



Prerequisite -Minimising construction stage light pollution

For criteria 5 – 8 only.

4 Building on the strategic reviewof the lighting carried out at the strategic stage of assessment (criteria 1 – 2 ), atemporary lighting plan (refer to CN3) is developed by the contractor or project team and implemented on site throughthe Code of Construction Practice (CoCP) or equivalent (refer to Relevant definitions).

One credit -Monitoring construction stage light pollution

5 Criterion4 has beenachieved.

6 An individual is appointed to carry out on-sitemonitoring of light pollution (refer to CN5) and undertakes their rolethroughout construction (refer to CN6).

7 Site induction and specific training is provided for all site staff (refer to CN7) identifying how lighting used to performtheir activities may affect sensitive receptors. This should include:7.a The appropriate use of portable and temporary light sources7.b Howsite activities may affect light pollution7.c Staff responsibilities with respect to minimising light pollution.



8 Lessons learnt and suggestions for improvement are collated and feed into the consultation evaluation (refer to ST 01Consultationplan: criteria 5 – 9 ).

One credit -Minimising operational light pollution

EITHER

9 External light pollutionhas beeneliminated througheffective design that removes the need for external lighting withoutadversely affecting the safety and security of the site and its users.

ORalternatively, where the asset does have external lighting, one credit canbe awarded as follows:

10 Lighting for permanent fixtures is designed in compliancewith the limits set for light technical parameters in section2.7of CIE150-200324 and table 2 of CIE126-199725.Alternative national best practice guidance is also used whererelevant (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL) and CN9).

11 Illuminated advertisements, where specified, complywith the uniformity of illuminance and maximum illuminance(CD/m2) outlined in Table 32 (refer to CN8).

12 Where safety, security and advertising lighting is to be used between23:00 hrs and 06:00hrs:12.a Illuminated advertisements complywith Table 32 as detailed above except within Zone E1 where themaximum

luminance value shall be zero past curfew12.b Safety and security lighting complies with the lower levels of lighting recommended during these hours inCIE

150-2003 and CIE126-197

13 The lighting implemented for the fully constructed asset is designed considering the content of the construction andoperational lighting strategy and further identifies:13.a The desirability for decorative lighting and the necessity for safety and security lighting13.b The type and placement of light fittings in and around the asset and opportunities for zoning or limiting lighting

to critical locations on site (refer to CN4)13.c Measures to minimise the risks and impacts of light pollutionwithout compromising health and safety13.d Requirements for a curfewprovision, where appropriate (refer to Relevant definitions).


Table 32:Recommendations for maximum luminance (CD/[m2])

Environmental Zone Zone E0 Zone E1 Zone E2 Zone E3 Zone E4

<10.00 N/A 100 600 800 1000

≥ 10.00 N/A N/A 300 600 600

Table 33: Environmental zone descriptions

EnvironmentalZone

Surrounding Lighting environment Examples

E0 Protected. Dark. UNESCOStarlight Reserves, IDA DarkSkyParks

E1 Natural. Intrinsically dark. National parks, Areas of OutstandingNational Beauty etc.



EnvironmentalZone

Surrounding Lighting environment Examples

E2 Rural. Lowdistrict brightness. Village, or relatively darkouter suburbanlocations.

E3 Suburban. Medium districtbrightness.

Small towncentres or suburban locations.

E4 Urban. Highdistrict brightness. Townor city centres with high levels ofnight time activity.

Compliance notes


CN1 Assessment ofprojects with a smallimpact lightpollution

Where activities associated with the constructionor operationof the asset are unlikelyto have a significant impact on light pollution, the criteria still apply. However, the detailwithin the lighting strategymaybe a simple analysis of the likely risks and appropriatemitigationmeasures proposed.

CN2 Minimum contentfor the strategiclighting review

The lighting strategy should identify the following as aminimum:1. Identificationof light sensitive receptors (refer to Relevant definitions) particularly

areas adjacent to the project which are likely to be sensitive to spill light2. Opportunities for minimising the impact of lighting during construction and

operation3. Considerationof differences in the construction and operation stage in regards

to lighting.

CN3 Temporary lightingplan

The temporary lighting planmust require as aminimum:1. All health and safety requirements and legislation aremet in respect to

construction site lighting2. All light is directed away from the sky3. Light shines directly onto the site and away from:

a. Windows of dwellings or other sensitive buildings (e.g. hospitals)b. Drivers of approaching vehicles (including trains and other transport sources)

4. There is no light spill into areas whichdo not need to be lit, particularly areascontaining wildlife

5. Zoning is determined to allow lower limits of obtrusive light inmore sensitiveareas (refer to CN4 and Relevant definitions)

6. Opportunities for limiting lighting to daylight hours and to critical locations on site7. Lights are switched off at times whenwork is not taking place8. A stated commitment to the avoidance of light pollution and obtrusive lighting.Where any, i.e. above cannot bemet due to a breach inH&S regulationor for securityreasons associated with the operationof the construction site the lighting plan shouldinclude, or be accompanied by, a justification explaining why the circumstances areunavoidable and detail anymitigationmeasures that are being incorporated.




CN4 Zoning of lighting Based on the scale or type of the project the number and size of lighting zones aredetermined by the project team.

CN5 Individualresponsible formonitoring lightpollution

An individualwith responsibility for monitoring light pollution and influencing siteactivities so that measures outlined in the temporary lighting plan are implemented.The individualmust have sufficient authority, time on site and knowledge ofconstruction to carry out the role. This individual need not be a lighting specialist butshould have sufficient understanding of light pollution issues and how they are affectedby activities on site.Note:Where other pollutants are also being monitored, one individualwith sufficientknowledge could be appointed to carry out these responsibilities for all pollution types.


Their role includes:1. Promoting the aim of the temporary lighting plan through site inductions, daily

briefings or similar so that the impact of light pollutionon the local environmentand sensitive receptors is minimised

2. Establishing accessible avenues of complaint for stakeholders, such as acomplaints line or public site reception

3. Investigating and responding to events or causes for a change in light. Eventsmust be reported and corrective actions, if necessary, documented. This maybetriggered by complaints from local residents or a site inspection

4. Ensuring complaints received during the construction stage are promptly andsatisfactorily dealt with.


In the context of this issue this includes all site staff, including subcontractorsundergoing activities that use lighting that may impact sensitive receptors if notappropriatelymanaged or mitigated. This is particularly relevant for operatives usinglighting equipment.

CN8 Safety signs The applicationof criterion11 does not apply to safety signs, although these shouldbe lit with consideration for avoidance of upward light pollutionwhere possible.

CN9 Exemptions toapplicationofdesignguidance in

The limits recommended inCIE150-2003 and CIE126-1997 are not appropriate forsome infrastructure lighting components. Theywould not be applicable to thefollowing:1. Lighthouse lanterns2. Directional security or safety searchlights3. Lasers4. Tall building or structurewarning lights5. Runwayor landing pad marker lights6. Traffic signals, including railway and waterway signals7. Lights on vehicles.

Methodology

None.



Evidence:

c Strategy stage Interim design stage Final post-construction stage

All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAMevidential requirements sectioncanbe used to demonstrate compliancewith these criteria.

1 Strategic reviewof the projectlighting

N/A N/A

4 N/A Temporary lighting plan Refer to generic evidencerequirement above



Code of Construction Practice (CoCP)A Code of Construction Practice (CoCP) is a formal document containing a series of measures and standards of workto be applied by the contractors throughout the constructionperiod. This will provide a consistent approach to themanagement of construction activities on a project.To demonstrate compliancewithin this issue, the CoCP, or anequivalent document, must containmeasuresappropriate to the project that mitigate the impact of light pollution as defined in the temporary lighting plan.

CurfewprovisionThe time after which stricter requirements (for the control of obtrusive light)will apply to lighting on the asset andacross the site, or withinmore sensitive areas (refer to light sensitive receptors definitionbelow). The CIEGuide on theLimitations of the Effects of Obtrusive Light fromOutdoor Lighting Installations26 recommends post-curfewhoursbetween23:00 and 06:00 hours althoughanearlier curfewof 21:30 maybemore appropriate if the project is in arural zone.

Light pollutionSpill light which, because of the quantitative, directional or spectral attributes in a given context, gives rise toannoyance, discomfort, distractionor a reduction in the ability to see essential information.

Light sensitive receptorsLandscapes, buildings or cluster areas where the occupiers or wildlife are likely to be sensitive to light created by theconstructionor operationof the asset, including:

Residential areas and nearbydwellingsHospitals, health centres, care homes, doctor's surgeries etc.Viewpoints where lots of people are likely to be after darkNature reserves, wildlife areas, historic landscapes, parks and gardensSpecial Areas of Conservation (SACs), Ramsar sites and other managed areasAnyother development that canbe considered light sensitive.


Other information

None.


Materials BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

Materials

Category overview


Refer to the country reference sheet in theASWL Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials

Summary

This category encourages steps taken to reduce the impact of temporary and permanent constructionmaterials throughstrategic planning, design and construction. Issues in this section focus on the procurement of materials that are sourced in aresponsibleway, have a lowembodied impact over their life and encouragesmaterials to be used efficiently and reuse andrecycling to be adopted.


Issue ID Credits

Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts Strategy - 0Project detail - 5

Reductionof the assets impact through selectionof materials with a low impact over the full life cycle of the assetIncreasing reward given through considerationof more LCA indicatorsUse of Environmental Product Declarations to informmaterials selectiondecisions

Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials Strategy - 0Project detail - 5Exemplary - 1

Sustainable procurement strategydeveloped with key representatives of the project team to inform futureprocurementMaterials sourced in accordancewith a sustainable procurement planPermanent and temporarymaterials responsibly sourced to reduce environmental and socio-economic impact

Mat 03Materials efficiency Strategy - 2Project detail - 4

Improve lean construction throughmapping of lean tools and activities and implementation throughout design,mobilisation and constructionOptimisationof material use through standardisation, off-site construction (where appropriate) and othertechniquesImprove end of life efficiency throughDesign for Deconstructionplanning and meeting best practicebenchmarks


Materials

Issue ID Credits

Mat 04 Reuse and recycling Strategy - 1Project detail - 3Exemplary - 1

Feasibility studyof opportunities for reuse and recycling of materials on and off-siteA pre-demolition audit (where relevant) to identify potential applications for reuse and recyclingReduce use of virginmaterial through identification and implementationof materials to be reused and recycledRecycled or secondary aggregate specified for highgrade uses against best practice benchmarks



Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts


0 5 None

Aim

To recognise and encourage the use of constructionmaterials with a lowenvironmental impact over the full life of the asset.


None.



Option1:Product life cycle impact (one credit)Option2 (A-C):Asset level life cycle impact assessment (up to four credits)Bothoptions: Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) (one credit)


Option 1 - One credit - Product life cycle impact assessments

1 A suitably qualified carbon, or life cycle assessment (LCA), practitioner carries out product life cycle assessments for tenkeyproducts (refer to CN1)within the assessed asset using existing product specific Environmental Product Declarations(EPDs) or generic LCA data (refer to Relevant definitions).

2 The suitably qualified practitioner considers a minimum of three functionally appropriate options for each keyproduct(refer to CN2) and makes recommendations to the project team to reduce the environmental impact of eachproduct.As aminimum, total carbonequivalent emissions should be considered over the expected lifetime over the asset (referto CN4).

3 The project team demonstrate how the recommendations have been taken forward for the fully constructed asset andreport the LCA data for eachproduct via the BREEAMInfrastructure online tool.

OR

Option 2 - Up to four credits - Asset level life cycle impact assessment

Option 2A - Two credits - Complete carbon footprint

4 Building on the results of the screening carbon footprint (within issue ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts) a fullcarbon footprint is produced and updated throughout keyproject gateways (refer to Relevant definitions) to establishthe total carbonequivalent impact associated with all life cycle stages of the asset shown to be significant during thescreening (refer to ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts: Figure 4 ).

5 The suitably qualified carbonpractitioner uses standards and sources data in accordancewith Table 35 for modules A-Cand D (where appropriate) and documents the assessment process with all decisions justified (refer to CN3).


Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts Materials

6 The suitably qualified carbonpractitioner considers a range of functionally appropriate options and identifies impactsover the expected lifetime of the asset (refer to CN4). Recommendations are provided to minimise the total carbonequivalent emissions (Ref 1 in Table 34), prioritising those that result in the biggest reduction in impact.

7 The project team demonstrate how the recommendations resulted in changes in the design and anoverall reduction inemissions.

8 The total carbonequivalent data are reported via the BREEAMInfrastructure online tool in reference to the asset'scapacity (refer to CN5).

Option 2B - Three credits - Simplified life cycle assessment (LCA)

9 Building on the screening LCA (within issue ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts) a simplified LCA is updatedthroughout keyproject gateways (refer to Relevant definitions) to establish the environmental impact associated with alllife cycle stages of the asset shown to be significant during the screening (refer to ID 06 Whole life environmentalimpacts: Figure 4 ).

10 The following indicators are evaluated and reported in linewith the principles set out in EN 15978 and the EeBGuidancedocument (refer to CN6) for modules A-C and D (where appropriate):10.a Ref 1:Total carbonequivalent and GlobalWarming Potential10.b Ref 8:Net use of freshwater10.c Ref 9:Hazardous waste disposed10.d Ref 10:Non-hazardous waste disposed.

Note:Where the asset being assessed will be constructed outside of the EuropeanUnion (EU) refer to CN7

11 The suitably qualified LCA practitioner considers a range of functionally appropriate options and identifies impacts overthe expected lifetime of the asset. Recommendations are provided to minimise the environmental impact, prioritisingthose that result in the biggest reduction in impact.

12 The project team demonstrate how the recommendations resulted in changes in the design and anoverall reduction inimpact.

13 All LCA indicators investigated are reported via the BREEAMInfrastructureOnline tool and the total carbonequivalentreported in reference to the asset's capacity (refer to CN5).

Option 2C - Four credits - Complete life cycle assessment

14 Building on the screening LCA (within issue ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts) a complete LCA is updatedthroughout keyproject gateways (refer to Relevant definitions) to establish the environmental impact associated with alllife cycle stages of the asset (refer to ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts: Figure 4 ).

15 All indicators shown in Table 34 are evaluated and reported in linewith the principles set out in out in EN 15978 and theEeBGuidance document (refer to CN6) for modules A-C and D (where appropriate).

16 Criteria 11 – 13 are achieved for the complete LCA.

Both options - One credit - Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs)

17 At least one credit has beenawarded for Option1 or 2 above (criteria 1 – 16 ).

18 The suitably qualified carbonor LCA practitioner identifies ten keyproducts (refer to CN1)within the assessed asset. Fiveof these products are specified within the final asset based on the analysis of product specific, independently verified,third party Environmental Product Declarations.

19 The EPDsmust inform specification recommendations made by the suitably qualified carbonor LCA practitioner and theEPDs relating to the products used in the final asset must be requested and documented.




Table 34: Indicators to be reported ona full life cycle assessment

Ref Indicators Unit

1 Total carbonequivalent or GlobalWarmingPotential (Climate Change);GWP (refer to Relevantdefinitions)

kgCO2e

2 OzoneDepletion Potential;ODP kg CFC 11e

3 Acidification Potential for Soil and Water;AP kgSO2-e

4 Eutrophication Potential; EP kg (PO4)3-e

5 PhotochemicalOzone Creation; POCP kg C2H4e

6 Abiotic Depletion Potential – Elements;ADPE kg Sbe

7 Abiotic Depletion Potential – Fossil Fuels;ADPF MJe

8 Net use of freshwater; FW m3

9 Hazardous waste disposed;HWD kg

10 Non-hazardous waste disposed;NHWD kg

11 Radioactivewaste disposed (high-level nuclearwaste); RWDHL

kg

Note: For countries outside of the EuropeanUnion, the above indicators maybe varied to suit your project and country ofassessment. BRE Global should be contacted where the suitably qualified carbonor LCA practitioner believes this isnecessary.



Table 35: Standards and data used to inform the carbon footprint (criterion4 only)


Embodied carbonof products - cradle togate

EN 15978:201127

ORISO14064-2:200628

ORGreenHouseGas (GHG)Protocol29

One standard should beselected.

Sourced as detailed in EN 15804(EPDs) and EN15978 or ISO21930 (outside EUonly).

Transport of constructionproducts to site

Construction activities on site (plant andmachinery used on-site & staffaccommodation)

On-site staff travel (to and from site)

Transport and disposal of waste from thesite

Operational carbonand energy

Land use change impact Land use, Land Use Change andForestry (LULUCF)GHG Inventorydata

LULUCFGHG Inventory data

Where a standard or data source not listed above is proposed by the suitably qualified LCA practitioner BREGlobalshould be contacted to confirm it canbe used as a compliant standard or data source.

Table 36:Key elements of an infrastructure asset

Infrastructure asset type Key element types assessed

Bridge FoundationsMain supporting structureDeck

Large-scale solar FoundationsFramingSolar panelsCabling and electrical equipment

Pipeline Pipe beddingPipe

Power stations FoundationsPrimary structureAncillary structurePipeM&Eequipment



Infrastructure asset type Key element types assessed

Railway FoundationsSubbaseBaseBallastSleeperTrack

Retaining wall or flood defence Supporting structureVisible structure

Road FoundationsSubbaseBase courseRoad baseWearing course

Other Please contact BREGlobalwho canestablish the key elements for assessment withinthe proposed asset.

Transmission and distributionprojects

FoundationsMain supporting structureM&Eequipment (e.g. fittings and insulators)Conductors

Underground structures (e.g.tunnels)

Primary structureAncillary structureM&Eequipment

Water treatment FoundationsPrimary structureAncillary structurePipeM&Eequipment

Wind turbine FoundationsTowerBlades

Compliance notes


CN1 Keyproducts withinthe elemental LCA

Inorder to determine the ten keyproducts to assess, the suitably qualified carbonorLCA practitioner must consider as aminimum the key elements of the infrastructureasset as shown in Table 36 and their component materials. A justification should beprovided as to how the keyproducts were selected in order to make recommendationsthat will have the largest positive impact.


mailto:[email protected]



CN2 Less than threefunctionallyappropriateoptions available

Where there are less than three functionally appropriate options available, all of theavailable functionally appropriate equivalents are analysed.

CN3 Cut-off criteria forthe carbon impactassessment

Where the carbonequivalent impact of an activity is estimated to account for no morethan1%of the total impact of that module, that activitymaybe omitted from theassessment.The proportionof total neglected activities within amodule, e.g. per module A1-A3,A4-A5, B1-B5, B6-B7, C1-4 and module D (where calculated) should not exceed 5%ofthe total impact within that module.This note cannot be applied in order to hide data. Any applicationof the cut-off criteriashould be documented.Note: This compliance note is not relevant to projects undergoing the simplified orcomplete LCA (criteria 4 – 16 ) - these projects should refer to EN 15978 and the EeBGuidanceDocument (refer to CN6).


The impacts should bemeasured over the expected lifetime of the asset as indicated inthe design specification. If the lifetime is not specified then theworking lifetimesdetailed in national best practice standards for the asset type should be used (refer toAppendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)).

CN5 Total carbonequivalent andprimary energyconsumption fromthe asset over itsexpected lifetime inreference tocapacity

The capacitymeasurement will vary depending on the type of asset. This allows thecarbonequivalent emissions and primary energy consumptionof the asset over itsexpected lifetime to be compared with its functional requirements. The design teamshould report on capacity as shown inCE01 Carbonand energy strategy: Table 44 asappropriate to the infrastructure type assessed.For example, a bridge project should report onboth:

Total carbonequivalent: kgCO2e/maximum axleweight of traffic volume (kg)

per km per annumPrimary energy consumption: kWh/maximum axleweight of traffic volume (kg)per km per annum

CN6 Use of EN 15978and the EeBGuidancedocument

EN 15978 and the EeBGuidance document (refer to Other information) have bothbeenwrittenwith a focus onbuildings, however the principles and rules within these areequally applicable to infrastructure projects.Dependent on the infrastructure type the suitably qualified LCA practitioner canmodifythe requirements of these documents where justified as necessary and appropriateand record the rationale for these decisions.For projects outside of the EuropeanUnion refer to CN7.




CN7 Assets outside ofthe EuropeanUnion

The standards EN 15978 and EeBGuidance documents are currently regarded as bestpractice globallywith respect to the sustainability of constructionworks, life cycleassessments and environmental product declarations.For the purposes of a BREEAMInfrastructure assessment BREGlobal requires that theprinciples of EN 15978 and EeBGuidance are followed inorder to provide a consistentapproach to life cycle assessment. The suitably qualified LCA practitioner canmodify therequirements of these documents further to account for regional variations if necessaryfor the assessment.If an alternative national best practice standard for life cycle assessment ofinfrastructure projects is commonly used, BREGlobal should be contacted to confirmwhether these standards canbe used inplace of EN 15978 and the EeBGuidancedocument.

Methodology

None.

Evidence



1 – 3 N/A Product LCAs includingrecommendations andjustifications from the suitablyqualified carbonpractitioner


4 – 8 N/A Complete carbon footprintreport includingrecommendations andjustifications from the suitablyqualified carbonpractitioner


9 – 13 N/A Simplified life cycle assessmentreport includingrecommendations andjustifications from the suitablyqualified LCA practitioner





14 –16

N/A Complete life cycle assessmentreport includingrecommendations andjustifications from the suitablyqualified LCA practitioner


17 –19

N/A Refer to generic evidencerequirement above

Delivery receipts and EPDcertificates



Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs)The ISO14025:2006 defines anenvironmental label or environmental declaration as a claimwhich indicates theenvironmental aspects of a product or service. ISO14020:2012 goes on to state that environmental labels anddeclarations provide information about a product or service concerning its overall environmental character, a specificenvironmental aspect, or any number of aspects. BREare anexample of an EPD provider via the BREEnvironmentalProfiles Schemewhich is being replaced by the newEN15804 compliant BREEPD Verification scheme.

Independently verified third party Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs)For this BREEAMissue, the independently verified third party EPDs can cover:

Partial life cycle (cradle to gate or cradle to gatewithoptions*)ORWhole life cycle (cradle to grave)

*Partial life cycle EPD can cover:The product stage only: such an EPD covers rawmaterial supply, transport, manufacturing and associated processes;this EPD is said to be "cradle -to gate";The product stage and selected further life cycle stages: such an EPD is said to be "cradle to gatewithoptions".In both cases, the EPDmust be produced in accordancewith the requirements within EN 15804, ISO21930 or the ISO14020 series, particularly ISO14025 and ISO14040 and 14044 (life cycle assessment).

Keyproject gatewaysThe definitionof keyproject gateways refers to project delivery phases, and this would include:1. Concept design2. Definition3. Design

ProductsFor the purpose of BREEAMInfrastructure the term 'products' refers to allmaterials and products used over thelifetime of the asset, i.e. its construction, operation and demolition.


demonstrate a practical understanding of LCA and its methodology. This includes familiarity and use of ISO14040 and ISO14044 and use of carbon footprinting tools or other carbon life cycle assessmentmethodologies

2. Has experience in undertaking assessments of the carbonand energy impact (or life cycle impacts for the suitably



qualified LCA practitioner - see below)of constructionprojects3. Candemonstrate that theydo not have a vested interest in the outcomeof the infrastructure project and should

not be professionally connected with any energy company, lowor zero carbon technologyor manufacturer.

Suitably qualified LCA practitionerAn individualwho canmeet the following requirements canbe deemed 'suitably qualified' for the purpose of aBREEAMassessment:1. Meets the requirements 1–3 specified for a suitably qualified carbonpractitioner PLUS2. Their knowledge and experience includes preparationof Type III environmental declarations, including familiarity

and use of ISO14025 and ISO21930.3. Their knowledge and experience includes applicationof Type III environmental declarations in the construction

context, specifically awareness of EN 15978:2011 and EN15804:2012+A1:2013. (Refer to CN7 for projectsoutside of the EU.)




2O),


2e to reflect the


Other information

Link between ID 06Whole life environmental impacts andMat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts

The options available to the design team for assessment of this issue (Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts) is linked directlyto theworkcarried out at the strategic stagewithin the issue ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts. Figure 5 belowdetailsthis linkage and the associated credits availablewhen selecting different options.

Figure 5 Assessment linkage between ID 06Whole life environmental impacts and Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impactsand available credits

EeBGuide Project

EeBGuide's Info Hub provides a wealth of information for LCA in the construction sector http://www.eebguide.eu/.


http://www.eebguide.eu/

Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials Materials

Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials


Minimum standards

0 5 Prerequisite - criterion1 (Legal sourcing) - Pass

Aim

To recognise and encourage the efficient procurement and use of sustainably and responsibly sourced materials.


None.



Legal sourcing (prerequisite)Sustainable procurement plan (one credit)Responsible sourcing of permanent materials (up to three credits)Responsible sourcing of temporarymaterials (one credit)


Prerequisite - Legal sourcing

1 Allmaterials used on the project (permanent and temporary) are legally sourced (refer to Relevant definitions).

One credit - Sustainable procurement plan


3 The principal contractor develops and sources materials for the project in accordancewith a documented sustainableprocurement plan (refer to Relevant definitions).

Up to three credits - Responsible sourcing of permanent materials (RSM)


5 The available RSMcredits for permanent materials (refer to Table 37) canbe awarded where the correspondingpercentage of materials for the asset are responsibly sourced in accordancewith the BREEAMmethodology, as definedin Routes 1 or 2 in theMethodology sectionbelow.

6 Additionally, allmaterials not covered by a BREEAMrecognised responsible sourcing certification scheme have beensubjected to a riskassessment by the supply chain organisations and demonstrate due diligence (refer to Relevantdefinitions) inmonitoring compliancewith the ILODeclarationon Fundamental Principles and Rights at Work30.

One credit - Responsible sourcing of temporary materials (RSM)




8 The available RSMcredit for temporarymaterials (refer to Table 37) canbe awarded where the correspondingpercentage of temporarymaterials for the site are responsibly sourced in accordancewith the BREEAMmethodology, asdefined in Routes 1 or 2 in theMethodology section.

Exemplary level criteria

The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve one innovation credit for this BREEAMissue:


10 The percentage of materials responsibly sourced for the project or subproject meet or exceeds the required level inTable 37.

Table 37:Credits available based onpercentage RSMpoints achieved

RSM Credits %of available RSM points achieved

1 - permanent materials ≥ 18%



Exemplary level - permanent materials ≥ 70%

1 - temporarymaterials ≥ 36%


Table 38:Components and material categories

Component categories for permanent materials

1. Earthworks, including landscaping2. Subbase and ballast3. Pavements and footways4. Piling5. Retaining walls6. Tunnels7. Primary structures8. Ancillary structures9. Drainage10. Other.

Component categories for temporarymaterials

1. Formworkand falsework2. Shoring and temporary bracing3. Temporary fill and structures (crane foundations, temporary access roads, etc.)4. Fencing and safety barriers5. Temporary piping, electrical, mechanical and heating services6. Other.



Component categories for permanent materials

Material categories

1. Timber or timber-based2. Concrete or cementitious3. Metal4. Stone or aggregate5. Clay based6. Gypsum7. Glass8. Plastic, polymer, resin, paint, chemicals and bituminous9. Animal fibre or skin or cellulose fibre10. Other.

Compliance notes


CN1 BREEAMrecognisedresponsiblesourcingcertificationschemes and theirpoint scores

GuidanceNote 18 available in the BREEAMAssessor Guidance sectionof the BREEAMprojects website provides a table of responsible sourcing certification schemesrecognised under BREEAM, their scope and associated point scores. This table isreviewed ona regular basis and BREEAMAssessors must ensure theyuse the currenttable.Note: The responsible sourcing certification schemepoint score is determined basedon the rigour of responsible sourcing demonstrated by the suppliers or manufacturersof that material or product through the use of recognised responsible sourcingcertification schemes.

CN2 Checkingresponsiblesourcing claims

Confirmationof manufacturers and suppliers claims should be sought from therelevant responsible sourcing schemeprovider.Manyof the organisations whoadminister RSMcertification schemeswill, via their website, list companies and productsthat have been certified against their standards, including the scope of any suchcertification. Some schemes, including BES6001 via www.greenbooklive.com,willprovide downloadable copies of the relevant certificate, which can in turnbe used asevidence of compliance for this BREEAMissue.

CN3 Other componentcategories forpermanentmaterials - SeeTable 38

Other components for infrastructure projects will vary dependent on the type ofproject. For example, rail projects may include railway sleepers and track, road projectsmay include surfacing materials, etc.Refer to CN5 whichdetails whenmaterials do not need to be included within theassessment of this issue.

CN4 Scope of temporarymaterialsconsidered - SeeTable 38

The scope of temporarymaterials considered excludes scaffolding and portableoffices or cabins. These items are commonly reused and therefore they are excludedfrom the assessment.


http://www.greenbook.live.com/



CN5 Route 1 Cut- off Seestep 1 in theMethodologysection.

Materials that meet the cut-off criteria are those that are considered minor in terms ofthe constructionof the asset.Materials can therefore be excluded from assessmentwhere theymeet anyof the following three rules:1. Anymaterial typewithin a component categorywhich is approximately estimated

to account for less than5%of the volume or mass of thewhole component.2. Anymaterial typewithin a component categorywhich is approximately estimated

to account for less than1m3 per 1,000m2 of gross internal floor area for pointprojects.

3. Anymaterial typewithin a component categorywhich is approximately estimatedto account for less than1m3 per 1000m of linear length for linear projects.

Fixings, adhesives and ironmongerywould normally fall below this threshold. Detailedcalculations will not normally be required to justify suchexclusions, however a logicalapproach to estimating the exclusions should be provided.

Methodology

There are two routes to demonstrating compliancewith this issue. Either of the routes or a combinationmaybe followed forany situation:

Route 1 is intended for use inmost situations where detailed informationonquantities of materials is not readilyavailable.Route 2 is intended for situations where amore detailed analysis is possible due to the availability of sufficient detailonmaterials quantities and associated supply chains.

Route 1: Lowest responsible sourcing certification scheme point score

The following steps outline themethodology to be followed for this route to determine the number of credits achieved forresponsible sourcing. The calculations outlined beloware undertakenusing the BREEAMInfrastructureMat 02 calculator andthe relevant project information collated by the project team.

Step 1: Confirm the presence of 'Component' categories andmaterials

Identify from the 'Component categories' list within Table 38 components relevant to the project. Allocate from the 'materialcategory' list allmaterials that make up each component category. Exclude allmaterials within a component category thatmeet the cut-off criteria set out inCN5.

Note: Themost appropriate category for eachparticular material typemust be selected, where none of the categories areappropriate use 'other.'

Products made up of constituent materials (such as a railway track)must be brokendown into constituent materials andassessed separately. For example constituent parts of a trackmaybe rails, fasteners, sleepers and ballast or slab track.

Step 2: Confirm the responsible sourcing certification scheme point score achieved for each applicablematerial

For eachmaterial type identified as applicable in step 1, determinewhether or not it is covered by a BREEAMrecognisedResponsible Sourcing Certification Scheme certificate (refer to Additional information).

Refer to GuidanceNoteGN18 available in the BREEAMAssessor Guidance sectionof the BREEAMProjects website for themost up-to-date list of BREEAMrecognised Responsible Sourcing Certification Schemes, their scope and corresponding pointscore.



Step 3: Point allocation and award of credits

The data entered in steps 1 and 2 are used in the BREEAMMat 02 tool to calculate the number of RSMpoints achieved andthe number of credits to be awarded accordingly. Credits are awarded as follows:

For materials that have beengiven the samematerial category (for this example Timber or timber-based products have beenused), the tool:

1. Finds the average responsible sourcing certification schemepoint score for [Timber or timber-based materials] thathave the same 'component' category. This is repeated for every 'component' category present.

2. Selects the 'component' categorywith the lowest average responsible sourcing certification schemepoint score for thatcomponent.

The process (1 and 2 above) is repeated for eachmaterial category. The results for allmaterial categories are summed andthe difference between the total and themaximum total possible is expressed as a percentage. The percentage is thenconverted to a credit score according to the Table 38.

Example calculation for Route 1

Table 39:Credits available based onpercentage RSMpoints achieved

Componentcategory

Material category Responsiblesourcingcertificationschemepointscore

Average pointscore (for agivenmaterialin thatcomponentcategory)

Point scoreallocation(lowest pointscore for agivenmaterialcategory)

Earthworks Stone or aggregate product 1 10 10 5.5

Subbase orballast

Stone or aggregate product 1 5 5.5

Subbase orballast

Stone or aggregate product 2 6

Earthworks Concrete or cementitious product 1 3 3 3

Subbase orballast

Concrete or cementitious product 1 4 4

Ancillarystructure

Concrete or cementitious product 1 6 6

Sleepers &track

Timber or timber-based product 1 6 5 5

Sleepers &track

Timber or timber-based product 2 4



Componentcategory

Material category Responsiblesourcingcertificationschemepointscore

Average pointscore (for agivenmaterialin thatcomponentcategory)

Point scoreallocation(lowest pointscore for agivenmaterialcategory)

Sleepers &track

Metal product 1 7 5 5

Sleepers &track

Metal product 2 3

Ancillarystructure

Metal product 1 5 5

Table 40: Example calculation for Route 1 - point allocation and award of credits

Materialcategory

Points score achieved Maximum point scoreavailable

%availablepointsachieved

Creditsachieved

Stone oraggregate

5.5 10 46.25% 2

Concrete orcementitious

3 10

Timber ortimber-basedproducts

5 10

Metalproducts

5 10

Total 18.5 40

Route 2: Proportion of materials responsibly sourced

This route allows for a more detailed calculationof the responsibly sourced materials used for constructing the final assetwhere informationonmaterial quantities are available. It follows a similar methodology to that set out for Route 1 above butallows for a detailed calculationof the impact of varying specifications and supply chains based on the relative quantity ofeachmaterial to weight the point scores thus influencing the final result. Following Route 2 leads to amore accurate final resultand could therefore lead to a higher score.

Anexample calculation for Route 2 is provided below. The example illustrates the calculation for a singlematerial category(stone or aggregatematerials). This process would be repeated for eachmaterial category present in the infrastructure assetto determine the final score.



Example calculation for Route 2

Table 41: Example calculation for Route 2 for permanent stone or aggregatematerials

Componentcategory

RSCSpointscore(A)

Quantity(m3/kg) (B)

Weightedpointscore(C)=(A)*(B)

Maxweightedpointscore(D)=10*(B)

Totalscore forcomponent (E)=sum of(C)

Totalmaxscore forcomponent (F)=sum of D

Total%scoreachieved (G)= (E)/(F)

Average%achieved (H)=average of(G)

Scoreachieved formaterial =10*(H)

Earthworks

10 8500 85000 85000 85000 85000 100% 76.66%

7.66

subbaseor ballast

5 5000 25000 50000 40000 75000 53.33%

subbaseor ballast

6 2500 15000 25000

Combination of routes

The following table illustrates the award of credits where a combinationof routes is used. In the example belowRoute 2 hasbeenused to calculate the points for stone or aggregate based products. For all other materials present Route 1 has beenused to allocate points. The figures shownhave been taken from the relevant tables under Route 1 and 2 examplecalculations provided above.

Table 42: Example calculation for combining Route 1 & 2 - point allocation and award of credits

Materialcategory

Points score achieved Maximum pointscore available

%availablepointsachieved

Creditsachieved

StoneORaggregate

7.66 10 51.65% 2

Concrete orcementitious

3 10

Timber ortimber-basedproducts

5 10

Metalproducts

5 10

Total 20.66 40



Evidence



1 N/A A specificationor letterof intent from the designteam confirming that alltimber will be procuredin accordancewith thedefinitions of legallyharvested and tradedtimber.

Written confirmation that thedocumentary evidence providedat Design Stage, detailing thetimber specificationhave beenused as specifiedA letter from the contractorconfirming other materials werelegally sourced

5 , 8 ,10

N/A Completed BREEAMInfrastructureMat 02 calculatorWritten confirmation fromsupplier of materials that theyhave a responsible sourcingcertificate and it is valid in linewiththe responsible sourcing schemerequirements

Copies of all relevant certificatesand chain of custody evidence

6 N/A Supply chain organisations riskassessment and due diligencereporting

As design stage



BREEAM InfrastructureMat 02 CalculatorA calculator tool used by the BREEAMAssessor to determine the number of BREEAMcredits achieved for BREEAMissueMat 02.

BREEAM recognised responsible sourcing certification schemesThese are third party schemes evaluated and approved byBREGlobal for recognitionunder BREEAM. Refer toGuidanceNoteGN18 available in the Resources sectionof the BREEAMwebsite for informationon the evaluationcriteria and the process for the evaluation and acceptance of schemes, including application and appeals.

Chain of custody (CoC)This is a process used to maintain and document the chronological history of the evidence or path for products fromforests to consumers. Timber must be tracked from the certified forest to the finished product. All the steps, fromthe transport of timber from the forest to a sawmill until it reaches the customer,must maintain appropriateinventory control systems that allow for separation and identificationof the certified product. Chain of custodycertification ensures that a facility has procedures in place to track timber from certified forests and avoid confusion



withnon-certified timber. Chain of custody is established and audited according to the rules of relevant forestcertification systems. See also definitionof CITESbelow.

Conventionon International Trade in Endangered Species (CITES)The Conventionon International Trade in Endangered Species of wild fauna and flora (CITES)works by subjectinginternational trade in specimens of selected species to certain controls. All import, export, re-export and introductionfrom the sea of species covered by the Conventionhas to be authorised througha licensing system. Each Party to theConventionmust designate one or moreManagement Authorities in charge of administering that licensing systemand one or more Scientific Authorities to advise them on the effects of trade on the status of the species. The speciescovered byCITESare listed in threeAppendices, according to the degree of protection theyneed:1. Appendix I includes species threatened with extinction. Trade in specimens of these species is permitted only in

exceptional circumstances2. Appendix II includes species not necessarily threatened with extinctionbut inwhich trademust be controlled to

avoid utilisation incompatiblewith their survival3. Appendix III contains species that are protected in at least one country, whichhas asked other CITESParties for

assistance in controlling the trade.Appendices I and II of the CITES list illustrate species of timber that are protected outright. Appendix III of the CITES listillustrates species that are protected in at least one country. If a timber species used in the development is onAppendix III it canbe included as part of the assessment as long as the timber is not obtained from the country orcountries seeking to protect this species.

CompositematerialsCompositematerial canbe defined as anengineered materialmade from two or more constituent materials withsignificantly different physical or chemical properties and which remain separate and distinct on amacroscopic levelwithin the finished structure. Resin based composites such as glass reinforced plastic and polymeric render andtimber composites such as chipboard or particleboard,MDF, OSB, plywood, hardboard, laminated veneered lumber,glulam and cement bonded particleboard are all required to be assessed for responsible sourcing.

Due diligenceThe performance of relevant and appropriate investigations and monitoring of anorganisation's supply chains sothat the actions of those supply chains do not compromise the organisation's commitments to responsible sourcing.Criterion6 is required to bemet where supply chain organisations source constituent materials outside of the EU, orfrom states that have not declared adherence to theOECDGuidelines for Multinational Enterprises. The followingestablished schemes shall be considered appropriatemechanisms for demonstrating due diligence:1. Membership of the Ethical Trade Initiative2. Membership of the United Nations Global Compact3. Certification to the Social Accountability International SA8000 standardDue diligence is required for the supply chain organisation that carries out the final processing or manufacturing ofthematerials into a final product, i.e. it should cover at least the keyprocess.

Legally harvestedTimber that has beenharvested in accordancewith theApplicable legislation in the country of harvest.

Legal timberTimber that was legally harvested and legally traded.

Legally TradedLegally traded means timber or products derived from legally harvested timber that were:1. Exported in compliancewith exporting country laws governing the import of timber and timber products,

including payment of any export taxes, duties or levies2. Imported in compliancewith importing country laws governing the import of timber and products, including

payment of any taxes, duties, levies, or not in contraventionof exporting country laws governing the export oftimber and products, including payment of export taxes, duties and levies

3. Traded in compliancewith legislation related to the conventionon international trade in endangered species(CITES), where applicable.

Legally sourced materials



Relevant documentationdemonstrating legal sourcing must be provided or made available on request subject to theavailability of suchmaterials in the country concerned. Specifically for timber, refer to the 'legal timber,' 'legallyharvested' and 'legally traded'definitions.

Permanent materialsPermanent materials are those used for constructionof the asset or that will be retained on-site on completionof theproject. For the purpose of this issue, permanent materials must include semi-permanent materials, i.e. materials thatdo not form part of the asset but will remainpost construction. For example, roads that are built to facilitateconstructionof the asset whichwill not be removed (due to providing local access) should be considered permanentmaterials.

Pre-consumer waste streamWastematerial generated during manufacturing processes; this excludes reuse of materials such as rework, regrindor scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it.

Post-consumer waste streamWastematerial generated byhouseholds or by commercial, industrial and institutional facilities in their role as endusers of the product, which canno longer be used for its intended purpose. This includes returns of material from thedistribution chain.

Recycled materialMaterials diverted from the pre-consumer or post-consumer waste streams that require significant processingbefore they canbe used again.

Responsible sourcingThemanagement and implementationof sustainable development principles in the provision, procurement andtraceability of constructionmaterials and components. In BREEAM, this is demonstrated throughauditable third partycertification schemes.

Responsible sourcing certification schemepoint scoresA graded scale to reflect the rigour of the certification scheme used to demonstrate responsible sourcing, formingthe basis for awarding credits in the BREEAMissueMat 02. Refer to GuidanceNoteGN18 available in the BREEAMAssessor Guidance sectionof the BREEAMProjects website for anup-to-date table of responsible sourcingcertification schemes recognised byBREGlobal Ltd for the purposes of a BREEAMassessment.

Reused materialsMaterials that canbe extracted from thewaste stream and used againwithout further processing, or with onlyminorprocessing, that does not alter the nature of thematerial (e.g. cleaning, cutting or fixing to other materials).

Sustainable procurement planA plan that sets out a clear framework for the responsible sourcing of materials to guide procurement throughout aproject and for all involved in the specification and procurement of constructionmaterials. The planmaybe preparedand adopted at anorganisational level or be project specific and for the purposes of BREEAMcompliance, will coverthe following as aminimum:1. Identificationof risks and opportunities against a broad range of social, environmental and economic issues. BS

8902:2009 Responsible sourcing sector certification schemes for constructionproducts- Specification canbeused as a guide to identify these issues

2. Aims, objectives and targets to guide sustainable procurement activities. BS8903:2010 Principles andframework for procuring sustainably - Guide canbe used to inform setting of aims, objectives and targets

3. The strategic assessment of responsibly sourced materials available locally and nationally. There should be a policyto procurematerials locallywhere appropriate and practical

4. Responsible sourcing policies that will be employed by the contractor and subcontractor5. Procedures that are in place to checkand verify that the sustainable procurement plan is being implemented and

adhered to on individual projects. These could include setting out measurement criteria, methodology andperformance indicators to assess progress and demonstrate success

6. Informationonhow the chain of custodyof materials will be fully audited and evidenced.



TemporarymaterialsTemporarymaterials are those used for temporaryworks. Temporaryworks are installations required to provideaccess, protection, support, or services for workers, equipment and materials during the construction, renovation,retrofit, maintenance, or demolitionof permanent works. Temporaryworks are also required to provide temporaryservice, repair, or support for anypart of permanent works, until the permanent works have achieved a state ofcompletion allowing temporaryworks to be removed. This includes (but is not limited to) temporary structuralsupport, formwork, site facilities, temporary parking,material or machinery storage.

Other information

BES 6001:2008 Framework Standard for Responsible Sourcing of Construction Products

This is a BREGlobal standard that provides a framework for the assessment and certificationof the responsible sourcing ofconstructionproducts. The Standard has been structured so that compliance canbe demonstrated througha combinationof meeting the requirements of other recognised certification schemes, establishing writtenpolicies, setting objectives andtargets and engaging with relevant stakeholders.

To complywith the standard a product must meet a number of mandatory criteria.Where a product demonstratescompliance beyond themandatory levels, higher levels of performance canbe achieved. The standard's performance ratingsrange from Pass to Good, VeryGood and Excellent.

The development of this standard and subsequent certification schemeswill, it is envisaged, provide constructionproducts,not wholly covered under current recognised standards, a means for demonstrating their responsibly sourced credentials. Inturn this will allowclients, developers and design teams to specify responsibly sourced constructionproducts withgreaterassurance and provide ameans of demonstrating compliancewith the assessment criteria for this BREEAMissue.

To viewa list of products approved to BES6001 and additional information about the standard visit:www.greenbooklive.com

Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) and Programme for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC)validity

A CPET document maybe helpful to assessors with respect to determining the validity of FSC and PEFC certificates. Seewww.cpet.org.uk.



http://www.cpet.org.uk/


Mat 03 Materials efficiency


2 4 None

Aim

To recognise and encouragemeasures to optimisematerial efficiency and reduce virginmaterial consumption.



Material efficiency (one credit)Design for deconstruction (one credit)


One credit –Material efficiency

Resourcemanagement plan (RMP)

1 A ResourceManagement Plan (RMP) is developed for the project and records howmaterial efficiency is beingconsidered (refer to Relevant definitions).

Lean tools and activities

2 A strategic levelmapping exercise is completed to establish the type and sequence of design and constructionprocesses for the project.

3 Following findings of the strategic levelmapping exercise key representatives of the project team (refer to Relevantdefinitions) identify and assess:3.a Processes and dependencies or links within this map that:

3.a.i Are traditionally inefficient3.a.ii Have the potential to be inefficient, e.g. if poorlymanaged3.a.iii Have the potential to bemore efficient, e.g. if wellmanaged

3.b Lean tools and activities, as shown in Figure 6, to determine:3.b.i Their relevance to the project3.b.ii Potential impacts of implementing identified tools or activities3.b.iii How they could be incorporated during the designdevelopment and constructionphases.

4 The project delivery team or contractor's brief includes the following requirements:4.a To apply 'leanprinciples' established within themapping to the identified processes.4.b To monitor and report efficiencies in implementing aspects of 'lean'design and construction.

Material optimisation

5 Key representatives of the project team are involved in reviewing opportunities to optimise the use of materials, such as:5.a Standardisationof permanent materials (refer to CN1) and components.5.b Reduction in the overallmaterial usewithin the project, including operation and maintenance replacement.5.c Use of ground improvement techniques to avoid excavating soft foundations.

6 The project delivery team or contractor's brief includes the following requirements:


Mat 03Materials efficiency Materials

6.a Recommend and implement opportunities to optimisematerial use (as detailed in 5.a – 5.c)6.b To undertake a study to investigate if off-site constructionwill offer material efficiencybenefits to the project

and the environment6.c Establish outcome focused specifications to ensurematerial optimisation.

One credit – Design for deconstruction

7 Key representatives of the project team are involved in reviewing opportunities to reuse and recycle components of theproject at the end of their life.

8 A Design for Deconstruction (DfD) strategy is produced which includes:8.a The strategybehind any 'designed to be reusable' elements8.b Best practicemeasures to ensure the 'designed to be reusable' elements or components are handled in a way

whichpreserves maximum reusability.

9 The project delivery team or contractor's brief includes the following requirements:9.a To apply the principles of the DfD strategy and evaluate further opportunities to reuse and recycle components

of the project9.b To produce a DfD plan.



Implementationof lean tools and activities (one credit)Enhanced materials efficiency (one credit)Reuse and recycling of deconstructionmaterials (up to two credits)


One credit – Implementation of lean tools and activities

10 Themapping exercise, associated processes and key lean tools and activities identified within the strategic stageassessment are reviewed and updated as the designdevelops with input from key representatives of the project team.

11 For eachof the processes where an improvement is deemed possible an appropriate lean construction tool or activity isselected from Figure 6 and applied at eachof the following stages:11.a Design (e.g. definition and design)11.b Mobilisation (e.g. build)11.c Construction (e.g. build and commission).

12 As aminimum at least one appropriate lean construction tool or activity is selected from the following categories(identified in Figure 6 ):12.a General activities12.b Process management12.c Operations management.

13 The following are reported at regular project meetings and within the BREEAMInfrastructureOnline Tool:13.a Process and efficiencymeasures adopted13.b Impact of measures adopted.

One credit – Enhanced materials efficiency

See also CN3 where a complete LCA has been carried out.

Material optimisation

14 Opportunities recommended within the strategic stage assessment are re-evaluated with key representatives of theproject team (refer to Relevant definitions) and further opportunities identified (refer to criteria 5.a – 5.c).

15 The design, programmeof works and RMP are updated to support implementationof identified opportunities andthese opportunities are reported at regular project meetings.



16 Identified opportunities are implemented to optimisematerials use and are reported within the BREEAMInfrastructureOnline Tool.

Off-site construction

17 Anassessment is carried out to confirm if off-site construction is a viable alternative (refer to Relevant definitions) totraditional construction for aspects of the project, this includes:17.a Identificationof parts of the asset that could bemanufactured off site17.b Identificationof activities that could become assembly processes rather than constructionprocesses.17.c Liaisonwith allmembers of the project team including specialists affected by the identified off-site construction

opportunities.

18 For projects where off-site construction is considered a viable alternative to traditional construction, a verified study isundertaken to compare the environmental impact of off-site constructionwith traditional on-site construction (refer toRelevant definitions).

19 Where the results of the study identify off-site constructionwould have a lower environmental impact thanon-siteconstruction, these opportunities are implemented.

20 The results of the study are recorded within the RMP (refer to Wst 01 Constructionwastemanagement and the BREEAMInfrastructureOnline Tool.

Up to two credits – Reuse and recycling of deconstruction materials

See also CN3 for where a complete LCA has been carried out.

One credit

21 A DfD plan is produced with key representatives of the project team (refer to Relevant definitions) building on thecontent of DfD strategy (criterion8 ). TheDfD plan is kept up to date as the design and constructionprocess progressesand details are included within the RMP.

22 50% (byweight or volume) of components that canbe easily dismantled canbe reused or recycled at the end of the lifeof the asset (refer to Relevant definitions).

23 TheDfD plan is (re-)issued to all parties at the handover stage, so that there is maximum awareness of theDfDrequirements for the future. As aminimum this is distributed to the asset owner, operator, designer and contractor.

24 Copies of the revised DfD Plan are included within theHealth and Safety file and theOperation andMaintenance files andwithin the Building InformationModelling (BIM)process where present.

Two credits


26 75% (byweight or volume) of components that canbe easily dismantled canbe reused or recycled at the end of the lifeof the asset.



Checklists and Tables

Figure 6 Examples of lean tools and activities and where they can add value

See Implementing Lean inConstruction for further details31



Compliance notes


CN1 Permanentmaterials

The permanent materials to be considered within the assessment of this issue canbeany element, component or material that forms part of the final asset. These include butare not limited to:1. Fencing and safety barriers2. Drainage3. Pavements and footways4. Piling, retaining walls and tunnels5. Structures6. Ancillary structures7. Other.Other elements are likely to be project specific, e.g. sleepers and track for railways,surfacing for roads, etc.

CN2 Materialsoptimisationevidencerequirements -criteria 14 – 16

BREhas avoided being overly prescriptivewith the evidence requirements for this issue,recognising that this is a complex environmental and design issue, where solutions andapproaches are largely influenced byproject specific factors. The evidence required todemonstrate compliancewill vary according to the stage of the project. A fewexamples have beenprovided below:

Reports outlining the activity relating to material efficiency ( ideas discussed,analysis and decisions taken)Drawings or building informationmodel (BIM), calculations showing reductionof material use throughdesignMeeting notes, constructionprogramme, responsibilities schedule (indicatingparties consulted).

The BREEAMAssessor should use their judgement in determining whether the aim andintent of the credit has beenmet using appropriate project information to back theirjudgement. BREGlobalwill endorse the BREEAMAssessor's judgement through theQualityAssurance audit where a reasonable justification to award the credit on thebasis of project team actions and proposed design solutions is evident.




CN3 Use of LCA todemonstratematerials efficiency

The requirements for the project detail credits 'Enhanced materials efficiency' (criteria14 – 20 ) and 'Design for deconstruction' (criteria 21 – 26 ) canbe awarded withoutmeeting all of the specific requirements of these credits where a complete LCA hasbeen carried out and used to optimisematerials efficiency for modules A-C and D.Evidencewill be required in the form of a report by a suitably qualified LCA practitionerjustifying how the biggest impacts identified in terms of materials efficiencywereidentified and reduced as far as practicably possible. The client or contractor must alsodemonstrate throughappropriate evidence how the LCA practitioner'srecommendations were implemented in the fully constructed asset.In regards to the specific criteria:Materials optimisation:Criterion14 canbe achieved through the LCA, however criteria15 – 16 should be implemented by the contractor to demonstrate how theyhaveimproved the design.Off-site construction:Criteria 17 – 18 canbe achieved through the LCA, however thedata sources and results should be verified to confirm independence of the results.Criteria 19 – 20 should be implemented by the contractor to demonstrate how theyhave improved the design.Design for deconstruction:Criteria 21 , 23 and 24 should be implemented by thecontractor allow for ease of deconstruction. Criteria 22 and 26 (i.e. % achieved) doesnot need to bemet, where the LCA has shown that inclusionof a higher percentage ofelements would result in a great environmental impact over the life of the asset.

Methodology

None.

Evidence

Ref Strategy stage Interim DesignStage

Final post-construction stage

ALL One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAMevidential requirementssection canbe used to demonstrate compliancewith these criteria.

1 Resourcemanagement plan (RMP) As strategy stage As strategy stage

2 – 4 Lean tools and activities mapping exerciseand project delivery team or contractor'sbrief

N/A N/A

5 – 6 Materials optimisation strategy and projectdelivery team or contractor's brief

N/A N/A

8 Design for deconstruction strategy N/A N/A



Ref Strategy stage Interim DesignStage

Final post-construction stage

14 – 16 N/A Refer to CN2

18 N/A Off site constructionverified study

As interim designstage

21 – 26 N/A DfD plansCalculationsconfirming %materials easilydismantled (or LCAoptimisation)

As interim designstage



Design for Deconstruction (DfD) planA Design for Deconstructionplan supports the aim of material efficiencyby reducing likely constructionwaste andincreasing construction efficiency. The plan should include a list of components and elements, as a minimum:1. An inventory of allmaterials and components used in the project together with full specifications and all

warranties and details of manufacturers2. The design life or service life of materials and components3. A list of components and elements that canbe reused or recycled at the end of the life of the asset4. Best options for reuse, reclamation, recycling and waste to energy for all reusable or recoverable components

and materials5. A list of hazardousmaterials that cannot be eliminated from the specification.Instructions must also be included onhow to deconstruct elements including;1. up-to-date locationplans2. As built information, as recorded through the constructionprocess, to demonstrate the optimum technique for

removal of specific elements3. A descriptionof the equipment required to dismantle the components, the sequential processes involved and the

implications for health and safety4. Advice for the future demolition contractor on the best means of categorising, recording and storing dismantled

elements.

Easily dismantledFor the purposes of BREEAMeasily dismantled components canbe takenapart without destroying the componentpieces, e.g. those that do not require demolition.

Key representatives of the project teamThis includes, but is not limited to:1. Client or developer2. Cost consultant3. Structural or civil engineers4. Mechanical or electrical engineers5. Principal contractor6. Demolitionor strip-out contractor7. Environmental consultant8. Project management consultant9. Materials and component manufacturers or suppliers.



The project teammayalso identify lessons learnt from other similar projects in order to map potentially inefficientprocesses in the design and constructionof the project.

LeanprinciplesLean is a term that relates to a provenwayof doing business, entirely focused onmaximising customer value througheliminationof all forms of process waste and ensuring that value-adding activities are completed in themost efficientand time-effectivemanner. Leanhas been successfully applied in all sectors of business, service and project delivery,resulting in improved performance in quality, time, cost and bottom line profit (CIRIA, 2013).

Regular project teammeetingsThis will vary depending on the scale of the project, but once amonth as aminimum.

Resourcemanagement plan (RMP)The aim of the RMP is to promote resource efficiency in the constructionof the asset. Resource efficiency includesoptimising the use of materials and minimising waste throughassessment of the use, reuse and recycling of materialsand products onand off the site. This should be considered across the project by the client, designers and principalcontractors. Best practice is a combinationof commitments to:1. Standardisematerials and components2. Reduce the overallmaterial use and waste generated over the life cycle of the asset3. Designout waste (materials optimisation)4. Establish outcome focused specifications to ensurematerial optimisation and procedures to sort and reuse or

recycle construction and demolitionwaste.5. Follows guidance from:

Government departmentsBRE (Building Research Establishment Ltd)WRAP (Waste and Resources Action Programme)

A BREEAMcompliant RMP for this issue focuses onmaterials optimisation and how this canbe achieved throughoutthe design, construction and operation (i.e. maintenance and replacement) of the asset.

Viable alternativeFor the purposes of this issue, off-site construction could be excluded as a viable alternativewhere the risks ofpursuing off-site constructionoutweigh the benefits. For example, risks maybe introduced in regards to installation,procurement, timing, safety, maintenance or fitness for purpose. This list is not exhaustive but the project teamshould adequately justify their reasoning for not investigating further this option.

Verified report for off-site and on-site comparisonFor the purposes of this issue, verified means that an independent personhas checked the data gathering processand content of the study to ensure that the results are not biased. This could be the BREEAMAssessor where theyhave sufficient understanding of the issues included within the report.The report must include a comparisonof, as a minimum:1. Potentialwaste generated during traditional on-site construction compared withwaste generated in the off-site

facility plus any additional on-sitewaste.2. Predicted volume of materials used in traditional on-site construction and volume of materials used inoff-site

construction.3. Predicted impact of the transport of materials for traditional on-site construction and the predicted impact of

the transport of materials for off-site construction, i.e. number of movements, distances travelled and whereappropriate vehicle types and fuel consumption.

4. Potential for reuse or recovery of the components at the end of the asset's life.

Other information

CIRIA 'Implementing lean in construction'

In 2013 CIRIA released 6 publications under the heading of 'Implementing lean in construction'. Included in themultiple issuesthese publications address are the principles of lean construction, how lean canbe implemented across the constructionsector and lean tools that are available. The six publications (and introductory note) are as follows:



1. CIRIA RP978:Overviewof CIRIA's guides and a brief introduction to Lean2. CIRIA C725: Lean construction and BIM3. CIRIA C726: Leanand the sustainability agenda4. CIRIA C727: Leanbenefits realisationmanagement5. CIRIA C728:A Leanguide for client organisations6. CIRIA C729: Selecting and working with a lean consultant7. CIRIA C730: Lean tools and techniques - an introduction

More information and download of the publications canbe found at: http://www.ciria.org/


http://www.ciria.org/News/CIRIA_news2/lean_thinking_approach.aspx

Mat 04 Reuse and recycling Materials

Mat 04 Reuse and recycling


1 3 None

Aim

To recognise and encourage the specificationof reused and recycled materials within the asset, reducing demand for virginmaterial.



One credit - Reuse and recycling strategy

1 A review is undertaken to determine the feasibility of using reused and recycled materials or elements for permanentcomponents within the asset (refer to CN1). The review identifies:1.a Existing buildings, structures and hard surfaces on sitewithmaterials and elements for potential reuse and

associated risk1.b Facilities, depots (e.g. for railway trackand ballast), dealers (e.g. for wind turbines) and other construction sites to

establish if existing infrastructure elements are available for reuse or recycling (refer to CN2 and CN3).

2 Where potential uses are identified for reused or recycled materials (including secondary aggregates) it is establishedwhether:2.a Using the reused or recycled materialwould be detrimental to performance2.b Materials canbe reused rather than reprocessed especially if recycling is energy intensive or environmentally

damaging2.c Using the reused or recycled material has a lower or equivalent environmental impact to the alternative, e.g.

considering transport costs, processing, pollution, etc. (refer to CN4).

3 The project delivery team or contractor's brief includes identified opportunities for recycling and reuse and requires thatthese are explored further.



Reuse of existing infrastructure on site (one credit)Reuse and recycling of materials and elements (one credit)Recycled aggregates (one credit)


One credit - Reuse of existing infrastructure on site

4 A pre-demolition audit (refer to Relevant definitions) is completed by an independent and competent third party for anyexisting buildings, structures or hard surfaces that require demolitionon site.



5 The key findings of the audit are referenced within the ResourceManagement Plan (RMP) (refer to Wst 01 Constructionwastemanagement) and includes potential applications and any related issues for the reuse and recycling of thedemolitionmaterials in accordancewith thewaste hierarchy.

6 Targets for levels of reuse and recycling are set by the project delivery team.

7 Post construction, an evaluationof the differences between the actual and the predicted levels is carried out and thesefigures are reported within the BREEAMInfrastructure online tool.

One credit - Reuse and recycling of materials and elements

See CN6 where a complete LCA has been carried out.

8 Opportunities recommended within the strategic stage assessment are re-evaluated with key representatives of theproject team throughan iterative process and further opportunities for permanent and temporarymaterials (refer toCN7) and elements are explored. This includes:8.a Information identified at the strategic stage8.b Confirmationof suitable depots (e.g. for railway trackand ballast), dealers (e.g. for wind turbines) and other

construction sites to establish if existing infrastructure elements are available for reuse or recycling8.c Confirmationof materials and elements suitable for reuse and recycling with justification for their inclusionor

exclusion8.d A programme for updating designplans to incorporate suitable existing infrastructure elements.

9 Where excavated material is generated on site, national best practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - TheApprovedStandards and Weightings List (ASWL)) is used to:9.a Develop and implement aMaterials Management Plan (MMP) covering the use of excavated materials based on

anappropriate riskassessment9.b Treat and usematerials as set out in theMMP. TheMMP is referenced within the RMP (refer to Wst 01

Constructionwastemanagement) so that it canbe actioned on site.

10 Component specifications and method statement documents and procurement plans are updated to include reusedand recycled materials for temporary constructionworks and permanent elements within the final asset.

11 If reuse and recycling has not beenwidely used for temporary and permanent materials, then compliance canbedemonstrated where:11.a Confirmation is provided the reviewprocess was carried out iteratively betweenboth the Strategic and project

detail stages11.b Reuse and recycling of materials was deemed inappropriate because of one of the following:

11.b.i The components of the asset are all bespoke11.b.ii Reused or recycled materials will not meet the required performance standards for the asset11.b.iii The environmental cost of transporting the reused or recovered material is deemed to be greater

than the benefit of reusing thematerial11.b.iv The environmental cost of reusing thematerial is deemed to be greater than the environmental cost

of using virginmaterial.

One credit - Recycled aggregates

See CN6 where a complete LCA has been carried out.

12 The percentage of highgrade aggregate that is recycled or secondary aggregate, specified in each application (present)must meet theminimum percentage levels (byweight or volume) of recycled of secondary aggregates, as specified inTable 43.Where this minimum level is not met, all the aggregate in that applicationmust be considered as primaryaggregatewhen calculating the total highgrade aggregate specified.

13 The total amount of recycled or secondary aggregate specified, is greater than25% (byweight or volume) of the totalhighgrade aggregate specified for the project.

14 The recycled or secondary aggregates are EITHER:14.a Construction, demolition and excavationwaste obtained on-site or off-site OR14.b Secondary aggregates obtained from a non-constructionor post-consumer or industrial by-product source

(refer to Relevant definitions section).





15 The percentage of highgrade aggregate that is recycled or secondary aggregate, specified in each application (present)must meet the exemplaryminimum levels (byweight or volume), as specified in Table 43.Where this minimum level is notmet, all the aggregate in that applicationmust be considered as primary aggregatewhen calculating the total highgrade aggregate specified.

16 Where the total amount of recycled or secondary aggregate specified is greater than35% (byweight or volume) of thetotal highgrade aggregate specified for the project.

17 The contributing recycled or secondary aggregatemust not be transported more than30 km by road transport, orequivalent (refer to CN11).


Table 43:Minimum levels (byweight and volume) of highgrade aggregate specified per application (where present) that isrecycled or secondary aggregate

Application Min.%One credit Min.% Exemplaryperformance

Bound

Structures 15% 30%

Erosionprotection (e.g. sloping structures, revetments) 100% N/A

Bitumenor hydraulically bound base, binder and surfacecourses for paved areas and roads

30% 75%

Hydraulically treated material as engineering fill 100% N/A

Foundations (shallowand deep)* 50% 100%

Concrete road surfaces 15% 45%

Concrete tunnel linings* 50% 100%

Unbound

New trenches (without concrete surround) 75% 100%

Newtrenches (with concrete surround)* 100% N/A

Trench reinstatement 100% N/A

Drainage and filter beds 100% N/A



Application Min.%One credit Min.% Exemplaryperformance

Gabions 100% N/A

Embankments and cuttings 100% N/A

Ground improvements 100% N/A

Temporaryworks, e.g. working platforms 100% N/A

Pipe bedding 100% N/A

Granular fill and capping(Refer to CN12)

100% N/A

*Based on the replacing the coarse aggregate

Compliance notes


Strategy criteria - General

CN1 Permanentcomponents

The permanent materials to be considered within the assessment of this issue canbeany element or component that forms part of the final asset. These include but are notlimited to:1. Fencing and safety barriers2. Drainage3. Pavements and footways4. Piling, retaining walls and tunnels5. Structures6. Ancillary structures7. Other.Other elements are likely to be project specific, e.g. sleepers and track for railways,surfacing for roads, etc.

CN2 Reviewof otherconstruction sitesfor materials forreuse and recycling- see criterion1.b.

The reviewof other construction sites for materials for reuse and recycling shouldconsider the following as aminimum:1. The constructionprogramme for the assessed asset and alternative site2. The transport implications of moving materials from analternative site3. How to create linkages with these sites to promote reuse of materials between

projects.




CN3 Asbestos in reusedor recycledmaterials

Designers and contractors should be aware that made ground canpotentially containasbestos, and therefore should be regarded as "suspect" in terms of the possiblepresence of asbestos. Similarly, demolitionmaterial to be crushed and recycled maycontain small amounts of asbestos.Where either made ground, crushed demolitionmaterial or both, is to be reused or recycled onor off-site, suchmaterial should bemonitored for the presence of asbestos.Where found, contractors must complywithall relevant health and safety legislationwithin the country of assessmentPlease also refer to the LUE03 Remediationof land contaminationwhere appropriate.

CN4 Assessing theenvironmentalimpact of reused orrecycled materialsat the strategystage

It is recognised that it maybe impractical to assess the environmental impact of allreused or recycled materials to the alternative at the strategic stage due toassumptions that aremade at this stage in regards to thematerials specification.If it is unfeasible for the project team to meet this requirement at the strategy stage,the reviewmust be carried out at the project detail stage to demonstrate compliancewith criterion8 .The strategic stage criteria could still be awarded where the remaining criteria areachieved.

Project detail criteria - General

CN5 Reuse of existinginfrastructure onsite credit

This credit is only applicable to projects whichhave existing buildings or infrastructureon site.

CN6 Use of LCA todemonstrateoptimisationofreused and recycledmaterials

The requirements for the project detail credits 'Reuse and recycling of materials andelements' (criteria 8 – 11 ) and 'Recycled aggregates' (criteria 13 – 14 ) canbeawarded without meeting all of the specific requirements of these credits where acomplete LCA has been carried out and used to optimise reused and recycled contentfor modules A-C and D.Evidencewill be required in the form of a report by a suitably qualified LCA practitionerjustifying how the environmental impact of the asset was reduced as far as practicablypossible throughoptimisationof reused and recycled materials.The client or contractor must also demonstrate throughappropriate evidence howthe LCA practitioner's recommendations were implemented in the fully constructedasset.In regards to the specific criteria:

Reuse and recycling of materials and elements:Criteria 8 and 11 canbeachieved through the LCA, however criteria 9 – 10 should be implementedby the contractor to demonstrate how theyhave improved the design.

Recycled aggregates:Criteria 12 – 13 (i.e. percentage achieved) do not needto bemet, where the LCA has shown that inclusionof a higher percentage ofrecycled aggregates would result in a great environmental impact over the lifeof the asset. Criterion14 should be achieved for all recycled aggregateincluded in the final asset.

Project detail criteria - Reuse and recycling of components




CN7 Temporarymaterials

The temporarymaterials to be considered within the assessment of this issue canbeany element or component that is used within the temporary constructionworks.These include but are not limited to:1. Formworkand falsework2. Shoring and temporary bracing3. Scaffolding4. Temporary fill (crane foundations, temporary access roads etc.)5. Portable offices and cabins6. Fencing and safety barriers7. Temporary piping, electrical, mechanical and heating services.

Project detail criteria - Recycled aggregates

CN8 Unsuitable recycledaggregates

The following aggregates cannot be deemed "recycled" or "secondary" todemonstrate compliancewith the recycled aggregate credit. Where any are specifiedwithin the designof the final asset, they should not be included within the calculation:1. Capping:Old bankslags and unburnt colliery spoil2. Fill to substructures:Old bankslags3. Pipe bedding and surround:Unburnt colliery spoil and burn colliery spoil4. Concrete foundations and pavements: IBA, steel slag, unburnt colliery spoil and

burnt colliery spoil.

CN9 Off-site recycledaggregates

Where off-site recycled aggregates from construction, demolition and excavationwaste are used, they should be produced according to the relevant quality protocol(refer to Relevant definitions)where relevant.

CN10 Aggregates in off-sitemanufacturedapplications

Where anyof the listed applications have beenmanufactured off site, the aggregatepresent in these applications should be included in the assessment of this issue.

CN11 Transport of morethan30 km by road,or equivalent

Where recycled or secondary aggregate is transported bymeans other than road,such as rail or river, the 30km distancemaybe increased, where it is demonstratedthrough calculation that the alternativemode of transport will have lower CO

2emissions than the equivalent road transport.BREdoes not specify themethodology for this calculation, however, conversionfactors and assumptions for typical construction transport just be documented andjustified.

CN12 Defining granular filland capping as ahighgrade use

Thematerials used for granular fill and capping canonly be considered 'highgradeaggregate’ if they conform to specifications in national best practice standards (referto Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)). If not, theyshould be considered ‘lowgrade aggregate’ and excluded from the assessment ofthe ‘recycled aggregates’ credit.

Methodology

None.



Evidence


All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAMevidential requirementssection canbe used to demonstrate compliancewith these criteria.

1 – 3 Reuse and recycling strategyand designer's orcontractor's brief

N/A N/A

9 N/A Materials Management Plan(MMP)


13 – 17 N/A Calculation confirming theamount of recycled orsecondary aggregate to beused

Calculation confirming theamount of recycled orsecondary aggregate used



Air-cooled blast furnace slagAir-cooled blast furnace slag is classified as a by-product (rather than awaste) and can therefore be used as anaggregatewithout the need for a quality protocol.

Key representatives of the project teamRefer to Mat 03Materials efficiency.

Lowgrade aggregate usesCrushed masonry used as fillmaterial for general landscaping is not considered to be highgrade. This practice is nowcommonplace on construction sites due to increased landfill costs.

Materials optimisationRefer to Mat 03Materials efficiency

Post-consumer waste streamWastematerial generated byhouseholds or by commercial, industrial and institutional facilities in their role as endusers of the product, which canno longer be used for its intended purpose. This includes returns of material from thedistribution chain.Wastematerials generated during manufacturing processes are pre-consumer waste streams andare excluded. These streams include reutilisationof materials such as rework, regrind or scrap generated in a processand capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it.

Pre-demolition auditThe aim of a pre-demolition audit is to determine if refurbishment or reuse of material is feasiblewhere demolition isrequired. If not, the intent is to maximise the recovery of material from demolition for subsequent highgrade or highvalue applications. A compliant pre-demolition audit must include:



1. Identificationof the key refurbishment and demolitionmaterials2. Potential applications and any related issues for the reuse and recycling of the key refurbishment and demolition

materials3. Completionof a standard template to record projected levels of demolitionproducts and their recovery or

disposal route4. Targets for reuse (on site and off site) and recycling of keyproducts5. Anoverall diversionof waste from landfill figure6. A plan for monitoring demolitionproducts and associated management routes to allow recording of actual

levels of recovery or disposal

Quality protocolThe purpose of a quality protocol is to provide a uniform control process for producers, fromwhich they canreasonably state and demonstrate that their product has been fully recovered and is no longer a waste. It alsoprovides purchasers with a product qualitymanaged to commonstandards, which increases confidence inperformance. Aggregates that do not meet the requirements of a quality protocol or relevant aggregate standardswill still be considered waste. Protocols exist for aggregates produced from inert waste, use of pulverised fuel ash(PFA) and furnace bottom ash (FBA) in bound applications.

Recycled aggregatesRecycled aggregates are those derived from reprocessing materials previously used in construction, e.g. crushedconcrete or masonry from construction and demolitionwastematerial.

Secondary aggregatesByproducts of industrial processes that canbe processed to produce secondary aggregates. Secondary aggregatesare subdivided into manufactured and natural, depending on their source. Recognised non-constructionpost-consumer or post-industrial byproducts include:1. China claywaste2. Slate overburden3. Pulverised FuelAsh (PFA)4. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS)5. Air-cooled blast furnace slag6. Steel slag7. Furnace BottomAsh (FBA)8. Incinerator bottom ash (IBA)9. Foundry sands10. Recycled glass11. Recycled plastic12. Spent oil shale13. Colliery spoil14. Municipal solid waste treatment residues.

Other information

Further guidance on recycled and secondary aggregates

Details on the European Standards for Aggregates are available at aggregain.wrap.org.uk

WRAP has information, tools and guidance on the use of recycled and secondary aggregates, seeaggregain.wrap.org.uk/opportunities


http://aggregain.wrap.org.uk/quality/aggregates_standards/european.html

http://aggregain.wrap.org.uk/opportunities/applications

Carbon and energy

Carbon and energy

Category overview


Refer to the country reference sheet in theASWL None

Summary

This section encourages the specification and designof energy efficient and lowcarbon solutions for construction andoperationof the infrastructure asset. Issues in this section look to establish a carbonand energy strategy for thewholeproject to identify keyopportunities to reduce total carbonequivalent emissions and implementationof measures to reducecarbonand energyduring construction and operation are rewarded.


Issue Credits

CE01 Carbonand energy strategy Strategy - 1Project detail - 1

Reviewof whole life environmental impacts of the asset to inform a carbonand energy strategySetting of strategic objectives

CE02 Construction site carbonand energy Strategy - 0Project detail - 5

Investigation and implementationof measures that reduce construction site carbonand energy asrecommended by a suitably qualified carbonpractitionerMonitoring and reporting construction stage energy and carbon

CE03 Operational carbonand energy Strategy - 0Project detail - 4

Investigation and implementationof measures that reduce operational carbonand energy as recommended bya suitably qualified carbonpractitioner


Carbon and energy BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

CE 01 Carbon and energy strategy

Strategic credits available Project detail credits available Minimumstandards

1 1 None

Aim

To encourage analysis of the total carbonequivalent impact of the infrastructure asset over its lifetime and identifymeasuresthat reduce carbonand energy from the asset.



One credit - Carbon and energy strategy

1 Based on the results of the screening carbon footprint or LCAwithin ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts, a carbonand energy strategy is developed by a suitably qualified carbonpractitioner (refer to Relevant definitions).

2 The strategy identifies opportunities for reducing the estimated total carbonequivalent over the expected lifetime of theasset (refer to CN1 and CN2).

3 The strategy considers the following life cycle stages of the asset and prioritises reducing carbonequivalent from thosewith the biggest impact and potential for reduction:3.a Extraction and manufacturing of materials (Modules A1 to A3)3.b Transport of materials from gate to site (Module A4)3.c Constructionprocesses and installation (Module A5) including use of plant and machinery, site accommodation

and facilities and transport and disposal of waste (site to grave)3.d Operational processes (Module B1 and B6) as a result of the infrastructure design (refer to Relevant definitions)3.e Maintenance, repair, replacement and refurbishment (Modules B2-B5)3.f End of life (Modules C1-C4)3.g Benefits and loads beyond the system boundary (Module D), such as land use changes (refer to Relevant

definitions) included if suitable scenarios canbe developed and shown to be relevant and justified (i.e. optionalmodule).

4 Design choices are informed by the screening carbon footprint or LCA and recommendations from the suitably qualifiedcarbonpractitioner. A series of solutions meeting the functional requirements of the asset are identified. Of these thesolution selected is that with the lowest total carbonequivalent over the expected lifetime of the asset.

5 The client, informed by themodelling and recommendations from the suitably qualified carbonpractitioner, setsobjectives or targets for the life cycle stages with estimates of total carbonequivalent emissions (refer to CN3).

6 The project delivery team or contractor's brief includes:6.a Applying the principles of the carbonand energy strategy and updating relevant objectives, targets or KPIs for

carbonand energy efficiency as the project progresses6.b Details of who has responsibility to action the carbonand energy strategy6.c A requirement to monitor and report on carbonand energy throughout the constructionof the asset.


CE01 Carbonand energy strategy Carbon and energy



One credit - Reporting total carbon and energy

7 The total carbonequivalent impact of the project is calculated for the final asset over its expected lifetime.

8 The total carbonequivalent and primary energy consumptionof the project in reference to the asset's capacity (refer toCN4) is reported as shown in Table 44 via the BREEAMInfrastructure online tool.


Table 44:Reporting total carbonequivalent and primary energy consumption in reference to the asset's capacity

Asset type Total carbonequivalent (kgCO2e) and primary energy consumption (kWh)

reporting

Bridge, viaduct1 /maximum passengers (kg) per km per annumOR /maximum axleweight of trafficvolume (kg) per km per annum.

Dam2 /maximum capacity to storewater (millionm3) per annumOR /maximum electricitygenerated (MWh)per annum.

Flood defence, retaining wall /maximum capacity to retainwater (millionm3) or other solid material (million kg)per annum.

Oil refineries /maximum petroleum products produced (MWh)per annum.

Pipeline, tunnels /maximum volume (millionm3) transported (km)per annumORmaximumweight(kg) of, i.e. transported (km)per annum.

Power stations including solarand wind farms

/maximum electricity generated (MWh)per annum.

Road, runway /maximum axleweight of traffic volume (kg) per km per annum.

Railway3 /maximum passengers (kg) per km per annumOR /maximum axleweight of trafficvolume (kg) per km per annum.

Water treatment, wasteprocessing

/maximumwater treated (millionm3) or weight of waste processed (kg) perannum.

Other Please contact BREGlobal for all other asset types and carbon capacity reporting.

All capacitymeasurement should be based on the ultimate design capacity (i.e. maximum capacity) of the asset, not atypical year in operation.



Asset type Total carbonequivalent (kgCO2e) and primary energy consumption (kWh)

reporting

1. The choice of indicator is dependent onwhether the bridge is pedestrian, road or rail.2. The choice of indicator is dependent onwhether the dam is primary for water storage or designed to generatedelectricity (e.g. hydroelectric).3. The choice of indicator is dependent onwhether the railway is predominantly a passenger or freight line.Where the isno predominant use, the project should report against both indicators.

Compliance notes



The carbon impacts should bemeasured over the expected lifetime of the asset asindicated within the design specification. If the lifetime of the asset is not specified thentheworking lifetimes detailed in national best practice standards for the asset typeshould be used (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List(ASWL)).

CN2 Opportunities forreducing totalcarbonequivalentemissions

Opportunities must be considered over the expected lifetime of the asset and includethe following as aminimum:

Choice of route or site and layoutDesign features and technologiesChoice of materials and material optimisation, substitutionor compositionConstructionmethods, processes and features that enable savingsOperational requirements and features that enable savingsUse of local (on site or near-site) lowand zero carbonenergy sourcesLandscaping choices.

CN3 Setting ofobjectives andtargets for carbonand energyefficiency

The setting of strategic objectives or targets is required at the strategic stage inorderto inform the designprocess and drive best practice.It is not expected that thesewould be absolute targets but canbe revisited andupdated as the designprocess evolves. The process of reducing carbonand energyacross the life cycle of the asset should be an iterative process and as suchobjectives ortargets are likely to evolve throughout the design and constructionprocess.


The capacitymeasurement will vary depending on the type of asset. This allows thecarbonequivalent emissions and primary energy consumptionof the asset over itsexpected lifetime to be compared with its functional requirements. The design teamshould report on capacity as shown in Table 44 as appropriate to the infrastructuretype assessed.For example, a bridge project should report onboth:


per km per annumPrimary energy consumption: kWh/maximum axleweight of traffic volume (kg)per km per annum.


CE01 Carbonand energy strategy Carbon and energy

Methodology

None.

Evidence



1 – 6 Carbonand energy strategy N/A N/A

7 N/A Updated carbon footprint orLCA report

Post-construction carbonfootprint or LCA report



Direct (Scope 1) and indirect (Scope 2) emissionsTheGHGProtocol Corporate Standard32classifies a company's GHGemissions into the following three 'scopes':

Scope 1 emissions - these are direct emissions from owned or controlled sources, e.g. emissions fromcombustion in owned or controlled boilers, furnaces, vehicles, etc.Scope 2 emissions - these are indirect (or 'out of scope') emissions from the generationof purchasedenergy, e.g. electricity, imported heat that is purchased.Scope 3 emissions - these are all indirect emissions that occur in the value chain of the reporting company,including bothupstream and downstream emissions.


Operational carbonand energyFor the purpose of BREEAMInfrastructure operational carbonand energy savings refer to those savings that canbeattributed to the asset itself and not savings attributable to theway inwhich the asset is operated. For example,smoother road surfaces and more gradually curved corners will lead to road traffic running more efficiently; gravitydrainagewithin a pipelinewill reduce pumping capacity, etc.


demonstrate a practical understanding of LCA and its methodology. This includes familiarity and use of ISO14040 and ISO14044 and use of carbon footprinting tools or other carbon life cycle assessmentmethodologies



2. Has experience in undertaking assessments of the carbonand energy impact of constructionprojects3. Candemonstrate that theydo not have a vested interest in the outcomeof the infrastructure project and should





2O),


2e to reflect the


Other information

None.


CE02 Construction site carbonand energy Carbon and energy

CE 02 Construction site carbon and energy


0 5 None

Aim

To construct the asset in a carbonand energy efficient manner.


None.



Construction carbonand energyperformance (up to four credits)Energy efficient construction activities (one credit)


Up to four credits - Construction carbon and energy performance

1 The opportunities identified within the strategic stage assessment of CE01 Carbonand energy strategy criteria 2 – 3for reducing carbonand energy consumption from construction activities are reviewed and updated throughout keyproject gateways(refer to Relevant definitions) in linewith the project details.

2 Key representatives of the project delivery team investigate energy saving opportunities, as a minimum those given inTable 46. If any saving opportunities are not appropriate these should be identified and the reason for the exclusionstated, e.g. technical or functional feasibility, regulatory requirements, etc.

3 The suitably qualified carbonpractitioner prepares a list of recommendations that could be implemented by the projectwith estimates of the anticipated level of savings. The recommendations areweighted bypercentage in terms of theimpact of the recommendationonenergy efficiency and carbon reduction (refer to CN1).

4 Prior to build and commission the carbon footprint developed within ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts is updatedfor the construction stagewithdetails of the proposed construction approach covering:4.a Use of plant and machinery4.b Site accommodation and facilities4.c Transport and disposal of waste (site to grave).

5 Credits are awarded for the implementationof the suitably qualified carbonpractitioner's weighted recommendationsthat reduce energy consumptionor carbonemissions from construction as shown in Table 45.



Table 45:Credits associated with energy and carbon savings from construction activities

Weighted recommendations implemented on site Associated credits

25% 1

50% 2

75% 3

95% 4

One credit -Monitoring construction stage carbon and energy

6 An individual is appointed to carry out on-sitemonitoring of carbonand energy (refer to CN3) and undertakes their rolethroughout construction (refer to CN4).

7 The individualmonitors and records data on contractor's and subcontractors' energy consumption in kWhand litres offuel used as a result of the use of constructionplant, equipment (mobile and fixed) and site accommodation.

Note: Transport of materials to site and transport of waste from site is recorded and reported separatelywithin the issue Tra02 Travel and logistics plan.

8 The total carbonequivalent and primary energy consumption from the constructionprocess in reference to the asset'scapacity (refer to CN5) is reported via the BREEAMInfrastructure online tool.


Table 46:Construction activities energy efficiency and carbon saving considerations

Ref Activity Saving opportunity

1a Asset design andsiting

Optimise earthmovements required during the constructionof the assetand the surrounding site.

1b Reduce the amount of site clearance and demolition, e.g. by utilisingexisting structures where possible.

1c Minimise the dimensions of the asset without impacting on capacity, e.g.reducing length for a linear asset or overall dimensions for a point asset.

1d Site to avoid destructionof existing carbon sinks, e.g. woodland (refer toLUE07 Land use changes for further detail).

1e Minimise extent of temporaryworks, e.g. lengthof fencing or accessroutes required.




2a Choice ofconstructionmethods

Reduce overall construction time, e.g. to reduce the quantity of workrequired and to reduce ancillary energy requirements such as lighting andsite accommodation.

2b Minimise use or designout highenergy-consuming plant and machinery,e.g. tunnel boring machines (TBMs), where feasible.

3a Choice ofconstructionplantand machinery1

Select constructionplant and machinerywith a highefficiency (%), i.e. thepercentage of output rating achieved under typical operating conditions.

3b Select efficient ancillary equipment, e.g. accommodation, temporarylighting (refer to CN2).

3c Select appropriately sized plant and machinery that will carry out thenecessarywork in themost energy efficient manner.

3d Selecting plant, machinery and ancillary equipment with timers and otherautomatic controls which:

Lead to efficiencygains by avoiding additionalworkbeing carriedout and reduction in the time taken to complete a taskSwitchoff the lighting during daylight or curfewhours in outdoorareas.

4a Choice of fuels/energy sources

Use of on-site energygeneration from renewable sources.

4b Use of grid electricity over on-site generation.

4c Use alternatives to fossil fuels including diesel.

5a On site logistics andmanagement

Workscheduling and sequencing to minimise overall construction time.

5b Workscheduling and sequencing to minimise distances travelled byconstruction equipment on site.

5c Workscheduling and sequencing to minimise idling time for constructionequipment.

5d Campaigns or working practices that promote switching off machineryand services promptlywhen they are no longer required.

6a Transport anddisposal of waste

Reduce the amount of waste generated in linewith the principles of thewaste hierarchy.

6b Minimising distance travelled to disposal.




1. The following questions should be asked to assist in the selectionof themost efficient equipment that is appropriatefor the task:1. Is the size (output) of the equipment appropriate for the size of the task?2. At what speed can the equipment perform the task?3. Is the equipment available?4. What are the transport costs and associated energy use (distance travelled and mode of use)?5. How is the performance of the equipment affected by:

a. The soil characteristics on site?b. The geometrical characteristics of the task?

6. Are there space and weight constraints on site?7. What is the energy source used by the equipment?

Compliance notes


CN1 Suitably qualifiedcarbonpractitioner'sweightedrecommendations

The suitably qualified carbonpractitioner must state the relative importance orweighting of eachproposed carbon saving measure, based on the anticipated level ofsavings attributed to that recommendation, i.e. based on the energyprofile duringconstruction.The practitioner must therefore confirm the ranking of the recommendations andweight these appropriately, for example onemeasure could be twice or three timesmore important in terms of total carbonequivalent saving as another, so this canholdtwice or three times as muchweight in the percentage assessment.This approach should be applied to allmeasures so that they are ranked in terms ofpercentage contribution to total savings achievable.

CN2 Opportunities toreduce carbonandenergy fromconstruction stagelighting

In respect to temporary lighting the project teammaywish to investigate:1. The need for lighting on site during construction, including:

a. Key locations on sitewhere lighting is necessary, e.g. tunnels, and whether lightcould be limited to these areas

b. Whether it is feasible to limit construction to daylight hours for all or part of theprogramme.

2. The applicability of curfews and automated controls to save higher levels oflighting for whenneeded

3. Opportunities for energy efficient and lowcarbon lighting solutions (refer to Otherinformation).

CN3 Individualresponsible forenergy use throughconstruction

An individualwith responsibility for monitoring, recording and reporting energy useresulting from all on site constructionprocesses (and dedicated off-sitemonitoring)throughout the constructionphase. The individualmust have sufficient authority andtime on site to influence activities and request and access the data required.





Their role is to ensure that measures proposed to reduce energy consumption andcarbonemissions are implemented and that data are recorded and reportedthroughout the constructionperiod.For lighting specifically, the individual ensures construction light is:1. Used onlywhere necessary2. Focused correctly (i.e. directed onto theworkarea)3. Programmed with automatic controls that switchoff or dim in accordancewith

the need on site.


The capacitymeasurement will vary depending on the type of asset. This allows thecarbonequivalent emissions and primary energy consumptionof the asset duringconstruction to be compared with its functional requirements. The design team shouldreport on capacity as shown inCE01 Carbonand energy strategy: Table 44, asappropriate to the infrastructure type assessed.For example, a road bridge project should report onboth:


per km per annumPrimary energy consumption: kWh/maximum axleweight of traffic volume (kg)per km per annum.

Methodology

None.

Evidence





Construction specialistAn individualwho has experience and knowledge in the selectionof plant and machinery for infrastructure projects.

Key representatives of the project delivery teamFor the purpose of this issue, key representatives of the project delivery team include:1. Suitably qualified carbonpractitioner (refer to definition)2. Contractor3. Designer4. Construction specialist (refer to definition).



Keyproject gatewaysThe definitionof keyproject gateways refers to project delivery phases, and this would include:1. Concept design2. Definition3. Design4. Build and commission.


demonstrate a practical understanding of LCA and its methodology. This includes familiarity and use of ISO14040 and ISO14044 and use of carbon footprinting tools or other carbon life cycle assessment methodologies

2. Has experience in undertaking assessments of the carbonand energy impact of constructionprojects3. Candemonstrate that theydo not have a vested interest in the outcomeof the infrastructure project and should





2O),


2e to reflect the


Other information

Tools for monitoring and targeting construction site impacts

BRE's online environmental reporting tool, SMARTWaste, enables users to capture,monitor and target a project's on-siteenergy consumption and produce a CO

2footprint, water consumption and responsible sourcing of timber. Transport and

CCSdata can also be collected. The system canbe used as a tool to help meet themonitoring criteria within this issue and as asource of evidence for demonstrating compliance. It is available through the SMARTWasteMembership schemebydeveloping tailor-made versions of SMARTWaste.More details on the tool and membership are available atwww.smartwaste.co.uk.

Examples of energy and carbon saving opportunities

Some specific examples of energy and carbon savings opportunities on construction sites are identified below:

Hybrid construction equipment: This combines anenergy storage systemwith an internal power producer such as acombustion engine or anelectricmotor. They reduce the amount of fuel required, emit less CO

2and improve

operative controllability compared with the traditional combustion engine only equipment. Also hybrid technologythrough their hybrid mobile elevated working platforms. For hydraulic equipment powered by combustion enginesonly around 10%of the energy is translated into movementHydrogen fuel cells: These canbe used to power monitoring equipment, particularlywhere access is limited and useof generators would compromise themonitoring results and batteries did not have a long enough life spanPower correction (to increase the efficiencyof power use): This is applicable to certain types of electrical equipment,primarily induction loadsSolar panels: These canbe used to power scanners and monitoring equipment and to power lowenergy lighting, e.g.LED sign lighting.

Opportunities for energy efficient and low carbon temporary lighting solutions

Temporary lighting will, inmost cases, contribute to the energy consumed during the constructionperiod. Efficient lightingsolutions can reduce consumption and alternative fuel sources (to diesel generators) can save carbon. Table 47 providesfigures for 'best practice efficiencies'whichmaybe implemented within the project (current at the time of writing). The suitablyqualified carbonpractitioner may also investigate site lighting that is mains powered, provided byhybrid lighting towers oruses lowor zero carbon technologies.


http://www.smartwaste.co.uk/


Table 47:Construction stage light fitting efficiencies

Type of light fitting Energy efficiencymeasure Requirement

Integrated LED light sources Average initial luminous efficacyof the light fittings

≥ 60 luminaire lumens per circuitwatt

All other light sources Initial lamp efficacy of each lightfitting

≥ 80 lamp lumens per watt



CE 03 Operational carbon and energy


0 4 None

Aim

To ensure that the asset is designed and constructed to minimise future operational energydemand, consumption and CO2

emissions.


None.



Up to four credits - Operational carbon and energy performance

1 The opportunities identified within the strategic stage assessment of CE01 Carbonand energy strategy: criteria 2 – 3for reducing operational carbonand energy are reviewed and updated throughout keyproject gateways (refer toRelevant definitions) in linewith the project details.

2 Consideration is given to reducing the following over the expected lifetime of the asset (refer to CN2 and relevantdefinitions):2.a Operational energydemand2.b Operational primary energy consumption2.c Operational carbonemissions.

3 Key representatives of the project delivery team investigate energy saving opportunities, as a minimum those given inTable 49. If any saving opportunities are not appropriate these should be identified and the reason for the exclusionstated, e.g. technical or functional feasibility, regulatory requirements etc.

4 The suitably qualified carbonpractitioner prepares a list of recommendations that could be implemented by the projectwith estimates of the anticipated level of savings. The recommendations areweighted bypercentage in terms of theimpact of the recommendationonenergy efficiency and carbon reduction (refer to CN3).

5 Prior to build and commission the carbon footprint developed within ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts is updatedfor the operational stagewithdetails of the proposed energy saving features.

6 Credits are awarded for the implementationof the suitably qualified carbonpractitioner's weighted recommendationsthat reduce energy consumptionor carbonemissions from operationof the infrastructure asset as shown in Table 48.

7 The total carbonequivalent and primary energy consumption from operation in reference to the asset's capacity (referto CN4 and CN5) is reported via the BREEAMInfrastructure online tool.


CE03 Operational carbonand energy Carbon and energy

Table 48:Credits associated with energy and carbon savings as a result of the operationof the asset

Weighted recommendations implemented on site Associated credits

25% 1

50% 2

75% 3

95% 4


Table 49:Operational energy saving considerations


1 Energy consumption and carbonemissionsassociated with the end use of the asset.

Designof asset to minimise demand, primary energyconsumption and reduce associated carbonemissionsduring operation, e.g. gradient, curvature, rolling resistanceof linear projects.

2a Energy consumption integral to the asset'soperation.

Designing out energy-consuming components.

2b Selectionof efficient equipment for the asset's operation,e.g. efficient pumps, efficient transmission, efficient lighting(refer to CN6), etc.

2c Use of automatic controls and timers so that energyconsuming equipment only runs whenneeded.

3a Energy sources for integral processes. Selectionof components whichuse lower carbon fuels.

3b Use of lowor zero carbon technologies for energyconsuming components (refer to CN7).

4 Operational carbon frommaintenance orreplacement.

Designof asset to minimise the need for maintenance /replacement or associated activities that are lowcarbon.



Compliance notes


CN1 Assets with nooperational energy

Infrastructure assets that do not require operational energy should not assess this issue,e.g. retaining walls.Where projects have designed out operational energy this issue should still be assessedand credits awarded.


The carbon impacts should bemeasured over the expected lifetime of the asset asindicated in the design specificationwhichhas received planning consent. If the lifetime isnot specified then theworking lifetimes detailed in national best practice standards forthe asset type should be used (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards andWeightings List (ASWL)).

CN3 Suitably qualifiedcarbonpractitioner'sweightedrecommendations

The suitably qualified carbonpractitioner must state the relevant importance orweighting of eachproposed carbon saving measure, based on the anticipated level ofsavings attributed to that recommendation, i.e. based on the energyprofile duringoperation.The practitioner must therefore confirm the ranking of the recommendations andweight these appropriately, for example onemeasure could be twice or three timesmore important in terms of total carbonequivalent saving as another, so this canholdtwice or three times as muchweight in the percentage assessment.This approach should be applied to allmeasures so that they are ranked in terms ofpercentage contribution to total savings achievable.

CN4 Total carbonequivalent andprimary energyconsumption fromoperation inreference to theasset's capacity

The capacitymeasurement will vary depending on the type of asset. This allows thecarbonequivalent emissions and primary energy consumptionof the asset duringoperation to be compared with its functional requirements. The design team shouldreport on capacity as shown inCE01 Carbonand energy strategy: Table 44 asappropriate to the infrastructure type assessed.For example, a road bridge project should report onboth:


per km per annumANDPrimary energy consumption: kWh/maximum axleweight of traffic volume (kg)per km per annum.

CN5 Government's griddecarbonisationprojections

The suitably qualified carbonpractitioner can include the national government'sprojections ongrid decarbonisationwithin the carbonand energymodel forestablishing total carbonequivalent over the asset's operation, if available.The latest figures canbe used within the assessment, up to the year for which theprojections have beenprovided. For the operationof the asset beyond this time itshould be assumed that there is no further changes to grid (as these have not beenprojected or quantified).




CN6 Opportunities toreduce energy andcarbon fromoperational lighting

Due to thewide scope of infrastructure projects lighting, if required, and its impact overthe operational life of the asset can vary. The project team could investigate (to varyingdegrees of detail based on the functionof the asset):1. Key locations onand around the asset and sitewhere lighting is necessary, e.g.

tunnels, road lighting, runway lighting, etc.2. The type of lighting that is required, e.g. safety, functional, decorative and whether

this canbe designed out3. Whether decorative lighting, including floodlighting of bridges or promenades, is

required, for example, if the asset is considered a focal point in the night timescene

4. Appropriate lighting controls such as presence detectors, time switches andcurfews

5. Opportunities for energy efficient and lowcarbon lighting solutions (refer to Otherinformation).

CN7 Lowor zero carbontechnologies foroperational use

The amount of energyor CO2emissions reduction is not specified in the criteria in this

issue. However, it should not be a trivial amount. As a guide, the installation shouldcontribute at least 5%of overall operational energydemand or CO

2emissions.

Methodology

None.

Evidence





EnergydemandThe energy that needs to be provided inorder to achieve operational capacity of the asset, i.e. energyprovided forend use of the asset such as lighting, fanpower, pump power, etc. Energydemand, and opportunities for reducingthis, will vary depending on the type of infrastructure asset and its function.The aim of considering energydemand is to reduce the demand while stillmeeting the functional capacity of theasset.

Key representatives of the project delivery team



For the purpose of this issue, key representatives of the project delivery team include:1. Suitably qualified carbonpractitioner2. Contractor3. Designer4. Owner/operator.

Keyproject gatewaysThe definitionof keyproject gateways refers to project delivery phases, and this would include:1. Concept design2. Definition3. Design4. Build and commission.

Lowor zero carbon (LZC) technologiesA lowor zero carbon technologyprovides a source of energygeneration from renewable energy sources or from alowcarbon source such as combined heat and power (CHP) or ground source heat pumps (GSHP).Waste heat fromanoperational process that takes placewithin the assessed asset (or on the assessed site) canbe considered as 'lowcarbon'where the generationof the heat from the process is integral to the assessed asset.

Operational carbonand energyFor the purpose of BREEAMInfrastructure operational carbonand energy savings refer to those savings that canbeattributed to the asset itself and not savings attributable to theway inwhich the asset is operated. For example,smoother road surfaces and more gradually curved corners will lead to road traffic running more efficiently; gravitydrainagewithin a pipelinewill reduce pumping capacity, etc.

Primary energy consumptionPrimary energy is an energy from fossil fuel or renewable sources that has not been subjected to any conversionortransformationprocess. Primary energy consumption is direct use at the source of generation, or supply to userswithout transformationof crude energy, that is, energy that has not been subjected to any conversionortransformationprocess.The aim of considering primary energy consumption is to meet the energydemand in themost efficient way, i.e.minimising losses from source through to consumption.


demonstrate a practical understanding of LCA and its methodology. This includes familiarity and use of ISO14040 and ISO14044 and use of carbon footprinting tools or other carbon life cycle assessmentmethodologies.

2. Has experience in undertaking assessments of the carbonand energy impact of constructionprojects.3. Candemonstrate that theydo not have a vested interest in the outcomeof the infrastructure project and should





2O),


2e to reflect the


Other information

Opportunities for energy efficient and low carbon permanent lighting solutions

The relative impact of permanent lighting onoperational carbonand energywill vary based on the type of infrastructureasset. For example, the energyprofile for some road schemes could be greatly reduced through implementationofmeasures to reduce operational lighting, however, for rail schemes this mayonly contribute a small amount to the energyprofile in relation to other energy consuming items, e.g. signalling energy, ventilation in tunnels and shafts and other elementsof the overhead line.



Table 50 provides figures for 'best practice efficiencies'whichmaybe implemented within the project (current at the time ofwriting). The suitably qualified carbonpractitioner may also investigate options for using lowor zero carbon sources ofenergy.

Table 50:Operational light fitting efficiencies

Type of area to be lit Energy efficiencymeasure Requirement

Illuminance based area types:Road intersections or shopping streets,residential roads, pathways or cycletracks (classes CEor S), outdoor workplaces or similar

Maximum energy efficiency indicator,givenby the average system powerdivided by the required horizontalilluminance and the area to be lit

≥ 0.044 W/luxm2 for a requiredilluminance belowor equal to 15luxOR≥ 0.034 W/luxm2 for requiredilluminance above 15 lux

Luminance based area types:Traffic routes (classesMEor MEW)

Maximum energy efficiency indicator,givenby the average system powerdivided by the required surfaceluminance and the area to be lit

≥ 0.524 W/cd/m2

Lighting of spaces with norecommended light level, includingfloodlighting or lighting of verticalsurfaces1

Average initial luminous efficacy of thelight fittings

≥ 60 luminaire lumens per circuitwatt

Traffic signals2 Maximum operating wattage (at 25°C)of individualmodules (including powerdemand from the lamp power circuit)

LED light sources must be usedas follows:

300mmRed Ball: 8W200mmRed Ball: 7.5W300mmRed Arrow:7W.300mmAmber Ball: 9W200mmAmber Ball: 8W300mmAmber Arrow:7W.300mmGreenBall:9.5W200mmGreenBall: 8W300mmGreenArrow:7W.

1. Coloured lighting is exempt frommeeting this requirement.2. Railway signals are exempt frommeeting this requirement.

Some lighting standards allow lower recommended illuminances if white light with good colour rendering index is used.In these instances, the higher illuminance canbe used.


Waste BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

Waste

Category overview


Refer to the country reference sheet in theASWL Wst 01 Constructionwastemanagement

Summary

This category encourages the sustainablemanagement of construction sitewaste through strategic planning, design andconstruction. As a result, waste arising from construction activities should be reduced to best practice levels and wastediverted from landfill.


Issue ID Credits

Wst 01 Constructionwastemanagement Strategy - 1Project detail - 2Exemplary - 1

Strategic evaluationof waste generated on-site considering excavation, demolition, construction and hazardouswasteDevelopment of a dynamic ResourceManagement Plan (RMP) and verificationof how it is implementedReducing constructionwaste arising related to on-site construction and off-sitemanufacture and fabricationDiverting non-hazardous construction and demolitionwaste (where relevant) from landfill


Wst 01 Constructionwastemanagement Waste

Wst 01 Construction waste management



Minimum standards

1 2 Prerequisite - criteria 6 – 9 (Resourcemanagement plan) - Pass

One credit - criteria 13 – 17 (Diversionof non-hazardouswaste from landfill) - Outstanding

Aim

To promote resource efficiency via the effectivemanagement and reductionof constructionwaste.



One credit -Waste strategy

1 A strategic evaluationof the amount of waste likely to be generated during the constructionof the asset is produced forthe project options. The estimated waste arisings are categorised as:1.a Excavated waste1.b Demolitionwaste1.c Constructionwaste1.d Hazardous waste.

2 The process records howwaste arisings have been robustly determined (such as baseline data from previous or similarprojects) and justificationgiven as to whether thewaste is deemed to be a significant impact of the constructionof theasset.

3 If excavated waste is deemed significant (refer to CN1) an analysis following thewaste hierarchy (refer to Relevantdefinitions) is carried out including a reviewof potential receptor sites. As aminimum, the following are considered:3.a The distance to the receptor sites and form of transport required3.b The capacity3.c The acceptability of materials3.d Other local environmental impacts3.e The impact of transporting excavated waste off site compared to treatment or use on site.

4 Representatives with experience or expertise inwastemanagement, such as contractor and supply chain organisations,have reviewed and commented on:4.a Thewaste strategy4.b Suggestions on resource efficiency and wasteminimisationmeasures.

5 The project delivery team's or contractor's brief includes the following requirements:5.a Development of a ResourceManagement Plan (RMP) that promotes resource efficiency throughout the

project's lifetime5.b Development of on-site features to minimisewaste (refer to Table 52 for examples).

Please note that criteria 6 and 7 also require actions to be undertakenat the concept design stage, however as they arelinked to the detail designprocess, they are included in the project detail assessment criteria.





Resourcemanagement plan (prerequisite)Construction resource efficiency and wasteminimisation (one credit)Diversionof non-hazardous waste from landfill (one credit)


Prerequisite - Resourcemanagement plan

6 A ResourceManagement Plan (RMP) (refer to Relevant definitions) is developed covering non-hazardous waste relatedto on-site construction and dedicated off-sitemanufacture or fabrication (including demolition and excavationwaste)generated by the design and constructionof the asset.

7 The RMP is based onanappropriate riskassessment and must be produced during the concept design stage andreviewed and updated regularly (refer to CN2) through to handover.

8 If relevant, the results of the pre-demolition audit as required inMat 04 Reuse and recycling:4 and 5 are included in theRMP.

9 A verification report is produced to demonstrate the implementationof the RMP and to feed backon lessons learnt(refer to CN3).

One credit - Construction resource efficiency andwasteminimisation


11 The checklist in Table 52 has been completed by themain contractor with details of wasteminimising featuresimplemented on site (refer to CN4).

12 Anappropriate target (refer to Relevant definitions) is set for constructionwaste arising related to on-site constructionand dedicated off-sitemanufacture or fabrication (excluding demolition and excavationwaste). Actualwaste arising isrecorded and reported in the BREEAM Infrastructure online tool along with the target for the asset.

One credit - Diversion of non-hazardous waste from landfill


14 The Constructionwaste data form or equivalent (refer to CN7)within the BREEAMInfrastructure online tool is completedwithdata for all constructionwaste arising on site and dedicated off-sitemanufacture or fabrication.

15 The percentages shown in Table 51 for non-hazardous constructionwaste (related to on-site and off-sitemanufactureor fabrication in a dedicated facility) and demolitionwaste (if relevant) have beenmet for diversion from landfill.

16 Anappropriate target (refer to Relevant definitions) is set for diversionof excavated waste from landfill. The actualdiversion rate is recorded and reported in the BREEAMInfrastructure online tool along with the target for the asset.

17 Wastematerials are sorted into separate keywaste groups as per Table 53 (according to thewaste streams generatedby the scope of theworks) either on site or througha licensed contractor for recovery.




19 The percentage of non-hazardous construction (on site and dedicated off-sitemanufacture or fabrication), anddemolitionwaste (if relevant) diverted from landfillmeets or exceeds the exemplary level percentage benchmarks shownin Table 51.

20 All keywaste groups are identified for diversion from landfill in the RMP.



21 All data fromwaste contractors used to demonstrate compliancewith criterion19 are data related to the actualproject, rather than the rate for thewaste facility.


Table 51:Diversionof non-hazardous waste from landfill benchmarks

One Credit Exemplary Level

National recovery rates Type of waste BREEAM target rates for diversion from landfill

Where the nationalconstruction recovery rateis < 50% (byweight)*

Construction ≥ 60% (byweight) or ≥50% (by volume)

≥ 75% (byweight) or ≥65% (by volume)

Where the nationaldemolitionwaste recoveryrate is < 60% (byweight)*

Demolition ≥ 70% (byweight) or ≥60% (by volume)

≥ 75% (byweight) or ≥65% (by volume)

Where the nationalconstruction recovery rateis ≥ 50% (byweight)*

Construction ≥ 10% improvement overnational rate (up to where95%of totalwastecreated is diverted fromlandfill)

≥ 35% improvement overnational rate (up to where95%of totalwastecreated is diverted fromlandfill)

Where the nationaldemolitionwaste recoveryrate is ≥ 60% (byweight)*

Demolition ≥ 10% improvement overnational rate (up to where95%of totalwastecreated is diverted fromlandfill)

≥ 35% improvement overnational rate (up to where95%of totalwastecreated is diverted fromlandfill)

*Where the nationalwaste recovery rate is reported for both construction and demolitionwaste together, the sametarget should be used for both types of waste (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List(ASWL)). For the project to achieve the credit, both construction and demolitionwaste (reported separately)must meetthe target.

Table 52:On-sitewasteminimisation features

Ref On-site feature description Addressed onsite (Yes/No)

Proposed evidence Ref toevidence

1 Appropriate storage of materials Site plansMaterials logistics plan andreportingMaterial receipts

2 Use of best practice logistic techniques Site plansMaterials logistics plan andreporting



Ref On-site feature description Addressed onsite (Yes/No)

Proposed evidence Ref toevidence

3 Procedures to reducewaste fromconstructionmaterials

Constructionprogramme anddetails of suppliers

4 Procedures to reduce packagingwaste

Details of suppliers andpackaging procedures

5 Appropriate training andcommunicationonwasteminimisation

Training content andattendance sheets

6 Wasteminimisation incentives Contracts

Table 53:Constructionwaste groups

Keygroup Examples

Bricks Bricks

Concrete Pipes, kerb stones, paving slabs, concrete rubble, precast and in situ

Insulation Glass fibre, mineralwool, foamed plastic

Packaging Paint pots, pallets, cardboard, cable drums,wrapping bands, polythene sheets

Timber Softwood, hardwood, board products such as plywood, chipboard,medium densityfibreboard (MDF)

Electrical and electronicequipment

Electrical and electronic TVs, fridges, air-conditioning units, lamps, equipment

Canteenor office Officewaste, canteenwaste, vegetation

Oils Hydraulic oil, engine oil, lubricating oil

Asphalt and tar Bitumen, coal tars, asphalt

Tiles and ceramics Ceramic tiles, clay roof tiles, ceramic, sanitaryware

Inert Mixed rubble, excavationmaterial, glass

Metals Radiators, cables, wires, bars, sheet

Gypsum Plasterboard, plaster, fibre cement sheets

Binders Render, cement, mortar



Keygroup Examples

Plastics Pipes, cladding, frames, non-packaging sheet

Furniture Tables, chairs, desks, sofas

Soils Soils, clays, sand, gravel, natural stone

Liquids Non-hazardous paints, thinners, timber treatments

Hazardous Defined in theHazardousWaste List (HWL) of the EuropeanWaste Catalogue (EWC)

Floor coverings (soft) Carpets, vinyl flooring

Architectural features Roof tiles, reclaimed bricks, fireplaces

Mixed, other Efforts should bemade to categorisewaste into the above categories whereverpossible.

Compliance notes


CN1 Significant amountof excavated waste- criterion2 .

If over 1,000 tonnes of excavationwaste is predicted then criterion3 will apply tothe project.

CN2 Updating theResourceManagement Plan(RMP) - criterion7

The ResourceManagement Plan (RMP) should be updated regularly throughout thedesign and construction stage to ensure effectivemanagement of waste arisingsand effectiveminimisation. 'Updated regularly' in this context canbe defined asonce every two months or when there is a change in the designor constructionplanthat will effect resourcemanagement.

CN3 Contents of theverification report

The verification report should summarise how the RMPwas implemented andwhether it was successful.For example, it could cover what worked well (or less well) from the plan, whetherwasteminimisation actions actuallymadewaste (or cost) savings and what lessonshave been learnt for future projects.

CN4 Table 52 On-sitewasteminimisation

All features within Table 52 must be considered within the design and planningstages to optimisewasteminimisationon site.Where opportunities are notpresent to implement all features listed, this will be acceptable for compliancewhere this is documented and justified.




CN5 Beneficial reuse ofmaterial or waste atlandfill

Althoughbeneficial reuse of material or waste at landfill sites should be separatelyrecorded within the BREEAMConstructionwaste data form, this should not beincluded as a contribution towards overall recycling figures.

CN6 Waste fromtemporary supportstructures

Anywaste generated on-site for the purposes of the development (excludingdemolition and excavationwaste)must be takenaccount of in the assessment ofthis issue. If temporary support structures, or anyother materials or systembrought on site to facilitate constructionof a building, enter thewaste stream(albeit for recycling), then theywill need to be classified as constructionwaste andtherefore contribute to the constructionwaste benchmarknecessary to facilitateassessment with this issue.If the support structure is reused by the contractor (or by another contractor) onother sites, then it has not beendiscarded and therefore does not enter thewastestream. Thus it would not be included in thewaste generated and hence thebenchmark figures for this issue. The samewould apply to timber formworkwherereused.

CN7 Constructionwastedata form orequivalent

Anequivalent to the construction-waste data form canbe used by the projectteam, as long as it records the same information required.Where the project teamuse their own tool to record their waste arisings; the assessor must ensure that thetool is robust in providing the relevant information required for the assessment.Alternatively, if the client or contractor confirms that the BRE's SMARTWaste systemhas beenused for planning and monitoring, the data canbe used for reportingwithin the online tool.

Methodology

Construction waste data form

The construction-waste data form has beendeveloped to collate key informationonwaste arising at construction and how itis being minimised following thewaste hierarchy. The form canbe used byprojects to monitor and track their targets forwaste arising and diversion from landfill. It will also be used byBRE to inform future benchmarking and drive best practice inthe infrastructure sector.

The form records the following data:

1. Materials and waste arisings2. Keywaste groups and whether these are considered hazardous3. Reuse of materials (where not defined as a waste) and reuse location4. Reuse of waste5. Direct recycling of waste6. Waste sent to a transfer station7. Recycling rates of the transfer station (and source of data)8. Energy recovery of waste9. Waste landfilled (and landfilled beneficially)10. Overall diversion from landfill.



Evidence



1 – 5 Waste strategy and designer's orcontractor's brief

N/A N/A

6 – 9 N/A ResourceManagement Plan RMP Verification report



Appropriate training and communicationonwasteminimisationAppropriate training and communication should include developing a programme to ensure all site staff are awareof features employed on-site to reducewaste, e.g. those covered in Table 52. This should include how individuals areexpected to report onmaterials logistics and waste arisings. Training canbe delivered via bespoke courses orincorporated into existing training sessions such as induction and tool box training.

Appropriate storage of materialsAppropriate storage of materials should include (but is not limited to):1. Clearly demarcated material storage and lay downareas2. Suitable storage areas for the type and amount of materials being stored3. Secure areas for storage of materials4. Receipt and storage process appropriate to the project phase to alloworganisationof similar materials

(electronic or paper system)5. Use of quality control systems to inspect materials delivered to site for damage before acceptance6. Suitable equipment and workforce to handle unloading and movement of material around site.

Appropriate targetsThese canbe set according to best practice (where available) and will depend on the type of waste and theopportunities available to the project team. Targets could also be set to improve ondata from similar past projectsor which areworking towards a company target. The design team should justifywhy the targets are deemedappropriate. A target is not deemed to be an 'appropriate target'within this issue solely because it is achievable.

Best practice logistics techniquesBest practice logistics techniques are those that allow for optimised ordering and minimise storage of materials on-site, which canultimately reducewaste. This includes techniques such as:1. Just-In-Time delivery (JIT)2. Demand smoothing3. On-siteMarketplaces (MP)4. Pre-assembled and off-site fabrication5. Information and Communication Technology (ICT) Systems used to tag and trackmaterials ("Tag systems")6. InventoryManagement Optimisation (IMO) software systems7. ConstructionConsolidationCentres (CCC).

Dedicated off-sitemanufacturing or fabrication



Productionof a component or material carried out in anoff-sitemanufacturing or processing facility specifically setup for a development project.

Diversion from landfillActions to avoid waste being disposed of in landfill include:1. Reusing thematerial on-site (in situ or for newapplications)2. Reusing thematerial onother sites3. Community reuse and recycling4. Salvaging or reclaiming thematerial for reuse5. Returning material to the supplier via a 'take back' scheme6. Recovery of thematerial from site by anapproved wastemanagement contractor and recycled or sent for

energy recovery.

Procedures to reducewaste from constructionmaterialsA reviewof materials required on-site and procedures put in place to reduce the amount of constructionmaterialsbecoming waste. This may include:1. Programming for contingencyof over ordered materials with short lives, e.g. concrete2. Use of take backschemes for over ordered materials or offcuts.

Procedures to reduce packaging wasteA reviewof likely packaging on-site and procedures put in place to reduce the amount of packaging becoming awaste. This may include:1. Selectionof suppliers who havemeasures to reduce or reuse packaging2. Procurement of products with recyclable packaging3. Efficient use of packaging4. Use of take backschemes for packaging.

Resourcemanagement plan (RMP)The aim of the RMP is to promote resource efficiency in the constructionof the asset. Resource efficiency includesoptimising the use of materials and minimising waste throughassessment of the use, reuse and recycling of materialsand products onand off site. This should be considered across the project by the client, designers and principalcontractors. Best practice is a combinationof commitments to:1. Standardisematerials and components2. Reduce the overallmaterial use and waste generated over the life cycle of the asset3. Designout waste (materials optimisation)4. Reducewaste generated on site5. Establish outcome focused specifications to ensurematerial optimisation and implement procedures to sort and

reuse or recycle construction and demolitionwaste.6. Followguidance from (as appropriate):

Government departmentsBRELocal or national best practiceWRAP

A BREEAMcompliant RMP is one that defines:1. A target benchmark for wasteminimisation and resource efficiency, i.e. m3 of waste per £100,000 project value

or tonnes of waste per £100,000 project value2. Procedures and commitments for minimising non-hazardous waste in linewith the benchmark3. Procedures for minimising hazardous waste4. Details of wasteminimisation actions to be undertaken, including designing out waste principles5. Procedures for estimating,monitoring,measuring and reporting hazardous and non-hazardous sitewaste. If

waste data are obtained from licensed externalwaste contractors, the data needs to be reliable and verifiable,e.g. by using data from national regulatory bodies

6. Procedures for sorting, reusing and recycling waste into defined waste groups, either on site or throughalicensed external contractor

7. Procedures for reviewing and updating the plan8. The nameor job title of the individual responsible for implementing the above.

Wasteminimisation incentives



To ensurewaste reduction is achieved, every party in the supply chain should be committed to waste reduction andthe setting of targets canbe used to encourage or incentivise the supply.Wherewaste reduction targets are set itmaybe appropriate to provide a reward where feedback is givenonhowdecisions have beenmade to reducewaste.

Waste arising benchmarkThewaste arising benchmarkshould only includewaste arising on-site and off-site frommanufacture or fabricationin a dedicated facility as defined bynational regulation. The national regulatory body's definitionof waste canbeused to definewhether a material has avoided being waste, i.e. it is being reused rather thanentering a waste stream.

Waste hierarchyThe order of priority for themanagement of wastewherewaste generation could or does occur. This is listed indescending order of environmental preference as:

PreventionReuseRecycleRecoverDispose.

Other information

WRAP's Designing out Waste: a design team guide for Civil Engineering

WRAP's Designing out waste tool provides a practical approach to successfully implementing theDesigning out Wasteprinciples in civil engineering projects. The guide is presented in two parts:

Part 1 - DesignGuide Provides the case for action, details the principles of Designing out Waste, and offers astructured approach to implementation in civil engineering projectsPart 2 - Technical Solutions Provides technical summary sheets ona range of design solutions for civil engineeringprojects.

WRAP also provide informationonaddressing resource efficiency through the design and constructionprocess (refer towww.wrap.org.uk) including WRAP's ResourceManagement Planning tool.


http://www.wrap.org.uk/content/designing-out-waste-design-team-guide-civil-engineering

http://www.wrap.org.uk/

http://www.wrap.org.uk/content/resource-management-planning

Water BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

Water

Category overview


Refer to the country reference sheet in theASWL Wat 01 Water efficiencyplanning and implementation

Summary

This category encourages efficient use of water during the construction and operation stages of the project. Issues in thissection focus ondeveloping awater strategy, appraising water demand and opportunities for efficiencies, implementing awater efficiencyplan including measures to monitor and reducewater consumption to meet water consumption targets.

Category summary

Issue Credits

Wat 01 Water efficiencyplanning and implementation Strategy - 1Project detail - 5

Developing awater strategy and undertaking anappraisal of water uses compared with supplyAppointing a water championand providing staff trainingThe implementationof measures to reducewater consumptionon site and during operation

Wat 02 Water monitoring Strategy - 0Project detail - 3

Metering and monitoring water consumptionBenchmarking water consumption against industry targets


Wat 01 Water efficiencyplanning and implementation Water

Wat 01 Water efficiency planning and

implementation



Minimum standards

1 5 One credit - criteria 4 – 6 and 10 – 16 (Sitewelfare facilities)- GoodOne credit - criteria 4 – 6 and 19 – 25 (Constructionprocesses) - Very good

Aim

To recognise, encourage and enforcemeasures to minimisewater consumption throughappropriate planning, training andthe use of water efficient fittings, equipment and processes.



One credit -Water strategy

1 Awater strategy for the project is developed (refer to CN1) and includes:1.a All identified water demands over the life of the asset and how this maybe influenced by changes in climate,

population and future demand (refer to Res 03 Designing for future needs)1.b Existing water supplies and how thesemaybe affected by changes in climate, population and future demand

(refer to Res 03 Designing for future needs)1.c Identificationof water stressed areas within the geographic locationof the asset, by reviewing thewater

management plans of the localwater company1.d The potential for and risks associated with excessive or uncontrolled water usage and leakage from fittings,

fixtures, processes etc.1.e Opportunities for implementing water efficient measures and features within the current design and,where

appropriate, additions or alterations to meet future needs (refer to Res 03 Designing for future needs)1.f Opportunities for water reuse and rainwater or greywater recycling during construction and operation1.g Potentialwater savings available at the construction stage (and where relevant operational stage) from a

combinationof the following measures:1.g.i Water efficient fittings1.g.ii Water efficiencymeasures and processes1.g.iii Reusing and recycling water.

2 Thewater company is offered the opportunity to reviewand comment on thewater strategy (refer to CN2).

3 The project delivery team or contractor's brief includes a requirement to further explore the opportunities identified forwater savings.




This stage of the issue is split into five parts:

Water efficiencyplan (prerequisite)Construction site staff training (one credit)Sitewelfare facilities (up to two credits)Constructionprocesses (one credit)Welfare facilities for the asset in operation (one credit)


Prerequisite -Water efficiency plan

4 AWater champion is appointed for the construction stage (refer to CN1) and is responsible for:4.a Writing or reviewing thewater efficiencyplan4.b Setting and achieving performance targets for the project (refer to CN3)4.c Reporting on the progress of meeting targets4.d Implementing and managing improvements to water efficiency4.e Raising staff awareness of the importance of water efficiency and implementing the necessary training.

5 Awater efficiencyplan is developed (or reviewed) and implemented by thewater championbased on thewaterstrategy (refer to criterion1 ) and influenced by any feedback from thewater company. The plan includes the followingfor the construction stage and,where present, for anyoperationalwater consumption (refer to CN1):5.a Schematic drawings showing thewater supply networkand metering5.b Water efficiencymeasures5.c Operation and maintenance requirements for water-consuming devices and fittings5.d Requirements for inspecting water-consuming devices and fittings5.e Water consumption targets (refer to CN3)5.f The process and frequencyof monitoring and recording water consumptiondata.

6 A representative from the localwater company is invited to carry out a site visit to review thewater efficiencymeasuresinstalled on site (refer to CN2).

One credit - Construction site staff training


8 Construction stage project managers are required to complete training whichdemonstrates that they understand theneed for water efficiencyon construction sites (refer to CN1).

9 Training is provided to construction site staff to undertake their role in a water efficient manner (refer to CN1).

Up to two credits - Site welfare facilities

One credit


11 WCs have aneffective flush volume of 4.5 litres or less.

12 Wash-hand basin taps have a flow rate of 5L/minute or less and have a self-closing mechanism.

13 Either urinals have a flow rate of 3 litres/bowl/hour or less, hydraulic valves are fitted to eachurinal or both, to managewater consumptionbased onoccupancy.

14 Showers have a flow rate of 8L/minute or less.

15 Kitchen taps have a flow rate of 5L/minute or less and trigger control is fitted to anypre-rinsing facilities.

16



One credit

17 Criteria 4 – 6 and 11 – 16 are achieved.

18 The use of rainwater recycling or greywater recycling is installed onallwelfare blocks.

One credit - Construction processes


20 For dust suppressionon roads one of the following measures is adopted:20.a Dust suppression vehicles are fitted with hydraulic spinning systems20.b The use of a road sweeper with anonboard water recycling system20.c Dust suppression vehicles with a highwater pressure, a lowwater flowand fitted with splashplates.

21 For dust suppressionof stockpiles one of the following measures is adopted:21.a The use of fanmisting systemswhich atomise and dischargewater21.b The applicationof an admixture to increase the surface tensionof thewater to create a thicker barrier21.c Rain guns located adjacent to the stockpile.

22 All hose pipes are fitted with trigger nozzles with the ability to vary flowand pressure.

23 Wherewheelwashing systems are in place:23.a Theyuse reclaimed or recycled water23.b Signs indicatewhichparts of the vehicle requirewashing (to prevent 'over washing')23.c Anymanual hose pipes are fitted with a trigger or similar (refer to criterion22 ).

24 All temporarywater uses have identificationplates for ease of monitoring and maintenance.

25 Isolation valves are installed on the temporarywater supply systemwherewater-consuming devices or activities aredeemed (by thewater champion) as having a high riskof leaking.

26 For projects pouring concretemeasures are used to minimise the use of water for concretewash-out (refer to CN4).

One credit -Welfare facilities for the asset in operation


28 Criteria 11 – 16 are achieved for anywelfare facilities that form part of the final asset once operational. This credit willbe scoped out where these are not present.


None.



Compliance notes


CN1 Water strategy andplan

For those involved inwriting and implementing thewater strategy and water efficiencyplan, e.g. a Water champion, project managers, water efficiency training includes as aminimum:

The importance of water efficiencyTechniques for reducing water demandRainwater and greywater recycling technologyMeter and automaticmetering reading technologyWater use audit techniquesExamples of current or innovative technologies.

Any internal company training must be at a level appropriate to project managerstaking responsibility for water efficiencyon site (refer to Other information).For construction site staff, the training canbe in the form of a tool box talkand mustinclude items of water efficiency that are relevant to the project.Anoperational stagewater efficiencyplan is only required where operationalwater ispresent, and is produced and included as part of the handover documentation.

CN2 Contact with awater companyrepresentative

For this requirement it is not enough to send an invitationbypost, the contractor shouldensure that the invitation for the reviewor site visit has been received by theappropriate personand that they are aware of the invitation, e.g. througha phone call.

CN3 Water consumptiontargets for theconstruction stage(criterion5

The targets are established through consultationwith localwater companies, waterauthorities and other appropriate bodies, taking into account the current waterdemands and supply in the area. They are also influenced by thewater consumptionbenchmarks outlined inWat 02 Water monitoring. The extent and detail of theconsultation are dependent upon thewater consumptiondemands of the project.

CN4 Minimising waterfor concretewashout

Measures to minimise the use of water should demonstrate a saving inwater use onand off site in comparison to traditionalwashout. Compliant measures include: the useof a concrete sockor reuse of 'washwater'. Use of rain or greywater may also be usedas an alternative to potablewater.

Methodology

None.



Evidence



1 Water strategy N/A N/A


AdmixtureThis is a materialwhich is added to amixture to give themixture a certain property, e.g. chlorides are added tounsealed roads as theydrawmoisture from the air and keep the road surface damp.

Effective flush volumeEffective flush volume is the volume of water needed to clear the toilet pan and transport any contents far enough toavoid blocking the drain. The effective flush volume of a single flushWC is the volume of water used for one flush. Theeffective flush volume of a dual flushWC is calculated using the ratio of full flush to reduced flush. The ratio is taken tobe one full flush for every three reduced flushes for non-domestic buildings and this is what is assumed forconstruction sites. The effective flush volume can therefore be calculated as follows, using a 6/4 litre dual flush volumeWCas anexample in theworkplace: {(6 litre x 1)+ (4 litre x 3)}/4 = 4.5 litre effective flushing volume (for a 6/4 dualflushWC).

Greywater recyclingThe appropriate collection, treatment and storage of domesticwastewater (which is defined as that dischargedfrom kitchens, baths or showers, laundry rooms and similar) to meet a non-potablewater demand in the building,e.g.WC flushing, or other permissible non-potable use on the site of the assessed building.

Non-potablewaterAnywater other thanpotablewater.

Rainwater recyclingThe appropriate collection and storage of rainwater run-off from hard outdoor surfaces to meet a non-potablewater demand on the site, e.g.WC flushing or other permissible non-potable use on site.

PotablewaterWater suitable for human consumption that does not contain anymicro-organism, parasite or substance at aconcentrationor valuewhichwould constitute a potential danger to humanhealth.

Other information

Water champion training

WRAP's ripple-effect guidance provides informationonhow to determine:

Howmuchwater a business usesSimpleways to start saving water and moneyWays to measurewater and cost savings andLearn about the benefits of somewater saving devices.

The informationmay support training of staff inwater efficiencymeasures. Refer to www.wrap.org.uk/content/rippleffect.


http://www.wrap.org.uk/content/rippleffect


Wat 02 Water monitoring


0 3 None

Aim

To ensurewater consumption canbemonitored and effectivelymanaged.


None.



Water metering for the construction stage (one credit)Water monitoring for the construction stage (one credit)Construction stagewater efficiency targets (one credit)


One credit -Water metering for the construction stage

1 Themainwater meter supplying the site is accessible for reading themeter.

2 Sub-meters are installed on:2.a Eachwater zone (refer to CN1)2.b Water discharge points whichhave the potential for uncontrolled flowbecause of humanbehaviour, e.g. leaving

a tap running2.c Water discharge points considered to have the highest estimated daily volumetric usewithin each zone (refer to

CN2)2.d Rainwater recycling technologies2.e Greywater recycling technologies.

One credit -Water monitoring for the construction stage

3 Water consumption is recorded weekly for the itemsmentioned in criteria 2.a – 2.e and anassessment made oferroneous consumption, e.g. highor lowwater demands to identify leaks or maintenance requirements (refer to CN3).

4 Amonthly site inspection is carried out to identify:4.a Inefficiencies inwater devices and water discharge points including leaks and overflows4.b Actions needed because of the inspection including relevant operation,maintenance or replacement

information4.c Out-of-hours assessment of base load water consumption.

5 Total and net water consumption is recorded at the end of the project or yearly and compared with the target (refer toCN4). The end of project figures are reported via the BREEAMInfrastructureOnline tool.


Wat 02 Water monitoring Water

One credit - Construction stagewater efficiency targets

6 Themain contractors construction stagewater consumption is less thanor equal to a national best practice target (referto Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL)) for either:6.a The infrastructure asset typeOR6.b Contractor organisations


None.

Compliance notes


CN1 Water zone(criterion2

For the purposes of water metering, the contractor establishes a number of zones. Azone is defined as an area of the sitewhere there is a specific use of water, e.g. the areawhere vehicles arewashed, the locationof water suppressionunits (fanmisting). It is thecontractor's responsibility to determine the zones based ona logical rationale.

CN2 Highest estimateddaily volumetric use(criterion2

This is applicable to zones withmore thanonewater discharge point. For zones withmore thanone highuse, discharge points should bemetered separately or be easilycalculated using themeters available.

CN3 Weekly audits andmonthly siteinspection (criteria 3and 4

These are carried out by a designated person, e.g. a siteworker or project manager.This person can change during the course of the development; however theymust haveappropriate authority and responsibility to request and access the data required toperform the role.

CN4 Total net waterconsumption(criterion5

The total net water consumption (m3) is recorded as the totalwater consumptionminus any recycled water use.

Methodology

None.

Evidence







Greywater recyclingThe appropriate collection, treatment and storage of domesticwastewater (which is defined as that dischargedfrom kitchens, baths or showers, laundry rooms and similar) to meet a non-potablewater demand in the building, e.g.WC flushing, or other permissible non-potable use on the site of the assessed building.

Rainwater recyclingThe appropriate collection and storage of rainwater run-off from hard outdoor surfaces to meet a non-potablewater demand on the site, e.g.WC flushing or other permissible non-potable use on site.

Other information

None.


Integrated design

Innovation


0 Up to 10 None

Aim

To support innovationwithin the construction industry through the recognitionof sustainability related benefits which are notrewarded by standard BREEAMissues.


None.



Up to amaximum of 10 credits are available in aggregate from a combinationof the following:

Exemplary level of performance in existing BREEAM issues

1 Where the asset demonstrates exemplary performance bymeeting defined exemplary level performance criteria in oneor more of following BREEAMassessment issues:1.a ST 03 Responsible constructionpractices1.b Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials1.c Mat 04 Reuse and recycling1.d Wst 01 Constructionwastemanagement

2 Please refer to the relevant BREEAMissuewithin this schemedocument for details of the exemplary level performanceassessment criteria.

Approved innovations

3 One innovation credit canbe awarded for each innovation application approved byBREGlobal, where the asset complieswith the criteria defined within anApproved InnovationApplication Form.


None.



Compliance notes


CN1 Exemplary level ofperformance

Refer to the compliance notes within the individual assessment issues that containexemplary performance levels.

Methodology

Exemplary level of performance in existing BREEAM issues

For informationon themethodology for exemplary level credits refer to theMethodology sectionof the relevant BREEAMissues.

Approved innovations

Innovation applications canbe submitted to BREGlobal by a licensed BREEAMAssessor using the formalApproved InnovationApplication Form (available from BREEAMProjects).

Evidence



1 N/A As defined within existing BREEAMissues.

3 N/A A copyof theApprovedInnovationApplication FormANDA copyof the InnovationApplicationReport stating theapplicationoutcome as'approved'ANDRelevant documentary evidencedemonstrating specificationofthe approved innovation.

As per interim design stageANDRelevant documentary evidenceconfirming that the project hasachieved or installed theapproved innovation asdescribed and quantified withinthe approved innovationapplication form.



None.


http://www.breeam.org/projects/

Appendices

Appendices


Appendices BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

Appendix A - Strategic and project detail stages links

The BREEAMInfrastructure assessment includes criteria to be assessed at the strategic stage (DPoWStage 0-2) to ensureopportunities are identified at the early stages of a project to increase the sustainable credentials of the asset. Ideally, theseopportunities are then taken forward to the detail stages of the design and constructionprocess.

If an assessor initiates a BREEAMassessment after DPoWStage 2 (Concept), the strategic stage credits are eitherretrospectively assessed based onwhat has beenundertakenby the project team already, or they arewithheld. If thestrategic credits arewithheld, the approach to assessing the project detail credits then varies, dependent on the issue, asdetailed below:

Option1:There are no strategic requirements for the issue. In these cases, the project detail credits canbe targetedindependently.

Option2:The strategic requirements for the issue are not directly linked to the project detail requirements. In these cases, theproject detail credits canbe targeted independently.

Option3:The strategic requirements for the issuemust be updated as stated within the project detail requirements. In thesecases, the strategic stage requirements must be carried out in full prior to the end of DPoWStage 3 (Definition) to inform andallow the project detail credits to be awarded.

Please note that although this option requires the strategic requirements to be achieved post DPoWStage 2 (Concept), thestrategic credits will still be unavailable to the project. Only the project detail credits canbe awarded. This is to recognise thatsome, but not all, opportunities will have been lost due to a later considerationof these issues.

Option4:There is no benefit of updating the strategic requirements for the issue after DPoWStage 2. In these cases, theproject detail credits are unavailable.

Table 54 details whichoption applies for each issue. For option3 it also references the relevant criteria to refer to within theissue.

Table 54: Strategy and project detail links

Options

Issue 1 2 3 4

Integrated Design

ID 01 Option appraisal and objectives(Targets and objectives)

✔

Criterion10

ID 02 Project team collaboration(All project detail credits)

✔

ID 03 Handover and aftercare(All project detail credits)

✔

ID 04 Ecosystem services(Detailed ecosystem services assessment)

✔

Criterion6

ID 05 Whole life costing(Component level LCC Plan)

✔


AppendixA - Strategic and project detail stages links Appendices

ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts No project detail assessment criteria. There are links to Mat01 and CE01. (See below.)

Resilience

Res 01 Business continuity No project detail assessment criteria. This issue is assessedat the strategic level only.

Res 02 Riskassessment and mitigation(All project detail credits)

✔

Criterion16 33

Res 03 Designing for future needs(Designing in capacity for future needs)

✔

Criterion5

Res 04 Surfacewater run-off(All project detail credits)

✔

Res 05 Durability(All project detail credits)

✔

Stakeholders

ST 01 Consultationplan(All project detail credits)

✔

Criterion4

ST 02 Consultation and engagement(Continued engagement and implementation)

✔

Criteria 12– 14 and16

ST 03 Responsible constructionpractices(National health and safety legislation)

✔

Criterion1

ST 03 Responsible constructionpractices(All remaining project detail credits)

✔

ST 04 Owner operator requirements(Operational performance)

✔

Localwellbeing

LW01 Economic impact(All project detail credits)

✔

Criterion8

LW02 Social impact(All project detail credits)

✔

Criterion7

Transport



Tra 01 Transport impact assessment(All project detail credits)

✔

Criterion3

Tra 02 Travel and logistics plan(Travel and logistics plan for the construction stage,Success of the construction stage travel and logisticsplan and Travel and logistics plan for the operationalstage)

✔

Criterion4.a.i

Tra 02 Travel and logistics plan(monitoring the transport of constructionmaterials andwaste)

✔

Tra 03 Transport connectivity(Enhanced connectivity)

✔

Criterion4

Land use and ecology

LUE01 Land use and value(Use of lowvalue land)

✔

Criterion5

LUE01 Land use and value(Local land value, Efficient use of temporary land)

✔

LUE02 Soil and vegetationmanagement(All project detail credits)

✔

LUE03 Remediationof land contamination(All project detail credits)

✔

LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan(Site specific biodiversity actionplan)

✔

Criterion734

LUE05 Protectionof biodiversity(All project detail credits)

✔

Criterion135

LUE06 Enhancement of biodiversity(All project detail credits)

✔

Criterion136

LUE07 Land use changes(All project detail credits)

✔

Criterion6

Landscape and heritage

LSH 01 Landscape and visual impact(Enhancing and protecting landscape character andvisual impact)

✔

Criterion5


AppendixA - Strategic and project detail stages links Appendices

LSH 02 Heritage assets(Planning protection and mitigationmeasures)

✔

Criterion1

LSH 02 Heritage assets(Implementation, reporting and disseminatinginformation)

✔

Pollution

Pol 01 Air quality(Minimising construction and operational stage airpollution,Monitoring construction stage air quality)

✔

Criterion6

Pol 01 Air quality(Reduction in pollutants from non-road mobilemachinery)

✔

Pol 02 Water pollution(All project detail credits)

✔

Criteria 5and 7

Pol 03 Noise and vibration(All project detail credits)

✔

Criteria 7.aand 14.a

Pol 04 Light pollution(All project detail credits)

✔

Criterion4

Materials

Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts(Option1 - Product life cycle assessments)

✔

Option137

Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts(Option2 - Asset level life cycle impact assessment)

✔

Option2:Criteria 4 ,9 or 14

Mat 02 Responsible sourcing of materials(All project detail criteria)

✔

Mat 03Materials efficiency(All project detail criteria)

✔

Criteria 10 ,14 & 21

Mat 04 Reuse and recycling(Reuse and recycling of materials and elements)

✔

Criterion8



Mat 04 Reuse and recycling(Reuse of existing infrastructure on site and recycledaggregates)

✔

Carbonand energy

CE01 Carbonand energy strategy(Reporting total carbonand energy)

✔38

CE02 Construction site carbonand energy(Construction carbonand energyperformance)

✔

Criterion139

CE02 Construction site carbonand energy(Monitoring construction stage carbonand energy)

✔

CE03 Operational carbonand energy(Operational carbonand energyperformance)

✔

Criterion18

Waste

Wst 01 Constructionwastemanagement(All project detail credits)

✔

Water

Wat 01 Water efficiencyplanning and implementation(All project detail credits)

✔

Criterion5

Wat 02 Water monitoring(All project detail credits)

✔


Appendix B - TheApproved Standards and Weightings List (ASWL) Appendices

Appendix B - The Approved Standards and

Weightings List (ASWL)

Purpose

The purpose of the approved standards and weightings list (ASWL) is to allowproject team’s designing and constructinginfrastructure assets to use local or national best practice standards to demonstrate compliancewith certain BREEAMInfrastructure criteria. To ensure the robustness of the local or national standards, the ASWL includes individual requirementsfor a particular local or national standard to meet in order to be approved byBREGlobal for use by the project team.

Every BREEAMInternational assessment must include a completed (project specific) versionof the approved standards andweightings list to inform BREGlobalwhich standards the project team haveworked to and complied with. This may requirethe use of a ‘newcountry reference sheet’ or, where assessments have alreadybeenundertaken in that country, an ‘existingcountry-specific reference sheet’ that is amended to suit the specific project. Submissionof theASWL is confirmation from theassessor that the previously approved standards remain valid and up to date.

Types of documents that can be approved by BRE Global

Throughout the BREEAMInfrastructuremanual there are specific criteria that reference this appendix to highlight that eitherinternational, Europeanor local documentation is required to be used to inform the design and constructionof the asset. Thetype of documentation canbe:

Best practice guidanceBest practice standardsRegulationor legislation (where this forms the baseline to showan improvement beyond regulationor legislation).

The approved standards and weightings list confirms which issues this applies to, the document type required and thespecific requirements the documentationmust cover in order to be approved.

For example, issue Pol 02 Water pollution states:

"To apply the principles of thewater pollution strategy to the project and implement measures appropriateto the project in linewith national best practice guidance (refer to Appendix B - TheApproved Standards andWeightings List (ASWL))."

The project team could thenuse an international, Europeanor UK equivalent as detailed in theASWLto demonstratecompliancewith this criteria. However, in some countries theremaybe local equivalents of these standards or best practiceguidance and in these cases theASWLprocess allows BREstaff, with support from assessors and the project team, to reviewthe local standards against BREEAMspecified requirements and confirm their equivalence.

Standards Compliance

For eachBREEAMcriterion requiring compliancewith specified standards or best practice documentationone of thefollowing three situations will arise, dependent on the country of assessment:

1. There are no specific local standards specified—in these cases the project team uses theASWLto inform BREGlobal that itwill beworking to the existing BREEAMapproved international, Europeanor UK standards detailed in theASWLfor use in anycountry.



2. The approved local standard is specified—the project team uses the approved standards and weightings list to inform BREGlobal that it will be using the approved local standards detailed in the ‘existing country-specific reference sheet’. The projectteam also need to confirm that the standards being used are current.

3. Anunapproved local standard is proposed—the project team uses theASWLto inform BREGlobal that theywill beworkingto (as yet unapproved) local standards.

Proposal of new standards

Where there are no specific approved local standards, the project team (led by the assessor) canprovide standards that meetthe requirements for proposed standards within theApproved standards and weightings list.

The relevant extracts of the proposed standards must be provided to BREGlobal, both in the local language and translatedinto English, with justificationof the robustness of the document. The approvals process for local standards should happenatthe very early stages of an assessment, i.e. well before a report is submitted for certification so that:

1. Certification is not delayed2. The project team or client has certainty over the use of approved standards against which their asset’s performance is

being assessed.

Outcomes of proposing a new standard

One of the following outcomeswill arise following submissionof the project specific versionof theApproved standards andweightings list:

1. BREGlobal approves the local equivalent, it is added to the ‘approved standards’ for that country or region.2. If the local equivalent does not meet the requirements for the standard, it is added to the ‘unapproved standards’

sheet—this is included as information for all assessors with justificationof why it was rejected to prevent duplicationofeffort.

In order to determine if the country of assessment has approved standards and weightings, download the latest versionoftheASWL, found within theDocuments and Tools sectionof the BREEAMProjects websitewww.breeam.org

At the time of writing, BREGlobal are updating theASWLto form part of the BREEAMProjects online system. Assessors will benotified when this is available.

For further informationon the procedure for submitting standards for inclusion in theASWL, refer to the BREEAMOperationalGuidance available on the BREEAMProjects website.

International Environment Weightings

The BREEAMInfrastructure Internationalweightings are also found within theASWL. For further informationonhow theweightings are locally adapted refer to the Scoring and rating BREEAMassessed infrastructure sectionof this manual.


http://www.breeam.org/projects/documenttoolshome.jsp

http://www.breeam.org/projects/index.jsp

http://www.breeam.org/servlet/bre.breeam.extranet.Download/SD5070-Rev4.0_BREEAM_and_CSH_Operational_Guidance.pdf?id=0000000000000000000100000000000000035433&type=.pdf

http://www.breeam.org/servlet/bre.breeam.extranet.Download/SD5070-Rev4.0_BREEAM_and_CSH_Operational_Guidance.pdf?id=0000000000000000000100000000000000035433&type=.pdf

AppendixC Appendices

Appendix C

Considerate and responsible construction practices

1 Safe and adequate access

This section is intended to demonstrate that the constructor operates the site in amanner that guarantees a safe andappropriate access to, around and on the site. The following items demonstrate compliancewith this section:

Table 55: Safe and adequate access requirements

REF Criteria Y Evidence or referencerequired

Validationor justification

a Appropriate and safe access to the site isprovided. This must include as aminimum:

Provisionof parking onor near siteORa public transport nodewith anaverage frequency under 30minutes within 500mORadedicated transport service to amajor public transport nodeprovided by the contractor.Good lighting and Adequatebarriers and uniform surfaces, i.e. notrip hazards outside the siteboundaryAll accesses to be clean and mudfreeHoarding or scaffolding to bewell litat night and scaffold netting is inplace and wellmaintained

See copyof parking planand check transport anddedicated servicetimetables and viewotherfacilities are on site.

b Appropriate and safe access on site isprovided. This must include as aminimum:

Footpaths marked with ramps andsigns Pathways wide enough forwheelchairsAccessibility of all areas by visually orhearing impaired visitorsAll site hazards advertised at the siteentrance

Viewon site and checkthat list of hazards iscomplete

c Site entrances and exits are clearlymarkedfor visitors and delivery drivers to see.

Viewon site

d Site reception is clearly signposted or allvisitors are escorted to the reception

Checkonarrival for thesigns or see a copyof theinductionprocedure.





e The post boxhas beenplaced on thepavement to avoid the postman fromentering the site.

Viewon site

f Where there areminority communitiesspeaking a different language in the area orworking on site, notices are printed in thecommon local language

Check the area and thestaff register for aminority culturecommunity.Where this ispresent onor off site,check for signs in thecommunity's language.

g All road signs and names canbe seenorwhena road signor name is obstructed areplacement has beenerected

Viewon site

h Where a sitewith severe congestionhas adelivery point remote from a site, deliveriescan thenbemade in smaller vehicles at timesto cause the least inconvenience.

Viewprocedures on site.

2Good Neighbour

This section is intended to demonstrate that the constructor operates the site in amanner that is considerate to thesurrounding neighbours. The following items demonstrate compliancewith this section:

Table 56:Good neighbour requirements



a Introductory letters have beenor will be sentto all neighbours and there is a commitmentto write and thankneighbours at the end ofthe contract for their patience and providefeedback form

See copies of letters withlist of addresses.A copyof thiscommitment should beprovided or a copyof astandard letter that isalways sent at the end ofa project.A copyof the feedbackformmust be providedalong a procedure tomonitor the results andimplement changes forfuturework.





b Site hours and noisywork restrictions areappropriate to the area, in particular whenthe site is located near:

HousesSchoolsHospitalsIndustrial UnitsMajor public Transport NodesCity centresShopping facilities.

Copyof statement ofintent, policy, agreementetc. to be provided

c The site boundary (which includes all areasaffected by theworks) is clearly and safelymarked and appropriate to theenvironment:

The colour of the hoarding has beenconsidered in terms of thesurrounding environment.Pedestrians have a suitable, safe andprotected passage around the siteboundaryThere arewell lit warning signs forthe benefit of the pedestrian androad userThe site’s surroundings are seenbythe public as tidy and clean.

Asksitemanager if anythought was given to thehoarding and the locationof the site. Is the hoardingclearly and safelymarked,clean, neat and wellmaintained?Ensure that there are nocomplaints about the sitebeing untidy or that iftherewere this wasquickly rectified and notrepeated.

d There is a complaints bookavailable ANDevidence that complaints are being dealtwith immediately

Inspect the complaintsbookand checkresponses for timeliness

e Local people are appropriately informed bythe use of a notice board:

Of the site progressOf the company contact details(telephone number, web site, emailaddress)

Viewon site

f Light is shielded from the neighbours Copyof the temporaryworks indicating lightshielding or the sitemanager mustdemonstrate how thelight shielding works or isnot applicable.





g Site personnel are discouraged from usinglocal facilities in their site clothes. Examples ofhow this might be achieved include:

A canteenStaggered breaks for differentgangs.Provisionof showers or washrooms.Provisionof lockers.A request to leave personalprotective equipment (PPE) on site.

Viewon site.Checkprocedures withthe SiteManager.

h There is a volume restrictionon radio use orthere is a radio ban

Check if a restrictionorban is in place and howthis is enforced

3 Environmentally Aware

This section is intended to demonstrate that the constructor has considered the impact of the site on the environment andhas implemented measures to mitigate this impact. The following items demonstrate compliancewith this section:

Table 57: Environmentally aware requirements



a There are restrictions on the effects of lightpollution and all lights are directional andnon-polluting. If there is a site specificenvironmental policywhich sets restrictionson lighting, this point canbe awarded.

Viewon site.

b Energy saving measures are implementedon site. Examples of this include:

Lowenergy lightingSwitching off equipment whennotin useInstalling thermostatsInstalling timersChoosing energy efficientequipment.

If there is a site specific environmental policywhichdefines energy saving measures, thispoint canbe awarded.

Viewon site.





c An impact minimisation strategy review is inplace for the site. The reviewshould considerthe impact of the site in environmental termsand howany adverse effects are beingminimised, e.g. protectionof ecologicalfeatures, pollution control.

View impact minimisationstrategy.

d Water saving measures are implemented onsite and monitored. If there is a site specificenvironmental policywhich indicates howwater saving measures aremanaged andmonitored on site, this point canbeawarded.

Viewprocedures on site.

e Alternative energy sources have beenconsidered.

Viewon site.

f Fuel oil spillage equipment is available. Viewon site. Ensure thespillage equipment islocated where spillagesmayoccur to ensure arapid response time.

g Sumps are provided in cases of heavywaterrun-off. If there is a site specificenvironmental policywhich indicates howheavywater run-off will beminimised anddealt with on site, this point canbe awarded.

Viewon site.

h Materials and equipment are tidily stackedand protected and covered wherenecessaryAND there is adequate space fornewmaterials to be stored in securedcovered areas to avoid damage, theft andto protect fromweather.

Viewon site. Ensure thatwhere the space has beenprovided, it is being usedcorrectly

4 Safe and considerate working environment

This section is intended to demonstrate that the constructor is operating the site in a clean and safemanner in order to ensurethewellbeing of its workers and to minimise the risk to their health and safety. The following items demonstrate compliancewith this section:



Table 58: Safe and considerateworking environment requirements



a Adequate facilities are provided on-site forworkers and visitors. Thesemust include as aminimum:

Separatemale, female and disabledtoiletsWorking usable showers ANDsuitable changing areasLockers in the drying roomDedicated smoking areaSuitable and safe accommodation(where provided).

Viewon site

b Site facilities arewellmaintained and clean.This must cover as aminimum:

Areas around the canteen, officesand skipsSitewelfare facilities (including toiletsand changing areas)Dedicated smoking area.

Viewon site.

c Private or visually-impacting areas arescreened. Thesemust include as aminimum:

Areas around the canteen, officesand skips where necessary.ToiletsDedicated smoking area.

Viewon site.

d Clean PPE is available for use by visitors Checkcompanypolicyand procedure and if it isbeing implemented onsite





e Health and Safety procedures are in place forthe following issues:

Appropriate training of all staffincluding non-native operatives tounderstand health and safety (H&S)best practices and informationdisplayed on siteOperatives’ exposure to the sunOperatives’ identification; alloperatives to be provided with aphoto identification clip cardReporting of all incidents (minor andserious) and near missesEnsuring that an appropriatenumber of first aiders and first aidequipment are available for the site.

Checkcompanypolicyand procedures and howthese are enforcedCheck first aid book inparticular for minoraccidents.Check the first aiders listand their qualifications(must be less than threeyears old). Check that eachfirst aiders have a boxwithbasic equipment andthat they have access tomore equipment ifnecessary and that theyknowwhere to find it.

f There is posted material indicating nearestpolice station and hospital (with accident &emergency facilities) in the following areas asaminimum:

Site receptionSite canteenMain site office.

Spot checkmanagers,operatives, receptionstaff to check they knowthis informationor at leastwhere theywould find it.Check induction talk.

g An inspectionhas been carried out by ahealth and safety inspector or equivalent.

Viewon site.

h Emergency escape routes well identified andclear emergency evacuationprocedure ANDdrills carried out.

Viewon site.Writtenproof of fire drillprocedure.

Signed by:



Appendix D

Considerate and responsible fleet operations

The purpose of this appendix is to provide the requirements for considerate and responsible fleet operations, for thepurpose of awarding the associated BREEAMcredit in ST 03 Responsible constructionpractices.

Management

This section is intended to demonstrate the requirements for themanagement of the fleet operators. The following itemsdemonstrate compliancewith this section:

Table 59: Fleet operator management requirements



a Policies and proceduresEnsure that all policies and processescovering the requirements listed in thisAppendix are:

DocumentedCommunicated to staffReviewed by senior management atleast every 12 monthsProven to result in positive changesto the business.

Manuals or otherdocuments containing themandatory requirementsStaff and driverhandbooks containing themanuals or documentsReviewmeeting minutes,indicatingrecommendations andactions to be takenSigned and dated reviewpages for themanuals ordocuments, indicatingrecommendations thathave beenactionedStaff training schedulewith training content andlists of attendees

b Responsibilities and accountabilities

Anorganisational chart showing theresponsibilities and accountabilitiesof, and links between, seniormanagement and daily operationspersonnelAnappointed responsible person torundaily transport operations

Organisational chartLetter of appointment ofthe responsible person


AppendixD Appendices



c Regulatory licensing and taxesEnsure all regulatory requirements regardingthe following aremet:

Fleet operator licencesPayment of the appropriate vehicleand road tax for all applicablevehiclesLicenses and qualifications of alldrivers are checked by theappointed responsible personpriorto driving, and thenat least every sixmonths to confirm vehicle categorylicensingA policy is in place to ensure driversreport all professional or personaldriving infringements to theresponsible person.

Display of appropriateoperation licensesDisplay of valid tax discs invehiclesRegister of fleet vehicles’taxation requirementsLog withdriver's licence orcertificate type and expirydate, including penaltypoints anddisqualificationsDriving infringementpolicy document

d ComplaintsA complaints system is provided that:

Feeds into decision-makingRecords legal and non-legal actionagainst the fleet operator, to bereviewed and reacted to.

Written record of all legaland non-legal actionagainst the fleetoperators or the drivers,indicating the operator’sresponse.

Vehicles

This sections is intended to demonstrate the requirements regarding the vehicles of the fleet. The following itemsdemonstrate compliancewith this section:



Table 60: Fleet operator vehicle requirements



a Inspection and maintenance planAnequipment inspection and maintenanceplan is required, which is followed andrecorded for all vehicles and specialistequipment (refer to Relevant definitions).This shall include

Any statutory legal checkrequirementsSafety inspections

The plan should:

Schedulemaintenance at least 6months in advanceIndicate vehicles and equipment thathave not been inspectedBe reviewed regularly and whenvehicles are changed.

Manufacturersmaintenance planMaintenance records(kept for at least 15months)

b First use checksEnsure that vehicles are inspected beforeeach shift for:

Safety bydrivers that haveundergone training as outlinedbelow in the training sectionDefects rectified by anappointedresponsible person.

The inspection is documented and recordedeven if no defects are found.

Completed vehicle defectforms (kept for at least 15months)

c Fuel and tyre usageA fuel and tyremanagement policy isrequired that ensures:

Recording of fuel and tyre usagedata by the driversMonitoring and reviewing of thedataAction is taken to improve fuel andtyre usage (e.g. efficient drivingtechniques training, upgradingvehicles, target setting)

A documented system for tyre disposal andrecycling is required.

Fuel and tyremanagement policydocumentsDocumentationof actionstaken to reduce fuel andtyre usageDocumentationof tyredisposal and recyclingsystem





d Insurance and claims

Aminimum of third party insurancefor thewhole fleet is requiredOther forms of insurance specific tothe actual operation is required,where applicableAll insurance claims are required tobe recorded, reviewed andactioned. The reviews should include:

RiskassessmentsManagement of driversPost-incident processesDriver behavioural training.

Insurance documentscovering the fleet vehiclesand their driversMinutes from reviewmeetings withbrokersand insurers todemonstrateconsiderationof non-obligatory insurance andother improvementsRecords of claimsReviewprocessdocuments (riskassessments, trainingcontent and attendance)

e Fines and chargesAll transport-related fines and charges needto be investigated and analysed. Theinvestigation should:

Confirm the authority andcompetencies of the individualcarrying out the investigationIdentify the root causes of the finesand chargesOutline the recommendations forimplementing interventions toreduce their occurrence.

Record of transport-related fines and chargesInvestigation reportshowing thecircumstances leading toa fine and therecommendations andremedial actions

Drivers

This sections is intended to demonstrate the requirements regarding the drivers of the fleet. The following itemsdemonstrate compliancewith this section:



Table 61: Fleet operator driver requirements



a Driving standardsA companypolicy ondriving standards isrequired. Anyone driving onbusiness shalldrivewithin the highway code of therespective country and companypolicy at alltimes. This shall cover:

Driver responsibilitiesSafety of vulnerable road users(refer to Relevant definitions)Actions following breakdowns andcollisionsSafety equipmentFatigue.

The policywill ban:

The use of mobile phones and otherin-vehicle technologyDrinking and drugsExceeding speed limits.

Policy document oncompanydrivingstandards covering

b Staff trainingDrivers and linemanagers are required toundergo approved progressive training andcontinued professional development withparticular attention to the:

Safety of vulnerable road users(including cycle hazard awareness)Use of supplementary vehicle safetyequipment and its limitationsHighway code of the respectivecountryCompanypolicy.

The training needs to be refreshed annuallyand the needs of all relevant staff arerequired to be identified, including:

Driving assessment prior toemploymentInduction to the companyInduction to newcontractsOperational compliance and safetyof vulnerable usersVehicle safety inspectionsRefresher trainingRemedial training.

Development planidentifying training needsof staffTraining events scheduleTraining contentdocumentsTraining attendance lists





c Incidents and collisionsIncidents, traffic collisions and reported near-misses are required to be:

RecordedInvestigatedAnalysed to identify trendsaddressed by implementing actions.

All driving infractions that would result inendorsable points, both at workandprivately, are required to be recorded,monitored and remedial action shall betaken. This can include:

TrainingDisciplinary action for persistentoffenders.

Log of incidents, collisionsand near misses andactions takenagainstthem.Review reports showingroot cause andcontributory factorsA documentedinvestigationprocedureshowing:

Root causeContributoryfactorRecommendationsRemedial actionsReviewdocumentshowing trendand cost analysisof insuranceclaims and post-incidentprocesses (e.g.drivermanagement,behaviouraltraining).

Health, safety andwellbeing

This section is intended to demonstrate the requirements regarding the health, safety and wellbeing of the drivers andvehicles. The following items demonstrate compliancewith this section:

Table 62: Fleet operator health, safety and wellbeing requirements



a Safe loadingEnsure that vehicles are safely loaded andthat appropriate load restraints are used by:

Completing a riskassessment ofeach type of load carried by eachvehicleProviding suitable equipmentTraining personnelRecording the dimensions andweights of vehicles before using theroad.

Completed riskassessment formsDocumentationofrecords of dimensionsand loads of vehiclesTraining material,schedule and attendancedocuments.





b Vulnerable road user safetyAll vehicles over 3.5 tonnes gross vehicleweight are required to be fitted with safetyequipment to help protect vulnerable roadusers. This shall include:

Prominent signage to the rear of thevehicle to visuallywarnother roadusers not to get too close to thevehicle.Side under-runprotection, orequivalent, to all vehiclesClass VImirrors (refer to Relevantdefinitions) to be fitted to all vehicles,where they canbemounted, with nopart of themirror being less thantwo metres from the ground.

Photos or viewon site ofsafety equipmentInformed health andsafety policy

c Working at height and the preventionof fallsfrom vehiclesEnsuring the safety of persons around thevehicleworking at height, including:

DriversPeople assisting them in loadingactivitiesPassengers in passenger-carryingvehicles.

This includes riskassessments for thepotential of persons falling off vehicles orgaining unauthorised access to vehicles.

Completed riskassessment formsInformed health andsafety policy

d VehiclemanoeuvringEnsure risks from vehiclemanoeuvring areidentified,mitigated and controlled, throughriskassessments. This includes the followingmovements onand off site:

Driving forwardReversingTowingUncouplingParking.

Completed riskassessment formsInformed policy on vehiclemovements





e Vehiclewarning equipmentAll vehicles over 3.5 tonnes gross vehicleweight are required to:

Be equipped with audiblemeans towarnother road users of a vehicle’sleft manoeuvre (for left hand drivecountries) and right manoeuvre (forright hand drive countries)Have front, side and rear blind-spotscompletely eliminated or minimisedas far as is practical and possiblethrougha combinationof fullyoperational direct and indirect visionaids and driver audible alerts.

All rigid vehicles over 7.5 tonnes gross vehicleweight are required to:

Have indirect vision aids fitted totheir rear.

Policy showingrequirementOn-site vehicle equipmentchecks

f Health and safety policyEnsure that road driving risks and workplacetransport safety are controlled via a workinghealth and safety policy and that vehicle-specific driver health and safety advice isgiven to drivers.

Health and safety policycovering at least vehicleson the road andworkplace transportsafetyReviewsheet of policy andminutes of managementreviewmeetingsRiskassessment for eachvehicle type health andsafety issue





g Driver health and wellbeingFleet operators shall ensure that driver healthand wellbeing is managed, including policiesand procedures to manage bothdrivers’hours and totalworking time for all. This shallinclude:

Driver eyesight checks prior tostarting workand at least every sixmonthsChecking that drivers meet eitherdriving licence or medicalrequirements, or both, and are notimpaired throughdrink, drugs orfatigueA process for checking drivers’ailments that may affect theirentitlement and ability to drive andreporting them to a trained medicalprofessionalMaximumworking and driving hoursshould not be exceeded (refer toRelevant definitions).

Record of drivers’eyesight checks every sixmonthsProcedure documents fordrivers to notify the fleetoperator of anyhealth orwellbeing issues affectingtheir entitlement andability to drivePlans of shifts and generalwork showing drivers’hours and working timeregulations for applicablevehicle times are notinfringedEvidence of recording andexamining driver hours, viatachographs or othermeans

Operations

This section is intended to demonstrate the requirements regarding the operationof the fleet. The following itemsdemonstrate compliancewith this section:

Table 63: Fleet operator operation requirements



a Routing and schedulingEnsure that:

Themost efficient, safe, andappropriate vehicles and routes areused to minimise the potential forinteractionwith vulnerable roadusersAny vehicle routes to sites orpremises are adhered to unlessdirected otherwiseDrivers are informed regardingparking restrictions and charges, tollpayment methods and specialaccess requirements and routing.

Policy documentdemonstrating howroutes have beenselectedDriver training documentsand attendance sheets





b Specialist goodsSpecialist goods such as waste, dangerousgoods, and abnormal loads are required tobe handled and transported in compliancewith national regulations.

List of appropriate bestpractice, permissions andlicensing for specialistgoodsDriver qualifications forcarrying dangerousgoods

c PerformancemeasurementBaseline data and activemonitoring of thefollowing performance indicators arerequired:

Total fuel usage and distancestravelledTransport-related CO

2as outlined in

Tra 02 Travel and logistics plan–MethodologyTotal incident and collisiondata andcosts involving personal injury, vehicleor property damageTotal transport-related fines andcharges

Baseline data report for a12-monthperiodcovering the entire fleetand the requiredperformance indicatorsActivemonitoringdemonstrated throughthe use of data capturemethods, e.g. fleetperformance tools,spreadsheets orbenchmarking systems,telematics, insurancereports or fuel cardreports

Signed by:


Class VI mirrorsA Class VI front mirror or Cyclopsmirror, is a front mounted wide viewmirror that helps provide a viewof the blindspot situated at the front of the drivers cab.

Maximumworking and driving hoursThe limits for working hours for mobileworkers are set at:

an average of 48 hours per week for a specified reference periodamaximum of 60 hours in any singleweek, as long as the 48-hour average is maintained10 hours per night for night work.

Breakdurationmust last:at least 15 minutes per break30 minutes in total if working between6 and 9 hours per day45 minutes in total if working more than9 hours per day

National requirements for working hours must be followed if they aremore stringent than the above.

Specialist equipmentSpecialist equipment can include the following:

speed limiterstachographstankslifting equipment



craneshoppersfork-liftstail-lifts.

Vulnerable road usersThese are defined as non-motorised road users, such as pedestrians and cyclists as well as motor-cyclists andpersons withdisabilities or reduced mobility and orientation.


Endnotes

Endnotes

1 For some assessment issues the number of credits availablewill vary by asset type. Furthermore, some issuesmaynot beapplicable to certain assets that do not contain a particular feature, e.g. operationalwater use.2 The pre-assessment is only an indicationof what canbe achieved by the project team. If carrying out a pre-assessmentbefore bespoke criteria have beendeveloped for the project, the assessor will need to make their ownassumptions of thecredits and criteria that will apply to the project.3 For the purpose of BREEAMthe specific clause of the specificationmust be referenced within the report.4 Evidence in the form of designdrawingsmust be presented in a clear, professionalworking format with clearly identifiedlegends indicating revisionnumber, date, title, owner etc. (where appropriate).5 ISO15686 Buildings and constructed assets - Service life planning Part 1 General principles and framework, 2011.6 ISO15686-5:2008. Buildings and constructed assets. Service life planning - Part 5: Life cycle costing.7 . BSI. BSEN 15978:2011 Sustainability of constructionworks. Assessment of environmental performance of buildings.Calculationmethod. BSI; 2011.8 ISO14064-2:2006 Greenhouse gases – Part 2: Specificationwithguidance at the project level for quantification,monitoring and reporting of greenhouse gas emission reductions or removal enhancements.9 TheGreenHouseGas Protocol, A corporate accounting and reporting standard, Revised Edition. www.ghgprotocol.org10 TheGreenHouseGas Protocol, A corporate accounting and reporting standard, Revised Edition.11 ISO14025:2006, Environmental labels and declarations - Type III environmental declarations - Principles and procedures;ISO2006.12 BSI. Societal security. Business continuitymanagement systems. Requirements. BSEN ISO22301:2014. London, BSI, 2012.13 ISO31000:2009, Riskmanagement – Principles and guidelines, International Standards Organisation, 2009.14 ISO26000:2010. Guidance onSocial Responsibility. International Standards Association, 2010.15 Natural England 2012:http://publications.naturalengland.org.uk/publication/3203116 Design Principle – Connectivity and Permeability, Healthy spaces and places, 2009.www.healthyplaces.org.au17 1. Hill D. Handbookof BiodiversityMethods, Survey, Evaluation andMonitoring [Internet]. CambridgeUniversity Press;2005. Available from:http://sunsetridgemsbiology.wikispaces.com/file/view/Biodiversity+Handbook.pdf18 The Chartered Institute of Ecology and EnvironmentalManagement (CIEEM), Guidelines for Ecological ImpactAssessment in the United Kingdom, 2006. http://www.cieem.net/19 Greenhalgh S, Daviet F,Weninger E. The Land Use, Land-Use Change, and ForestryGuidance for GHGProject Accounting[Internet]. World Resources Institute;Available from:http://ghgprotocol.org/files/ghgp/lulucf-final.pdf20 Ricardo-AEA. Land Use, Land Use Change and Forestry (LULUCF), GHG Inventory summary Factsheet, Ricardo AEA[Internet]. Department of Energy& Climate Change;Available from:https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/441378/LULUCF_2013_Issue1.2.pdf2013.21 Air quality guidelines. Global update 2005. Particulatematter, ozone, nitrogendioxide and sulfur dioxide(http://www.euro.who.int/_data/assets/pdf_file/0005/78638/E90038.pdf).22 CIRIA C693, Noise and vibration from road and rail, T Lawrence, J Dakin, P Norris,MForni, 201123 Basic Analytical Toxicology,World HealthOrganisation199524 Commission Internationale d'Eclairage (CIE) 150 Guide on the Limitationof the Effects of Obtrusive Light fromOutdoorLighting Installations, 2003.25 Commission Internationale d'Eclairage (CIE) 126 Guidelines for minimizing skyglow, 1997.26 CIETechnical Report 150. 'Guide on the limitationof the effects of obtrusive light from outdoor lighting installations'Vienna, CIE, 2003.27 BSEN15978:2011 Sustainability of constructionworks. Assessment of environmental performance of buildings.Calculationmethod28 ISO14064-2:2006 Greenhouse gases – Part 2: Specificationwithguidance at the project level for quantification,monitoring and reporting of greenhouse gas emission reductions or removal enhancements29 TheGreenHouseGas Protocol, A corporate accounting and reporting standard, Revised Edition.http://www.ghgprotocol.org30 The International Labour Organisation (ILO)Declarationon Fundamental Principles and Rights at Workhttp://www.ilo.org/declaration/lang--en/index.htm31 CIRIA, 2013, Implementing Lean in construction: Lean tools and techniques – an introduction, CIRIA, London


http://www.healthyplaces.org.au/

http://ghgprotocol.org/files/ghgp/lulucf-final.pd

Endnotes BREEAMNewConstruction: Infrastructure (International pilot)

32 TheGreenHouseGas Protocol, A corporate accounting and reporting standard, Revised Edition.33 Only the strategic requirements associated with the prerequisite for 'Project riskassessment' (criteria 4 – 7) need to beupdated.34 This criteriononly requires the biodiversity actionplan to be updated prior to construction (DPoWStage 5).35 This criterion refers to strategic requirements (criteria 1 – 2)within LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan.LUE05 Protectionof biodiversity does not have separate strategic requirements.36 This criterion refers to project detail requirements (criteria 1 – 5)within LUE05 Protectionof biodiversity. As LUE05 islinked to the strategic requirements(criteria 1 – 2)within LUE04 Ecological impact assessment and actionplan., option4 alsoapplies to these criteria only. LUE06 Enhancement of biodiversity does not have separate strategic requirements.37 If assessing Mat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts, Option1 (criteria 1 – 3 ) there are no strategic requirements. Ifassessing Mat 01, Option2 (criteria 4 – 16 ) the criteria refer to strategic requirements (criteria 1 – 5 or 6 – 10) in ID 06 Wholelife environmental impacts. Please seeMat 01 Environmental life cycle impacts: Figure 1: for further detail.38 The strategy stage credit for having a Carbonand energy strategy requires a screening carbon footprint or LCA, asdetailed within ID 06 Whole life environmental impacts39 These criteria refer to strategic requirements (criteria 1 – 2 )withinCE01 Carbonand energy strategy. CE02 and CE03do not have separate strategic requirements.


Index

Index

3

3rd. party evaluation 112

A

Appropriate consultant 101

Appropriate statutory body 87, 101

B

Baseline transport data 152

BREEAMrelated performance targets 47

C

Catchment 101

Compliant organisation 123

Component level LCC plan 61

Connectivity 161

Construction Logistics Plan 158

Constructionworkforce travel plan 158

Control devices 101

Current 152

D

Design flood event 88

Design flood level 88, 102

Design storm event 88

Development evaluation 112

Discharge point 102

E

Effective flush volume 315

Elemental LCC plan 61

Environmental Product Declarations 68, 251

EPD 68, 251

F

Flood defences 88

Flood event 88

Flood probability 88

Flood risk 88

Flood riskassessment 88

Flood storage 88

Formally agreed 47

G

Greenfield 102

Greenfield run-off rate 102

Greywater recycling 315

H

Hard surfaces 102

health 120

Heritage asset 207

Heritage specialist 207

I

Inclusive design 117

Independent party evaluation 112

Independent third party 52

Independently verified third party EPD 68, 251

K

Keydesign teammeetings 47

Keyphases 47

Key representatives of the project delivery team 47

L

Life cycle cost 61

N

Non-potablewater 315

TechnicalManual:Version: SD219-A1 – Issue:2.0 – IssueDate:12/11/2015 349

Index Infrastructure (United Kingdom)

P

Potablewater 315

Previously developed land 168

Project executionplan 48

R

Rainwater recycling 315

S

Severance 152

Site staff

facilities 124

health and wellbeing 123

Stakeholder champion 118

SuDSmanagement train 102

SuDSTechniques 102

SurfaceWater Run-off 103

Sustainability Champion 48

Sustainableworking practices 123

T

Team Communication Strategy 48

Tidal estuary 103

Transport network 161

Transport plan 158

Travel and logistics plan 158

V

Volume of run-off 103

W

Watercourses and sewers 103

Wholesomewater 315

Workforce

facilities 120, 124

350 TechnicalManual:Version: SD219-A1 – Issue:2.0 – IssueDate:12/11/2015

Glossary

Glossary

A

ADMSAtmospheric DispersionModelling System

ADPEabiotic depletion eotential – elements;

AONBArea of Outstanding Natural Beauty

APAccredited Professional

AQAair quality assessment

ASWLApproved Standards and Weightings List

B

BAPBiodiversity actionplan

BIMBuilding InformationModel

BPMbest practicablemeans

BSBritish Standard

C

CCSConsiderate Constructors Scheme

CDMConstruction (Design andManagement)Regulations

CEUndefined

CHPCombined heat and power

CICConstruction Industry Council

CIEEMChartered Institute of Ecology andEnvironmentalManagement

CIRIAConstruction Industry Research and InformationAssociation

CITESConventionon International Trade inEndangered Species

CMLIchartered member of the Landscape Institute

CoCPCode of Construction Practice

CPETCentral Point of Expertise onTimber

CSHCode for Sustainable Homes

D

DBEDesignBasis Events

DBTDesignBasis Threats

DEFRADepartment for Environment, Food and RuralAffairs

DfDDesign for Deconstruction

DPoWDigital Planof Work

DSDesign Stage

E

EcIAEcological Impact Assessments


Glossary Infrastructure (United Kingdom)

EclAecological impact assessment

EeBEuropean Environmental Bureau

EIAecological impact assessment

EMSEnvironmentalManagement System

EPeutrophicationpotential

EPDEnvironmental Product Declaration

ESTEnergy Saving Trust

EUEurope

F

FBAFurnace bottom ash

FORSFleet Operators Recognition scheme

FRAFlood RiskAssessment

FSCForest Stewardship Council

G

GHGGreenhouse gas

GIGreen Infrastructure

H

HWDhazardous waste disposed

I

IAQMInstitute of Air QualityManagement

IBAIncinerator bottom ash

ICEInstitute of Civil Engineers

ICTInformationCommunication Technology

IDIntegrated design

IEEMEcology and EnvironmentalManagement

IESInstitutionof Environmental Sciences

IHInstitute of Hydrology

ILCDinternational life cycle data

ILEInstitutionof Lighting Engineers

ILOInternational Labour Organization

ILPInstitutionof Lighting Professionals

IMechEInstitutionof Mechanical Engineers

IPCCIntergovernmental Panel onClimate Change

K

KPIkeyperformance indicator


Glossary

L

LALocal authority

LAQMLocalAir QualityManagement

LCALife Cycle Assessment

LCCLife Cycle Cost

LEDLight-emitting diode

LEPLocal Enterprise Partnerships

LLFALead Local Flood Authorities

LOAELlowest observed adverse effect level

LRFLocal Resilience Forums

LULUCFLand Use Change and Forestry

LVIAlandscape and visual impact assessment

LZCLowor zero carbon

M

MEa class of traffic route

MEICAmechanical, electrical, instrumentation, control,automation

MMPMaterials Management Plan

MWmegawatt

N

NERCNatural Environment ResearchCouncil

NGOnon-governmental organisations

NHWDnon-hazardous waste disposed

NPPFNational Planning Policy Framework

NRMMnon-road mobilemachinery

NSONational SchemeOperator

O

ODPOzoneDepleting Potential

OPIOperational Performance Indicators

P

PAHpolycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons

PCSPost-Construction Stage

PFAPulverised FuelAsh

POCPphotochemical ozone creation

POEPost Occupancy Evaluation

PRPproject resilience plan


Glossary Infrastructure (United Kingdom)

Q

QAQualityAssurance

QMLCQualityMarkScheme for Land affected byContamination

R

RMPResourceManagement Plan

RSMResponsible sourcing of materials

S

SASstrategic assessment stage

SCSecurity Check

SHWSpecification for HighwayWorks

SIASecurity IndustryAuthority or social impactassessment

SMLCCStandardised method for life cycle costing

SOAELsignificant observed adverse effect level

SPZsource protection zones

SQASuitablyQualified Acoustician

SQESuitably qualified ecologist

SQLAsuitably qualified landscape architect

SSSISite of Special Scientific Interest

STEMscience, technology engineering and maths

SuDSSustainable Drainage system

SuRFSustainable Remediaton Forum

T

TSOThe StationeryOffice

U

UKCIPUKCIP

W

WebTAGWeb-based Transport Analysis Guidance

WHOWorld HealthOrganisation

WLCWhole life cost

WRAPWaste Resources Action Programme


Cover


blankpage